Arn19886 Atp - 3 20.98 000 Web 1

ATP 3-20.
98
SCOUT PLATOON
DECEMBER 2019
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
This publication supersedes ATP 3-20.98, dated 5 April 2013.
Headquarters, Department of the Army

This publication is available at the Army Publishing Directorate site
(https://armypubs.army.mil), and the Central Army Registry site
(https://atiam.train.army.mil/catalog/dashboard)
*ATP 3-20.98
*Army Techniques Publication Headquarters

No. ATP 3-20.98
Department of the Army
Washington, DC, 04 December 2019
SCOUT PLATOON
Contents
Page
PREFACE .................................................................................................. xiii
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................... xv
Chapter 1 ROLE OF THE SCOUT PLATOON ........................................................... 1-1
Section I – Overview ................................................................................ 1-1
Scouts in Decisive Action ........................................................................... 1-3
Variables of the Operational Environment .................................................. 1-4
Section II – Threat .................................................................................... 1-4
Regular and Irregular Threat Description ................................................... 1-5
Threat Impact on Scouts ............................................................................ 1-5
Section III – Key Personnel ..................................................................... 1-6
Common Responsibilities ........................................................................... 1-6
Duties and Responsibilities ........................................................................ 1-7
Section IV – Organizations .................................................................... 1-14
Common Scout Platoon Capabilities and Limitations ............................... 1-14
Scout Squad............................................................................................. 1-15
Scout Section ........................................................................................... 1-16
ABCT Cavalry Squadron Scout Platoon ................................................... 1-17
ABCT Combined Arms Battalion Scout Platoon ....................................... 1-19
SBCT Scout Platoons............................................................................... 1-21
IBCT Scout Platoons ................................................................................ 1-22
IBCT Cavalry Squadron Mounted Troop Scout Platoon ........................... 1-22
IBCT Cavalry Squadron Dismounted Troop Scout Platoon ...................... 1-24
Infantry Battalion Scout Platoon ............................................................... 1-26
Chapter 2 COMMAND AND CONTROL ..................................................................... 2-1
Section I – Platoon Mission Command .................................................. 2-1
Distribution Restriction: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
*This publication supersedes ATP 3-20.98, 5 April 2013.
i
Contents
Mission Command Principles ..................................................................... 2-1

Importance of Commander’s Intent ............................................................ 2-3
Commander’s Reconnaissance and Security Guidance ............................ 2-3
Commander’s Critical Information Requirements ....................................... 2-3
Information Collection ................................................................................ 2-5
Section II – Troop Leading Procedures.................................................. 2-8
Step 1– Receive the Mission .................................................................... 2-10
Step 2 – Issue a Warning Order ............................................................... 2-11
Step 3 – Make a Tentative Plan ............................................................... 2-12
Step 4 – Initiate Movement ...................................................................... 2-25
Step 5 – Conduct Reconnaissance .......................................................... 2-26
Step 6 – Complete the Plan ..................................................................... 2-27
Step 7 – Issue the Order .......................................................................... 2-28
Step 8 – Supervise and Refine................................................................. 2-28
Section III – Planning Considerations .................................................. 2-30
Operational Considerations ...................................................................... 2-30
Time Management ................................................................................... 2-30
Warfighting Functions .............................................................................. 2-31
Command Relationships .......................................................................... 2-31
Fighting for Information ............................................................................ 2-33
Section IV – Common Graphic Control Measures............................... 2-34
Section V – Communications ................................................................ 2-36
Joint Capabilities ...................................................................................... 2-36
Scout Platoon Radio Nets ........................................................................ 2-36
Platoon Net .............................................................................................. 2-38
Troop Command Net................................................................................ 2-39
Retransmission ........................................................................................ 2-39
Techniques of Effective Communications ................................................ 2-39
Primary, Alternate, Contingency, and Emergency Plan ........................... 2-40
Chapter 3 RECONNAISSANCE ................................................................................. 3-1
Section I – Basics of Reconnaissance Tasks ........................................ 3-1
Fundamentals of Reconnaissance ............................................................. 3-2
Reconnaissance Planning Considerations ................................................. 3-4
Reconnaissance Management ................................................................. 3-13
Section II – Forms of Reconnaissance ................................................. 3-14
Zone Reconnaissance ............................................................................. 3-14
Area Reconnaissance .............................................................................. 3-21
Route Reconnaissance ............................................................................ 3-27
Reconnaissance in Force ......................................................................... 3-51
Special Reconnaissance .......................................................................... 3-51
Section III – Reconnaissance Handover .............................................. 3-51
Planning Considerations .......................................................................... 3-52
ii ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Contents
Reconnaissance Handover Priority of Rehearsals ................................... 3-53

Example of Reconnaissance Handover ................................................... 3-54
Battle Handover ....................................................................................... 3-58
Passage of Lines ...................................................................................... 3-59
Chapter 4 SECURITY ................................................................................................. 4-1
Section I – Basics of Security Tasks ...................................................... 4-1
Fundamentals of Security........................................................................... 4-2
Security Planning Considerations .............................................................. 4-2
Section II – Forms of Security Tasks ...................................................... 4-6
Screen ........................................................................................................ 4-6
Guard ....................................................................................................... 4-34
Cover........................................................................................................ 4-34
Area Security............................................................................................ 4-35
Local Security........................................................................................... 4-38
Section III – Counterreconnaissance.................................................... 4-39
Engagement Area Development .............................................................. 4-40
Identify Likely Enemy Avenues of Approach ............................................ 4-40
Direct Fire Planning and Engagements .................................................... 4-51
Detect, Identify, Decide, Engage, and Assess ......................................... 4-60
Chapter 5 BASIC SCOUT SKILLS ............................................................................. 5-1
Section I – Fundamentals of Tactical Movement ................................... 5-1
Movement and Maneuver ........................................................................... 5-2
Use Terrain for Cover and Concealment .................................................... 5-3
Reduce Vehicle-Related Signatures .......................................................... 5-4
Use of Dismounted Scouts ......................................................................... 5-5
Section II - Navigation .............................................................................. 5-5
Map Correlation .......................................................................................... 5-5
Navigation Aids .......................................................................................... 5-6
Methods of Navigation................................................................................ 5-7
Route Types ............................................................................................... 5-9
Develop a Leg .......................................................................................... 5-10
Danger Areas ........................................................................................... 5-11
Lateral or Boundary Routes ..................................................................... 5-12
Section III – Mounted Scout Platoon Formations ................................ 5-12
Line Formation ......................................................................................... 5-13
Vee Formation .......................................................................................... 5-14
Column Formation .................................................................................... 5-15
Staggered Column ................................................................................... 5-16
Wedge Formation ..................................................................................... 5-17
Echelon (Left or Right) ............................................................................. 5-18
Coil Formation .......................................................................................... 5-19
Herringbone Formation ............................................................................ 5-20
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 iii

Contents
Section IV – Movement Techniques ..................................................... 5-22

Traveling .................................................................................................. 5-23
Traveling Overwatch ................................................................................ 5-24
Bounding Overwatch ................................................................................ 5-25
Section V – Dismounted Operations .................................................... 5-29
Dismounted Three-Scout Team ............................................................... 5-29
Dismounted Four-Scout Team ................................................................. 5-29
Dismounted Six-Scout Team ................................................................... 5-30
Dismounted Platoon ................................................................................. 5-30
Special Teams ......................................................................................... 5-30
Dismounted Movement ............................................................................ 5-31
Security Halts ........................................................................................... 5-39
Actions at Danger Areas .......................................................................... 5-40
Break Contact .......................................................................................... 5-45
Tracking Methods..................................................................................... 5-50
Types of Rally Points ............................................................................... 5-52
Five Point Contingency Plan .................................................................... 5-53
Section VI – Actions on Contact ........................................................... 5-54
Step 1 – Deploy and Report ..................................................................... 5-54
Step 2 – Evaluate and Develop the Situation ........................................... 5-55
Step 3 – Choose a Course of Action ........................................................ 5-55
Step 4 – Execute the selected Course of Action ...................................... 5-61
Step 5 – ReCommend a Course of Action to the Commander ................. 5-62
Section VII –CBRN Operations.............................................................. 5-62
Mission Oriented Protective Posture Analysis .......................................... 5-62
Unmasking Procedures ............................................................................ 5-63
Chapter 6 ENABLERS ............................................................................................... 6-1
Section I – Brigade Combat Team Assets ............................................. 6-1
Engineer Support ....................................................................................... 6-3
Engineer Reconnaissance Tasks ............................................................... 6-4
Sustainment ............................................................................................... 6-6
Fires Support.............................................................................................. 6-6
Mortar Employment .................................................................................. 6-10
Field Artillery Support ............................................................................... 6-11
Fire Request Process............................................................................... 6-12
Fire Request Channels ............................................................................ 6-12
Fire Direction and Control Procedures ..................................................... 6-12
Sniper Employment .................................................................................. 6-31
Military Intelligence Company .................................................................. 6-31
Unmanned Aerial System ........................................................................ 6-31
Chemical, Biological, Radiological, Nuclear ............................................. 6-39
Section II – External Brigade Combat Team Assets ........................... 6-41
iv ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Contents
Air and Missile Defense Support .............................................................. 6-41

Army Aviation Support.............................................................................. 6-44
Close Air Support ..................................................................................... 6-47
Explosive Ordnance Disposal .................................................................. 6-50
Interpreters ............................................................................................... 6-50
Chapter 7 SUSTAINMENT ......................................................................................... 7-1
Section I – Basics of Sustainment .......................................................... 7-1
Leaders Responsibilities ............................................................................ 7-1
Sustainment Functions ............................................................................... 7-5
Classes of Supply....................................................................................... 7-5
Section II – Sustainment Planning .......................................................... 7-6
Sustainment Planning Factors ................................................................... 7-6
Forecasting Logistics.................................................................................. 7-8
Basic and Combat Loads ......................................................................... 7-11
Load Planning Considerations ................................................................. 7-12
Sustainment Overlay ................................................................................ 7-12
Sustainment Reporting ............................................................................. 7-13
Section III – Platoon Resupply Operations .......................................... 7-13
Resupply Methods.................................................................................... 7-13
Resupply Procedures ............................................................................... 7-14
Resupply Site Selection ........................................................................... 7-14
Resupply Techniques ............................................................................... 7-15
Logistics Package Survivability ................................................................ 7-20
Section IV – Maintenance ...................................................................... 7-21
Levels of Maintenance ............................................................................. 7-21
Section V – Medical Support ................................................................. 7-24
Wounded Scouts ...................................................................................... 7-24
Medical Evacuation .................................................................................. 7-25
Medical Treatment.................................................................................... 7-28
Health and Hygiene .................................................................................. 7-30
Combat and Operational Stress Control................................................... 7-31
Section VI –Detainees ............................................................................ 7-31
Appendix A ANALOG REPORTS .................................................................................A-1
Appendix B PLATOON OPERATING DISTANCES ......................................................B-1
GLOSSARY .................................................................................. Glossary-1
REFERENCES ...........................................................................References-1
INDEX ................................................................................................. Index-1
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 v

Contents
Figures
Figure 1-1. ABCT Cavalry squadron scout platoon ............................. 1-19

Figure 1-2. ABCT combined arms battalion scout platoon .................. 1-20
Figure 1-3. SBCT scout platoon ........................................................... 1-22
Figure 1-4. IBCT Cavalry squadron mounted scout platoon ................ 1-24
Figure 1-5. IBCT Cavalry squadron dismounted scout platoon ........... 1-26
Figure 1-6. IBCT Infantry battalion scout platoon ................................ 1-28
Figure 2-1. CCIR and essential elements of friendly information .......... 2-4
Figure 2-2. Priority intelligence requirement breakdown ....................... 2-6
Figure 2-3. Enemy course of action ..................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-4. Line of sight analysis ......................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-5. Modified combined obstacles overlay, example ................ 2-21
Figure 2-6. Scheme of air control measures ........................................ 2-27
Figure 2-7. Scout platoon nets ............................................................. 2-37
Figure 2-8. Scout platoon communication structure ............................ 2-38
Figure 3-1. Tempo of reconnaissance ................................................... 3-5
Figure 3-2. Dismounted team conducting short duration operation ....... 3-8
Figure 3-3. Scouts conducting mounted reconnaissance .................... 3-10
Figure 3-4. Scouts using reconnaissance by fire, indirect ................... 3-12
Figure 3-5. Reconnaissance management, example .......................... 3-14
Figure 3-6. Scout platoon conducts zone reconnaissance .................. 3-18
Figure 3-7. Zone reconnaissance, establish observation posts........... 3-19
Figure 3-8. Zone reconnaissance, establishing a screen .................... 3-20
Figure 3-9. Scout platoon staged to conduct an area
reconnaissance ................................................................ 3-23
reconnaissance (continued) ............................................. 3-24
reconnaissance (continued) ............................................. 3-26
Figure 3-12. Route reconnaissance graphics, example ...................... 3-29
Figure 3-13. Route reconnaissance (continued) .................................. 3-31
Figure 3-16. Route classification overlay graphics, example............... 3-35
vi ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Contents
Figure 3-17a. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols ....................... 3-36

Figure 3-17b. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols ....................... 3-37
Figure 3-17c. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols ....................... 3-38
Figure 3-17d. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols ....................... 3-39
Figure 3-17e. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols ....................... 3-40
Figure 3-18. Route width formula ........................................................ 3-41
Figure 3-19. Chord method for determining curve radius ................... 3-45
Figure 3-20. Radius of curve formula .................................................. 3-45
Figure 3-21. Radius of curve formula example ................................... 3-47
Figure 3-22. Gradient of slope formula ................................................ 3-48
Figure 3-23. Pace method for percentage slope ................................. 3-49
Figure 3-24. Map method for percentage slope .................................. 3-50
Figure 3-25. Reconnaissance handover ............................................. 3-55
Figure 3-26. Reconnaissance handover phase II ............................... 3-57
Figure 3-27. Reconnaissance handover phase III .............................. 3-58
Figure 4-1. Use of cueing during a security mission ............................. 4-5
Figure 4-2. Use of redundancy during security tasks ............................ 4-6
Figure 4-3. In-depth positioning of observation posts ......................... 4-10
Figure 4-4. SBCT scout platoon stationary screen mission ................ 4-12
Figure 4-5. ABCT scout platoon moving screen mission .................... 4-15
Figure 4-6. Vehicles overwatching an observation post ...................... 4-20
Figure 4-7. Sectors .............................................................................. 4-22
Figure 4-8. Vehicle sectors .................................................................. 4-23
Figure 4-9. Rapid scan technique ....................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-10. Slow scan technique ....................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-11. Detailed search ............................................................... 4-26
Figure 4-12. Air search technique ....................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-13. Scout platoon outposting a route .................................... 4-38
Figure 4-14. Possible or likely enemy avenues of approach............... 4-41
Figure 4-15. Likely enemy scheme of maneuver ................................ 4-42
Figure 4-16. Locations to kill the enemy.............................................. 4-43
Figure 4-17. Plan for and integration of obstacles .............................. 4-44
Figure 4-18. Emplace weapon systems .............................................. 4-45
Figure 4-19. Integration of direct and indirect fires .............................. 4-47
Figure 4-20. Completed range card, example ..................................... 4-48
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 vii

Contents
Figure 4-21. Platoon fire plan ............................................................... 4-50

Figure 4-22. Terrain-based quadrants, examples ................................ 4-54
Figure 4-23. Friendly-based quadrants, example ................................ 4-55
Figure 4-24. Frontal fire........................................................................ 4-56
Figure 4-25. Cross Fire ........................................................................ 4-57
Figure 4-26. Depth fire ......................................................................... 4-58
Figure 4-27. Target arrays, example .................................................... 4-59
Figure 4-28. Direct fire engagement process ....................................... 4-61
Figure 5-1. Use of natural terrain for concealment ................................ 5-3
Figure 5-2. Crest and berm drill ............................................................. 5-4
Figure 5-3. Sketching of legs, example ................................................ 5-11
Figure 5-4. Line formation (ABCT scout platoon) ................................ 5-13
Figure 5-5. Vee formation (ABCT scout platoon) ................................. 5-14
Figure 5-6. Column formation (SBCT scout platoon) ........................... 5-15
Figure 5-7. Staggered column formation (SBCT scout platoon) .......... 5-16
Figure 5-8. Wedge formation (ABCT scout platoon) ............................ 5-17
Figure 5-9. Echelon left or right (ABCT scout platoon) ........................ 5-18
Figure 5-10. Coil formation (ABCT scout platoon) ............................... 5-19
Figure 5-11. Herringbone formation (SBCT scout platoon) ................. 5-21
Figure 5-12. Movement techniques usage chart ................................. 5-23
Figure 5-13. Traveling movement technique ....................................... 5-24
Figure 5-14. Traveling overwatch movement technique ...................... 5-25
Figure 5-15. Bounding overwatch (alternate bounds) .......................... 5-27
Figure 5-16. Bounding overwatch (successive bounds) ...................... 5-28
Figure 5-17. Formation comparison chart ............................................ 5-34
Figure 5-18. File formation ................................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-19. Wedge formation ............................................................. 5-36
Figure 5-20. Modified wedge/rolling T formation.................................. 5-37
Figure 5-21. Four-scout diamond formation......................................... 5-38
Figure 5-22. Security halt ..................................................................... 5-39
Figure 5-23. Securing the near side of a danger area ......................... 5-41
Figure 5-24. Securing the far side of a danger area ............................ 5-42
Figure 5-25. Crossing the danger area ................................................ 5-43
Figure 5-26. Scroll to the road technique ............................................. 5-44
Figure 5-27. Crossing a small open area ............................................. 5-45
viii ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Contents
Figure 5-28. Break contact (front) ....................................................... 5-46

Figure 5-29. Break contact (front) (four scout) .................................... 5-47
Figure 5-30. Break contact (Australian peel) ....................................... 5-48
Figure 5-31. Break contact (left or right) .............................................. 5-49
Figure 5-32. Break contact (left or right) (four scout) .......................... 5-50
Figure 5-33. Five-point contingency plan ............................................ 5-53
Figure 5-34. IBCT scout platoon disengages from contact ................. 5-57
Figure 5-35. IBCT scout platoon breaks contact and conducts
bypass .............................................................................. 5-58
Figure 5-36. Scout platoon maintains contact and conducts bypass
(phase I) ........................................................................... 5-59
(phase II) .......................................................................... 5-60
(phase III) ......................................................................... 5-61
Figure 6-1. Engineer reconnaissance capabilities ................................ 6-5
Figure 6-2. Troop fire support execution matrix, example ..................... 6-8
Figure 6-3. Indirect fire request format ................................................ 6-13
Figure 6-4. Lateral and range shifts from a known point ..................... 6-16
Figure 6-5. Deviation spotting ............................................................. 6-18
Figure 6-6. M22 and M24 binocular reticle pattern ............................. 6-19
Figure 6-7. Use of hand and fingers method to determine deviation .. 6-20
Figure 6-8. Deviation spotting with binoculars..................................... 6-21
Figure 6-9. Converting mil deviation to deviation correction ............... 6-23
Figure 6-10. Range spotting ................................................................ 6-24
Figure 6-11. Successive bracketing .................................................... 6-26
Figure 6-12. Hasty bracketing ............................................................. 6-27
Figure 6-13. Creeping method of adjustment ...................................... 6-28
Figure 6-14. Circular restricted operating zone ................................... 6-33
Figure 6-15. Box restricted operating zone ......................................... 6-34
Figure 6-16. Unmanned aircraft system complementing a ground
scout platoon’s screen ..................................................... 6-37
Figure 6-17. Unmanned aircraft system providing additional
security for a scout platoon ............................................. 6-38
Figure 6-18. Unmanned aircraft system reconnoitering a bypass
for a scout platoon ........................................................... 6-39
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 ix

Contents
Figure 6-19. Football field technique: rotary-wing aiming points ......... 6-43
Figure 6-20. Football field technique: fixed-wing aiming points ........... 6-44
Figure 7-1. Tailgate resupply technique ............................................... 7-16
Figure 7-2. Service station resupply technique .................................... 7-17
Figure 7-3. Combination of tailgate and service station resupply ........ 7-19
Figure 7-4. Graphic training aid 08-01-004 (front) ............................... 7-27
Figure 7-5. Graphic training aid 08-01-004 (back) (continued) ............ 7-28
Figure 7-6. DD Form 1380, Tactical Combat Casualty Care
(TCCC) Card..................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-7. Detainee handling flow chart ............................................. 7-32
Figure 7-8. DD Form 2745, Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW)
Capture Tag (Part A) ....................................................... 7-34
Figure 7-9. Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) Capture Tag (Part B) ....... 7-34
Figure 7-10. Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) Capture Tag (Part C) ..... 7-35
Figure B-1. ABCT scout platoon operational distance (unrestrictive
terrain) ............................................................................... B-2
Figure B-2. IBCT scout platoon operational distances (severely
restrictive) .......................................................................... B-4
Figure B-3. IBCT dismounted scout platoon ......................................... B-5
Figure B-4. SBCT scout platoon operational distances (restrictive) ..... B-6
Tables
Table 1-1. Reconnaissance/security fundamentals ............................... 1-3

Table 2-1. Example hasty sync matrix ................................................. 2-13
Table 2-2. Avenue of approach to mobility corridor comparison
examples .......................................................................... 2-17
Table 2-3. Example observation and fields of fire, avenues of
approach, key terrain, obstacles, and cover and
concealment matrix .......................................................... 2-20
Table 2-4. Example effects of weather matrix ...................................... 2-22
Table 2-5. Example scheme of air matrix ............................................ 2-26
Table 2-6. Reconnaissance and security graphic control measures ... 2-34
Table 3-1. Scout senses ........................................................................ 3-2
Table 3-2. Traffic flow capability based on route width ........................ 3-44
Table 4-1. Dismounted observation post capabilities .......................... 4-17
Table 4-2. Trigger development sequence .......................................... 4-28
x ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Contents
Table 4-3. Common fire-control measures .......................................... 4-52

Table 5-1. Movement techniques and characteristics ......................... 5-22
Table 6-1. Enabler integration checklist ................................................ 6-3
Table 6-2. Methods and procedures for indirect call for fire ................ 6-17
Table 6-3. Determining the observer target factor .............................. 6-22
Table 6-4. Results and observer actions ............................................. 6-29
Table 6-5. Example of a GRID mission ............................................... 6-30
Table 6-6. Example of a shift from a known point ............................... 6-30
Table 6-7. Nonstandard unmanned aerial system mission request,
example............................................................................ 6-35
Table 6-8. Air to ground check-in brief, example ................................ 6-45
Table 6-9. Attack aviation call for fire, example................................... 6-47
Table 6-10. Close air support briefing (game plan and 9-line) ............ 6-49
Table 7-1. Sustainment functions .......................................................... 7-5
Table 7-2. Classes of supply ................................................................. 7-6
Table 7-3. Water consumption chart ..................................................... 7-9
Table 7-4. Daily environmental water consumption chart in gallons
per person ........................................................................ 7-10
Table 7-5. Scout platoon vehicle burn rates ........................................ 7-10
Table B-1. Scout platoon width/depth formula ...................................... B-7
Table B-2. ABCT scout platoon operational distances in
unrestrictive terrain ............................................................ B-8
Table B-3. IBCT scout platoon operational distances in severely
restricted terrain ................................................................. B-8
Table B-4. SBCT scout platoon operational distances in restricted
terrain ................................................................................. B-9
Table B-5. Scout platoon optics systems estimated distances ........... B-10
Table B-6. ABCT scout platoon weapon system list ........................... B-11
Table B-7. IBCT scout platoon weapon system list ............................. B-11
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 xi

This page intentionally left blank.
Preface
ATP 3-20.98 provides framework and tactical employment principles and techniques
for scout platoons of the Cavalry troops in the Armored brigade combat team; the
Infantry brigade combat team, mounted and dismounted; the Stryker brigade combat
team. ATP 3-20.98 also applies to the scout platoons of the combined arms battalion,
the Infantry battalion, and the Stryker Infantry battalion.
The principal audiences for ATP 3-20.98 are platoon leaders, platoon sergeants, section
sergeants, and squad leaders. It also applies to Cavalry troop and squadron commanders
and staff and maneuver battalion commanders and staff responsible for the planning,
execution, or support of reconnaissance and security operations as well as instructors
charged with teaching reconnaissance and security operations.
Commanders, staffs, and subordinates ensure that their decisions and actions comply
with applicable U.S., international, and in some cases host-nation laws and regulations.
Commanders at all levels ensure that their Soldiers operate in accordance with the law
of war and the rules of engagement. (See FM 6-27.)
ATP 3-20.98 uses joint terms where applicable. Selected joint and Army terms and
definitions appear in both the glossary and the text. For definitions shown in the text,
the term is italicized and the number of the proponent publication follows the definition.
This publication is not the proponent for any Army terms.
ATP 3-20.98 applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard/Army National
Guard of the United States and the United States Army Reserve unless otherwise stated.
The proponent agency is the United States Army Training and Doctrine Command. The
preparing agency is the United States Army Maneuver Center of Excellence. Send
comments and recommendations on DA Form 2028, (Recommended Changes to
Publications and Blank Forms) to Commander, Maneuver Center of Excellence,
Directorate of Training and Doctrine, Doctrine and Collective Training Division,
ATTN: ATZK-TDD, 1 Karker Street, Fort Benning, GA 31905-5410; by email to
[email protected]; or submit an electronic DA Form 2028.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 xiii

Introduction
To understand ATP 3-20.98, the reader should review FM 3-98 and the doctrinal
principles outlined in FM 3-90-2, FM 3-55, ATP 3-20.96, and ATP 3-20.97. The reader
should understand decisive action tasks, and the relation to the Army’s military
decision-making process, and troop leading procedures described in ADP 5-0 and
FM 6-0. The reader also must understand the concepts associated with mission
command as described in FM 6-0.
ATP 3-20.98 provides combined arms tactics that scout platoons use to conduct
reconnaissance and security missions, which authoritative will require judgment in
application.
The following summarizes each chapter of ATP 3-20.98:
 Chapter 1 discusses the role, operational environment and threat profiles that
a scout platoon encounters while conducting missions. It describes leader’s
duties and responsibilities. The chapter also describes the organization,
equipment, capabilities, and limitations found in each type of brigade combat
team scout platoon.
 Chapter 2 discusses troop leading procedures, mission command principles
and planning for the scout platoon.
 Chapter 3 discusses the fundamentals and basics of reconnaissance, forms of
reconnaissance, passage of lines, and reconnaissance handover.
 Chapter 4 is an overview of security tasks. It discusses the fundamentals of
security, the forms of security, and the considerations when conducting
security tasks such as observation post planning, occupation, and engagement
area development.
 Chapter 5 discusses the basic scout skills required to successfully conduct
reconnaissance and security tasks during decisive action.
 Chapter 6 discusses the augmentation of combat forces that provide the scout
platoon enablers, which enhance reconnaissance and security effectiveness.
 Chapter 7 discusses how the scout platoon plans and conducts sustainment.
Chapter 7 also discusses the different types of logistics and the operations,
maintenance, field services, and Army Health Support system available for
the scout platoon.
The techniques and procedures discussed in this publication are specific examples of
conducting a particular task. Collectively, they provide a set of tools that commanders
use to employ tactical situations.
The existing rules of engagement and mission operational variables in a specific
situation control the actual application of the techniques and procedures discussed in
this publication.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 xv

Chapter 1
Role of the Scout Platoon
The scout platoon’s mission is to conduct reconnaissance and

security operations to answer the commander’s information
requirements and provide early warning to the protected force.
Specifically, it conducts tasks to satisfy the commander’s critical
information requirements (CCIRs) before the latest time the
information is of value (LTIOV) expires. Commanders specifically
assign the scout platoon missions for any given operation based on
known and projected friendly operations, the range of threats, and
their understanding of potential areas of operations (AO). Scouts
then confirm or deny commanders’ assumptions.
Scout platoons conduct reconnaissance and security missions in

close contact with enemy organizations and civilian populations to
allow maneuver commanders to seize, retain, and exploit the
initiative and obtain a position of relative advantage.
Contents
Page
SECTION I. Overview 1-1
SECTION II. Threat 1-4
SECTION III. Key Personnel 1-6
SECTION IV. Organizations 1-14
SECTION I – OVERVIEW
1-1. Scout platoons are the eyes and ears of the commander. They uniquely organize,
train, and equip to conduct reconnaissance and security tasks. The role of the scout
platoon is to conduct reconnaissance and security missions that satisfy information
requirements to allow commanders to make decisions.
1-2. The execution of reconnaissance and security missions provides supported units
information, time, and space to adjust to the changing situation, react to opportunities
and danger, and enable commanders to transition to future operations. For example,
scout platoons conducting reconnaissance allow commanders to transition from defense
to offense. By establishing a screen, scout platoons provide the commander with early
warning of enemy activities with enough time to react and space to maneuver their
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-1

Chapter 1
forces. Scout platoons enable the commander to determine enemy intent, willingness to
fight, and preserve freedom of maneuver.
1-3. Scout platoons are the primary reconnaissance asset in the Cavalry troop, and the
organic reconnaissance unit available to Infantry and combined arms battalions. By
providing timely and accurate information during reconnaissance and security missions,
the commander can progressively build situational awareness of the operational
environment. During security, the scout platoon provides commanders with reaction
time and maneuver space and allows them to understand the situation more clearly.
Collectively, scouts conducting reconnaissance and security missions aid the
commander in decision making and directing follow-on or future operations.
1-4. Scout platoons execute missions with organic and external reconnaissance assets
to identify and target enemy forces and capabilities, and provide maneuver space and
reaction time for the protected force. When performing its fundamental role, the scout
platoon makes the following contributions (not in order of priority)—
 Provide an effective all weather, reconnaissance capability.
 Maximize security by providing reaction time and maneuver space to
preserve combat power through economy of force.
 Facilitate commander’s situational awareness and understanding with timely
and accurate reporting.
 Enable the operations and intelligence processes by satisfying information
requirements.
 Facilitate commander’s visualization of the operational environment that aids
decision making to achieve or preserve the decisive operation.
 Assist in shaping the AO by providing information or directing fires to disrupt
the threat.
 Facilitate tactical movement across the AO by conducting route
reconnaissance.
 Detect threat cover and concealment, deception, and decoys.
1-5. The primary focus of the scout platoon is to answer supported CCIR. CCIR is an
information requirement tied to a decision point and identified by the commander as
being critical for facilitating timely decision making and successful execution of military
operations priority intelligence requirements (PIRs). CCIR includes PIR and friendly
force information requirements. PIR is an intelligence requirement, stated as a priority
for reconnaissance and security tasks and intelligence collection that the commander
needs to understand about a threat, enemy, or adversary or about the operational
environment (for example, terrain or civil considerations) (JP 2-01). PIR identifies the
information about the enemy and the operational environment that the commander
considers most important. PIR, along with friendly forces information requirements, are
the two essential elements of CCIR. Scout platoons conduct reconnaissance and security
missions to answer PIR, which normally tie to either a named area of interest (NAI) or
a target area of interest (TAI). See chapter 2 for further discussion on CCIR and decision
point NAI linkage.
1-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

1-6. The scout platoon operates consistent with and guided by the fundamentals of
reconnaissance and security during planning, preparation, and execution of its missions
(see table 1). See chapters 3 and 4 of this publication for greater detail of these
fundamentals.
Table 1-1. Reconnaissance/security fundamentals
Fundamentals of Reconnaissance Fundamentals of Security
Ensure continuous reconnaissance. Provide early and accurate warning.
Do not keep reconnaissance assets in Provide reaction time and maneuver
reserve. space.
Orient on the reconnaissance Orient on the force, area, or facility to be
objective. protected.
Report all information rapidly and Perform continuous reconnaissance.
accurately. Maintain enemy contact.
Retain freedom of maneuver.
Gain and maintain enemy contact.
Develop the situation rapidly.
1-7. The scout platoon’s five-core reconnaissance and security missions follow below.
While not a core reconnaissance and security mission, local security is a priority task
and responsibility of all Army units as a force protection measure.
 Zone reconnaissance.
 Area reconnaissance.
 Route reconnaissance.
 Screen.
 Area security.
1-8. The scout platoon operates in support of a larger force conducting a guard or
cover, which may include offensive and defensive operations. The platoon may be
directed to conduct screening or reconnaissance missions during the larger unit's guard
or cover mission.
SCOUTS IN DECISIVE ACTION

1-9. Unified action is the synchronization, coordination, and/or integration of the
activities of governmental and nongovernmental entities with military operations to
achieve unity of effort (JP 1). The Army’s contribution to unified action is unified land
operations. (See ADP 3-0 for more information.) The Army executes unified land
operations through decisive action tasks. Unified land operations are the simultaneous
execution of offense, defense, stability, and defense support of civil authorities across
multiple domains to shape operational environments, prevent conflict, prevail in large-
scale ground combat, and consolidate gains as part of unified action. (ADP 3-0). Scout
platoons conduct reconnaissance and security to support their higher commanders
during all decisive action tasks. Cavalry forces conduct reconnaissance to support higher
commanders, especially when transitioning between decisive action tasks.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-3

Chapter 1
1-10. Both brigade combat team (BCT) and maneuver battalion commanders task scout
platoons against their decisive point where scouts conduct zone, area, and route
reconnaissance missions, to confirm or deny assumptions, or provide the commander
more information on enemy, terrain, or civilian populations.
1-11. The commander provides guidance to the battalion/squadron or brigade
operations staff officer (S-3) and battalion or brigade intelligence staff officer (S-2) to
develop CCIR for their decision points. They task scout platoons to gather the required
information as expressed as indicators to inform their actions. For example, a Stryker
battalion commander may task their scout platoon to conduct an area reconnaissance
mission for a suitable area to deploy their companies for an attack. An Infantry battalion
commander might employ their scout platoon in a screen to their front during the defense
to provide reaction time and maneuver space allowing a company to reposition based on
reported approaching enemy formations.
VARIABLES OF THE OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

1-12. The operational environment evolves as each operation progresses. The two types
of variables are operational and mission. Army leaders use operational variables to
analyze and understand a specific operational environment and use mission variables to
focus on specific elements during mission analysis (see ADP 3-0 for more information).
The operational variables are political, military, economic, social, information,
infrastructure, physical environment, and time. (Refer to ADP 5-0 for more
information.)
1-13. The second type of variable is mission variables, which describes characteristics
of the AO focusing on how they affect a mission. The mission variables are mission,
enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, and civil
considerations (METT-TC). (Refer to ADP 5-0 for more information.)
SECTION II – THREAT
1-14. A threat is any combination of actors, entities, or forces that have the capability
and intent to harm U.S. forces, U.S. national interests, or the homeland (ADP 3-0).
Threats may include individuals, groups of individuals, paramilitary or military forces,
nation-states, or national alliances. In general, threats are an enemy or an adversary:
 An enemy is a party identified as hostile against which the use of force is
authorized (ADP 3-0).
 An enemy is also called a combatant and is treated as such under the law of
war.
 An adversary is a party acknowledged as potentially hostile to a friendly
party and against which the use of force may be envisaged (JP 3-0).
1-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

REGULAR AND IRREGULAR THREAT DESCRIPTION

1-15. Regular. These include peer and near-peer threats that train, equip, and organize
to conduct combined arms maneuver. They employ modern and modernized weapons
systems capable of defeating or competing with like U.S. systems.
1-16. Irregular. These include insurgent, guerilla, terrorist, paramilitary, and criminal
organizations. These threats attempt to win by exhausting U.S. national will by inflicting
long-term expenditure of American lives and treasure. (See FM 3-24 for more
information.) A hybrid threat employs a combination of regular and irregular forces. See
TC 7-100 series and supporting products for more information on hybrid warfare, threat
equipment, and potential future operating environments.
THREAT IMPACT ON SCOUTS

1-17. Scout platoons face an elusive, diverse, flexible, and adaptive enemy. The enemy
is capable of combining a wide array of lethal and nonlethal weapons, including modern
peer, near-peer, hybrid threats, and improvised systems, presenting a complex enemy
situation for friendly reconnaissance and security forces. Scouts may face combined
arms organizations that outnumber the scout platoon and overmatch the weapons of
friendly scout platoons and sections. The enemy uses traditional, unconventional, and
hybrid tactics to present numerous challenges for friendly forces by combining
electronic warfare (EW) and cyber weapons with the following capabilities—
 Infantry.
 Armed vehicle equipped insurgents, either individually or in groups.
 Mechanized forces.
 Antiarmor systems.
 Indirect fires.
 Unmanned aircraft systems (individual and massed).
 Cyber/EW attacks.
1-18. During reconnaissance missions, the enemy seeks to disrupt, deter, defeat, or
destroy information-collection effort. The enemy may employ stationary observation
posts integrated with insurgents operating individually or in teams among the
population. They may also use unmanned aircraft system (UAS) to identify and target
friendly reconnaissance units or to pass information to highly mobile,
counterreconnaissance forces. Conventional and unconventional counterreconnaissance
forces conduct complex ambushes to defeat or destroy scout platoons to prevent
collection and reporting of information.
1-19. During security missions, the enemy will attempt infiltration through the security
force with the intent to identify friendly strengths, weaknesses, key command
communications elements, or influence the protected population. The enemy endeavors
to identify and target key communication nodes or critical capabilities that disrupt our
ability to maintain security and limit our freedom of maneuver. They will continue to
employ EW to affect positioning, navigation, and timing. Simultaneously, the enemy
may employ insurgents or criminal elements within the population to collect
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-5

Chapter 1
information. They then transmit the information through messengers using

inconspicuous visual signals (tire fires, animal flock movements, flags, flyers, and
posters), and various electronic means. Insurgents employ terrorist tactics to disrupt and
create fear amongst the populace to distract friendly security forces and limit our ability
to collect information. Insurgent forces may target patrols, observation posts, and
logistics package (LOGPAC) with improvised explosive devices (IEDs) and ambushes.
1-20. The enemy may also utilize subterranean passages, avenues of approach, and
hideouts to evade friendly forces or conduct sudden attacks from unexpected directions.
Enemy EW efforts may include spoofing or jamming to disrupt positioning, navigation,
and timing to deny effective communications and precise targeting. The enemy will link
its activities with information operations to influence the local and international
audience and gain support.
SECTION III – KEY PERSONNEL

1-21. Every scout in the platoon needs required information to accomplish the mission.
Providing a clear task, purpose, and commander’s intent coupled with reconnaissance
and security guidance to all echelons allows scout platoons to exercise disciplined
initiative and complete the mission successfully, regardless of setbacks or losses.
1-22. Duties and responsibilities as outlined below are a guideline for all scout platoons.
Task organization (known as TASKORG) or absence of personnel may warrant other
members of the scout platoon performing additional duties outside their traditional
scope. All scouts must be proficient in their responsibilities, which are listed below, and
of the next higher position to accomplish the mission successfully.
COMMON RESPONSIBILITIES
1-23. All leaders assume the duties of the next higher leader in their absence and take
initiative to accomplish the mission in the absence of orders. They are responsible for
what their echelon does or fails to do, and employs their echelon as directed by the scout
platoon leader. They position themselves where they can influence the most critical tasks
of the mission.
1-24. During planning all leaders adhere to timelines using backwards planning from
LTIOV and understand commander’s intent and that of the commander two levels up.
They assist the platoon leader in planning direct/indirect fire control measures and also
understand key tasks and information collection requirements and employ their echelon
to accomplish them. The following common responsibilities apply to all scout platoon
leadership regardless of position:
 Supervise or assist in selection, construction, and occupation of observation
posts and firing positions.
 Ensure participation in and execution of mission critical rehearsals.
 Understand the capabilities and limitations of available personnel and
equipment in and attached to the platoon.
 Use standardized report formats to keep the platoon leader informed.
1-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

 Employ indirect fires and Army attack helicopters.

 Control fires and establishes fire control measures.
 Perform precombat checks and inspections (PCC/PCI).
 Issue a five-point contingency plan when they leave the vehicle.
DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

1-25. The following duties apply to all scout platoon formations. The next higher leader
is responsible to ensure subordinates successfully execute their duties.
PLATOON LEADER
1-26. The scout platoon leader develops trust and understanding with the commander
and subordinates. The entire platoon must execute disciplined initiative consistent with
the commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance and train subordinates to do the
same.
1-27. The platoon leader is responsible for what the platoon does or fails to do,
including tactical employment, training, administration, personnel management, and
logistics. Successful platoon leaders handle this responsibility by planning, making
timely decisions, issuing orders, assigning tasks, and supervising platoon activities.
1-28. Scout platoon leaders fully understand the capabilities and limitations of
personnel and equipment in and attached to their platoon. They develop and adhere to
timelines using backwards planning from LTIOV, and understand the commanders
intent and that of the commander two levels up, allowing them to exercise disciplined
initiative to accomplish the mission in the absence of orders. Platoon leaders ensure key
tasks and information requirements are understood by all subordinates. They backbrief
the commander on their plan to accomplish the mission and allot time for section leaders
to plan their section’s scheme of maneuver. They evaluate enemy threat at the platoon
level and template threats down to the team, and continually plan and reassess one phase
ahead during execution. They plan communications to enable early and accurate
warning through timely and accurate reporting, maneuver their elements, and employ
fires and other enablers.
1-29. During planning, platoon leaders use parallel planning to issue operation orders
(OPORD), fragmentary orders (FRAGORD), and warning orders (WARNORD). The
platoon leader works with the troop fires support officer and develops a scheme of fires
overlay. They assign subordinates as observers, develop a scheme of air overlay, and
provide clear guidance to the UAS and Army attack aviation assets.
1-30. The platoon leader directs and assists the platoon sergeant (known as PSG) in
planning and executing sustainment. They conduct planning with the help of the leaders
and attachments within the platoon and develop redundant (digital and analog) graphic
control measures for distribution. Platoon leaders conduct troop leading procedures
(TLP) and identify the need for enablers and assets, synchronize them, and request them
in a timely manner. They coordinate with adjacent units and understand that unit’s
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-7

Chapter 1
mission. Prior to execution, they perform PCI according to their platoon standard
operating procedures (SOPs).
1-31. During execution, scout platoon leaders position themselves where they can
influence the most critical tasks of the mission while controlling fires and establishing
fire control measures. They use standardized report formats to keep the commander
informed and maneuver sections by providing guidance to the section leader to
accomplish the mission. Additionally, they collect section range cards and prepare a
platoon sector sketch. They direct the development and refinement of the platoon’s pre-
execution tasks, and make adjustments when required.
PLATOON SERGEANT
1-32. The PSG is the senior noncommissioned officer (NCO) in the platoon and second
in succession of command. The senior most experienced scout in the platoon and the
only NCO that assumes a leadership role from a commissioned officer, the PSG provides
expertise, helps, and advises the platoon leader. They lead the platoon in the platoon
leader’s absence, and supervise the platoons’ administration, logistics, and maintenance.
The PSG assists the platoon leader with the development of paragraph four of the
OPORD. PSGs understand the commander’s intent and that of the commander two
levels up.
1-33. The PSGs primary focus is directing all resupply and maintenance activities. The
PSG receives requests from the section leader for rations, water, ammunition, and
replacement equipment, and conducts coordination directly with the troop first sergeant
(1SG), or executive officer (XO) using standardized report formats for all classes of
supply. They develop the scheme of support overlay and distribute it across the platoon.
1-34. The PSG supervises and directs the platoon medic, combat lifesaver (CLS)
personnel, and aid and litter teams. They develop and supervise the platoon’s casualty
collection plan and all medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) and casualty evacuation
(CASEVAC) plans.
1-35. Additionally, the PSG maintains platoon status of personnel, weapons, and
equipment and submits standardized reports to the commander or 1SG. They ensure that
ammunition, supplies, and loads are evenly distributed.
1-36. They monitor the morale, discipline, and health of the platoon and ensure that the
platoon adheres to the platoon leader’s timeline. The PSG enforces compliance with
platoon and troop SOPs.
1-37. The PSG conducts PCC and is responsible for the security plan during all
operations. They confirm and recommend locations of the casualty collection point
(CCP), ambulance exchange point, logistic release point (known as LRP), and
maintenance collection point (known as MCP), and template them on the scheme of
support overlay. The PSG delegates responsibility to section leader to confirm or deny
suitability of all CCPs/ambulance exchange points/LRPs/MCPs) templated on the
scheme of support overlay. The PSG enforces net discipline amongst the platoon, and
distributes priorities of work during all phases of operations.
1-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

SECTION LEADER
1-38. The term section leader is used to denote which squad leader (known as
SQDLDR) is in charge of a specific TASKORG. The section leader is responsible for
the tactical employment and combat readiness of their section, including the health,
welfare, and training of Soldiers, and maintenance of weapons and equipment of their
squad. They help the platoon leader plan the scheme of maneuver and make relevant
recommendations during planning and execution.
1-39. The section leader maintains section status of personnel, weapons, and equipment
and submits standardized reports to the platoon leader or PSG. They ensure that
ammunition, supplies, and loads are evenly distributed in the section. Section leaders
direct the maintenance of the section's weapons and equipment and perform PCC.
1-40. The section leaders delegate tasks to squad and team leaders, and supervises there
accomplishment. While maneuvering their section during execution, within the platoon
leader’s guidance, the section leader will refine the plan to meet the needs of a changing
operational environment.
1-41. Additionally, the section leader assists the platoon leader in planning direct and
indirect fire control measures and employs indirect fires and Army aviation assets. They
understand key tasks and information collection requirements and employ their section
to accomplish them. They prepare a section sector sketch and develop a route
reconnaissance overlay in support of route reconnaissance missions.
SQUAD LEADER
1-42. The SQDLDR is responsible for the combat readiness and tactical employment
of their squad and scout vehicle. They supervise the health, welfare, and training of
Soldiers, and maintenance of the vehicle, equipment, and weapons.
1-43. The SQDLDRs maintain the squads’ status of personnel, weapons, and
equipment, and submit standardized reports to the section leader. They ensure that
ammunition, supplies, and loads are evenly distributed, and direct the maintenance of
the squads’ weapons and equipment. Additionally, they employ indirect fires and
aviation assets.
1-44. The SQDLDRs help the section leader plan the scheme of maneuver. They
delegate tasks to team leaders (known as TLs) and subordinates, and supervise their
accomplishment. SQDLDRs follow the platoon leader’s plan and make
recommendations, understand key tasks and information collection requirements and
employ their squad to accomplish them. They plan for aspects of long duration
observation posts, dismounted reconnaissance and security patrols, and prepare a range
card, DA Form 5517 (Standard Range Card).
TEAM LEADER
1-45. The TLs assist SQDLDRs by providing direct oversight and supervision of their
scouts. TLs are the first link in the chain of command and are responsible for the combat
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-9

Chapter 1
readiness and tactical employment of their team, the health, welfare, and training of
Soldiers, and the maintenance of equipment and weapons.
1-46. TLs interpret commander’s intent and reconnaissance and security guidance into
directed actions for Soldiers. TLs inform the squad leader of preparation status by
personally checking on: scout’s readiness of equipment such as vehicle fluid levels,
filled canteens, and packed rucksacks according to the tactical SOP. Additionally, the
TL verifies sensitive items and ammunition status, checking weapons and ammunition,
and prepares their team for PCC and PCI.
1-47. TLs delegate tasks to subordinates, and supervise the subordinate actions. They
inform and provide recommendations to the SQDLDR. They employ indirect fires and
aviation assets. They prepare to establish OPs and lead patrols. TLs establish
communications security, fill loads into radios, and other equipment. They prepare a
range card, for the squad/section leader.
GUNNER
1-48. The gunner is responsible for the combat readiness and tactical employment of
their weapon system, and vehicle mounted communications systems. Additionally, the
gunner maneuvers the vehicle, as directed, in the absence of the vehicle commander.
1-49. The gunner performs the maintenance, assembly, disassembly, and operator
checks of the weapon system. During an engagement the gunner will detect, identify,
engage, and assess enemy targets as directed by the vehicle commander. They recognize
firing angle limitations and direct the driver to reposition the vehicle to eliminate them.
The gunner coordinates sector responsibilities over voice communications systems with
other vehicle gunners throughout the platoon during missions.
1-50. Gunners prepare a range card and assume control of the vehicle in the absence of
the vehicle commander. They assist in navigating and maneuvering the vehicle. They
employ their vehicle/weapon system/optics to accomplish the tasks and requirements,
delegate tasks to the driver, and supervise their accomplishment.
DRIVER
1-51. The driver is responsible for the combat readiness and tactical employment of
their vehicle. The driver tactically maneuvers the vehicle as directed by the vehicle
commander.
1-52. Drivers perform the preventive maintenance and operator checks of the vehicle
and equipment. They maintain vehicle status of personnel, weapons, equipment, and
petroleum, oils, and lubricants, and submit reports to the gunner.
1-53. The driver recognizes firing angle limitations and repositions the vehicle to
eliminate them. They assume control of the vehicle in the absence of the crew and assist
in navigating and maneuvering the vehicle. The driver is always looking for the next
covered and concealed position during maneuvering and communicates it to the vehicle
commander.
1-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

1-54. They assist the gunner in maintaining and employing all communication systems
mounted in the vehicle. They perform PCC ensuring that ammunition, supplies, and
loads are evenly distributed and secured in the vehicle.
1-55. They receive a five-point contingency plan when personnel leave the vehicle.
They observe their sector of responsibility, camouflage the vehicle, and provide local
security when needed. Drivers help detect, identify, and assess enemy targets. They
maintain and improve on all scout skills.
SCOUT
1-56. Scouts understand how to stealthily navigate through terrain to close in and report
on enemy units. They move to positions of advantage, establish well-camouflaged and
emplaced observation posts, and send accurate and timely reports to their higher
element. Scouts use their sensors and systems to identify and observe NAIs for the
commander. They are experts with their analog and digital reporting systems, and they
apply these systems to report as much detailed and pertinent information as possible to
inform higher commanders.
1-57. Scouts assume duties of the team leader in their absence. They are experts with
their rifle, its optics, and its laser-aiming device, and are effective with their weapon
system both day and night. They are capable of engaging all targets with well-aimed
shots. They employ all weapons of the squad and are proficient in their individual and
assigned tasks. Scouts know the duties of their teammates and prepare to execute their
mission, as needed.
1-58. Scouts understand their requirements as a member of a special team (detainee
search, aid/litter, site exploitation, CLS, demolitions, and wire/mine breach teams).
They manage their food, water, and ammunition during missions, and maintain proper
vehicle, individual, and equipment camouflage during all operations. They provide local
security, perform the maintenance and operator checks of their equipment, and
accomplish all assigned tasks.
1-59. Scouts make relevant recommendations to the team leader, and understand the
capabilities and limitations of personnel and equipment, in and attached, to their platoon.
They observe their sector of responsibility, and employ all scout skills to accomplish the
mission. They are proficient in use of indirect fires. They understand how to collect
information on routes and in areas as directed by the team leader. Scouts understand the
fundamentals of reconnaissance and security and collect and provide information to
assist leaders.
SPECIAL WEAPONS
1-60. Scouts carrying special weapons; grenade launcher, machine guns, Javelin, or
Stinger have the same duties as the scout with the addition of the following: engages
targets with appropriate type of rounds, both day and night and understands the
capabilities and limitations of equipment employment. They perform the maintenance
and operator checks on their equipment.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-11

Chapter 1
1-61. The scout grenadier can identify 40-mm (millimeter) rounds by shape and color,
and know how to employ each type of round. They know each rounds minimum safety
constraints and the maximum ranges for each type of target. The grenadier is familiar
with the leaf sight increments without reading the markings. Additionally, they know
how to make an adjustment from the first round fired to obtain a second-round impact.
The grenadier is proficient in quick reloading, firing in all positions, and accurate when
firing on the move.
1-62. The machine gunner accurately engages groups of enemy personnel, thin-skinned
vehicles, bunker doors or apertures, and suspected enemy locations with automatic fire.
They provide suppressive fire on selected targets to enable the supported unit to maintain
freedom of maneuver.
1-63. Machine gunners must engage targets from the prone, kneeling, and standing
positions, with and without night observation devices. They are responsible for their
assistant gunner and all the gun equipment, and knowing the ballistic effects of the
weapon on all types of targets.
1-64. The javelin gunner engages targets both day and night, knows how to employ the
javelin, its minimum safety constraints, and knows the maximum effective range of the
javelin. Javelin gunners understand the capabilities and limitations of equipment
employment considerations. They perform the maintenance and operator checks on
missiles and on the command launch unit and maintain batteries for the command launch
unit. They operate and troubleshoot the command launch unit without the use of a
flashlight.
1-65. The Stinger gunner defends the scout platoon from air threats. A second person
helps carry the equipment. They engage targets both day and night and know how to
employ the Stinger and its minimum safety constraints, while also understanding the
maximum effective range of the Stinger.
RADIO TELEPHONE OPERATOR

1-66. The scout acting as radio telephone operator (known as RTO) is there to maintain
communications with higher, adjacent units, and attachments. The RTO maintains
communications at all prescribed times and takes actions necessary to regain
communications, sends and receives all reports using standardized formats, and is an
expert at employing field expedient antennas.
1-67. The RTO maintains a copy of the signal operating instructions and assists the
platoon leader with information management. They manage battery usage and signal
output during operations in accordance with communication windows and SOPs.
1-68. The RTO maintains communications equipment and employs the assigned crypto
key filling device. They perform the maintenance and operator checks on their assigned
communications equipment. RTOs understand the capabilities and limitations of
equipment employment considerations consistent with displaced and dispersed
locations. They understand actions taken when they encounter a meaconing, intrusion,
jamming and interference threat.
1-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

COMBAT MEDIC
1-69. Combat medics reside in the medical platoon and support the Cavalry squadron.
Combat medics attach to Cavalry troops with one combat medic per scout platoon and
one senior combat medic per troop. The combat medic makes their assessment,
administers initial medical care, initiates a DD Form 1380 (Tactical Combat Casualty
Care [TCCC] Card), then requests evacuation or returns the scout to duty. The combat
medic also assists in the training of the platoon’s CLSs in enhanced first-aid procedures,
and requisitions class VIII supplies from the squadron aid station (known as SAS).
FORWARD OBSERVER (TROOP LEVEL)

1-70. The forward observer (FO), along with their RTO, is the scout platoon’s subject
matter expert on indirect fire planning and execution. They advise the scout platoon
leadership on the employment and execution for all fire support assets, including troop
mortars, field artillery, and other allocated fire support assets. They are responsible for
locating targets, and calling and adjusting indirect fires. The fire support team also
knows the mission and concept of operation, specifically the scout platoon’s scheme of
maneuver, and concept of fires and is the scout platoon leader’s indirect fire expert.
MORTARS (TROOP LEVEL)

1-71. Circumstances may warrant dismounted mortar teams be attached to the scout
platoon. Soldiers of the platoon may have to carry ammunition for the mortars during
movements. Planning for additional weight and making load adjustments for the Soldiers
facilitate mission accomplishment.
1-72. They must understand the platoon’s scheme of maneuver and know their current
location while maintaining communication with the fire direction center (FDC). They
assist the platoon leader in planning for use of indirect fires and assist with planning and
selection of the mortar firing point. Additionally, they plot fires and determine firing data.
HABITUAL ENABLERS
1-73. Scout platoons may receive additional attachments to those listed here. See
chapter 6 for an expanded and more detailed discussion of possible attachments to the
scout platoon. In general, scout platoons should understand the following information
from attachments:
 What is their mission?
 What capabilities do they bring to the fight?
 What are their limitations?
 Who has control of them?
 How do they move and maneuver?
 Who has responsibility for their sustainment?
 What are their communication capabilities (radio frequencies, call signs)?
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-13

Chapter 1
 How long will they remain and where do they go once their mission is
complete?
 How do you locate them for a face-to-face link up?
SECTION IV – ORGANIZATIONS
1-74. Below are the current capabilities and limitations common to each of the BCT
scout platoons. Also provided below are descriptions for the organization, equipment,
capabilities, and limitations that are specific for each of the scout platoons.
COMMON SCOUT PLATOON CAPABILITIES AND

LIMITATIONS
1-75. The following general capabilities and limitations apply to all types of scout
platoons. Specific platoon capabilities center on the formation types discussed below.
1-76. Each scout platoon can conduct simultaneous reconnaissance of one area per
scout section. The size of each area depends on factors such as the available road
network, terrain features, anticipated enemy activity, reconnaissance tasks to perform,
availability of UAS and Army aviation to support, and the time available. Each platoon
can conduct a detailed zone reconnaissance at a rate dependent on METT-TC and
number of tasks associated with the mission. All scout platoons can reconnoiter two
routes in a permissive no-threat environment, one route in a low-threat environment, and
one route as a subordinate element conducting reconnaissance as a troop in a medium to
high-threat environment.
1-77. Scout platoons provide all weather, accurate, and timely reconnaissance and
security in nonrestrictive, restrictive, and urban terrain using surveillance systems, and
mounted and dismounted scouts.
1-78. Scout platoons employ integrated sensors and systems to defeat enemy deception,
decoys, and cover and concealment that would otherwise remain undetected.
1-79. Each scout platoon can also—
 Operate in three scout sections or two scout sections to respond to changes in
the mission variables of METT-TC.
 Conduct mounted and dismounted reconnaissance or security concurrently at
the platoon, section, and squad level.
 Conduct three dismounted patrols concurrently.
 Operate three mounted and three dismounted observation posts for more than
12 hours.
 Operate six mounted and six dismounted observation posts for up to 12 hours.
 Communicate with and report information by voice and data over distances
normally associated with beyond line-of-sight communications.
 Observe, detect, identify, and classify enemy elements during the conduct of
reconnaissance and security tasks.
1-14 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

 Operate in close proximity to the enemy and among civilian populations.

 Defeat, destroy, or impede enemy reconnaissance elements within
capabilities.
 Integrate attachments to identify enemy signatures and enable multidomain
reconnaissance and security.
 Move at speeds equal to or faster than the supported unit.
 Lead and train squads, teams, and crews with NCOs.
SCOUT SQUAD
1-80. The purpose of the scout squad is to conduct reconnaissance and security
missions, provide local security, establish observation posts, and clear intervisibility
(known as IV) lines for their section and platoon. A scout squad enables depth through
the combination of mounted and dismounted scouts. The vehicle crew (vehicle
commander, driver, and gunner) perform the primary vehicle duties, including crew
gunnery qualification. The squad possesses a dismounted capability that task organizes
based on mission requirements. Therefore, all scouts must be proficient on maintaining
their vehicle, their mounted weapon systems, and the M320 grenade launcher, the
Javelin Missile System, and the M240B machine gun. Cross-training mounted and
dismounted tasks across the squad increases the squad’s flexibility and ability to sustain
reconnaissance and security mission requirements.
1-81. The composition of the scout squads differ across the formations of the Armored
brigade combat team (ABCT), Stryker brigade combat team (SBCT), Infantry brigade
combat team (IBCT), combined arms battalions and Infantry battalion. The composition
of the scout squads are listed in paragraphs 1-83 to 1-86.
1-82. The ABCT and SBCT Cavalry troops have six scout squads within each scout
platoon. Each squad consists of six personnel and one reconnaissance vehicle (Bradley
or Stryker).
1-83. The ABCT combined arms battalion has six scout squads within the scout
platoon. Three of the squads consist of six personnel and a Bradley and three squads
consist of four personnel and a high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle (HMMWV)
or Joint Light Tactical Vehicle.
1-84. The IBCT Cavalry squadron has six scout squads within each scout platoon of
the mounted troops. Each squad consists of four personnel and a reconnaissance vehicle
(HMMWV). The IBCT Cavalry squadron dismounted troop has three scout squads
within each scout platoon and each squad consists of eight personnel.
1-85. The IBCT Infantry battalion scout platoon has three scout squads within each
scout platoon. Each squad consists of six personnel and two vehicles (HMMWVs or
Joint Light Tactical Vehicles).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-15

Chapter 1
SCOUT SECTION
1-86. Regardless of scout platoon formation, platoons may task organize as two or three
section concepts. Characteristics shared by all scout sections are in the following
paragraphs.
1-87. Each scout platoon consists of two or three scout sections. Each section includes
two or three scout squads. The scout platoon leader and PSG designate the section leader
to lead the Alpha and Bravo sections. The headquarters section includes the platoon
leader and the PSG, depending on how the platoon task organizes.
1-88. In some cases, the platoon may fight as a single entity, which is most common
when the platoon supports a higher-level security mission such as a guard. When a
section employs its dismounted teams as a squad-sized dismounted element, a squad
leader usually dismount to lead the teams.
1-89. The platoon leader or PSG may dismount to perform specific leader tasks. In such
a case, a team leader assumes responsibility for the vehicle to provide leadership to the
mounted team.
1-90. The platoon leader or PSG may operate together within a command section or
separately. METT-TC variables may require them to operate with other sections to
ensure effective mission command.
1-91. The scout section requires its two scout vehicles and their mounted teams to
conduct coordinated tactical movements. Mounted scout squads must have the
capability to operate and move their vehicles, command their vehicles, or lead the
movement of the section’s vehicles. The mounted teams require the ability to secure
themselves and their vehicles at the short halt while maintaining the ability to move
immediately.
1-92. Scout sections must operate their primary weapons and optics concurrently, and
remain on the platoon’s communications and mission command systems. Mounted
teams require sufficient personnel to minimally operate their vehicle while one Soldier
from the vehicle dismounts to provide local security. In the case of a scout section
equipped with Bradleys’ or Stryker Infantry carrier vehicles the gunners may dismount
to provide local security while the vehicle commander and driver remain to control
weapons, optics, communications, and the vehicle itself. In the case of Stryker
reconnaissance vehicles or up-armored light wheeled platform variants with two crew
positions on the vehicle, the third Soldier in the mounted team, not part of the
dismounting scout teams, fulfills the local security requirement at the short halt.
1-93. The scout section security missions are normally screening missions. When
screening, the section must have enough personnel to monitor communications, use the
vehicle’s primary optic and primary weapon, and move the vehicle. Other Soldiers in
the section maintain the dismounted observation post, provide local security, and
conduct periodic patrols. Additionally during long duration missions, over 12 hours, the
section executes squad- and team-size dismounted patrols. When the section employs a
six Soldier dismounted patrol, the two mounted three-Soldier teams assume local
security and mounted observation post duties.
1-16 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

TWO SECTION
1-94. Use the two-section organization when there is a requirement for increased
security, when two elements can efficiently cover a sector, or when the threat situation
is unknown. The two-section organization allows for maximum dismounts and is best
suitable for area reconnaissance missions.
1-95. Advantages to a two-section organization are—
 Easier to gain fire superiority.
 Effective if there are only two high-speed avenues of approach to observe.
 Simplified command and control, senior leader (platoon leader or PSG) in
each section.
 Easier to effectively mass personnel.
 Simplified mission command.
 Easier CASEVAC.
1-96. The disadvantages to a two-section organization are—

 Harder to disperse forces over a wider area.
 Higher chance of compromise due to massing of sound and visual signature.
 Harder to conduct simultaneous reconnaissance on more than two NAIs.
THREE SECTION
1-97. Use the three-section organization when there is a requirement to cover a wider
area or there are multiple avenues of approach and area of interests within the platoon’s
zone or screen. The three-section organization provides added depth to the platoon’s
screen.
1-98. Advantages of a three-section organization are—
 Easier to disperse forces over a wider area.
 Easier to conduct simultaneous reconnaissance of more than two NAIs.
 Lesser chance of compromise because forces are spread out.
 Easier to form a headquarters section with platoon leader and PSG in same
section.
1-99. The disadvantages to a three-section organization are—
 Harder to gain fire superiority.
 Harder to mass personnel.
 Harder to conduct CASEVAC with dispersed distance.
 Harder to ensure senior leaders are in proper position to best influence to
mission.
ABCT CAVALRY SQUADRON SCOUT PLATOON

1-100. The sound signature of the Bradley will be the most difficult factor to overcome.
Leaders should allot additional time for dismounts to leave the vehicle at greater
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-17

Chapter 1
distances from the NAI to maintain stealth. Each platoon has one platoon leader, one
PSG, and four squad leaders. As described above, for tactical employment, all leaders
employ their sections using the wingman concept. The ABCT Cavalry squadron scout
platoon has the following common equipment in each platoon:
 Six M2A3 Bradley fighting vehicles.
 M240L 7.62-mm machine gun.
 Javelin command launch unit.
1-101. The ABCT Cavalry squadron scout platoon capabilities include:

 Provide all weather, continuous, accurate, and timely reconnaissance and
security in nonrestrictive terrain.
 Survivability and fight for information against appropriate threat.
 The M2A3 Bradley fighting vehicle armed with a 25-mm cannon, 7.62-mm
coaxial machine gun, and tube launched, optically tracked, wire guided
(TOW) missile system, provides firepower.
1-102. The ABCT Cavalry squadron scout platoon limitations include:
 Limited maneuverability in urban environments and other types of complex
terrain.
 The K-series modified table of organization and equipment also lacks the
Long-Range Advance Scout Surveillance System (known as LRAS3) optic
system for long-range target acquisition and surveillance and only has one
fire support sensor system variant if attached a fire support team.
1-103. The platoon’s vehicles create sustainment consideration for resupply, refueling,
and maintenance despite the ABCTs enhanced sustainment capability.
1-104. The following is a possible TASKORG for ABCT scout platoons that have 6
vehicles and 36 personnel. (See figure 1-1.)
1-18 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Figure 1-1. ABCT Cavalry squadron scout platoon
ABCT COMBINED ARMS BATTALION SCOUT

PLATOON
1-105. With eight vehicles, it is possible to have four, two vehicle sections. Four
sections may be beneficial in some security postures, or if senior leaders need to be able
to move to multiple sections to best influence the mission. Additionally, the platoon can
task organize to have a section leader in a Bradley or a HMMWV. The advantage to the
section leader in a HMMWV is a lower signature so they can operate forward, locate an
enemy, and conduct a target handover to their wingman. The ABCT combined arms
battalion scout platoon has the following common equipment:
 Three M2A3 Bradley vehicles.
 Five up-armored, HMMWVs.
 AN/TAS-8 LRAS3.
 Javelin command launch unit.
 MK19 40-mm machine gun grenade.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-19

Chapter 1
 .50 caliber heavy machine gun.

1-106. In addition to the capabilities and limitations discussed above in the ABCT
Cavalry squadron scout platoon, the ABCT combined arms battalion scout platoon
up-armored light-wheeled platforms provide greater stealth capabilities and limited
protection and mobility.
1-107. The following is a technique for scout platoons that have 3 Bradley fighting
vehicles, 5 light-wheeled platforms, and 36 personnel. (See figure 1-2.)
Figure 1-2. ABCT combined arms battalion scout platoon
1-20 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

SBCT SCOUT PLATOONS

1-108. The SBCT Cavalry squadron and Stryker Infantry battalion scout platoon has
one platoon leader, one PSG, and four squad leaders. As described above, for tactical
employment, all leaders employ as sections using the wingman concept. The SBCT
scout platoon has the following equipment in each platoon:
 Six Stryker vehicles.
 AN/TAS-8 LRAS3.
 Javelin command launch units.
1-109. The SBCT Cavalry squadron scout platoon capabilities include—

security in nonrestrictive terrain.
 Provide reconnaissance and security for SBCT operations.
 Maximizing the teaming of ground scouts to conduct close reconnaissance of
enemy forces.
 Fighting for information against light and motorized forces.
1-110. The SBCT Cavalry squadron scout platoon has limitations in its ability to
maneuver in complex terrain during inclement weather conditions.
1-111. The following is possible TASKORG for SBCT Cavalry squadron scout
platoons that have 6 vehicles and 36 personnel. Including the Stryker maneuver battalion
scout platoons. (See figure 1-3, page 1-22.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-21

Chapter 1
Figure 1-3. SBCT scout platoon
IBCT SCOUT PLATOONS

1-112. There are two types of scout platoons in the IBCT, platoons with vehicles for
each section and a dismounted platoon. The paragraphs below discuss both types of
scout platoons in the IBCT Cavalry troops.
IBCT CAVALRY SQUADRON MOUNTED TROOP

SCOUT PLATOON
1-113. The mounted IBCT scout platoon has one platoon leader, one PSG, and four
squad leaders. As described above, for tactical employment, all leaders employ as
sections using the wingman concept. The IBCT mounted scout platoon has the following
equipment in each platoon:
 Six up-armored, HMMWVs.
 AN/TAS-8 LRAS3.
1-22 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

 Javelin command launch units.

 M41 TOW improvised target acquisition system.
1-114. The IBCT mounted scout platoon has the following capabilities:
 Provides reconnaissance and security for IBCT operations.
 Possesses two mounted TOW systems.
 Possesses greater firepower, mobility, and protection than IBCT units.
 Fights for information against appropriate threat.
1-115. The IBCT mounted scout platoon has the following limitations:
 The up-armored HMMWV provides limited protection.
 The up-armored HMMWV’s added weight limits mobility, especially in
complex terrain.
 The mounted scout platoon has limited dismounts.
1-116. The following is possible TASKORG for the mounted scout platoons that have
6 vehicles and 24 personnel. (See figure 1-4, on page 1-24.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-23

Chapter 1
Figure 1-4. IBCT Cavalry squadron mounted scout platoon
IBCT CAVALRY SQUADRON DISMOUNTED TROOP

SCOUT PLATOON
1-117. The dismounted scout platoon is especially suited for conducting stealthy
reconnaissance. In any instance, the scheme of support will be the biggest hindrance on
successful mission accomplishment. Resupply of the dismounted troop may require
mounted troops or external assets to assist. 11B Infantry Soldiers compose the IBCT
dismounted troop scout platoon. They provide the dedicated dismounted capabilities of
reconnaissance and security missions for IBCT operations.
1-118. The IBCT dismounted scout platoon has the following capabilities:
 Operate centralized or decentralized as three independent squads.
 Conduct stealthy reconnaissance and security tasks.
security in complex, close, restrictive, and urban terrain.
 Conduct ground, water, and air insertion.
 Conduct multiple reconnaissance and security tasks (area, zone, route
reconnaissance) in complex terrain.
1-24 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

1-119. The IBCT dismounted scout platoon has the following limitations:
 Limited mounted capability, requiring augmentation of mobility platforms
for rapid movement.
 Depends on the use of stealth, cover, concealment, and their dismounted
patrolling skills to remain undetected.
 Limited direct-fire standoff, lethality, and survivability.
 Requires additional planning and employment time to reduce risk due to
limited protection.
 Equipment and supplies limited to only what the platoon can man-pack or
cache dismounted.
 Has digital tactical internet systems only in vehicles.
1-120. Figure 1-5, page 1-26, illustrates a possible TASKORG for scout platoons that
have 1 vehicle and 28 personnel.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-25

Chapter 1
Figure 1-5. IBCT Cavalry squadron dismounted scout platoon
INFANTRY BATTALION SCOUT PLATOON

1-121. The Infantry battalion scout platoon serves as the forward reconnaissance and
security element for the battalion commander. The primary mission of the scout platoon
is to conduct reconnaissance and security to answer CCIR, normally defined within the
battalion’s information collection plan. The platoon conducts route, zone, and area
reconnaissance tasks. The platoon can also conduct limited screening missions and can
1-26 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

participate as part of a larger force in guard tasks. The platoon has one officer and 21
enlisted personnel. The PSG assists and advises the platoon leader, and leads the platoon
in the platoon leader’s absence.
1-122. The scout platoon organizes into a platoon headquarters and three squads of six
men each. Each SQDLDR is responsible for controlling their squad’s movement and
information requirements. They report information collected that answers PIRs to the
scout platoon leader or battalion command post.
1-123. In either offensive or defensive operations, the commander may deploy scout
platoons to conduct screening operations of the battalion’s front, flank, or rear. The scout
platoon may also occupy outposts from which it can relay critical information to the
battalion command post concerning enemy composition, disposition, and activities.
1-124. The Infantry battalion scout platoon has the following capabilities:
 Provides all weather, continuous, accurate, and timely reconnaissance and
security in complex terrain.
 Conducts stealthy reconnaissance and security tasks.
 Assesses situations rapidly and directs combat power, reconnaissance, and
security capabilities to support answering CCIRs.
 Employs integrated and synchronized reconnaissance to detect threat
deception, decoys, and cover and concealment.
 Conducts insertion by ground, water, and air.
1-125. The Infantry battalion scout platoon has the following limitations:
 Limited dismounted capability if operating all eight of the platoon’s vehicles.
 Limited direct-fire standoff, lethality, and survivability.
 Dismounted tasks associated with zone, area, and route reconnaissance.
 Limited organic sustainment assets.
1-126. Figure 1-6, page 1-28, illustrates a possible TASKORG for IBCT Infantry
battalion scout platoons that have 8 vehicles and 21 personnel.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-27

Chapter 1
Figure 1-6. IBCT Infantry battalion scout platoon
1-28 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Chapter 2
Command and Control
Command and control is the exercise of authority and direction by

a properly designated commander over assigned and attached forces
in the accomplishment of the mission (JP 1). Command and control
is fundamental to the art and science of warfare.
Scout platoons apply command and control to develop the situation

in close contact with the enemy and civilian populations. The
application of TLP ensure clear and concise mission orders to
enable the exercise of disciplined initiative by subordinate elements
in execution. Effective command and control during reconnaissance
and security missions is essential to make effective decisions in an
uncertain environment.
BCT commanders require timely and accurate information from

scout platoons. The scout platoon is the most reliable all weather,
continuous organization BCT or battalion/squadron commanders
have to answer information requirements.
Contents
Page
SECTION I. Platoon Mission Command 2-1
SECTION II. Troop Leading Procedure 2-8
SECTION III. Planning Consideration 2-29
SECTION IV. Common Graphic Control Measures 2-33
SECTION V. Communication 2-37
SECTION I – PLATOON MISSION COMMAND

2-1. Mission command is the Army’s approach to command and control that
empowers subordinate decision making and decentralized execution appropriate to the
situation (ADP 6-0).
MISSION COMMAND PRINCIPLES

2-2. Scout platoon leaders lead consistent with mission command—
 Competence.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-1

Chapter 2
 Trust.
 Shared understanding.
 Commander’s intent.
 Mission orders.
 Initiative.
 Risk acceptance.
2-3. Tactically and technically competent commanders, subordinates, and teams are
the basis of effective mission command. Leaders within the scout platoon must be
technically competent at their jobs and those of their subordinates.
2-4. The scout platoons complex mission requirements require increased emphasis on
teamwork, which may require a longer and more deliberate team-building process than
other organizations. There needs to be mutual trust from the lowest ranked scout
throughout the platoon. Scouts often operate with limited communications and minimal
guidance stretched over remote distances during which scouts must develop certainty
from uncertain situations; developing information on enemy, terrain, and civilian
populations. The scout platoon mission requires commanders and platoon leaders to
develop trust to operate effectively. They develop this trust during after action reviews
and counseling sessions. Leaders need to sit with subordinates and highlight
expectations. Developing trust is consistent with candor. Leaders develop candor in
subordinates by listening and understanding subordinate point of views Subordinates
must speak out if they see a better solution or violation of doctrine or safety. If a leader
chooses a different approach or course of action (COA) subordinates feel all the facts
were present in decision making and trust leaders to execute successfully.
2-5. The platoon requires shared understanding of the mission, intent, and
commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance to accomplish the mission.
Understanding the mission two levels up and the mission of the supported unit allows
subordinates to focus on mission accomplishment without being dwelling on
unnecessary detail.
2-6. At the platoon level, it is essential for leaders to understand that troop
commander’s focus their orders on the commander’s intent, purpose of the operation,
and commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance, offering platoon leaders both
freedom of action as well as direction to allow subordinates to execute and accomplish
stated objectives.
2-7. The scout platoon leader, assisted by the PSG, uses TLP and mission orders to
prepare for missions, issue orders, and employ the platoon. Command and control allows
the scout platoon leader to emphasize timely decision making and clearly identify the
tasks for subordinates to execute to achieve the desired end state.
2-8. Scouts exercise initiative based on the commander’s intent and reconnaissance
and security guidance to make informed decisions on possible courses of action. As
conditions change, they apply their understanding of that guidance to execute disciplined
initiative to meet commander’s desired end state.
2-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-9. By understanding their own and subordinate capabilities and competence, coupled
with trust and understanding throughout the scout platoon, leaders can focus on the
commander’s intent. They conduct TLP and rapidly produce mission orders that allow
their subordinate’s initiative in providing clarity through reconnaissance and security
missions for supported commanders. They rely on all of the above listed elements to
accept risk in the unclear environment in which they operate.
IMPORTANCE OF COMMANDER’S INTENT

2-10. It is critical that the platoon leader and subordinate elements clearly understand
and execute missions within their commander’s intent. Commander’s intent describes
what constitutes success for the reconnaissance and security operation including the
operation’s purpose, key tasks, and the conditions that define the end state. It describes
the “what” for the scout platoon leader, allowing them to achieve desired results without
further orders. Commander’s intent must be simple, concise, and easily understood two
echelons lower in the chain of command to enable Soldier’s abilities to act quickly and
decisively in fluid and chaotic situations.
2-11. Maneuver battalion scout platoons may not receive commander’s reconnaissance
and security guidance as described in Cavalry doctrine. They often have to refine
commander’s intent into guidance for their subordinates to achieve success. The
components of commander’s intent are expanded purpose, key tasks, and end state.
COMMANDER’S RECONNAISSANCE AND SECURITY

GUIDANCE
2-12. Commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance is an essential component of
reconnaissance and security operations. Commanders must provide subordinate leaders
with clear guidance to operate with disciplined initiative on the battlefield that ultimately
achieves the higher commander’s intent (see FM 3-98 for more information.). Critical
to the platoon leader’s ability to execute the mission is a clear understanding of the
commander’s reconnaissance or security guidance, which is:
 Focus.
 Tempo.
 Engagement/disengagement criteria.
 Displacement criteria for the mission.
COMMANDER’S CRITICAL INFORMATION

REQUIREMENTS
2-13. The commander provides guidance and focus by defining operational priorities
and establishing decision points and CCIRs (ADP 2-0). A commander’s critical
information requirement is an information requirement identified by the commander as
being critical to facilitating timely decision making (JP 3-0). Commanders limit the
number of CCIRs to focus efforts for their elements conducting reconnaissance and
security as well as facilitate timely and accurate reporting. The two key elements are
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-3

Chapter 2
PIRs and friendly forces information requirements. (Refer to JP 3-0 and ADP 5-0 for
more information.) (See figure 2-1.)
Figure 2-1. CCIR and essential elements of friendly information
2-14. A CCIR directly influences decision making and usually tie directly to decision
points. A CCIR is—
 Specified by a commander for a specific operation.
 Applicable only to the commander who specifies it (or their subordinates
executing reconnaissance and security tasks in support of the commander).
 Situation dependent – directly linked to a current mission or decision that will
create a new mission, branch, or sequel to the current or future mission.
 Time-sensitive and therefore usually assigned a LTIOV.
2-15. Priority intelligence requirement is an intelligence requirement that the

commander and staff need to understand the threat or other aspects of the operational
environment (JP 2-01). PIR identifies the information about the enemy and the
operational environment that the commander considers most important. PIR becomes
the central focus for scout platoons conducting reconnaissance and security for a
commander.
2-16. The primary role of a scout platoon during reconnaissance is to collect
information, which enables the BCT or battalion commander and staff to analyze the
information that answer PIR.
2-17. PIR exist at echelon (division, brigade, battalion/squadron, and troop) to enable
timely decision making for the commander who requires the information about the
operational environment or enemy to make a decision. Scout platoons should not
develop their own PIR. Troop commanders develop limited, if any PIR, which must link
to decisions they expect to make. Instead, a scout platoon collects on an indicator or
specific information requirement that links through the information collection plan to
the PIR and decision point for the commander who assigned the PIR or can make the
decision linked to it.
2-18. Friendly force information requirement. A friendly force information
requirement is information the commander and staff need to understand the status of
2-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
friendly force and supporting capabilities (JP 3-0.). Friendly force information
requirements identify the information about mission, troops, and support available as
well as time available for friendly forces that the commander considers most important.
(See figure 2-1 on page 2-4.)
2-19. Essential elements of friendly information (EEFI). Commanders describe
information they want to protect as essential elements of friendly information. An
essential element of friendly information is a critical aspect of a friendly operation that,
if known by a threat would subsequently compromise, lead to failure, or limit success
of the operation and therefore should be protected from enemy detection (ADP 6-0).
Although EEFIs are not CCIRs, they have the same priority. EEFIs establish elements
of information to protect rather than ones to seek or collect. EEFI identification is central
to prioritizing units, information, or activities focusing security tasks.
INFORMATION COLLECTION
2-20. In most cases where commanders execute decision point tactics, staffs and
subordinate units will break a commander’s PIR into manageable pieces of quantifiable
information. (See figure 2-2, page 2-6.) The breakdown and organization of these
information requirements is a logical process that results in the information collection
plan.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-5

Chapter 2
Figure 2-2. Priority intelligence requirement breakdown
2-21. To this end, products of the intelligence preparation of the battlefield/battlespace

(IPB) (such as the enemy situational template, the event template, and the higher
commanders’ CCIR) are critically important to assisting the BCT in anticipating events
and adapting to changing situations. Scout platoons are by extension the eyes and ears
of the commander whom they enable. The squadron’s primary purpose is to collect
information, to answer PIR which enables the BCT commander and staff to analyze
information that answer PIR for the brigade commander and the battalion scout’s
primary purpose is to collect information that answers PIR for the battalion commander
while providing reaction time allowing commanders to make decisions.
2-22. PIRs break down into indicators, which are positive or negative evidence of threat
activity or any characteristic of the AO that points toward threat vulnerabilities, the
adoption or rejection by the threat of a particular activity, or which may influence the
friendly commander’s selection of a COA.
2-23. After developing PIRs into indicators, the staff and troop commanders will then
develop specific information requirements (SIR) associated with each indicator to
facilitate tasking by matching requirements to asset capability. SIR also provide specific
information about specific threat activity (or lack thereof) at specific locations. Cavalry
2-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
units should have access to all information requirements at the lowest level to enable
them to timely and accurately report thus helping develop the commander’s situational
understanding and facilitate timely decisions.
2-24. The following is an example of BCT information collection plan development.
The BCT commander wants to know “when will enemy artillery be in range of our main
body?” The PIR will drive the decision to transition phases of the operation. The BCT
staff will conduct an analysis of likely firing positions given the terrain, subsequent PIR,
indicators, and SIR for their respective AO resulting in the following PIR breakdown
that clearly links back to the BCT commander’s decision point and enables clear
understanding for the execution level to understand the purpose of the information they
are collecting as well as facilitate tasking by echelon:
 BCT Decision: Transition Phase of the operation.
 BCT PIR 1: When will enemy artillery be in range of our main body?
 Indicator 1.1: Is enemy reconnaissance present in the vicinity of NAI 3?
 Indicator 1.2: Is there enemy movement south of Phase Line Gowins?
 Indicator 1.3: Do the bridges at grid A and grid B support tracked vehicles?
2-25. The squadron refines the information collection plan from the BCT in support of
BCT commander’s PIR and decision by conducting an analysis of likely firing positions
given the terrain. They develop additional indicators and SIR, a staff process that
involves matching an indicator with the appropriate intelligence collection asset, for the
AO based on the squadron’s IPB:
 Squadron SIR 1.1.1: Bravo troop can be tasked to conduct area
reconnaissance of NAI 3 to confirm or deny presence of enemy
reconnaissance vehicles vicinity of NAI number 3.
 Indicator 1.2: Is there enemy movement south of Phase Line Gowins?
 Squadron 1.2.1: Charlie troop can be tasked to conduct area reconnaissance
of NAI 1 to confirm/deny presence of enemy vehicles vicinity of Phase Line
Gowins.
 Indicator 1.3: Do the bridges at grid A and grid B support tracked vehicles?
 Squadron Indicator 1.4: Are the routes trafficable into NAI 3?
 Squadron SIR 1.4.1 Alpha troop can be tasked to conduct route
reconnaissance and determine bridge load bearing capacity at grid A and
grid B.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-7

Chapter 2
2-26. Troops further refine and nest the information collection plan within their
respective AO, adding indicators if necessary and linking indicators for their platoons.
Once assigned against a collection asset the indicators become, SIR. Staff and leaders
should consider using the eight forms of contact as a clear way to describe how to detect
information requirements and match them to the appropriate asset. Anticipating enemy
contact allows the troop commander to create nested specified tasks to their platoon
leaders linking the supported commander’s decision points and associated PIR, to
indicators and SIR, with appropriate NAIs, and LTIOV. For example, Bravo troop may
refine squadron’s information plan into the following for its platoons:
 Troop SIR 1.1.1: Platoons can be tasked to conduct area reconnaissance of
NAI 3 to confirm or deny presence of enemy reconnaissance vehicles vicinity
of NAI number 3.
 Troop SIR 1.1.2: RAVEN can be tasked to conduct aerial area reconnaissance
of NAI 3 to confirm or deny presence of enemy reconnaissance vehicles.
 Troop Indicator 1.1.2: Are enemy observation posts in NAI 31?
 Troop SIR 1.1.2: Platoons can be tasked to conduct area reconnaissance of
NAI 31 to confirm or deny presence of enemy observation posts.
 Troop SIR 1.1.3: Attached low-level voice intercept team can be tasked to
conduct surveillance of NAI 31 for electronic signature.
2-27. The platoon leader receives the specified tasks and the information collection plan
in WARNORDs, OPORDs, or FRAGORDs. The platoon leader’s scheme of maneuver
focuses on executing tactical tasks to answer the tasked indicators.
SECTION II – TROOP LEADING PROCEDURES

2-28. TLP provide small-unit leaders a framework for planning and preparing for
operations (refer to FM 6-0 for more information). TLP begins when the leader receives
a mission and continues throughout the operations process (plan, prepare, execute and
assess). TLP are a sequence of actions that assist leaders in effectively and efficiently
using available time to issue orders and execute tactical operations.
2-29. TLP are the scout platoon leader’s most frequently used tool in mission
preparation. Parallel planning will aid the scout platoon in accomplishing its mission.
Even if the platoon leader does not have a complete plan, issuing guidance early allows
more time for rehearsals which are, essential to any successful operation, particularly in
the scout platoon. Scout sections and squads often operate dispersed and over extended
distances and the section and squad leaders require time to conduct their planning and
issue orders and guidance to their Soldiers. The eight steps in TLP are—
 Step 1. Receive the mission.
 Step 2. Issue a WARNORD.
 Step 3. Make a tentative plan.
2-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
 Step 4. Initiate movement.

 Step 5. Conduct reconnaissance.
 Step 6. Complete the plan.
 Step 7. Issue the order.
 Step 8. Supervise and refine.
2-30. Planning in the scout platoon is always a time-constrained event. Required to
develop the situation for their command, scouts understand they are executing their
mission shortly after the higher headquarters’ mission analysis, and the issuance of
WARNORD 2. Subsequently their own situation, specifically relating to enemy, terrain,
and civilian populations will be extremely unclear. Scouts at all levels train subordinates
in TLP and backwards planning.
2-31. All planning begins backwards planned from LTIOV. It may be useful for the
platoon leader to develop a detailed planning timeline and standardize it in an SOP to
help them manage their own time during the planning process.
2-32. When specialized elements (engineer, chemical, biological, radiological, and
nuclear [CBRN], explosive ordnance disposal, and so forth) attach to the Scout element,
these attachments should be included in the planning process as early as possible to
ensure that METT-TC considerations relevant to their mission sets are addressed. The
equipment and time requirements of attachments to execute their support tasks and the
additional terrain considerations of these operations may significantly impact the
mission planning of a scout operation.
2-33. Scout platoons plan geographically decentralized in many circumstances. The
scout platoon may be in a screen and have to plan the next reconnaissance mission while
executing security tasks. Often, time and distance will not permit gathering the entire
Platoon around a terrain board for an OPORD. Leaders must become adept at
overcoming the distance separating the scout platoon from other maneuver elements.
Possible solutions include:
 Practice the use of digital communication systems to distribute graphics and
orders.
 Require all leaders to monitor the troop frequency while the commander
issues the OPORD to the platoon leader.
 Require all personnel observe listening silence while orders are issued on the
frequency.
 Predetermine runners from platoon leader/PSG vehicle to communicate
complex information between vehicles.
 Designate personnel from each squad to prepare copies of analog graphics,
or personnel from platoon leader/PSG vehicles prepare for the section leader.
 Ensure everyone has standardized operating graphics, not just the platoon
leader before missions. Graphics include, at a minimum, boundaries, phase
lines, checkpoints, and NAIs or TAIs.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-9

Chapter 2
 Require section leader to move to the platoon leader’s location one or more
at a time to receive information not easily understood verbally or the platoon
leader moves to section leader to brief information.
 Standardize formats in the tactical SOP for conveying complex information
such as information requirements.
STEP 1– RECEIVE THE MISSION

2-34. The scout platoon leader receives their mission from the commander. It is the
platoon leader’s responsibility to have a complete understanding of the mission and the
commander’s intent including implied tasks not explicitly stated. The platoon leader
should ask questions when they are unsure, and develop requests for information to gain
as much information as possible. Requests for information may not be answered in a
timely manner or at all, and the platoon leader will operate off assumptions.
2-35. If the situation allows, the platoon leader should bring their PSG and section or
squad leader when they receive the mission from the commander. Multiple platoon
representatives at the briefing may save time and assist the understanding of subordinate
leaders without diluting information. At the receipt of the mission the platoon leader
must—
 Understand the enemy, friendly, and civilian situation.
 Understand the commander’s intent, tasks (key, specific, and implied), end
state, commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance and CCIRs.
 Understand the reconnaissance and security objective.
 Understand how the platoon plan fits into the higher headquarters’ plan.
 Know any attached assets and how to coordinate with them.
 Copy all common graphics available including graphic control measures,
scheme of maneuver, support, fires, information collection, air, enemy
situation. A member of the platoon leader’s crew should copy graphics so the
platoon leader has more time to understand and plan the mission.
 Copy planning and execution timeline. Pay close attention to critical times
specified by higher.
2-36. The platoon leader conducts a confirmation brief usually within 20 minutes of
receiving the order or as time demands, so the commander knows that the platoon leader
understands the mission, commander’s intent, CCIR, and the purpose of conducting the
mission. The commander may require a confirmation brief immediately following the
brief. Platoon leaders bring up shortfalls that they identified on their initial assessment
of the mission. If the platoon leader identifies a shortfall, they generate a possible
solution to present to the commander.
2-37. The confirmation brief will not hinder the issuance of the WARNORD to the
platoon. The PSG may issue the WARNORD if the platoon leader is conducting a
confirmation brief.
2-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-38. While the platoon leader receives the mission from the commanding officer, the
rest of the platoon executes tasks to prepare for the mission. Regardless of the platoon’s
mission, completing the tasks listed below allow increased planning time.
2-39. The PSG alerts the platoon that the platoon leader is receiving a mission, gathers
supply requests from subordinate leaders, and consolidates the green 2 report.
Additionally, they will create or update the battle roster, maintain accountability of
weapons and equipment, create or update the master arms list and supervise the cross
loading of supplies.
2-40. Section/squad/team leaders consolidate supply requests, perform PCCs of
equipment, submit the green 2 report, improve camouflage, and supervise equipment
maintenance. Additionally, rehearsing battle drills or tasks from the platoon or troop
SOP that generally do not change and are common to all operations like CASEVAC and
react to indirect fire. The time for rehearsals during the rest of the planning process will
generally center on actions on the objective and critical points in the operation or the
entire operation itself.
2-41. Dismounts and drivers conduct before or during preventive maintenance checks
and services (PMCS) of individual equipment and vehicles, improve individual,
equipment, and vehicle camouflage, inventory all equipment and class I and inform their
leader when complete.
STEP 2 – ISSUE A WARNING ORDER

2-42. The platoon leader with the help of the PSG finishes their initial assessment of
the situation and available time. They do not wait for more information, and issue the
best and most detailed WARNORD possible. A WARNORD is a preliminary notice of
an order or action that is to follow. The more time subordinates have to prepare and
conduct rehearsals, the better. The platoon leader will issue additional WARNORDs as
more information becomes available or the situation changes.
2-43. The platoon leader conducts more analysis of the WARNORD received from the
troop commander prior to issuing to the platoon. For example, the timeline the platoon
leader received may include details for the troop, but not adequately address times for
section rehearsals. The timeline they received for execution may only state, “execute
mission” and “mission complete” and may not include LTIOV for indicators or PIR.
The execution timeline may change slightly during TLP, both the platoon leader and
PSG understand the platoon’s capabilities and limitations and apply sound judgement to
estimate the time required. Use of a platoon standardized timeline format will aid scouts
in planning and execution.
2-44. The platoon leader will issue the first WARNORD usually within 30 minutes of
the completion of receiving the mission, or as time demands. The minimum
requirements for a WARNORD are—
 I. Situation.
 Area of interest.
 AO.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-11

Chapter 2
 Enemy forces.
 Friendly forces.
 Interagency, intergovernmental, and nongovernmental organizations.
 Civil considerations.
 Attachments and detachments.
 II. Mission.
 III. Execution.
 Initial commander’s intent.
 Concept of operations.
 Tasks to subordinate units.
 Coordinating instructions.
 IV. Sustainment.
 V. Command Signal.
Additional things that a scout platoon leader adds to a WARNORD are—
-- Directed changes to TASKORG.
-- Key tasks and end state.
-- Restated mission statement (if analysis was not done at troop level,
restated mission must be approved by troop commander).
-- Specified tasks to subordinates.
-- Commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance.
-- CCIRs.
-- A copy of all common graphics available including graphic control
measures, scheme of maneuver, support, fires, information collection,
air, enemy situation.
-- Specific tasks and rehearsals and who is responsible for their
completion.
-- Refined platoon timeline.
-- Time and place of the OPORD.
2-45. It is helpful to have a member of each squad designated to copy graphics allowing
leaders more time to plan. The platoon leader issues additional WARNORDs as more
information becomes available.
STEP 3 – MAKE A TENTATIVE PLAN

2-46. The platoon leader performs mission analysis to gain a better understanding of
the situation. Every attempt should be made to obtain any analysis done by higher
headquarters and staff before the platoon leader starts their own analysis. Regardless of
having higher level products, the platoon leader begins mission analysis. They use the
mission variables of METT-TC. No other useful planning concerning execution
precedes without conducting mission analysis.
2-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-47. Always complete mission analysis prior to the scheme of maneuver. Subordinates
cannot make simple, flexible plans against a thinking enemy if they do not understand
what the enemy is doing. Also, all analysis is subject to change with time, and as more
intelligence becomes available. Terrain and enemy analysis is constantly updated before,
during, and after operations.
2-48. METT-TC is a way to help scouts understand the aspects of the mission and how
this affects operations. It may help to think of METT-TC as a synchronized (sync) matrix
throughout operations. Sync matrixes (see table 2-1) help the leader understand they must
accomplish their mission in time, and with proper terrain analysis, and space.
Table 2-1. Example hasty sync matrix
Time 0900 0930 1000 1030 1100 1130 1200 1230 1300
Consolidate vicinity
Enemy Attack on city court house Withdrawal
Hill 431
Medical services in
Civilians Running in all directions from court house
AO
The Higher
Headquarters’ Phase II: Defense of AO Strike
Mission
Phase III: Area Security of City Court Phase IV: Area
Platoon Mission
House Reconnaissance of Hill 431
Attachments/2x En route Provincial Hill
Return to BSA
AH-64 from BSA Center 431
Legend: AO – area of operation, BSA – brigade support area
2-49. METT-TC analysis does not need to be in a particular order. The order follows
the preference of the leader and the experience they have analyzing a mission. Some
leaders may evaluate in the order of terrain and weather, enemy, civil considerations,
time, mission and finally troops and support available. For the sake of simplicity, we
will explore each section in the order of the standard acronym, METT-TC.
MISSION
2-50. Scouts must understand the mission and commander’s intent, reconnaissance and
security guidance, and the CCIR. Scouts are responsible for collecting information about
all aspects of CCIR from the decision point to the indicators. The relevant information
reported from the scout on the ground and analyzed by leaders will help drive the higher
commander’s decision making process and aid in exercising economy of force by
positioning follow-on forces where they are needed. Leaders at all levels understand
how their plan nests with the higher headquarters and what information higher
headquarters needs to aid the commander in making an informed decision.
Understanding what indicators link to commanders’ decisions aids subordinate leaders
in taking disciplined initiative. It is impossible to predict the outcome of every
engagement. However, an understanding of what the higher commander needs to know,
and why, will aid leaders in adapting the current plan to meet the requirements of the
commander.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-13

Chapter 2
2-51. A way to help analyze the mission is to answer and understand questions and
information such as the following:
 What is the higher headquarters’ mission, intent, end state, and CCIR two
levels up?
 What is my unit’s purpose?
 What have I been told to do, and why?
 What tasks did the commander say must be accomplished (specified tasks)?
 What other tasks must I accomplish to conduct the mission (implied tasks)?
 Based on the commander’s intent, which of my tasks are absolutely essential?
 How does my commander’s reconnaissance and security guidance fit into the
higher headquarters’ plan?
 What is the composition and disposition of the enemy we are expected to
encounter?
2-52. Scout platoons face an elusive, diverse, flexible, and adaptive enemy. The enemy
combines a wide array of lethal and nonlethal weapons, including modern peer,
near-peer, hybrid threats, and improvised systems presenting a complex enemy
situation. Because these wide ranging capabilities, the platoon must consider each form
of contact that the enemy may use because of these wide ranging capabilities. The forms
of contact to consider are—
 Direct fire.
 Indirect fire.
 Nonhostile civilian contact.
 Obstacles.
 CBRN.
 Aerial.
 Visual.
 EW.
ENEMY
2-53. All analysis of the enemy must consider the terrain where they are operating.
Because of the constrained time the scout platoon is always under, the enemy situation
may be unclear, or partially depicted. It is likely that the platoon leader will receive an
enemy situation template with symbols representing entire platoons.
2-54. The platoon leader must understand the enemy’s objective, and depict the enemy
in their AO down to the squad and team level. Breaking the enemy two levels down
gives their subordinate leaders a better understanding of enemy capabilities and how to
address these capabilities in the friendly plan. Successful enemy analysis allows the
platoon leader to visualize when and where to anticipate contact and the form of contact
to expect. This allows the scout platoon leader to create a friendly plan that synchronizes
assets at the time and place of expected contact.
2-14 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-55. The platoon leader may try to answer some questions during their analysis to help
understand the threat. Questions may include—
 What is the composition, disposition, and strength of the enemy force?
 What are the capabilities of their weapon and surveillance systems?
 Where are their kill zones?
 What is the enemy trying to do (defend, reinforce, attack, withdraw, or
delay)?
 What will they do in response to friendly actions?
2-56. The troop commander or staff may provide products and information on the
enemy. Leaders must be flexible with enemy estimates and adjust to what they are facing
especially if it differs from what they predicted. The platoon leader tries to answer or
understand the following and articulate their findings to subordinates—
 Enemy’s composition, disposition, and strength.
 Enemy’s objectives one and two levels up.
 Enemy’s weapon systems and optics capabilities.
 Enemy equipment (uniform color/pattern, equipment carried on their person).
 Vehicle composition, vehicle appearance, configuration and formations (how
many are there? If I see one, how far away are the others?).
 Enemy activity in relation to their mission.
 Historical and doctrinal reference of how the enemy fights.
 Recent experience with how the enemy fights.
 Order of battle.
 Forms of contact the enemy prefers to gain contact with the platoon and forms
of contact the enemy may avoid.
 Enemy’s engagement, disengagement, and displace criteria.
2-57. Understanding the above information will aid the platoon leader with planning
and preparing for anticipated threats. Failing to understand the enemy or shortchanging
the enemy in the assessment generally leads to failure.
2-58. The platoon leader receives a most likely COA and a most dangerous COA from
the troop commander. Some circumstances and time constraints may warrant only
receiving a most likely COA and planning based on that. The troop commander specifies
when this circumstance is happening and informs the platoon leader. In all other cases,
the platoon leader plans off the most likely COA and most dangerous COA.
2-59. Generally, the enemy COAs the platoon leader receives is unit symbols that are
platoon- or section-sized elements like the image below. It is platoon leaders’
responsibilities to take the information they gain and refine the enemy COAs down to
squad and team levels. It may help to depict sectors of fire and limits of weapon systems
for all anticipated forms of contact to aid themselves and subordinate leaders in
understanding the threat and planning against it. (See figure 2-3, page 2-16.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-15

Chapter 2
Figure 2-3. Enemy course of action
TERRAIN AND WEATHER

2-60. Leaders must thoroughly know and understand the terrain and weather in their
AO. Overlooking minute details or false assumptions during planning on seemingly
unpassable terrain or effects of weather involving streams, fords, and narrow defiles
have historically lead to disaster. Inadequate reconnaissance and security involving
terrain is often categorized by surprise, confusion, and routes of maneuver and support
elements.
Terrain
2-61. Leaders consider how the terrain will affect the enemy and friendly mission.
Scouts conduct terrain analysis using observation and fields of fire, avenues of approach,
key terrain, obstacles, and cover and concealment (OAKOC). In general, terrain and
weather do not favor one side over the other unless one is better prepared to operate in
the environment or is more familiar with it. The terrain however, may favor defending
or attacking forces. Analysis of terrain answers the question: What is the terrain’s effect
on the operation?
2-16 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-62. While OAKOC is an easily remembered acronym to use for analysis, the results
are briefed in an order based on local guidance. Another way of thinking about it is that
obstacles indicate avenues of approach dominated by key terrain dictating observation
and fields of fire and defining cover and concealment.
2-63. An obstacle is any natural or scout-made obstruction designed or employed to
disrupt, fix, turn, or block the movement of an opposing force, and to impose additional
losses in personnel, time, and equipment on the opposing force. It is important to take
into account obstacle effects. For example, rubble and debris in a street may halt wheeled
vehicle movement, but only slow a dismounted force. Understand obstacles from the
friendly and enemy perspective to be successful.
2-64. Avenues of approach are air or ground routes used by an attacking force leading
to its objective or to key terrain in its path. The identification of avenues of approach is
important because all COAs that involve maneuver depend on available avenues of
approach. Mobility corridors are those areas relatively free of obstacles where a force
will be canalized due to terrain restrictions allowing military forces to capitalize on the
principles of mass and speed (refer to ATP 2-01.3 for more information). Identifying
mobility corridors requires some knowledge of friendly and enemy forces and their
preferred tactics. The best mobility corridors use unrestricted terrain that provided
enough space for a force to move in its preferred doctrinal formations while avoiding
major obstacles.
2-65. Avenues of approach consist of a series of mobility corridors through which a
maneuvering force must pass to reach its objective. (See table 2-2.) Avenues of approach
must provide ease of movement and enough width for dispersion of a force large enough
to significantly affect the outcome of the operation. Classify mobility corridors based on
the distance between the terrain features that form the corridor. Mobility corridor ranges
are not absolute but reflect the relative and approximate distance between terrain
features.
2-66. Prioritize avenues of approach based on how well each supports the ability to
meet the desired result in a timely and efficient manner. Evaluate avenues of approach
for suitability in terms of—
 Access to key terrain and adjacent avenues.
 Degree of canalization and ease of movement.
 Sustainability (line of communications support).
 Access to the objective.
Table 2-2. Avenue of approach to mobility corridor comparison examples

Avenue of Approach Cross-country Mobility Approximate Distance Between
Corridor Classification Terrain Features (in kilometers)
Division Brigade/Regiment 10
Brigade/Regiment Brigade/Regiment 6
Battalion Company 2
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-17

Chapter 2
2-67. Key terrain is an identifiable characteristic whose seizure or retention affords a

marked advantage to either combatant (ADP 3-90). In natural terrain dominated by
restrictive terrain features, high ground can be key terrain because it dominates an area
with good observation and fields of fire. In an open or arid environment, a draw or wadi
can be key terrain because it offers good cover and concealment. In urban environments,
infrastructure (such as bridges, medical facilities, choke points, intersections, industrial
complexes, and economic, social, and government institutions) may be key terrain.
2-68. Evaluate key terrain by assessing the impact of controlling it for either force.
Observation is the condition of weather and terrain that permits a force to see friendly,
enemy, and neutral personnel, systems, and key aspects of the operational environment.
Commanders evaluate their observation capabilities for electronic and optical
line-of-sight surveillance systems, as well as for unaided visual observation. The highest
terrain normally provides the best observation. In natural terrain, there are limitations
on observation caused by relative, localized, and often subtle variations in terrain
elevations. These limitations are IV lines. IV is the condition of being able to see one
point from the other.
2-69. Anticipate limitations in observation by adverse weather, dusk, and smoke. In
urban terrain, observation is primarily limited by man-made structures, as well as the
activity and debris associated with human activity. Analyzing observation and fields of
fire in urban terrain is more complicated than it is for natural terrain.
2-70. Fields of fire is observation limited to a specific linear distance based on weapons
systems capabilities. A unit’s field of fire is directly related to its ability to observe.
Evaluation of observation and fields of fire identifies—
 Potential engagement areas.
 Defensible terrain.
 Specific equipment or equipment positions.
 Areas where forces are most vulnerable to observation and fires.
 Identification of visual dead space.
2-71. Analysis of fields of fire includes an evaluation of all direct and indirect fire
weapons systems in a command’s inventory. An ideal field of fire for a direct fire
weapon is an open area in which the enemy can be seen and on which the enemy has no
protection out to the maximum effective range of that weapon. An ideal field of fire for
an indirect fire weapons system is a target area that provides no protection from the
system’s munitions. Terrain that offers good observation and fields of fire generally
favors defensive COAs.
2-72. Cover is the physical protection from bullets, fragments of exploding rounds,
flame, nuclear effects, and biological and chemical agents. Cover and concealment is
available by ditches, caves, riverbanks, folds in the ground, shell craters, buildings,
walls, and embankments. Cover does not necessarily provide concealment. An example
of cover without concealment is a bunker in plain sight that is intended for the protection
of personnel.
2-18 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-73. Concealment is protection from observation or surveillance. It degrades the

enemy’s ability to observe forces, equipment, or position. Concealment is available in
tall grass, trees, underbrush, cultivated vegetation, weather conditions (such as snow,
fog, or rain), as well as man-made camouflage. Concealment does not necessarily
provide cover.
2-74. A line-of-sight analysis determines the observation, fields of fire, and cover and
concealment that the terrain provides to both the friendly and enemy or adversary forces.
Figure 2-4 shows the masked area that lies behind terrain that is level with or higher than
the defensive position. Scouts cannot see or fire direct weapons into the masked area as
there is no observation or fields of fire behind terrain masking. The masked area provides
the attacker cover from the defender’s direct fire and concealment from the defender’s
observations. If the enemy or adversary has done proper analysis, then they would select
one or more of the approach routes.
Figure 2-4. Line of sight analysis
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-19

Chapter 2
2-75. Time permitting a thorough analysis leads to greater terrain appreciation. The
table below provides a quick reference matrix for analyzing terrain, it is a way to help
leaders understand OAKOC (see table 2-3).
Table 2-3. Example observation and fields of fire, avenues of approach, key
terrain, obstacles, and cover and concealment matrix
Location and affects. Who it favors.
Observation and Scouts crest in the mountains provides Friendly
Fields of Fire excellent observation of the valley.
Avenues of Terrain allows concealed route of travel Friendly
Approach from NAI 003 to NAI 004
Key and Decisive Hilltops that separate NAIs 003 and 004. Friendly
Terrain This is key because it overwatches the
RTE and the backside of the mountain.
Obstacles Suspected enemy explosives on the RTE, Enemy
C section is tasked to locate and report.
Rocky and vegetated terrain means
vehicle movement will be hindered; deploy
dismounts to guide vehicles.
Cover and Mountainous terrain and vegetation Neither
Concealment provides excellent survivability.
Legend: NAI – named area of interest, RTE – route
2-76. Leaders may receive a modified combined obstacle overlay (MCOO) from higher
headquarters to help them understand the terrain. Cavalry leaders must understand that
the MCOO was done in a time-constrained environment and should apply their own
analysis to determine and refine how terrain and weather uniquely affect the enemy and
their mission in their AO.
2-77. An MCOO is a graphic product that portrays the effects of natural and urban
terrain on military operations. The MCOO normally depicts military significant aspects
of the terrain and other aspects of the terrain that can affect mobility. Though not all
inclusive, some of these aspects are—
 Avenues of approach.
 Mobility corridors.
 Natural and man-made obstacles.
 Terrain mobility classifications.
 Key terrain.
2-78. The MCOO provides a basis for identifying ground avenues of approach and
mobility corridors. Unlike the cross-country mobility, the combined obstacle overlay
integrates all obstacles to vehicular movement, such as built-up areas, slope, soils,
vegetation, and hydrology into one overlay. The overlay depicts areas that impede
movement (severely restricted and restricted areas) and areas where friendly and enemy
forces can move unimpeded (unrestricted areas).
2-20 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-79. The end result of producing an MCOO, either detailed or simplified, is that scout
platoon leaders understand the terrain in which they are operating. Doing the MCOO
may also help them understand limits in line of sight communications systems. Figure
2-5 is an example of an MCOO.
Figure 2-5. Modified combined obstacles overlay, example
2-80. An MCOO is simply a way to help leaders understand their AO. During planning
platoon leaders need to evaluate the terrain using the five elements of military terrain
analysis (OAKOC). During security tasks, they evaluate the enemy’s capability to
maneuver and during reconnaissance tasks, they consider friendly vehicle capabilities.
2-81. Scouts always confirm or deny assumptions made by higher headquarters, in this
case terrain. Terrain that squadron or BCT staffs determine to be impassable needs to be
verified as such, even if scouts must dismount and slowly maneuver a single vehicle
through a pass with a ground guide. If the enemy can only move wheeled versus tracked
vehicles through unsecured terrain to a position of advantage they will, if it enables them
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-21

Chapter 2
to maneuver against friendly reconnaissance. They must confirm or deny the

commander’s assumptions and quickly and accurately report their findings.
2-82. The platoon leader must ensure they determine the relation and importance of
their terrain and weather analysis and which forces it favors. For example, stating the
fact there is a stream in the AO does not help anybody. But saying there is a stream that
friendly forces cannot cross and will force the use of existing bridges that the enemy
will overwatch helps subordinates understand actions they will have to take when
crossing a danger area.
Weather
2-83. The five military aspects of weather are visibility, winds, precipitation, cloud
cover, temperature and humidity. Like terrain, it is important to determine how weather
affects the mission. Thoroughly understanding weather impacts are vital. Simply stating
it will be windy will not suffice. Explaining the wind direction and effects on smoke
targets, the use of aviation or UAS, dust trails or smell helps subordinates understand
why the analysis matters. Additionally, the map cannot show that it is raining, but will
give indicators of which creeks may flood and become difficult to cross. A general
understanding of weather patterns before deployment into an area will aid leaders in
planning and understanding time requirements during operations. Table 2-4 is a way to
help leaders understand the effects of weather on their operation.
Table 2-4. Example effects of weather matrix
Data Effects and who it favors
Visibility 10 miles. Neither.
Wind Blowing from north to Defender: Wind will carry
south at four miles per dust signatures and sound
hour. towards the enemy.
Precipitation 10 percent chance of rain. Defender: Track vehicle
maneuverability.
Cloud Cover No cloud cover. Neither.
Temperature 10 to 37 degrees F Defender: Effects on
thermal systems.
Humidity N/A N/A
Light Data
Solar/Lunar Data BMNT Sun Moon Sun EENT Moon
0657 Rise Rise Set 2042 Set
0749 0729 1949 1909
Who it favors Defenders: Zero percent illumination will make
dismounted movement slower and Soldiers will make
more noise because it is difficult to see.
Legend: BMNT – begin morning nautical twilight, EENT – end of evening nautical
twilight, F – Fahrenheit, N/A – not applicable
2-22 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
TROOPS AND SUPPORT AVAILABLE

2-84. Leaders study their TASKORG to determine the number, type, capabilities, and
condition of available friendly troops and other support. They must understand the
impact on the mission of troops and available support. For instance, a squad that
conducted drown proof training and has several strong swimmers may be best suited for
water operations. A very claustrophobic squad leader may not be the best choice for
subterranean task. Arrange gunnery skills to anticipated enemy engagements. Leaders
consider the following to help them understand the troops and support available:
 Determine the strengths and weaknesses of subordinate leaders. Consider the
supply status of ammunition, water, fuel, and other necessary items.
 Assess the present physical condition of Soldiers (morale, sleep).
 Evaluate the condition of equipment.
 Determine the unit’s training status and experience relative to the mission.
 Gauge additional Soldiers or augmenting units.
 Measure required additional assets to accomplish the mission.
2-85. Understanding the platoon’s troops will help focus efforts on actual mission
accomplishment tasks. The situation may warrant a long duration observation post while
the unit may not rehearse or plan for this in the past. Identifying impacts early will aid
in prioritizing rehearsals and possibly gathering and requesting additional materials and
resources early in the planning process. Identifying facts early and developing possible
solutions will ease the planning process during time constrained planning.
TIME
2-86. As addressed in the first step of TLP, time analysis is a critical aspect to planning,
preparation, and execution. Time analysis is often the first thing a leader does. Nest all
time analysis conducted in a Cavalry organization with the higher headquarters timeline,
and backwards plan from LTIOV.
2-87. The leader must not only appreciate how much time is available, but they also
appreciate the time and space aspects of preparing, moving, fighting, and sustaining.
They must see their own tasks and enemy actions in relation to time. Most importantly,
as events occur, they must adjust the time available and assess its impact on what they
must accomplish. Finally, they must update previous timelines for their subordinates,
listing all events that affect higher headquarters, the organization, and its subordinate
elements which may help to answer a few questions concerning time:
 How does my mission fit into the higher headquarters?
 What times did my commander tell me to be accomplished with tasks?
 How long will each reconnaissance mission take?
 What critical times do I have to meet to facilitate the higher headquarters’
CCIR?
 What is the enemy’s timeline?
 When is the LTIOV for my reconnaissance and security objective?
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-23

Chapter 2
 How long will it take for me to move from my current location to being set
on the line of departure (LD)?
 How long will I allow myself to plan to facilitate maximum time for
rehearsals?
2-88. As stated before, plan and execute all reconnaissance and security in a time
constrained environment. It can be beneficial to have a member of the platoon leader’s
crew to keep track of the platoon’s own timelines and provide warnings before tasks go
over time. For example, if the platoon leader planned for 15 minutes to do terrain
analysis, the designated scout will remind the platoon leader of the set time constraint
to ensure the platoon stays on timeline. Creating a simple, flexible plan and rehearsal
early is far better than a perfect plan with no time for rehearsals.
2-89. While the platoon leader is conducting mission analysis, the rest of the platoon
can execute tasks to prepare for the mission. The PSG can submit the supply requests
and green 2. The PSG will also enforce the security and rest plans.
2-90. Section/squad/team leaders are following the timeline issued in the WARNORD.
They can also correct deficiencies found during their PCC. The section leader also needs
to be prepared to assist the platoon leader with planning the scheme of maneuver.
2-91. Dismounts and drivers follow the timeline issued in the WARNORD, fix issues
identified during the PCC and complete the PMCS of their equipment and vehicles. They
also complete their individual, equipment, and vehicle camouflage.
2-92. Once mission analysis is complete, the platoon leader can move to developing
the scheme of maneuver. The platoon leader must not forget why they are executing the
mission. It is easy to be sidetracked after focusing on terrain and enemy analysis. Before
developing the scheme of maneuver, review the commander’s intent, commander’s
reconnaissance and security guidance, mission statement, higher echelon scheme of
fires, and all specified tasks and associated indictors. The platoon’s scheme of maneuver
must address the terrain, enemy, and all friendly requirements by clearly describing task,
purpose, location, and effect to subordinate elements in time and space.
2-93. If the platoon is given priority of fires for mortars, artillery, or close air support
(CAS), the platoon leader must develop a fires plan simultaneously with the scheme of
maneuver by developing execution times and controls for preplanned targets along the
route. Some examples of preplanned targets are high-speed avenues of approach along
the lead friendly element’s flanks, NAIs, and possible enemy observation posts that can
observe the route. While developing the fires plan, the platoon leader can answer the
correct questions:
 Who will observe the targets?
 Where will the primary observers be at that time?
 Who will be alternate observers?
 Where will the element firing on that target (mortars, artillery, CAS) be, to
enabling them to support firing on that target?
2-24 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-94. It is acceptable to have section leaders plan their own scheme of maneuver to
maximize their experience and give them more confidence and understanding with the
plan. The section leaders must graphically depict their plan for the scout platoon leader.
CIVIL CONSIDERATIONS
2-95. Civil considerations include the influences of scout-made infrastructure; civilian
institutions; and the attitudes and activities of civilian leaders, populations, and
organizations within an AO, with regard to the conduct of military operations. Civil
considerations generally focus on the immediate impact of civilians on operations in
progress. The civil considerations can either help or hinder friendly or enemy forces; the
difference lies in which leader has taken time to learn the situation and its possible
effects on the operation. Analysis of civil considerations answers three critical questions:
 How do civilian considerations affect the operation?
 How does the operation affect the civilians?
 How do our forces build national will in our AO?
2-96. The higher headquarters provides the leader with civil considerations that may
affect the next echelon’s mission. A way that higher headquarters may analyze the civil
considerations is cross-walking areas, structures, capabilities, organizations, people, and
events with political, military, economic, social, information, and infrastructure. See ATP
2-01.3 for more information.
2-97. If the platoon leader gets the opportunity to see this information, they must remain
focused. They must understand what specifically they are looking for as it pertains to
their mission to maximize time in their analysis and planning.
2-98. Civil considerations may help drive decisions like a displaced persons plan, how
long it will be safe to conduct society-focused reconnaissance in an area, and where to
focus reconnaissance and security operations during stability tasks. Regardless of the
mission, the scout platoon leader must have a general understanding of the civilian
population in their AO.
STEP 4 – INITIATE MOVEMENT

2-99. Leaders initiate any movement necessary to continue mission preparation or to
posture the unit for the start of the mission. Leaders may execute this step at any time
throughout the sequence of TLP. It can include movement to an assembly area, battle
position (BP), or new AO, or the movement of guides or quartering parties.
2-100. If the platoon is to initiate some kind of movement during the planning process,
the initial timeline issued during the WARNORD must reflect it. It may be beneficial to
have the PSG control any movement during the planning process so the platoon leader
has more time to plan. Section leaders can assist in planning the movement as well.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-25

Chapter 2
STEP 5 – CONDUCT RECONNAISSANCE

2-101. The conduct reconnaissance step of TLP allows the platoon leader to confirm
the validity of their tentative plan. They should at least confirm their initial march route
to the LD or start point (SP) and check initial positions. If possible, they should also
check some of the area beyond the LD, taking their section leaders with them so they
too can see the ground. If the platoon leader cannot go personally, they should task their
subordinates to accomplish specific reconnaissance requirements to most efficiently use
the available time. An example of this is tasking a squad leader to reconnoiter and verify
route time to the SP. The platoon leader must conduct the reconnaissance with an open
mind; not everything they see will match their tentative plan. They must be flexible
enough to change and competent enough to work out new plans swiftly. The platoon
leader must ensure that all reconnaissance is authorized by their higher headquarters.
2-102. The platoon leader should know all tools are at their disposal. It may be possible
to task the troop Raven to look at routes and verify suspected enemy positions. If the
platoon leader wants to use the Raven, they must produce a scheme of air overlay and
have a way to explain to the Raven operator what they are looking for. Depicted below
in an example of a way to communicate what they wants a UAS operator to look at and
report on. (See table 2-5 and figure 2-6.)
Table 2-5. Example scheme of air matrix
Location What to look for. (Mark all findings on the provided overlay)
ACP 1 to ACP 2 Orient on RTE Yellow. Look for any obstacles that would impede the
movement of a Stryker, and attempt to determine if routes Diane and
Boyd are wide enough for a Stryker.
ACP 2 to ACP 3 Orient on Route Gold and identify the tallest buildings and mark them
on the GRG.
Identify buildings that appear to be abandoned and mark them on the
GRG.
ACP 3 to ACP 1 Orient on NAI 12 and look for indications of tracked BMP occupying
battle positions. Look vicinity CP 12 for dismounted personnel armed
with rifles and RPGs.
Legend: ACP – airspace control point, BMP – Russian amphibious tracked infantry fighting
vehicle, CP – checkpoint, GRG – gridded reference graphic, NAI – named area of interest,
RPG – rocket propelled grenade, RTE – route
2-26 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
Figure 2-6. Scheme of air control measures
2-103. During stability operations, another tool may be base defense surveillance
systems. These systems often have very powerful color and thermal gimbaled cameras
that can observe over long distances. Collocating with the operator and asking them to
look at certain areas can give the leader a better idea of what to expect during movement
or how they will handle actions on the objective.
STEP 6 – COMPLETE THE PLAN

2-104. Subordinates should complete a terrain model for the OPORD. It is helpful to
have a member of the platoon leaders crew make the terrain model as they will usually
be near the platoon leader and able to obtain copies of new graphics or changes and
quickly adapt them to the terrain model.
2-105. Complete all graphics; at a minimum, each vehicle commander will have a copy
of all common operating graphics. The distribution of graphics to the vehicle level will
help ensure complete understanding during the OPORD. It helps to have Soldiers with
neat hand writing produce analog copies of the graphics to save time.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-27

Chapter 2
2-106. The platoon leader conducts their backbrief to the commander prior to issuing
the platoon OPORD. They will describe how they intend to accomplish the mission and
how their plan nests with the higher headquarters’. The platoon leader will bring a copy
of all graphics they produce and give them to the commander. The PSG will conduct a
backbrief with the 1SG to ensure the scheme of support and sustainment is feasible and
nests with target reference points (TRP) plan.
STEP 7 – ISSUE THE ORDER

2-107. The OPORD precisely and concisely explains both the leader’s intent and
concept of how they envision the unit accomplishing the mission. The order does not
contain unnecessary information. Deliver the OPORD quickly and in a manner that
allows subordinates to concentrate on understanding the leader’s vision and not just
copying what they say verbatim. The leader must prepare adequately and deliver the
OPORD confidently and quickly to build and sustain confidence in their subordinates.
2-108. When the leader finishes issuing the order, subordinate leaders should leave
with a clear understanding of what the platoon leader expects their elements to do. All
leaders are responsible for ensuring that their subordinates understand.
2-109. Complete the order with a confirmation brief. At a minimum, each subordinate
leader should backbrief the unit mission and intent and how it nests with the higher
headquarters’, their own task(s) and purpose, commanders reconnaissance and security
guidance, and information requirements broken down to indicators with a time attached.
The confirmation brief also provides an opportunity to highlight any issues or concerns.
2-110. If addressing something discussed during previous WARNORDs during the
OPORD, it is adequate to say no change. However, it may be beneficial to spot check a
few subordinates understanding of information briefed as, no change. If the subordinates
do not understand the information, clarify it to the group. The correct way to brief the
OPORD is the one that conveys the information the subordinates need to know to
accomplish the mission and understand how their mission nests with the higher
headquarters’.
2-111. All members of the platoon should be present for the OPORD. Some
circumstances may warrant not all members of the platoon present for the OPORD.
When this is the case, the platoon leader should, at a minimum, brief their PSG, section,
and squad leaders. Allot additional time for them to then brief their subordinates.
STEP 8 – SUPERVISE AND REFINE

2-112. The platoon leader and PSG make sure all crewmembers receive briefs from
their vehicle commanders or team leaders and understand the mission and concept of
the operation. Team briefings and rehearsals are essential to a successful operation. The
platoon leader makes sure the entire platoon conducts PCC and procedures according to
the SOP.
2-28 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
2-113. The platoon leader and PSG should observe each crew during PCC if possible,
if it was not completed during the planning process. The platoon leader or PSG are
responsible for conducting PCI after the PCC is complete and before execution.
2-114. Rehearsals are practice sessions conducted to prepare units for an upcoming
operation or event. They are essential in ensuring thorough preparation, coordination,
and understanding of the commander’s plan and intent. Leaders should never
underestimate the value of rehearsals. Leaders can change the type of rehearsal to fit the
mission and time available. They may use map rehearsals, live rehearsals, and radio
rehearsals to ensure that all elements of the plan are understood. Leaders use
well-planned, efficiently run rehearsals to accomplish the following:
 Reinforce training and increase proficiency in critical tasks.
 Reveal weaknesses or problems in the plan, leading to further refinement of
the plan or development of additional contingency plans.
 Integrate the actions of subordinate elements (actions on contact and battle
drills).
 Confirm coordination requirements between the company and adjacent units.
 Improve each Soldier’s understanding of the concept of the operation, the
direct fire plan, the indirect fires plan, anticipated contingencies, and possible
actions and reactions for various situations that may arise during the
operation.
 Ensure that subordinates are prepared to execute in their leaders’ absence.
2-115. Rehearsals are too often the first thing to cut when leaders use their time
unwisely. When time is short, a rehearsal may be the best thing to develop subordinates
understanding. Forcing subordinates to demonstrate their execution displays at a much
higher level of understanding then saying: ROGER, I GOT IT.
2-116. Flexibility is key to effective operations. The platoon leader must refine their
plan as new information becomes available. If they adjust their plan, they must inform
the platoon and troop commander. Once the operation has begun, the platoon must adapt
quickly to new situations and new orders.
2-117. When there is not enough time to conduct all eight TLP steps in detail, the
platoon leader must understand how to trim them to save time. Most TLP can be done
mentally. Upon receiving the order, the platoon leader conducts a quick map
reconnaissance and analysis and then sends for the vehicle commanders. They make
sure they post the minimum required control measures on their maps and give an
abbreviated order consisting of a quick enemy and friendly situation, the platoon
mission, commander’s intent, key tasks, and end state, commander’s reconnaissance and
security guidance, and information requirements broken down into indicators with a
time attached, and the concept of the operation. The PSG briefs adjustments to the
scheme of support and sustainment. SOPs should clearly outline how the platoon will
communicate and execute primary, alternate, contingency, and emergency (known as
PACE)/no communications plans in the absence of orders.
2-118. The abbreviated order should not be the standard technique used by the platoon;
it is a technique to use only when time is short. In some cases, there may not be enough
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-29

Chapter 2
time even for these shortened procedures. The platoon may have to move out and receive
FRAGORDs by radio or at the next scheduled halt. Effective SOPs and training enable
platoons to move and accomplish their mission with a minimum of formal orders.
2-119. When time is available, however, there is no substitute for effective preparatory
instructions, a thorough tactical plan, and a formal OPORD. The odds of success
increase considerably when conducting detailed planning and rehearsals prior to an
operation, even when time is short. Successful platoon leaders make the most of every
available minute.
SECTION III – PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

2-120. The purpose of this section is to outline the measures of planning, methods, and
tactical employment involved in executing reconnaissance and security tasks. Leaders
should be alert to other considerations not discussed here.
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
2-121. The scout platoon develops an understanding of what is happening and why. In
the operational environment, collecting information that may identify enemy centers of
gravity, decisive points, and the means to influence their will and behavior are some of
the most important contributions the scout platoon can make to ensure successful
mission accomplishment.
TIME MANAGEMENT
2-122. Historically maneuver units focus on LD time as the critical execution event
during an operation. Scout platoons must adhere to LD time but their planning and time
management revolves on LTIOV.
LATEST TIME INFORMATION IS OF VALUE

2-123. Latest time information is of value is the time by which an intelligence
organization or staff must deliver information to the requester in order to provide
decisionmakers with timely intelligence. This must include the time anticipated for
processing and disseminating that information as well as for making the decision.
(ATP 2-01).
2-124. In relation to the scout platoon, LTIOV correlates to the information the troop
or squadron commander’s needs to answer questions leading to the mission decisions
throughout the operation. Often LTIOV for the scout platoon is tied to execution of their
specified tasks, for example conducting a route reconnaissance of an assigned NAI with
an indicator or SIR, linked to PIR, to report by a specific time and date. Completion of
this task enables the commander to initiate an execution or adjustment decision in time
for it to be effective. Therefore, understanding LTIOV is critical for backwards planning
and allotting time for effective planning and execution ahead of the threat.
2-30 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
BACKWARDS PLANNING
2-125. Leaders follow the “one-third or two-thirds” rule to allocate time available for
planning and preparation. Leaders use no more than one-third of usable, available
planning time. They leave the remaining two-thirds for their subordinates. They use the
remaining two-thirds available time to their plan, and oversee preparations. Cavalry
leaders must apply prioritization, focus, and efficiency to meet this goal.
2-126. Time management is essential to mission success. For example, if the scout
platoon has nine hours prior to the start of mission, the platoon leader and PSG should
allow themselves a total of three hours to develop their plan, resource allocation, and
briefings, and allocate the remaining six hours to section and squad leaders. Platoon
leader/PSG should encourage their section leadership to utilize the same planning
process, thus allowing the team level leadership to initiate all equipment checks,
maintenance, mission preparation, and rehearsal time.
WARFIGHTING FUNCTIONS
2-127. Commanders use the group of tasks and systems (people, organizations,
information, and processes) to accomplish missions and training objectives. There are
six warfighting functions (ADP 3-0):
 Command and control.
 Movement and maneuver.
 Intelligence.
 Fires.
 Sustainment.
 Protection.
COMMAND RELATIONSHIPS
2-128. Command relationships define superior and subordinate relationships between
unit(s) and leaders. By specifying a chain of command, command relationships unify
effort and give leaders the ability to employ subordinate forces with maximum
flexibility. Command relationships identify the degree of control of the supported
commander. The type of command relationship often relates to the expected longevity
of the relationship between the units involved and quickly identifies the degree of
support that the gaining and losing commanders provide.
2-129. Organic. The scout platoon is assigned to and forms an essential part of the
military organization. Organic units are listed in the higher unit’s table of organization
and equipment or modified table of organization and equipment.
2-130. Assigned. The scout platoon remains subordinate to a higher headquarters for
an extended period of time, typically years.
2-131. Attached. The scout platoon is temporarily subordinate to the gaining
headquarters and the period may be lengthy, often months or years.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-31

Chapter 2
2-132. Operational control. This authority allows the gaining commander to

task-organize and direct forces. The parent unit retains responsibility for training,
maintenance, resupply, and unit-level reporting.
2-133. Tactical control. This authority allows the gaining commander to direct but not
to task-organize forces. The parent unit retains responsibility for training, maintenance,
resupply, and unit-level reporting.
2-134. During most tactical operations, the scout platoon can task organize to operate
with units such as Armor, Infantry, or Stryker. The scout platoon can have units or teams
attached to them such as engineers, civil affairs teams, tactical military information
support teams, human intelligence (HUMINT) collection teams, explosive ordnance
disposal teams, EW assets, and Army aviation.
SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS
2-135. Supporting and supported units share specific relationships and responsibilities.
For example, the assigning headquarters retains logistic support responsibility and the
authority to reorganize or reassign all or part of a supporting force. Although support
relationships usually do not occur at the platoon level, it is important to understand how
they affect the type of support it provides or receives. (Refer to ADP 3-0 for further
information.) The three types of support relationships are—
 Direct support. The scout platoon provides support to the BCT commander.
The platoon is under the command of the supported unit, and is required to
report directly to that unit and provide any requested support.
 Reinforcing. In this type of support, the scout platoon provides reinforcing
support for another unit. As a secondary mission, it remains responsive for
direct support requests.
 General support. The scout platoon can provide general support to the unit as
a whole or to any particular subunit.
BATTALION SCOUT PLATOON PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

2-136. Battalion scouts execute the same functionality for their commander as their
eyes and ears. The battalion scout platoon usually coordinates their role allowing
commanders to concentrate forces at the decisive point, identify and attack enemy
weaknesses, isolate the enemy from sources of strength, and maneuver to strike the
enemy from unexpected directions.
2-137. The mission planning in the ABCT, IBCT, and SBCT maneuver battalions is
identical to Cavalry squadron planning, the difference occurs with the level of staff
planning and integration. Similar to BCT planning, the battalion staff assigns the scout
platoon missions against the commander’s decision points. Collaboration occurs
between the S-3 and S-2 and platoon leader in deploying the scout platoon. The most
important collaboration between the S-3 and the S-2 in reconnaissance and security
operations involves the development of PIRs, because PIRs drive reconnaissance and
security operations and shape the formations, methods, and locations that tasked assets
utilize. The S-3 and the S-2 must work on the PIR collectively. Squadron staffs and
2-32 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
subsequently troop commanders become adept at rapid planning and integration in

uncertain conditions. Battalion’s staffs must also develop this capability in regards to
their scout platoon deployment.
2-138. Commander/S-3 responsibilities. Commanders must provide clear intent and
reconnaissance and security guidance. They must understand what they want their scout
platoon to accomplish and explain that to the platoon leader. Maneuver battalion
commanders and staffs must fully understand mission similarities in role, capabilities,
and limitations. A battalion scout platoon, depending on type, may not be able to occupy
and maintain multiple long duration OPs. Without access to company level mortars, they
face challenges establishing depth during security tasks. They must efficiently
coordinate between two headquarters to effect successful transitions.
2-139. Maneuver battalion scout platoons often operate in coordination with the BCT
Cavalry squadron. They can often pass their battalion through the squadron to attack or
defend. Subsequently, they must be proficient at all transitional enabling tasks such as
battle and reconnaissance handover (known as RHO), forward and rearward passage of
lines (known as RPOL), and securing the flanks of their battalion while it is on or near
the objective. The scout platoon leader, PSG, and senior scout divide responsibility for
monitoring battalion and squadron nets. Platoon leaders interact directly with more
senior staff leaders and commanders. To combat overload, if possible, the scout platoon
leader participates in staff planning specifically IPB and COA development early to
create better understanding for the scout platoon leader. The PSG coordinates directly
with the headquarters troop 1SG and the battalion logistics staff officer (S-4) for
required sustainment.
2-140. To maximize training efficiency scout platoons in maneuver battalion conduct
military occupational specialty specific and cross level training with the Cavalry
squadron when possible. Doing so maximizes both the battalion and scout platoons’
resources.
FIGHTING FOR INFORMATION

2-141. Fighting for information is a term commonly associated with Cavalry
formations but one that can be applicable to a range of organizations. In the simplest
terms, fighting for information entails the collection of information generated by limited,
focused offensive action that exposes multiple echelons of the enemy’s order of battle,
potentially altering their decision cycle.
2-142. When associated with Cavalry formations, fighting for information is
applicable during both reconnaissance and security operations. It is important to note
that in many cases fighting for information can, and should be a synergistic effort. While
a Cavalry organization collect information resulting from its offensive action,
observation of secondary enemy echelons by other sensors (rotary wing, UAS, signals
intelligence, and so forth.) also fulfills the definition of fighting for information. Cavalry
units generally task organize. Fighting for information includes—
 Winning visual contact.
 Focused and limited offensive action.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-33

Chapter 2
 Retaining freedom of maneuver.

 Causing an observable enemy reaction.
 Rapidly developing the situation.
 Identification of enemy weaknesses to exploit.
SECTION IV – COMMON GRAPHIC CONTROL MEASURES

2-143. Scout platoons operate in an uncertain environment. The higher commander
defines the commander’s intent and establishes control measures allowing for
decentralized execution and scout platoon leaders’ initiative to the greatest extent (refer
to ADP 3-90 for more information). Scout platoons should utilize graphic control
measures to reinforce expectations during the execution of reconnaissance and security
missions (see table 2-6). Common graphic control measures for the scout platoon
conducting reconnaissance and security missions are—
Table 2-6. Reconnaissance and security graphic control measures

Graphic Control Measure Definition
Assembly area (AA). An area a unit occupies to
prepare for an operation.
Battle handover line (BHOL). A designated phase

line on the ground when responsibility transitions
from the stationary force to the moving force and
vice versa.
Checkpoint (CKP). A predetermined point on the
ground used to control movement tactical
maneuver, and orientation.
Contact point. A point on the terrain, easily
identifiable, where two or more units are required
to make contact.
Coordination point. Designated on boundaries as
specific points for coordination of fires and
maneuver between adjacent units.
Cover. A security task to protect the main body by
fighting to gain time while also observing and
reporting information and preventing enemy
ground observation of and direct fire against the
main body.
2-34 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control

(continued)
Forward edge of the battle area (FEBA). The
foremost limits of a series of areas in which ground
combat units are deployed, excluding the areas in
which the covering or screening forces are
operating, designated to coordinate fire support,
the positioning of forces, or the maneuver of units.
Forward line of own troops (FLOT). A line that
indicates the most forward positions of friendly
forces in any kind of military operation at a specific
time.
Guard. A security task to protect the main force by
fighting to gain time while also observing and
reporting information and preventing enemy
ground observation of and direct tire support
against the main body. Units conducting a guard
mission cannot operate independently because
they rely upon fires and functional and
multifunctional support assets of the main body.
Named area of interest (NAI). A geospatial area or
system node or link against which information that
will satisfy a specific information requirement can
be collected.
Objective (OBJ). A location on the ground used to
orient operations, phase operations, facilitate
changes of direction, and provide for unity of effort.
Observation post (OP). A position from which
military observations are made, or fire directed and
adjusted, and which possesses appropriate
communication.
Passage of lines. An operation in which a force
moves forward or rearward through another force’s
combat positions with the intention of moving into
or out of contact with the enemy.
Phase line (PL). Line used for control and
coordination of military operations, usually an
easily identified feature in the operational area.
Reconnaissance handover line (RHL). A
designated phase line on the ground where
reconnaissance responsibility transitions from one
element to another.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-35

Chapter 2

(continued)
Route (RTE). The prescribed course to be traveled
from a specific point of origin to a specific
destination.
Screen. A security task that primarily provides early
warning to the protected force.
SECTION V – COMMUNICATIONS
2-144. Communications are vital to reconnaissance and security operations.
Regardless if scout platoons find enemy indicators, they must be able to relay that
information to the supported command to be effective. Leaders place the same emphasis
in their communications plan as any of the other warfighting functions. Because of the
extended frontages and distances over which the scout platoon operates, it must rely
heavily on effective communications techniques. These techniques include not only the
means of communications (such as visual signals, radio, and digital systems) and the
proper way of using them, but also the effective application of operational terms,
radiotelephone procedures, and digital tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP).
JOINT CAPABILITIES
2-145. Joint capabilities release is one of the primary digital systems the scout platoon
uses to send and receive digital information to support information requirements. The
joint capabilities release also provides a digital common operating picture to enhance
the platoon’s situational awareness during mission execution.
SCOUT PLATOON RADIO NETS

2-146. Leaders in scout platoons employ and monitor the following radio nets. (See
figure 2-7 and figure 2-8, on page 2-38.)
Note. The scout platoon leader may assign section or squad leaders to monitor
the nets of units operating to the front or rear of the platoon. These units’ nets
would become the alternate nets monitored by leaders. This technique supports
situational awareness and facilitates an RHO or battle handover.
2-36 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
Figure 2-7. Scout platoon nets
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-37

Chapter 2
Figure 2-8. Scout platoon communication structure
PLATOON NET
2-147. The platoon net facilitates mission command. All elements within the scout
platoon must have the ability to monitor and transmit on this net at all times. Making
sure this happens is one of the keys to effective command and control during the conduct
of tactical missions. All scouts must also have the ability to rapidly change to any other
platoon net as required to coordinate contact points or handover of reconnaissance
responsibilities.
2-38 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Command and Control
TROOP COMMAND NET

2-148. Troop command net maneuvers the troop as well as processes most routine
reports not sent on digital mission command systems. The troop command post is the
net control station, and the scout platoon leader or PSG sends routine reports to the troop
XO. Platoon leaders talk to each other and coordinate key tactical actions of their
platoons; however, platoon leaders will use each other’s platoon nets to pass routine
messages not of interest to the troop commander.
2-149. Both the scout platoon leader and PSG must always have the ability to monitor
and transmit on this net. All scouts must be able to switch to this net to send reports and
receive guidance if they are unable to contact their platoon leader or PSG.
TROOP FIRES NET

2-150. Many troops operate a troop fires net to send calls for fire to the troop fire
support officer (FSO) or directly to the troop mortars. Scout platoon leaders should
direct all radios not actively operating on another net to enter this net. All scouts must
have the ability to switch to this net and coordinate indirect. Scouts must also be ready
to change to the nets of supporting elements such as tank and mobile gun systems to
coordinate supporting fires.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND LOGISTICS NET

2-151. The PSG usually monitors the administrative and logistics (known as A/L) net
for the platoon, but the platoon leader must be familiar with it as well. The PSG uses it
as required to send routine A/L reports. This net also coordinates resupply and
evacuation of casualties.
RETRANSMISSION
2-152. When the scout platoon operates at extended distances from the troop command
post, it may use the retransmission net to facilitate effective communications between
the platoon leader and the troop or supported unit. The platoon leader should request use
of the retransmission net during all missions requiring frequency modulation (FM)
communications at extended ranges.
TECHNIQUES OF EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATIONS

2-153. The platoon leader and PSG are responsible for ensuring that their scouts
understand and adhere to the following guidelines, which can contribute to more
effective, more secure tactical communications.
KNOW THE SYSTEM

2-154. Each scout must be an expert at using and maintaining all responsible
communications systems. In particular, scouts must understand its capabilities and
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 2-39

Chapter 2
limitations. Scouts must also understand how to maintain the system and how to
troubleshoot it whenever they suspects it is not functioning properly. They must also be
able to recognize differences between malfunctions and jamming or interference.
DURATION
2-155. All messages sent within or from the platoon must be short and informative.
The longer the message, the greater the opportunity for enemy elements to use electronic
means to determine the platoon’s location. Message length can be controlled in several
ways:
 Write the message down and then eliminate all unnecessary words from the
written message before sending it.
 Read the message as written when sending it.
 Use brevity codes and pro-words, such as “WILCO” meaning, “will comply,”
that reduce the need to explain the tactical picture in detail.
 Break long messages into several parts and send each separately.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE, CONTINGENCY, AND

EMERGENCY PLAN
2-156. The PACE plan is a communication plan that exists for a specific mission or
task, not a specific unit, as the plan considers both intra- and inter-unit sharing of
information. The PACE plan designates the order in which an element will move
through available communications systems until contact establishing with the desired
distant element.
2-157. Develop a PACE plan for each phase of an operation to insure mission
command of the formation. The plan reflects the training, equipment status, and true
capabilities of the formation. Actions of how to execute the PACE plan; switching
frequencies and radios, identifying meaconing, intrusion, jamming and interference, and
times to execute these switches must be fully understood at all echelons of the scout
platoon.
2-40 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Chapter 3
Reconnaissance
Reconnaissance is a mission to obtain, by visual observation or

other detection methods, information about the activities and
resources of an enemy or adversary, or to secure data concerning
the meteorological, hydrographic, or geographic characteristics of a
particular area (see JP 2-0 for more information). Scout platoons
conduct reconnaissance missions in support of the commander to
answer questions the commander deems most important to support
decision making. Reconnaissance is a part of all scout missions and
performed both mounted and dismounted.
The scout platoons seek to determine valuable information about

enemy forces, terrain, and local populations. Successful
reconnaissance enables the supported unit to seize, retain, and
exploit the initiative, by identifying, creating, and capitalizing on
opportunities discovered and reported by the platoon. A key
component of reconnaissance is providing timely and accurate
information, allowing maneuver commanders to generate options
and make timely decisions, enabling the commander to maneuver
to positions of advantage and concentrate combat power at the
decisive point. Skillful reconnaissance operations allow the
commander to shape the battlefield, ideally accepting or initiating
combat at times and places of their choosing.
Contents
Page
SECTION I. Basics of Reconnaissance Tasks 3-1
SECTION II. Forms of Reconnaissance 3-13
SECTION III. Reconnaissance Handover 3-50
SECTION I – BASICS OF RECONNAISSANCE TASKS

3-1. It is important to understand that scout platoons can conduct surveillance tasks as
part of reconnaissance and security. Surveillance is passive and continuous.
Reconnaissance is active and involves combat maneuver and fighting for information.
Reconnaissance also involves many tactics, techniques, and procedures throughout the
course of a mission.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-1

Chapter 3
3-2. A scout’s primary tools for reconnaissance are the human senses. The platoon’s
equipment supplements and complements those senses. The following are some
examples of what a scout must be able to determine about the enemy through the use of
the human senses. See table 3-1.
Table 3-1. Scout senses

Sight (Looks for) Hearing (Listens for)
-Movement, sudden or unusual movement. -Gunfire sounds (by type of weapon).
(Day) -Running engines.
-Lights, fires, or reflections. (Night) -Track sounds.
-Enemy personnel. -Voices.
-Enemy vehicles, aircraft, and unmanned -Metallic sounds.
aircraft system (UAS).
-Unusual calm or silence.
-Smoke or dust.
-Dismounted movement through brush or
-Engine exhaust fumes. woods.
-Unusual movement of farm or wild animals. -Enemy UAS or aircraft.
-Activity of the local populace. -Indicators of enemy radio interception or
-Vehicle tracks. jamming.
-Signs or evidence of enemy occupation.
-Recently cut foliage or vegetation.
-Muzzle flashes.
Touch (Feels) Smell
-Warmth of coals. -Cooking food.
-Freshness of tracks. -Vehicle exhaust.
-Age of discarded food or trash. -Burning petroleum, oils, and lubricants
(POL).
-Age of discarded food or trash.
-Human waste.
FUNDAMENTALS OF RECONNAISSANCE
3-3. Scout platoons conduct all reconnaissance tasks guided by the fundamentals of
reconnaissance. There are seven fundamentals that govern the planning and the
execution of reconnaissance tasks.
3-4. Ensure continuous reconnaissance. The scout platoon conducts continuous
reconnaissance to gain as much information as possible about the AO and the enemy.
Continuous reconnaissance provides commanders with a constant flow of information.
Leaders manage scout’s tasks. Continuous reconnaissance does not mean every
available asset at full power, nonstop, continuously. Leaders need to plan in scheduled
maintenance, feeding, and rest. Leaving optics on at high power, draining batteries,
observing a deserted plain in daylight is not consistent with continuous reconnaissance,
3-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
tasking a section with rest after a long duration observation post does not violate the
fundamental of continuous reconnaissance.
3-5. Do not keep reconnaissance assets in reserve. Every scout and every pair of eyes
makes a difference. Employ all scouts in executing reconnaissance tasks. Leaders need
to plan for scheduled maintenance, feeding, and rest, which is not tasking a reserve but
required for successful mission execution. Continuous and focused collection efforts
require a concerted effort to maximize the reconnaissance management techniques.
3-6. Orient on the reconnaissance objective. The scout platoon’s scheme of maneuver
focuses toward a specific objective of the commander. The reconnaissance objective is
an effect or expectation the commander is hoping to achieve or prevent, or confirm or
deny. Reconnaissance objectives can be a combination of terrain features, enemy, or
civil considerations that provide commanders with the necessary information. It is the
simplified focus for the commander on which scout platoons try and maximize their
capability to collect information. The reconnaissance objective is tied to both the
commander’s end state and PIR.
3-7. Report all information rapidly and accurately. Scouts aid the commander in the
development of plans and rapid decision-making. Scouts must report all information
exactly as they see it and as fast as possible. They must never assume, distort, or
exaggerate. Information that the enemy is not present paints the overall picture just as
importantly as where the enemy is located.
3-8. Retain freedom of maneuver. Tactical mobility and maneuver drive the success
of reconnaissance tasks. Platoon leaders consider task organization, their commander’s
reconnaissance guidance, movement techniques, and scheme of maneuver to retain their
unit’s ability to maneuver. Scout platoons change movement techniques and employ
multiple assets by phase to make contact with the smallest possible element and avoid
becoming decisively engaged. The scout platoon retains freedom of maneuver by
avoiding decisive engagement with a superior force.
3-9. Gain and maintain enemy contact. Scout platoons gain and maintain contact with
the enemy on terms and conditions of their choosing. Using at least one of the eight
forms of contact, commanders and staffs plans for and integrate aerial and ground
sensors and platforms to assist the scout platoon to gain contact with the enemy by using
the smallest element possible. They may change forms of contact while still maintaining
contact such as breaking direct fire contact while another section maintains visual
contact.
3-10. Develop the situation rapidly. Effective scout platoons understand how time
impacts movement (both friendly and enemy) and how timely information collection
requirements impact the commander’s decisions. Whether the scouts encounter an
obstacle or an enemy force, they must rapidly develop the situation in regards to
composition, disposition, and activity, quickly, with minimum guidance from higher.
Time is the scout platoon’s most precious resource and cannot be wasted.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-3

Chapter 3
RECONNAISSANCE PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

3-11. Reconnaissance planning occurs at all echelons. Planning in this chapter details
requirements for the scout platoon leader, but also highlights the required planning by
the PSG and the section leader. In order to be an effective scout platoon, scouts must
understand the higher unit’s scheme of maneuver as well as the templated enemy scheme
of maneuver. The scout platoon’s scheme of maneuver is the product of a series of
tactical tasks conducted to answer indicators for a supported commander.
COMMANDER’S RECONNAISSANCE GUIDANCE

3-12. Commanders provide clear reconnaissance guidance that offers the scout platoon
both freedom of action to develop the situation as well as adequate direction to ensure
the scout platoon can accomplish stated reconnaissance objectives within the required
timeline. The commander’s reconnaissance guidance enables disciplined initiative and
provides subordinate elements clear understanding of the commander’s requirements
and expectations. Scout platoons in maneuver battalions may have to interpret the
commander’s intent, end state, task and purpose, and develop reconnaissance and
security guidance for their platoon. Everyone in the scout platoon must understand the
commander’s reconnaissance guidance. Guidance and the information collection plan
tie directly to what the supported commander needs to know to rapidly make decisions
and choose courses of action. Commanders issue reconnaissance guidance in the
five-paragraph operations order to refine their intent. Reconnaissance guidance may
change for each phase of an operation. The commander’s reconnaissance guidance
consists of four elements:
 Focus.
 Tempo of reconnaissance.
 Engagement and disengagement criteria (lethal and nonlethal).
 Displacement criteria.
Focus
3-13. Focus allows the platoon leader to determine which tasks the platoon needs to
accomplish first, where to concentrate reconnaissance activities, and the assets required.
It narrows the scope of tasks to the information that is most important or critical to the
squadron or battalion and brigade’s operations. The focus is terrain, enemy forces, or a
civilian population. Terrain includes weather effects and civilian population includes
society and infrastructure networks.
3-14. The commander narrows the focus further by defining a reconnaissance
objective. A reconnaissance objective is a terrain feature, civilian population, or an
enemy force about which the commander wants to obtain additional information. The
reconnaissance objective consists of confirm or deny information about a specific
geographical location, civilian population, or threat activity, allowing the scout platoon
to set priorities and focus on the reconnaissance objective when under time constraints.
The reconnaissance objective directly supports the end state defined in the commander’s
intent.
3-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Tempo of Reconnaissance
3-15. Tempo refers to the level of detail and the level of covertness required by the
scout platoon to accomplish reconnaissance tasks. Reconnaissance tempo allows the
platoon leader to establish associated time requirements and correlate them with the
planning time, movement formations, engagement criteria, and methods such as
dismounted or mounted reconnaissance. Four terms describe tempo: rapid, deliberate,
stealthy, and forceful. Rapid and deliberate are levels of detail and are mutually
exclusive, meaning a scout platoon cannot be rapid and deliberate at the same time.
Stealthy and forceful are mutually exclusive levels of covertness, meaning a scout
platoon cannot be stealthy and forceful at the same time. When the scout platoon leader
issues reconnaissance guidance, they express two of these words as tempo. Leaders must
ensure however, that everyone in the platoon clearly understands what these words
imply. An example would be, “Our tempo of reconnaissance will be stealthy and
deliberate. I want to thoroughly check every culvert, ravine, ditch, and underpass for
signs of enemy activity. Time is not as important as an exhaustive search.”
Reconnaissance tempo has four distinct terms and four possible combinations associated
with it as displayed in figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1. Tempo of reconnaissance
3-16. Rapid tempo indicates that the level of detail for the reconnaissance mission
requires satisfying only a certain number of prescribed tasks or PIR. An example of this
would be a rapid route reconnaissance in which the commander is only concerned with
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-5

Chapter 3
the ability of a bridge to support follow-on forces. Given this guidance, the scout platoon
would conduct an overall rapid reconnaissance of the route; however, they would
transition to a deliberate tempo at the NAI associated with the bridge and answer all
necessary information requirements from the commander.
3-17. Deliberate tempo implies accomplishing all tasks of the mission to ensure overall
mission success. An example of this would be when an organization is new to its AO
and possesses limited information about a route that is planned as a main supply route
for future operations. Given this scenario, the commander would order the scout platoon
to conduct a deliberate route reconnaissance of the main supply route, following all of
the tasks associated with a route reconnaissance.
3-18. Stealthy tempo emphasizes avoiding detection and generally consists of
restrictive engagement criteria. Stealthy reconnaissance usually takes more time and
often uses dismounted reconnaissance methods to maximize the use of cover and
concealment to reduce friendly signatures. Use stealthy reconnaissance when there is
more time available, likely enemy threat contact, required detailed reconnaissance, or
when terrain restricts the use of mounted reconnaissance elements.
3-19. Forceful tempo allows scouts to develop the situation rapidly by employing
ground and air assets. Detection is not a concern. Forceful reconnaissance may rely upon
the use of standoff weapons and optics to rapidly seize the initiative and answer CCIR.
Scouts use a forceful reconnaissance tempo with limited time, few detailed information
requirements, terrain does not support covert methods, or when stealthy reconnaissance
cannot answer the information requirements.
Engagement and Disengagement Criteria

3-20. Engagement criteria are protocols that specify those circumstances for initiating
engagement with an enemy force. These can be either restrictive or permissive, but it is
not sufficient to define engagement criteria using terms such as aggressive or discreet.
Define engagement criteria using precise doctrinal terms, such as “three or fewer
personnel carriers” or “squad size or smaller dismounted elements. The commander’s
guidance establishes which targets the scout platoon engages, under which
circumstances to use direct or indirect fires, and which targets the scout platoon hand
over to another maneuver element. The commander’s guidance enables the platoon
leader to—
 Conduct the platoon’s direct fire planning.
 Plan for bypass criteria.
 Plan for the destruction of specific enemy dismounts and vehicles.
Displacement Criteria
3-21. Displacement criteria are triggers for a planned withdrawal, passage of lines, or
an RHO between units. Displacement criteria conditions are either event-driven
(example, answering associated PIR), time-driven (example, meeting latest time
information of value trigger), or threat driven (example, identification of enemy
reserve). Once meeting displacement criteria, the scout platoon may transition to the
3-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
next mission, phase, or task and is relieved from the responsibility of maintaining a form
of contact with the enemy.
RECONNAISSANCE TECHNIQUES
3-22. There are two reconnaissance techniques scout platoons execute to answer
information requirements: reconnaissance pull and reconnaissance push. Scout platoons
employ these techniques based on their commander’s level of understanding of the
operational environment combined with the time available to refine their understanding.
Scout platoons must be capable of initiating reconnaissance upon receipt of the squadron
or battalion’s WARNORD number 2. Therefore, scout platoons operate on different
operational timelines than their supported unit, often well before other maneuver units
initiate movement. Scout platoons usually transition between reconnaissance and
security tasks as the BCT progresses through its operations cycle.
3-23. Scout platoons execute the reconnaissance push technique when commanders
have a relatively thorough understanding of the operational environment. In these cases,
the scout platoon is pushed into specific portions of an AO to confirm, deny, and validate
planning assumptions impacting operations.
3-24. Scout platoons use the reconnaissance pull technique when commanders are
uncertain of composition and disposition of enemy forces in their AO or terrain
information or have limited available time. In these cases, scout platoons initially work
over a broad area to develop the enemy situation rapidly. As the scout platoon gains an
understanding of enemy weaknesses, they pull the main body to positions of tactical
advantage.
RECONNAISSANCE METHODS
3-25. The scout platoon leader seeks to use appropriate combinations of reconnaissance
methods (dismounted, mounted, aerial, and reconnaissance by fire) to accomplish their
mission and gain and maintain contact with the enemy. No method is mutually exclusive
and the greater the number of assets applied usually increases the effectiveness of the
operation. The scout platoon conducts reconnaissance using a combination of
dismounted, mounted, aerial, and reconnaissance by fire methods augmented with
higher echelon technical sensor capabilities.
Dismounted
3-26. Dismounted reconnaissance is the most time consuming method, but also permits
the most detailed collection of information. Scouts conduct dismounted reconnaissance
when there is—
 The requirement for detailed reconnaissance.
 The requirement for stealth.
 Expected or actual enemy contact.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-7

Chapter 3
 Restricted terrain.
 Permissive time constraints.
 A primary concern for security.
3-27. The primary purpose of dismounted reconnaissance is to obtain detailed
information about terrain features, obstacles, or enemy forces. In addition, scouts
dismount and reconnoiter forward of their vehicle to provide security before moving
through danger areas such as IV lines, hilltops, curves, or other blind spots. They also
dismount to set up short or long duration observation posts. Dismounted scouts provide
security for each other as they move (see figure 3-2). Ideally, at least two scouts work
together when operating dismounted. When only a single scout dismounts, the scout
should never move out of supporting distance of the vehicle.
3-28. Other considerations for the use of dismounted reconnaissance include a slower
rate of movement for scouts on foot, extensive requirements for detailed preliminary
planning and coordination, and reduced protection from CBRN threats and hazards,
enemy fire, booby traps, and IEDs. These considerations are incorporated into planning
to mitigate risk to scouts as they conduct reconnaissance.
Figure 3-2. Dismounted team conducting short duration operation
3-29. Dismounted scouts carry equipment that gives them the capability to report
information accurately and to call for and adjust indirect fires. At a minimum,
dismounted scouts should plan for observation posts using mnemonic, commonly
known as CWORMS:
 Compass and navigation equipment.
 Weapons, such as personal, crew-served and anti-tank.
3-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
 Optics: binoculars, spotting scope, thermal sights, and night observation

devices with spare batteries.
 Radios and report formats. Signal operating instructions.
 Map of the area with operational graphics.
 Seasonal equipment. Wet weather gear, gloves, sleeping bags, CBRN
equipment based on weather and threat.
Mounted
3-30. Mounted reconnaissance is one of the most frequently employed methods. It
allows scouts to conduct fairly detailed reconnaissance while maintaining speed and
momentum during a mission. Mounted reconnaissance will make maximum use of
standoff using vehicle weapons systems and optics. Scouts use mounted reconnaissance
when there is:
 Limited time.
 Small requirement for detailed reconnaissance.
 Large distances requiring mounted maneuver.
 Known enemy locations.
 Low minefields and obstacles threat.
 Unlikely enemy contact.
3-31. Speed and momentum are rarely necessary in reconnaissance, but they are often
critical to the successful execution of offensive operations that the reconnaissance
mission supports. Additionally poorly planned time often necessitates scouts use of
speed. Mounted reconnaissance offers scouts the advantages of using their
reconnaissance vehicle for protection and additional firepower. These advantages
depend on the specific vehicle employed, but they can include firepower, armor
protection, increased navigation and communications capability, and thermal optics.
3-32. Other considerations for the use of mounted reconnaissance include the loss of
covertness due to the visual, noise, and thermal signatures of the vehicle and the loss of
some detail because of restricted vision and impairment on the senses of smell and
hearing. These considerations are incorporated into planning to mitigate the risk to
scouts as they conduct reconnaissance. Figure 3-3, page 3-10, highlights an example of
scouts conducting mounted reconnaissance.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-9

Chapter 3
Figure 3-3. Scouts conducting mounted reconnaissance
Aerial
3-33. Aerial reconnaissance conducted by UAS or Army aviation assets provides a
flexible, low-risk means for gaining basic information in the least amount of time. It
serves as a link between sensors and mounted or dismounted reconnaissance. Aerial
reconnaissance can quickly reconnoiter impassable terrain.
3-34. The UAS is organic to the troop and squadron of the ABCT, IBCT, and SBCT
for surveillance and reconnaissance. Complex terrain, adverse weather conditions,
enemy deception/countermeasures, and enemy air defense systems severely limit the
effectiveness and potential availability of aerial reconnaissance assets. The scout platoon
can employ the UAS forward in its AO to facilitate reconnaissance in complex terrain
or to maximize the UAS operational range.
3-35. The higher headquarters may direct aerial reconnaissance, or the platoon leader
may determine the requirement for aerial reconnaissance when there is:
 Weather permitting.
 Extremely limited time, requiring information quickly.
 No ground reconnaissance assets available.
 Extended distances.
3-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
 Significant risk to ground forces from known or unknown enemy locations.

 Complex terrain.
Reconnaissance by Fire
3-36. In the reconnaissance by fire method, scouts place direct or indirect fire on
positions where there is information on, or a reasonable suspicion of enemy occupation;
the goal is to cause the enemy to disclose their composition, disposition and willingness
to fight. Scouts use reconnaissance by fire when expecting enemy contact, and they have
limited time available or when they are unable to maneuver and develop the situation.
Reconnaissance by fire eliminates any element of surprise the scouts have and it is likely
to provide the enemy detailed knowledge of their location. It may, however, reduce the
chance of scouts being ambushed within established kill zones. Reconnaissance by fire
does not always work. For example, disciplined troops in prepared positions will not
react to the scouts’ fires. Examples of situations in which scouts employ reconnaissance
by fire include:
 Presence of a natural or man-made obstacle.
 Existence of an obvious kill zone.
 A suspected enemy position that fits the situational template.
 Signs of recent activity (track marks, trash).
 Bunker complexes.
3-37. When such evidence exists, the scouts should maneuver to observe from different
locations. When the decision is finally made to use reconnaissance by fire, weapons
should be used in the following priority:
 Indirect fire.
 Dismounted machine gun.
 25-mm chain gun, MK-19, mounted machine gun.
 TOW.
3-38. Reconnaissance by fire does not mean the indiscriminate use of direct and indirect
fires at all wood lines and hilltops in the hopes of causing the enemy to react. The enemy
will recognize that and may not react and also wastes valuable ammunition.
Indirect Fire
3-39. Scouts can employ reconnaissance by indirect fire providing security for the
scouts by not disclosing their exact position. All scouts should observe the effects of the
indirect fire.
3-40. Reconnaissance by indirect fire has disadvantages. Indirect fire requires more
coordination and communication than direct fire; it is less responsive and may be less
accurate than direct fire. Indirect fire is subject to considerations beyond the control of
the scout platoon such as the supporting unit’s class V supply status, counterbattery
threats, and command approval. Additionally, the effects of indirect fire may obscure
the scout’s vision. Figure 3-4, page 3-12, is a graphical depiction of scouts using the
reconnaissance by indirect fire method.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-11

Chapter 3
Figure 3-4. Scouts using reconnaissance by fire, indirect
Direct Fire
3-41. Scouts use their organic weapons to place accurate direct fires on suspected
enemy positions that are likely to provoke a rapid enemy response, but disclose the
scouts’ position. Maximum effective range of the weapon limits direct fire and uses
valuable ammunition. Scouts must work together when employing direct fire. The scout
who fires may not be in the best position to observe because of obscuration and the
survival requirement to move to a covered position after firing. Another scout, in a
different position can observe for an enemy reaction. The observing scout remains
undetected and accurately reports enemy information. When using direct fire, the scout
platoon leader should also place indirect fires on suspected positions for suppression if
the enemy responds in strength.
3-42. One example of the technique of integrating reconnaissance methods is the use
of mounted and dismounted reconnaissance at the individual vehicle, squad or section
level at any point where scouts encounter IV lines or before suspected enemy locations.
Before execution, the platoon leader should direct the use of the appropriate movement
technique and specify the reconnaissance method based on anticipated enemy contact
depicted in the enemy situational templates. In execution, the vehicles stop short of the
crest of the IV line, and deploy their dismounts. The dismounted element will use stealth,
cover, and concealment to gain observation on the far side of the IV line. Once the
3-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
dismounts confirm or deny enemy contact, they provide overwatch while the vehicles
bound the IV line. The vehicles and dismounted teams link up and remount in an area
with cover and concealment or not anticipating enemy contact before continuing to the
next terrain feature or NAI. The scout platoon’s vehicles relay or retransmit back to
commander.
RECONNAISSANCE SENSOR AND SURVEILLANCE ASSETS

3-43. While not separate reconnaissance methods, sensor and surveillance assets cue
different reconnaissance methods. They maintain surveillance of areas that require
observation over extended periods and facilitate cueing for aerial, dismounted, and
mounted reconnaissance. Sensors provide redundancy when assets push forward to
facilitate ground reconnaissance, and can extend distance between ground
reconnaissance and the enemy. The platoon leader needs to know the capabilities,
limitations, and command support relationship of the various sensor systems. These
systems are susceptible to countermeasures, lack the ability to convey the human
dimension of the AO in terms of assessing the enemy’s morale, and cannot make crucial
decisions or judgment calls. The higher headquarters may direct the use of sensors to—
 Expand the scope of missions in a larger AO.
 Conduct missions of an extended duration.
 Conduct CBRN.
 Cue a more thorough ground or aerial reconnaissance of a given area.
RECONNAISSANCE MANAGEMENT
3-44. Effective use of reconnaissance management greatly enhances the scout platoon’s
ability to gain and maintain contact with the enemy on friendly terms. Leaders may task
organize as appropriate to accomplish the mission. Understanding the known
communication plan and linkage is useful for the following reconnaissance management
techniques to be successful. Figure 3-5, on page 3-14, highlights reconnaissance
management in relation to an NAI.
3-45. Cueing is the integration of one or more types of reconnaissance or surveillance
systems to provide information that directs follow-on collecting of more detailed
information by another system. An example of cueing is a dismounted observation post
that gains visual contact with threat elements at a distance beyond positive identification.
Visual contact can cue the use of the troop level Raven UAS to conduct aerial
reconnaissance of the visual contact to confirm threat disposition and composition.
3-46. Mixing is using two or more different assets to collect against the same
intelligence requirement. An example of mixing would be the use of a dismounted
observation post and a vehicle using its optics to conduct reconnaissance on the same
NAI from different vantage points.
3-47. Redundancy is using two or more like assets to collect against the same
intelligence requirement. An example of redundancy would be the use of two separate
dismounted observation posts observing the same NAI from different locations.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-13

Chapter 3
Figure 3-5. Reconnaissance management, example
SECTION II – FORMS OF RECONNAISSANCE

3-48. The four forms of reconnaissance scout platoons conduct are zone, area, route,
and reconnaissance in force. Special forces conduct the fifth form, special
reconnaisance.
ZONE RECONNAISSANCE
3-49. Zone reconnaissance is the directed effort to obtain detailed information
concerning enemy, terrain, or civil considerations, in accordance with the commander’s
intent. Scout platoons conduct a zone reconnaissance within a location delineated by
LD, lateral boundaries, and a limit of advance (LOA).
3-50. Zone reconnaissance focuses on enemy, terrain, or civilian population and
consider infrastructure a part of terrain. Additionally, the commander may focus the
reconnaissance effort on a specific enemy force, such as the reserve.
3-51. Commanders direct scouts to conduct zone reconnaissance when they are
uncertain of the composition and disposition of enemy forces in their AO, information
concerning terrain is vague, or requiring information from or on the civilian population.
In these cases, reconnaissance assets initially work over a broad area to develop the
enemy situation. As they gain an understanding of enemy weaknesses, they then pull the
main body to positions of tactical advantage.
3-14 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
3-52. A zone reconnaissance is normally a deliberate, time-consuming process. It takes

more time than any other reconnaissance mission, so the commander must plan for
adequate time for the scout platoon to conduct the mission. A zone reconnaissance
normally occurs over an extended distance and starts from a LD. However, when the
reconnaissance objective is the enemy force, a commander may forego a detailed
reconnaissance of the zone and focus assets on those NAIs that would reveal enemy
compositions and dispositions. The scout platoon cannot disregard terrain when
focusing on the enemy. However, it may minimize its terrain reconnaissance to actions
that influence an NAI.
TASKS
3-53. The troop commander or battalion S-3, in conjunction with the squadron or
battalion commander, determines the priority of tasks best suited (collection of
information necessary) to answer PIRs then focuses the troop’s collection efforts against
these requirements. Tasks associated with zone reconnaissance are—
 Find and report all enemy forces within the zone.
 Clear all enemy forces in the designated AO within the capability of the unit
conducting reconnaissance based on engagement criteria.
 Determine the trafficability of all terrain in the zone, including built-up areas.
 Locate and determine the extent of all contaminated areas in the zone.
 Inspect and classify all bridges within the zone.
 Locate fords or crossing sites within the zone.
 Inspect and classify all overpasses, underpasses, and culverts.
 Locate and clear all mines, obstacles, and barriers in the zone (within
capability).
 Report reconnaissance information.
3-54. Based on priority, the commander may direct the following:

 Reconnoiter all terrain within the zone.
 Reconnoiter specific terrain within the zone.
 Locate bypass around built-up areas, obstacles, and contaminated areas.
CONSIDERATIONS
3-55. Zone reconnaissance is time-consuming. Unless the orders specify which tasks to
omit, all tasks are implied in the mission statement. When speed is the primary concern,
commanders modify the focus, tempo, and engagement criteria to prioritize the tasks for
the platoon leader. Commanders determine the width of the zone by the road network,
terrain features, anticipated enemy activity, and time available to accomplish the
mission. UAS assets can act as an economy of force role to observe areas beyond the
operational reach of ground reconnaissance elements.
3-56. The supported commander’s order includes phase lines and other graphic control
measures within the area that control the maneuver of the scout platoon during the zone
reconnaissance mission. The platoon leader verifies mission requirements by identifying
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-15

Chapter 3
information requirements, CCIR, SIR, and develops understanding of the higher

commander’s plan.
EXAMPLE OF ZONE RECONNAISSANCE

3-57. To maximize reconnaissance assets and prepare for contact, the platoon leader
deploys the sections before reaching the LD. The platoon is in position early enough to
conduct observation of the LD. To do this, the platoon leader designates a section or
team to conduct a reconnaissance of the route from the SP to the release point (RP), and
capture the time it takes to complete the movement. This time is used in deciding when
to execute the SP, allowing the platoon enough time to complete movement to the LD
and establish initial observation posts.
3-58. Once the scout platoon occupies their initial positions before the LD, vehicle
commanders direct team members to observe the zone beyond the LD for enemy
movement. The platoon stops turns off vehicles, Soldiers dismount and take a knee and
remove headgear. Soldiers look for existing undisturbed terrain. They check using optics
or natural sight to scan for booby-traps, disturbed vegetation, indicators of enemy
presence, and recheck friendly camouflage efforts. Drivers locate next covered and
concealed positions and possible driving hazards. Gunners familiarize themselves with
the AO and possible enemy positions while scanning with weapons systems. Everyone
listens for sounds of nature to return or any vehicular noise. Soldiers smell for exhaust
fumes, cordite, or any unusual smell. This technique is a halt known by the mnemonic
aide: stop, look, listen, and smell (SLLS). It is intended to rapidly acclimatize the
platoon to their AO. During this time, the platoon leader requests any updates from the
commander or S-2 on enemy activity prior to moving across the LD. The platoon
remains in observation positions until the time prescribed in the OPORD and then
crosses the LD, or on order from the commander.
3-59. The scout platoon executes zone reconnaissance by using the movement
technique described in the OPORD. The sections move into their respective AO within
the zone for which the platoon is responsible. The platoon leader uses phase lines,
checkpoints, contact points, or Grid Index Reference System and Terrain Index
Reference System (known as TIRS) to direct movement so the platoon can reconnoiter
the entire zone. The platoon leader ensures the sections remain generally online while
maintaining adequate security through overwatch, which prevents development of
significant gaps that a moving enemy can exploit. Section and team leaders submitting
location reports on a timely and regular basis facilitate and enable movement.
3-60. In mounted scout platoons, scouts dismount to gather detailed information,
reconnoiter danger areas, or move through areas not accessible by the vehicles. The
sections maneuver through their sectors in a back and forth pattern to properly explore
the zone and accomplish all tasks. The platoon continues to inspect the zone until it
reaches the LOA. After completing the zone reconnaissance, the scout platoon
transitions to a follow-on mission that often includes moving into a screen. Executing a
hasty screen at halts or at phase lines, allows the scout platoon to provide early warning
of enemy activities; send class I, III, and V reports; and conduct consolidation and
reorganization while friendly elements move into a defense behind the platoon’s screen.
3-16 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
3-61. In figure 3-6, page 3-18, the platoon leader deploys the platoon abreast prior to
reaching the LD. Once on the LD, the platoon conducts a SLLS halt beginning to observe
their assigned AO and cross the LD at the time prescribed by the commander. Based on
the platoon leader’s analysis and TLP, the platoon executes appropriate movement
techniques and formations. For the purpose of this example, the platoon will use the
bounding overwatch movement technique.
3-62. Once Alpha section has crossed Phase Line Bruder, they conduct zone
reconnaissance in their assigned section boundaries from the LD to Phase Line Cook.
Alpha section will not cross Phase Line Cook until Bravo section is also set on Phase
Line Cook. Once Alpha section is set on Phase Line Cook, they radio to Bravo section
to begin their zone reconnaissance from the LD to Phase Line Cook. Once both sections
are set on Phase Line Cook, they deploy their dismounts to conduct reconnaissance of
the bridges in vicinity of checkpoint 1 and checkpoint 2. The dismounts determine the
trafficability of the bridge, locate necessary bypass routes, and conduct a BLUE 5
CROSSREP (known as crossing report) (see appendix A). Once both bridges are devoid
of enemy forces, and suitable for continued movement, the vehicles collapse their
overwatch positions and pick up their respective dismounted elements. (See figure 3-6.)
It is important for the platoon leader to report the platoon’s execution of all graphic
control measures and actions (mounted and dismounted) to the troop command post.
The platoon leader reports assist the troop’s development of a common operating picture
and enhance situational awareness for the commander.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-17

Chapter 3
Figure 3-6. Scout platoon conducts zone reconnaissance
3-63. Both sections rapidly maneuver across their respective bridge, to minimize the
large linear danger area between subordinate elements of the platoon. Once across the
bridge, Alpha section continues its zone reconnaissance to Phase Line Maynard to begin
observation of NAI 1 (major road intersection). Once set on Phase Line Maynard, Alpha
section radios to Bravo section that overwatch is set; Bravo section then begins its zone
reconnaissance to Phase Line Maynard. Once on Phase Line Maynard, Alpha section
deploys its dismounts to execute a more thorough reconnaissance of NAI 1 and NAI 2.
The dismounts establish an observation post according to the commander’s
3-18 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
reconnaissance guidance (see figure 3-7). Once the determining NAI is clear of enemy
forces, the Alpha section bounds forward to pick up the dismounted element.
Figure 3-7. Zone reconnaissance, establish observation posts
3-64. Both sections conduct a short halt at Phase Line Reyes, until the platoon leader
grants permission to cross the phase line. Once the platoon leader authorizes movement,
Alpha section bounds first to the LOA (Phase Line Zang), where it establishes a short
duration screen. Once the section screen is set, Alpha section radios Bravo section to
cross Phase Line Reyes and bound to the LOA to establish a platoon consolidated screen
until the platoon reaches its displacement criteria. (See figure 3-8, on page 3-20.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-19

Chapter 3
Figure 3-8. Zone reconnaissance, establishing a screen
3-20 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
AREA RECONNAISSANCE
3-65. An area reconnaissance is a form of reconnaissance that focuses on obtaining
detailed information about the terrain, enemy, or civilian population within a prescribed
area. For a scout platoon, a prescribed area may encompass one or a combination of
these factors. For example, a scout platoon may deploy to a prescribed area such as a
town to gather information about the population, roads, bridges, market places, and other
society and infrastructure. Area reconnaissance is often employed during a zone
reconnaissance for small towns, dead zones, and NAIs. The primary difference that
identifies an area reconnaissance is the reduced size of the area boundaries compared to
a zone. Additionally, whereas in a zone reconnaissance, the scout platoon focuses on the
entirety of their assigned zone, from the LD to the LOA, in an area reconnaissance, the
scout platoon may not be responsible for conducting reconnaissance during their
movement to their assigned area. The commander may dictate that the reconnaissance
begins once the platoon reaches their assigned reconnaissance area, or NAI associated
with the tasked area reconnaissance, conducts a SLLS halt, and begins their
reconnaissance.
TASKS
3-66. The tasks for an area reconnaissance are the same as a zone reconnaissance.
Based on time and intent, the commander may omit certain tasks for the platoon to focus
on during an area reconnaissance. Unless the commander directs otherwise, the scout
platoon’s primary tasks usually associated with an area reconnaissance include:
 Finding and reporting all enemy forces within the area.
 Reconnoitering specific terrain within the area.
 Reporting reconnaissance information.
3-67. Other tasks include the following:

 Reconnoiter all terrain within the area.
 Inspect and classify all bridges within the area.
 Locate fords or crossing sites near all bridges within the area.
 Locate and clear all mines, obstacles, and barriers in the area within its
capability.
 Locate a bypass around built-up area, obstacles, and contaminated areas.
CONSIDERATIONS
3-68. As with the zone reconnaissance, the platoon leader ensures that the platoon has
all known information and intelligence pertaining to the AO. The commander
determines the infiltration method and sequence for the platoon. At times, the
commander may require recommendations from the platoon leader to assist in this
process. If so, the platoon conducts reconnaissance during their TLP to identify their
infiltration routes and identify the method or whether methods change throughout the
mission. The platoon leader may request other assets available to the BCT. Information
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-21

Chapter 3
from intelligence assets can help the platoon develop and complete the scheme of
maneuver during TLP. The platoon leader and section leaders use intelligence and
geospatial products with a detailed map reconnaissance to determine how terrain
supports movement. The platoon views the terrain not only from the perspective of how
it supports the mission success, but also from the enemy’s perspective. Aviation and
UAS assets not organic to the troop can provide early warning and reconnaissance of
areas that are inaccessible to the platoon.
INFILTRATION AND EXFILTRATION

3-69. Scout platoons frequently employ infiltration and exfiltration in executing forms
of reconnaissance and security to avoid detection and direct fire contact with enemy
elements. Infiltration and exfiltration can occur during zone, area, or route
reconnaissance tasks. Area reconnaissance, in particular, is a form of reconnaissance
that is especially effective for infiltration and exfiltration. Infiltration and exfiltration
occurs when elements of the platoon proceed mounted, dismounted, or using a
combination of the two methods. Preceding infiltration, augmentation assets may have
to insert the platoon into the AO where it conducts infiltration. Insertion may be by
ground, air, or water assets (if they are available and the tactical situation permits).
Extraction may require ground, air, or water assets.
EXAMPLE OF CONDUCTING AN AREA RECONNAISSANCE

3-70. The following paragraphs include an example of a combined arms battalion scout
platoon conducting an area reconnaissance. The illustration below by no means is “the”
way, but a way to conduct an area reconnaissance in respect to the mission variables of
METT-TC.
3-71. In the following example, the troop commander gave the platoon leader a mission
of conducting an area reconnaissance of Objective Sledge and Objective Hammer. The
platoon was not assigned a specific route and enemy disposition is vague. The platoon
leader analyzes the terrain, mission requirements, and the commander’s reconnaissance
guidance and decides to use the two-section platoon configuration (phase line in Alpha
and PSG in Bravo section) to execute the mission. The platoon leader develops a concept
sketch and adds graphic control measures to control the movement of the platoon.
Graphic control measures for this example include section boundaries, checkpoints,
phase lines, target reference points, and NAIs (see figure 3-9). It is important for the
platoon leader to report the platoon’s execution of all graphic control measures and
actions (mounted and dismounted) to the troop command post. The platoon leader
reports aid the troop’s development of a common operating picture and enhance
situational awareness for the commander.
3-22 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-9. Scout platoon staged to conduct an area reconnaissance
3-72. In this example, Alpha section is responsible for NAI 2, a threat focused NAI and
Bravo section is responsible for NAI 1, a terrain focused NAI. Given the platoon leader’s
terrain and enemy analysis and identification of weather effects, the section leaders
develop their scheme of maneuver to answer their assigned indicators, adhering to the
fundamentals of reconnaissance at all times.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-23

Chapter 3
3-73. Upon execution, the platoon crosses Phase Line Bruder (LD) at the time specified
in the commander’s OPORD using the bounding overwatch moving technique. Alpha
section leads the movement. Alpha section maneuvers from LD to Phase Line Cook, set,
and provide overwatch for Bravo section to maneuver to Phase Line Cook. Once Bravo
section is set at Phase Line Cook, both sections employ their dismounted teams to
conduct a detailed reconnaissance of the bridges within their respective boundaries. (See
figure 3-10.)

(continued)
3-24 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
3-74. The dismounted teams conduct a detailed reconnaissance of the bridges to ensure
the bridges can support the platoon’s vehicles as well as follow-on forces movement.
Once the bridges are deemed feasible for crossing and cleared of any threats, the
mounted team picks up the dismounted teams and continues the mission. Alpha section
crosses the bridge within their section and maneuver to Phase Line Maynard. Once
Alpha section is set in the vicinity of Phase Line Maynard, the platoon leader radios to
Bravo section to maneuver to Phase Line Maynard. Alpha section provides overwatch
for Bravo section while Bravo section maneuvers to Phase Line Maynard. Additionally,
the platoon requests and receives UAS to reconnoiter NAIs 1 and 2 prior to the platoon’s
execution of Phase Line Maynard. The platoon leader establishes restricted operations
zone (ROZ) 1 and ROZ 2 to manage the UAS employment. Once both sections are set
at Phase Line Maynard, they deploy their dismounted teams to establish dismounted
observation posts forward of the vehicles to provide observation on their respective
NAIs (see figure 3-11, on page 3-26).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-25

Chapter 3

(continued)
3-26 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
3-75. Throughout this mission, the section leaders assist the platoon leader in selecting
the best mutually supporting observation posts (mounted and dismounted), support by
fire (known as SBF) locations, infiltration routes, vehicle hide sites, and egress routes
for the mission. The dismounted teams crosstalk with their respective mounted team to
verify and confirm TRPs and preplanned fires targets to aid in engagement,
disengagement, and displacement. The platoon leader preplans the fires targets short of,
on, and beyond the NAI and reconnaissance objectives.
3-76. The platoon leader and section leader must constantly track their subordinates’
positions, thereby increasing the speed and accuracy of ground clearance for fires. When
scouts establish an observation post, either mounted or dismounted, the platoon leader
must coordinate with the troop FSO and mortar FDC to establish a no fire area. To
deconflict airspace, the platoon leader has the option to deconflict by time, space, or a
combination of the two. By establishing an air corridor for the employment of the UAS,
the platoon leader can establish necessary graphical control measures to rapidly de-
conflict the gun target line of indirect fires systems through airspace management.
ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE
3-77. A route reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain detailed information of a
specified route and all terrain from which the enemy could influence movement along
that route. A scout platoon conducts a route reconnaissance to answer questions for the
commander about the presence and disposition of obstacles and enemy along a route
and whether it will support the movement of friendly vehicles.
TASKS
3-78. During a route reconnaissance, the platoon prepares to accomplish a wide range
of tasks. Based on time available and the commander’s intent, the platoon may decide
to conduct the reconnaissance to acquire specific information. To be ready for either
type of situation along the route, the platoon leader clearly understands the following
tasks they may have to accomplish in a route reconnaissance:
 Find, report, and based on engagement criteria, clear within capabilities all
enemy forces that can influence movement along the route.
 Reconnoiter and determine the trafficability of the route.
 Reconnoiter all terrain the enemy can use to affect movement along the route.
 Reconnoiter all built-up areas along route.
 Reconnoiter all lateral routes. Conduct out-posting along lateral routes to
identify potential enemy positions and forces that could influence the route.
 Inspect and classify all bridges within the area.
 Reconnoiter defiles along the route, clear of enemy and obstacles (within
capability), or locate a bypass.
 Locate fords or crossing sites near all bridges on the route.
 Locate and clear all IEDs, mines, obstacles, and barriers on the route within
capability.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-27

Chapter 3
 Locate bypasses around built-up areas, obstacles, and contaminated areas.

 Report route information.
CONSIDERATIONS
3-79. Scout platoons usually conduct a detailed reconnaissance of one route, due to the
number of tasks to accomplish in a route reconnaissance. A scout platoon can
reconnoiter a route independently or may operate as part of a larger force such as a
Cavalry troop. Based on the commander’s reconnaissance guidance and intent, the scout
platoon may require engineer assets to assist with the route reconnaissance.
3-80. The OPORD the platoon leader receives specifies the route the platoon must
reconnoiter and defines the route from SP to RP. Additionally, the order should specify
platoon boundaries, LD, and LOA or reconnaissance objective. These control measures
specify how much terrain on both sides of the route the platoon must reconnoiter and
where the operation must begin and end. The scout platoon needs to reconnoiter all
lateral routes and terrain that can influence the route out to at least half the maximum
effective range of their respective vehicles main direct fire weapon system, a technique
known as out-posting.
3-81. During the initial planning phase, the platoon leader must take into consideration
the type of unit the route reconnaissance is supporting. For example, if a platoon is
conducting a route reconnaissance to determine the feasibility of the route to serve as a
main supply route for future logistical convoys, the platoon leader must understand what
types of vehicles will utilize the route. Understanding the purpose of the route enables
the platoon leader to develop platoon NAI’s specifically tied to curves, slopes, bridges,
and other terrain features. See figure 3-12.
3-28 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-12. Route reconnaissance graphics, example
3-82. The platoon leader may add additional graphics and platoon level NAI’s to the
platoon internal graphics. The platoon leader must provide all additional operational
graphics to the troop command post to ensure a clear common operating picture is
present across the entirety of the formation.
3-83. In coordination with the FSO, the platoon leader plans artillery targets on known
or suspected enemy positions and on dominant terrain throughout the AO. The platoon
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-29

Chapter 3
leader evaluates the factors of METT-TC to select a platoon organization of a two or

three section formation. The platoon leader must ensure that at least one section has
responsibility for reconnoitering the route and physically drives the length of the route.
The three-section organization is usually the type best suited to reconnoiter one route.
One section reconnoiters the terrain left of the route, another section covers the terrain
on the right side of the route, and the most experienced section reconnoiters the route.
The platoon leader controls the movement of the other two sections.
EXAMPLE OF A ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE

3-84. When the scout platoon conducts a route reconnaissance, after its SLLS halt, it
often deploys in a vee formation because of the detailed nature of this mission.
Headquarters section is positioned to the left of the route, Bravo section to the right, and
Alpha section in the center of the zone along Route Saber. The platoon should deploy
into the formation prior to reaching Phase Line Patton and conduct its SLLS halt, (LD)
so that it crosses the LD at the specified time. The platoon leader reports crossing the
LD to the troop command post when the first element crosses it.
3-85. The platoon leader is responsible for the scout platoon’s movement through the
sector. The platoon leader uses checkpoints to control the movement and focuses on key
terrain or features that may influence movement along the route.
3-86. Unless the sector is very small or consists of open terrain, the platoon moves as
individual sections. As the sections move to the checkpoints, they maneuver in a zigzag
pattern to clear the sector and complete all critical tasks of the route reconnaissance. The
lead teams on the flanks must observe the route and report any restrictions or obstacles
that may restrict movement along the route. Visually clearing the route before Alpha
section’s maneuvers provides better security and allows Alpha section to concentrate on
the route reconnaissance tasks. As the sections maneuver toward the checkpoints, they
maintain visual contact with the route (see figure 3-13).
3-30 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-13. Route reconnaissance (continued)
3-87. After both lead sections report “SET” at Phase Line Bradley and are in overwatch
positions, Alpha section begins their reconnaissance of the route. As the platoon leader’s
vehicle moves along the route, the wingman maneuvers to provide overwatch for the
reconnaissance. As the platoon leader travels along Route Saber, the platoon leader
normally sends a route classification of the trafficability at intervals designated by the
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-31

Chapter 3
commander. Sending a separate route report occurs only if there is a significant or

unexpected change in the route’s makeup (see figure 3-14).
3-88. As Alpha section clears the route, the other sections move ahead, clearing and
reconnoitering critical and dominant terrain. The platoon leader controls and coordinates
the movement of the sections. The platoon leader must ensure that the flank sections
remain far enough forward of Alpha section to provide security. The flank sections have
3-32 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
also been assigned responsibility for covering lateral routes. Headquarters section is
executing a lateral route and uses checkpoint 8 to tie-in with Alpha section on Route
Saber (see figure 3-15).
3-89. The platoon OPORD must address actions on the approach to the stream. In this
case, the two flank sections have been given the task of locating bypasses in the form of
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-33

Chapter 3
fords or unmapped bridges. Headquarters section is successful in locating a mapped

bridge. Bravo section is unsuccessful in locating a feasible fording site, and maneuvers
to cross the main bridge that is located along the route within Alpha section’s AO.
3-90. Alpha section continues its route reconnaissance along the route until it
approaches the bridge site. It then executes a bridge reconnaissance to establish
trafficability of the bridge. Headquarters section occupies an overwatch position while
Alpha section reconnoiters the bridge. Bravo section continues its reconnaissance one
terrain feature beyond the stream and then occupies a short-duration observation post.
3-91. Alpha section completes its bridge reconnaissance and establishes local security
on the approaches to the far side of the bridge. Once this is complete, Headquarters
section maneuvers across the bridge through Alpha section and continues its
reconnaissance to clear dominant terrain on the left flank of the route. Once Bravo
section is set in sector, the platoon resumes its route reconnaissance to the LOA.
ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE OVERLAY

3-92. Figure 3-16 is an example of graphics in route classification overlays. At a
minimum, they include the following information on the route-classification overlay:
 Route-classification formula.
 Name and rank of person in charge of performing the classification.
 Unit conducting the classification.
 Date-time group (DTG) that the classification was conducted.
 Map name, edition, and scale.
 Any remarks to ensure complete understanding of the information on overlay.
3-34 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-16. Route classification overlay graphics, example
3-93. Figures 3-17a, b, c, d, and e, on pages 3-36 through 3-40, outline a variety of
symbols used to illustrate route reconnaissance data on overlays. Use these symbols in
association with route classification formulas discussed in paragraphs 3-94 through
3-111.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-35

Chapter 3
Figure 3-17a. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols
3-36 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-17b. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-37
Chapter 3
Figure 3-17c. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols
3-38 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-17d. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-39

Chapter 3
Figure 3-17e. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols
ROUTE CLASSIFICATION FORMATS

3-94. Information gathered during the route reconnaissance inputs into the route
classification formula. Record the format on the route-classification overlay as, for
example, 5.5m / Y / 30 / 4.6 (OB) (W). The format consists of the following:
 Traveled width, in meters.
 Route type (based on ability to withstand weather).
 Lowest military load classification (MLC).
 Lowest overhead clearance, in meters.
 Obstructions to traffic flow (OB), if applicable.
 Special conditions, snow blockage (T) or flooding (W), if applicable.
3-40 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Traveled-way Width
3-95. The traveled-way width is the narrowest width of traveled way on a route.
Figure 3-18 outlines the required measurements needed to determine the route’s width.
The narrowest constriction (bridge, tunnel, road, underpass, other) along the route
determines the traveled-way width.
Figure 3-18. Route width formula
Route Type
3-96. The route type is determined by the ability to withstand weather. It is determined
by the worst section of road on the entire route and is categorized as follows:
 Type X. An all-weather route that, with reasonable maintenance, is passable
throughout the year to a volume of traffic never appreciably less than its
maximum capacity. This type of route is normally formed of roads having
waterproof surfaces and being only slightly affected by rain, frost, thaw, or
heat. This type of route is never closed because of weather effects other than
snow or flood blockage.
 Type Y. A limited, all-weather route that is passable throughout the year with
reasonable maintenance, but at times has a volume of traffic considerably less
than maximum capacity. This type of route usually consists of roads that do
not have waterproof surfaces. The route is considerably affected by rain,
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-41

Chapter 3
frost, thaw, or heat. This type of route is closed for short periods (up to one
day at a time) by adverse weather conditions during which heavy use of the
road would probably lead to complete collapse.
 Type Z. A fair-weather route is passable only in fair weather. This type of
route is so seriously affected by adverse weather conditions that it may
remain closed for long periods. Improvement of such a route can only be
achieved by construction or realignment.
Lowest Military Load Classification

3-97. A route MLC is a weight load classification number that represents the safe load
carrying capacity, and it indicates the maximum vehicle class that can be accepted under
normal conditions. Usually, the lowest bridge MLC (regardless of the vehicle type or
conditions of traffic flow) determines the route MLC. If there is not a bridge on the
route, the worst section of road determines the overall classification of the route.
Requirements for Classification Numbers

3-98. Classification numbers are mandatory for all self-propelled vehicles having a total
weight of three tons or more, and all trailers with a payload of 1.5 tons or greater. (Refer
to Standardization Agreement 2021.) Trailers with a rated capacity of less than 1.5 tons
are usually combined with their towing vehicles for classification. During the
classification process, vehicles are future divide into two groups—those with trailers
(vehicle combination class number [known as CCN]) and those without (single vehicle
classification number)—and calculated for each vehicle classification.
Procedures for Vehicle Classification

3-99. The actual mathematical computation of a vehicle’s MLC is beyond the capability
of route reconnaissance teams, scouts use the temporary procedures described in
paragraph 3-100. MLC information is found in the vehicle’s technical manual or on the
dash’s data plate located on the dashboard.
Temporary Procedure for Vehicle Classification

3-100. When a single vehicle tows another vehicle at a distance less than 30.5 meters
and the vehicles are not designed as one unit, the temporary vehicle assign MLC number
to this combination. The classification number assigned is nine-tenths of the sum of the
normal vehicle classification numbers if the total of both classifications is less than 60.
If the sum of the two military classification numbers is 60 or over, then the total becomes
the MLC number for the nonstandard combination.
CCN = 0.9 (A + B) if A + B < 60

CCN = A + B if A + B > 60
where—
A = class of first vehicle
B = class of second vehicle
3-42 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Expedient Procedure – Wheeled Vehicle Classification

3-101. On occasions when a vehicle needs classification in the field, observe and
compare the unclassified vehicle to a vehicle that is similar. Compare the axle loads,
gross weight, and dimensions of the unclassified vehicle with those of a similar
classification.
Example of Expedient Procedure for Wheeled Vehicle

Classification
The expedient classification for a wheeled vehicle is estimated to
be 85 percent of its total weight. Determine the vehicle’s gross
weight; multiply the air pressure in the tires (in pounds per square
inch [psi]) by the total area (in square inches) of the tires in contact
with the ground. If a gauge is not available, use 75 psi as an average
value, which yields an approximate weight of the vehicle in pounds.
Convert this figure to tons and find 85 percent of the weight in tons.
Expedient Procedure – Tracked Vehicle Classification

3-102. Tracked vehicles weigh about one ton per square foot of track contact with the
ground. Determining the area of track in contact with the ground, assigns the vehicle’s
gross weight. When vehicles weigh a fraction over whole tonnage, assign the next higher
classification number.
Lowest Overhead Clearance

3-103. The lowest overhead clearance is the vertical distance between the road surface
and any overhead obstacle that denies the use of the road to some vehicles. Use the
infinity symbol for unlimited clearance in the route classification format. Points along
the route where the minimum overhead clearance is less than 4.3 meters are considered
an obstruction.
Obstructions to Traffic Flow

3-104. Several route characteristics are considered obstructions. Annotate the
following obstructions on the overlay with graphics and include in the route
classification formula as OB (table 3-2, page 3-44 contains information to determine
traffic flow capability):
 Overhead obstructions with a clearance of less than 4.3 meters.
 Reductions in traveled-way widths that are below the standard minimums.
 Curves with a radius of 25 meters and less. Curves with a radius of 25.1 to
45 meters are not considered an obstruction; however, they must be recorded
on the route classification overlay.
 Slopes (gradients) of seven percent or greater.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-43

Chapter 3
 Ferries.
 Fords.
Table 3-2. Traffic flow capability based on route width

Limited Access Single Lane Single Flow Double Flow
Wheeled At least 3.5 m 3.5 to 5.5 m 5.5 to 7.3 m Over 7.3 m
Tracked and
At least 4.0 m 4.0 to 6.0 m 6.0 to 8.0 m Over 8 m
wheeled vehicles
Legend: m – meters
Seasonal Conditions
3-105. Use specific symbols to depict special conditions:
 When snow blocks traffic on a regular and recurrent basis, the symbol
following the route-classification formula is T.
 When flooding blocks traffic on a regular and recurrent basis, the symbol
following the route-classification formula is W.
Curves
3-106. The speed at which vehicles move along a route is affected by sharp curves.
Curves with a radius of 25 meters or less are obstructions to traffic. These curves are
indicated as obstructions on the route classification format b the annotation OB.
3-107. There are three methods available to measure the radius of a curve. Each of the
following methods provide adequate information about the curve:
 Tape measure.
 Triangulation.
 Chord.
3-108. Figure 3-19 is an example of a method of determining a curve’s radius based

upon the following formula (all measurements are in meters) shown below:
3-44 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
2 2
R=M +C
2M
R = radius of the curve.
C = one-half the distance from the centerline of the road
to the outer extremities of the curve.
M = the perpendicular distance from the center of the
tape to the centerline of the road.
Figure 3-19. Chord method for determining curve radius
3-109. Figure 3-20 is an example of how to utilize the radius of a curve formula once
the data has been collected by the scout platoon.
Figure 3-20. Radius of curve formula
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-45

Chapter 3
3-110. The example below follows the method of determining a curve’s radius based
upon the formula R = (57.3 x L) / (DC) (all measurements are in meters):
R = Radius of curve
L = Length of curve from star of curve to end of curve
DC = Degree change from azimuths. (The degree change in
azimuths is the change between the azimuth taken in the direction
of travel entering the curve to the azimuth taken in the direction of
travel exiting the curve.) (See figure 3-21.)
3-46 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-21. Radius of curve formula example
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-47

Chapter 3
Slope
3-111. There are several formulas and methods to determine the gradient of slope, as
shown in figure 3-22, figures 3-23 and 3-24, on page 3-49 and 3-50.
Figure 3-22. Gradient of slope formula
3-48 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-23. Pace method for percentage slope
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-49

Chapter 3
Figure 3-24. Map method for percentage slope
PLATOON LEADER RESPONSIBILITIES AND CONSIDERATIONS

3-112. The platoon leader integrates route reconnaissance information as they collect
it into the overall route recon report. The collection team that actually conducts the
reconnaissance disseminates this information to the platoon and team leaders. The
platoon leader ensures they enter all information into the appropriate report formats on
tactical internet systems, such as joint capabilities release, and forward to the higher
headquarters for collection.
3-113. Route reconnaissance continues until the section reaches the RP. The platoon
continues to move in their assigned section boundaries to a distance of approximately 2
to 3 kilometers (km) (based on threat and terrain) beyond the RP for security purposes.
The platoon then transitions to its follow-on mission as dictated in the OPORD. Upon
completion, the platoon leader reports the results of the reconnaissance to the
commander. If the platoon leader or engineer assets developed a route overlay, it is
included in the report.
3-50 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
RECONNAISSANCE IN FORCE
3-114. A reconnaissance in force is a squadron-level mission. Reconnaissance in force
is an aggressive reconnaissance which develops information and intelligence in contact
with the enemy to determine and exploit enemy weaknesses. The scout platoon usually
conducts zone or an attack in support of the unit conducting the reconnaissance in force
mission. (Refer to ATP 3-20.96 for more information on a reconnaissance in force).
Tasks for reconnaissance in force include—
 Penetrate the enemy’s security area and determine its size and depth.
 Determine the location and disposition of enemy forces.
 Attack enemy positions and attempt to force the enemy to react by using local
reserves or major counterattack forces, employing fires, adjusting positions,
and employing specific weapon systems.
 Determine weaknesses in the enemy’s disposition for exploitation.
 Locate obstacles and create lanes as specified.
 Entering AOs in complex terrain not previously occupied by friendly forces,
such as urban environments.
SPECIAL RECONNAISSANCE
3-115. Special reconnaissance is reconnaissance and surveillance actions conducted
as a special operation in hostile, denied, or politically sensitive environments to collect
or verify information of strategic or operational significance, employing military
capabilities not normally found in conventional forces (JP 3-05).
SECTION III – RECONNAISSANCE HANDOVER

3-116. RHO is the process of planning, preparing, and executing transfer of
responsibility and information from one element to another to facilitate continued
observation or surveillance of enemy contact or an assigned area. The term element
refers to all echelons involved in the RHO, from observation posts to squadron and
battalion-sized components. Scout platoons can be the transferring element, the
receiving element, or provide command and control for the RHO.
3-117. An RHO may cover an area or zone, such as an AO, NAI, TAI, avenues of
approach, or any enemy elements. It involves transferring physical, visual, electronic,
or digital observation in any number of combinations. Assets such as ground sensors
and UAS may transfer. Scout platoons execute an RHO with a designated RHO
coordination point, phase line where reconnaissance responsibility transitions from one
element to another known as the reconnaissance handover line, or trigger such as visual
contact with threat forces outside of the platoon’s engagement criteria.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-51

Chapter 3
3-118. RHOs can occur in offensive or defensive reconnaissance and security

operations. Normally, the platoon leadership can find conditions and criteria for
conducting RHOs in the commander’s reconnaissance or security guidance for
displacement criteria located in the troop OPORD, FRAGORD, or WARNORD. If the
commander does not dictate conditions or criteria within the OPORD, platoon leadership
MUST submit requests for information to the commander prior to SP or LD.
3-119. A successful RHO ensures that there are no violations of any of the
fundamentals of reconnaissance or security. This transfer of responsibility and
information prevents gaps or seams from emerging that the enemy can exploit. If
conducting target handover, the receiving unit acquires the target before handover is
complete.
3-120. Once an RHO is complete during reconnaissance, the element transferring
control either conducts an RPOL as the passing unit through the main body receiving
responsibility, acts as the stationary unit in a forward passage of lines (known as FPOL)
for the element receiving responsibility, or continues further into zone to continue their
reconnaissance mission.
3-121. In security operations such as a screen or guard, it is common to have a phase
line or RHO line between the scout platoon and its adjacent unit where the responsibility
to maintain contact with the threat transfers once the threat crosses that line. The element
transferring control maintains contact with threat forces until the threat crosses the RHO
line, conducts an RPOL as the passing unit, or conducts an FPOL as the stationary unit.
3-122. Typically, the elements accepting an RHO are another scout platoon or a
maneuver organization prepared to begin offensive operations to complete an RHO.
Additionally, units may execute RHOs with aerial assets such as UAS, and attack
aviation.
3-123. Several tasks for RHO are shared with a battle handover, including relief in
place, linkup, and passage of lines. Unlike BHO, however, it does not imply the
assumption of a fight or being within enemy direct fire range, but focuses on planning,
preparing, and executing the transfer of responsibility and information of an assigned
area from one element to another. An RHO or reconnaissance handover line may turn
into a BHO or battle handover line (BHL) quickly during reconnaissance if the scout
platoon contacts a superior enemy force.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
3-124. Reconnaissance and security tasks require the platoon conducting the handover
to effectively coordinate with higher, lower, and adjacent units. Planning for these tasks
requires the RHO coordination to start at the higher echelons and execute at the lowest
element.
3-125. Scout platoons must have a thorough understanding of the RHO criteria, and
follow the control measures specified by higher headquarters. The unit commander
directs how to transfer handover to other elements. Platoon leadership coordinates and
executes RHO tasks using planning steps such as—
3-52 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
 Coordinating for redundant surveillance to assist in maintaining enemy

contact.
 Determining location, timeline, and criteria for RHO.
 Preparing and understanding a multi-layered communications plan between
elements.
 Exchanging all plans and information gathered about the AO.
 Notifying troop of the progress of the handover.
 Identifying and coordinating for target handover, as necessary.
 Synchronizing indirect fires and exchanging fire support information.
 Selecting secure contact points or linkup points.
 Exchanging information and information gathering assets.
 Coordinating transfer and acceptance of responsibility between units.
 Rehearsals.
 Recognizing signals.
RECONNAISSANCE HANDOVER PRIORITY OF

REHEARSALS
3-126. Scout platoons may conduct RHOs with follow-on or security (stationary)
forces, accept RHOs from a forward force, or provide mission command for the
handover. Include the following priorities of rehearsals in the platoon’s planning
timeline:
 Actions on contact incorporating both transferring and receiving elements,
for likely forms of contact.
 Movement between vehicles hide and vehicle BPs.
 Displacement from dismounted and mounted observation posts sequentially
or simultaneously.
 Linkup procedures.
 Information exchange such as graphic control measures, direct fire plan,
indirect fire plan, recognition signals, CCIR, situation reports (SITREPs), and
any supporting assets.
 Target handover.
 Communications: PACE plan.
 CASEVAC or MEDEVAC plan for both transferring and receiving elements.
 Passage of lines procedures.
 Relief in place procedures.
 Other actions deemed necessary per METT-TC.
 Execution of an RHO.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-53

Chapter 3
EXAMPLE OF RECONNAISSANCE HANDOVER

3-127. The following vignette describes a possible RHO. Phase 1 – The scout platoon
is conducting a zone reconnaissance to reconnoiter key terrain, determine feasibility of
all routes within platoon boundaries for follow-on forces, and also to determine if the
NAI Bruder contains threat forces. Prior to performing reconnaissance on NAI Odom,
the scout platoon leader deploys a dismount team on elevated terrain to the north in an
attempt to gain observation on NAI Bruder. The team sets an observation post on the
mountain. They observe what appears to be a squad of enemy dismounts manning
fighting positions on the northeastern outskirts of NAI Bruder. The observation post
team sends a BLUE 1 report to the platoon leader, with a recommendation to cue UAS
for mixing and deploying another observation post team for redundancy. The platoon
leader agrees, decides to deploy another dismounted team to establish an observation
post vicinity the southwest mountain within the AO and coordinates with troop
command for UAS (see figure 3-25). Commander’s reconnaissance guidance is as
follows:
 Focus – Terrain based focus with how it favors the enemy.
 Tempo – Stealthy and rapid. Movement should prioritize remaining
undetected.
 Engagement criteria – Dismount teams of nine or fewer, two or fewer Russian
combat reconnaissance patrol vehicles (known as BRDMs)/Russian class of
armored vehicles (known as BTRs,) two or fewer Russian amphibious
tracked infantry fighting vehicles (known as BMPs), one tank.
 Disengagement criteria – 10 or more dismounts, three or more BMPs, three
or more BRDM/BTRs, two or more tanks.
 Displacement criteria- Troop and platoon receives change of mission from
squadron to continue reconnaissance after the RHO with battalion scouts, if
enemy outside of engagement criteria is identified.
3-54 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-25. Reconnaissance handover
3-128. Phase 2 – Instead of immediately engaging the enemy, the platoon leader
decides to develop the situation on NAI Bruder. (See figure 3-26, on page 3-57) After
deploying an additional observation post team and flying the UAS, scouts realized there
are multiple fighting positions located on the perimeter of NAI Bruder and an additional
platoon of enemy dismounted forces located in the center, which is well outside of the
scout platoon’s engagement criteria. To maintain contact while continuing mission, the
scout platoon conducts a RHO with the Infantry battalion scouts. The platoon leader
sends an updated BLUE 1 to the troop commander, with recommendation to conduct the
RHO. The troop commander agrees, and directs the Cavalry scout platoon to continue
zone reconnaissance South of NAI Bruder after the RHO is complete (see figure 3-27
on page 3-58). The platoon leader begins to conduct the necessary coordination’s for the
RHO, which includes:
 Preparing and understanding a multilayered communications plan between
elements.
 Exchanging all plans and information gathered about the AO.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-55

Chapter 3
 Identifying and coordinating for target handover, as necessary.

 Synchronizing indirect fires and exchanging fire support information.
 Selecting contact points or linkup points that will not become compromised.
 Exchanging information and information gathering assets.
 Coordinating transfer and acceptance of responsibility between units.
 Recognizing signals.
3-129. Commanders reconnaissance guidance for this phase is—
 Focus – terrain and how it favors the enemy.
 Tempo – stealthy and rapid. Stay undetected, use terrain to move quickly.
 Engagement criteria – Dismount teams of nine or fewer, two or fewer
BRDM/BTRs, two or fewer BMPs, one tank.
 Disengagement criteria – 10 or more dismounts, 3 or more BMP, 3 or more
BRDM/BTR, 2 or more tanks.
 Displacement criteria – Troop and platoon receives change of mission from
squadron to continue reconnaissance after an RHO with battalion scouts, if
enemy outside of engagement criteria is identified.
3-56 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
Figure 3-26. Reconnaissance handover phase II
3-130. Phase 3 – The platoon leader establishes communications with the battalion
scouts, and gives criteria for near and far side recognition signals. The platoon
establishes the linkup at the intersection of route Reyes and route Maynard. Via the
radio, the scout platoon leader provides the more pertinent aspects of the AO such as
enemy composition, disposition, location, indirect fire plan, and actions on contact for
both elements while conducting the RHO. The platoon leader also sends photos of NAI
Bruder and photos of any sector sketches or range cards developed at the observation
posts via data transfer using the AN/PRC-150 radio. At the linkup, the transferring unit
and receiving unit discuss any other aspects that would not have been feasible discussing
over the radio. Since this is a target handover, the scout platoon maintains contact with
the threat until the battalion scouts are in position to observe (see figure 3-27).
Commanders reconnaissance guidance is as follows:
 Focus – Unchanged.
 Tempo – stealthy and rapid. Stay undiscovered but continue to move rapidly.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-57

Chapter 3
 Engagement criteria – Dismount teams of nine or fewer, two or fewer

BRDM/BTRs, two or fewer BMPs, one tank.
 Disengagement criteria – 10 or more dismounts, three or more BMPs, three
or more BRDM/BTRs, two or more tanks.
 Displacement criteria – Bypass enemy and continue with reconnaissance
after the RHO with battalion scouts if enemy outside of engagement criteria
are identified.
Figure 3-27. Reconnaissance handover phase III
BATTLE HANDOVER
3-131. A battle handover is an operation generally associated with a passage of lines
in which a stationary unit and a passing unit transfer responsibility for fighting a threat
force from one unit to another. A BHL is a designated phase line on the ground where
responsibility transitions from the stationary force to the moving force and vice versa.
The battle handover’s purpose is to sustain continuity of the fight and to prevent the
3-58 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
threat from moving unopposed on the battlefield as one force picks up the fight from
another. It also preserves the fighting capabilities of both friendly units. It shares many
tasks and planning considerations with an RHO. The difference between the RHO and
a battle handover is that the focus is primarily threat, and there is an assumption of a
fight for the receiving element of a battle handover. Battle handovers can occur in both
reconnaissance and security operations.
3-132. A battle handover can occur during either offensive or defensive operations.
During defensive operations, usual planning and coordination occurs in advance to
facilitate execution and usually involves a RPOL. In the offense, it is situation dependent
and often initiated by a FRAGORD. A battle handover usually occurs in the offense
when one unit passes through or around another unit. Orders or tactical SOPs containing
clear, simple, standardized procedures and control measures enhance the ability of units
to coordinate without experiencing a corresponding loss in momentum.
PASSAGE OF LINES
3-133. Passage of lines is an operation in which a force moves forward or rearward
through another force’s combat positions with the intention of moving into or out of
contact with the enemy. Designate passages as a FPOL or RPOL. Passage of lines is
inherently a high risk activity that requires detailed planning, rehearsals, and
communication to mitigate risk to friendly forces and operational tempo.
3-134. Scout platoons conducts a passage of lines in support of another friendly
element’s attack or counterattack, retrograde security or main battle forces, and any time
one unit cannot bypass another unit’s position. The conduct of a passage of lines
potentially involves close combat. It involves transferring the responsibility for an AO
between two commanders. That transfer of authority usually occurs when roughly
two-thirds of the passing force moves through the passage point. If not directed by
higher authority, the unit commanders determine—by mutual agreement—the time to
pass command. They disseminate this information to the lowest levels of both
organizations. RHOs or battle handovers occur during a passage of lines, because there
is a transfer of responsibility between units for the AO. There are three key elements in
a passage of lines: the stationary unit, the passing unit, and the commander.
3-135. Conditions and criteria for conducting a passage of lines are normally in the
commander’s reconnaissance or security guidance for displacement criteria, located in
the troop OPORD, FRAGORD, or WARNORD.
3-136. A passage of lines occurs under two conditions: FPOL and RPOL. FPOL occur
when a unit passes through another unit’s positions while moving toward the enemy.
RPOL occur when a unit passes through another unit’s positions while moving away
from the enemy. A unit may participate in a passage of lines as either the passing or
stationary force. Ideally, a passage of lines does not interfere with conducting the
stationary unit’s operations.
3-137. The scout platoon, acting independently or as part of a higher passage, may be
either the stationary or the passing unit. The platoon normally assists in some portion of
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-59

Chapter 3
the passage of lines and may coordinate the passage. In many cases, the scout platoon
conducts a passage separate from its higher headquarters.
3-138. Control measures associated with a passage of lines are generally restrictive to
prevent friendly fire incidents. At a minimum, they include the AO, avenues of
approach, attack positions, BHL, reconnaissance handover line, contact points, passage
points, passage lanes, routes, gaps, phase lines, and recognition signals. The
headquarters directing the passage designates or recommends contact points, passage
lanes, avenues of approach, routes, and start and end times for the passage. The
commander may also use SP, RP, fire support coordination measures, such as
coordinated fire lines, and other control measures as necessary to conduct this task.
Unless the higher headquarters of the two units establishes the necessary graphic control
measures, the stationary unit establishes them for the passage. However, the stationary
unit commander coordinates them with the passing unit commander. The stationary unit
establishes these measures because it controls the terrain, knows where the obstacles
are, and knows the tactical plan. If the control measures dictated by the higher
headquarters are not sufficient—because they do not contain enough passage points,
lanes, and so forth, the two units can agree to add the necessary measures.
PASSING UNIT TASKS

3-139. The passing unit accomplishes several tasks during the passage of lines in the
RHO and battle handover including—
 Establishing communications immediately, entering the command,
intelligence, and fire support communication nets of the stationary unit.
 Collocating a unit or vehicle with the tactical command post or main
command post of the stationary unit as soon as possible to enhance
communication and unity of effort.
 Reporting continuously to the stationary unit during a rearward passage the
location, size, composition, and current activity of all threat forces. If the
threat is attacking, the passing unit reports the direction of movement,
movement formation, and estimated rate of advance. If the threat is
defending, the passing unit reports threat locations, orientation, composition,
engagement area, reserves (if known), obstacle systems, and flanks.
 Reporting continuously to the stationary unit the location, size, and activity
of all parent unit elements, including augmentation, sustainment, and mission
command assets.
 Coordinating with the stationary unit based upon the current dispositions of
the parent unit to determine contact points for subordinate elements (such as
scout sections) to synchronize handover and passage of lines with
representatives of the stationary unit. Once determining contact points, the
passing unit leader sends a FRAGORD to all elements specifying the location
for the passage with the stationary unit. The passing unit confirms recognition
signals used during passage.
 Ensuring subordinate elements acknowledge where to coordinate the passage
and that representatives are dispatched to the assigned contact points. At the
3-60 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
contact points, the representatives confirm recognition signals and exchange

required information with their counterparts from the stationary unit.
 Maintaining visual contact with all threat units in a rearward passage,
conducting movement back to the reconnaissance handover line and BHL,
and avoiding decisive engagements.
 Displaying correct recognition signals and using the correct challenge and
password as specified in the signal operating instructions during the passage.
 Maintaining proper weapons orientation.
STATIONARY UNIT TASKS

3-140. The stationary unit accomplishes a variety of tasks when ordered to conduct a
passage of lines during an RHO and a battle handover. These tasks include—
 Establishing communications, coordinating necessary contact points, and
directing the passing unit to the contact points based on current dispositions
of the designated units.
 Exchanging fire support plans to include target lists and fire support contact
frequencies.
 Ensuring contact points are manned and secured, and that passing elements
have established personal communication with their representatives.
 Ensuring representatives at the contact points assign each passing element a
passage point into the AO, and a route that extends from the passage points
to the rear boundary or assembly area (in a rearward passage) or to the attack
position (in a forward passage).
 Exchanging required information, including Force XXI Battle Command,
brigade and below, with the passing unit as outlined in their unit SOP.
 Positioning elements to overwatch the reconnaissance handover line and
BHL where they have the best possible observation of threat avenues of
approach, adjusting as necessary during limited visibility.
 Ensuring routes through a system are clearly marked and physically
controlled by guides, or escorts provided to the passing unit.
 Ensuring all routes of withdrawal obligated to the passing unit are
unobstructed facilitates rapid movement to the rearward passage.
 Ensuring obligated routes of advance, attack positions, and routes to the
reconnaissance handover line and BHL are clear and facilitate rapid
movement (forward passage).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-61

Chapter 3
PREPARATION
3-141. Units are particularly vulnerable during a passage of lines. Effective preparation
is critical because subordinate elements may be concentrated, stationary unit fires may
be temporarily masked, and the passing unit may not be disposed properly to react to
enemy actions. To assist in preparing for the passage, the commander may task
subordinate units with a number of missions, including detailed reconnaissance and
coordination. Graphic control measures include considerations such as the following:
 Reconnaissance handover line and BHL. The leader of the unit, in
consultation with both commanders, establishes a reconnaissance handover
line and BHL. The stationary unit leader determines the location of the
reconnaissance handover line and BHL and overwatches the line with direct
fires.
 Fire support coordination measures. If necessary, these are established or
identified.
 Contact points. Establish these on identifiable terrain and are normally in the
vicinity of the passage lanes. For RPOL, establish the contact points forward
of the reconnaissance handover line and BHL. For forward passage, establish
the contact points in the stationary unit’s AO, rearward of the passage lanes.
 Passage points. Passage points are a specifically designated place where the
passing units pass through the stationary unit. The location of this point is
where the commander deems most suitable to control movement.
 In a FPOL, the passage point marks the location where the passing unit
is no longer bound by the restrictions placed on it by the stationary force.
 In a RPOL, the passage point marks the location where the stationary
unit can restrict the movement and maneuver of the passing force.
Between the contact point and the passage point, the stationary unit
controls the passing force’s movement.
 Passage lanes. The stationary unit establishes passage lanes to move the
passing unit quickly through defending unit positions. This could include
passing through gaps in friendly obstacles and moving near or through
friendly engagement areas and BPs. Lanes are restrictive and should be wide
enough to allow the passing unit to move in a tactical formation. The passage
lane begins at the passage point and ends at the rear of the stationary unit BPs.
The passage is complete when the moving unit exits the lane.
 Routes. Routes are used to move the passing unit through the stationary unit.
The number of routes designated varies based upon METT-TC. As a general
rule, plan multiple lanes to facilitate rapid passage of moving units and to
avoid unnecessary massing of units. The stationary unit may escort or guide
the passing unit along the lane/route.
3-62 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
 Assembly area. An assembly area in the AO of the stationary unit allows the
passing unit to conduct hasty reorganization and emergency sustainment
actions. This assembly area is temporary in nature.
 Exfiltration points. Leaders should plan infiltration points and lanes for
personnel unable to complete the passage with their unit. Passing unit liaison
officers may remain located with stationary unit command posts to serve as
a point of contact for infiltrating personnel and equipment. Personnel who
infiltrate must have some way of contacting the stationary unit before
crossing into friendly territory.
COORDINATION
3-142. Coordination for the RHO and battle handover occurs at a preplanned contact
point where critical information is exchanged from the commander out of contact to the
commander in contact. Coordination for the passage of lines and the handover should
occur simultaneously.
3-143. The scout platoon leader plays a major role in coordination for handover and
passage of lines. The platoon leader is responsible for conducting reconnaissance to
obtain information for use by the parent unit and the platoon. The platoon leader then
uses this information in the coordination process.
3-144. During the scout platoon’s reconnaissance, the platoon leader must confirm the
following factors:
 The disposition of the stationary force through which the platoon and its
parent unit passes.
 The location of contact points where both units are required to make physical
contact at a predetermined time.
 The location of passage lanes that provide a clear route through the stationary
unit’s position to facilitate a smooth and continuous passage. Select
unoccupied positions or ones on the flanks of units in position. If possible,
the platoon leader should reconnoiter multiple routes that can reduce
vulnerability during the mission.
 The rear boundary or assembly area (in a rearward passage) or the attack
position (in a forward passage). This position should provide cover and
concealment and be located where the passing unit does not interfere with the
stationary unit.
 The initial locations for enablers and sustainment elements of the platoon’s
parent unit.
3-145. Based on this reconnaissance, the platoon leader coordinates the following
information:
 Contact points (primary and alternate) and passage points.
 Passage lanes, including the SP, RP, and critical points.
 The LD.
 Location and number of guides and guide vehicles.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-63

Chapter 3
 Routes through obstacles, including alternate routes.

 Sustainment plans, including resupply (classes III and V), maintenance,
MEDEVAC and CASEVAC, and disposition of enemy prisoners of war
(EPWs).
 Traffic control factors, such as number of vehicles by type.
 Time of the passage.
 Rally points; the rear boundary or assembly area (rearward passage), or the
attack position (forward passage).
 Actions on contact, if required during the passage.
 Times for transfer of responsibility for control of the sector, handover of the
enemy, and reconnaissance handover line, or BHL.
 Exchange of information both enemy and friendly situation.
ASSIST WITH A PASSAGE OF LINES

3-146. The platoon enhances mission command for the commander, who may require
the platoon to assist other units in the passage of lines. The platoon may conduct tasks
of a stationary or passing unit, or assist its parent unit.
3-147. Elements of the platoon may help in securing contact and passage points where
units meet and pass or reconnoiter possible passage lanes (primary and alternate),
clearing them of obstacles (within capability), and marking their locations. The platoon
may conduct area reconnaissance of attack positions (forward passage) and assembly
area locations (rearward passage), including a requirement to check for CBRN and high-
yield explosive contamination.
3-148. The platoon may assist the commander by occupying observation posts or
conducting patrols to provide a continuous flow of information about the enemy
situation or guide units from contact points to or through passage lanes. The platoon
may also control traffic at the passage point and in the lane or act as a communications
link by positioning in the passage area in case units involved in the passage have trouble
staying in contact with each other.
EXECUTING A FORWARD PASSAGE OF LINES AS THE PASSING FORCE

3-149. An FPOL is usually executed using a column or staggered column formation
along a covered and concealed route. The scout platoon ensures they maintain proper
weapon orientation and follow weapons hold status at all times. The platoon makes sure
that proper recognition signals, such as VS-17 and chemical light sticks, are displayed
properly. The platoon leader and PSG monitor the stationary unit’s radio frequency
throughout the passage of lines.
3-150. Upon reaching the contact point, the PSG or designated leader positions
themselves with the stationary unit’s representative. Together they count the vehicles
and personnel to ensure all elements move into the passage lane.
3-151. Once the platoon enters the passage lane it does not stop or block the lane. All
elements move through the passage lane until they reach the RP on the far side. If a
3-64 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance
vehicle becomes inoperable in the passage lane, the platoon attempts to self-recover. If
requiring recovery assets, the stationary unit dispatches a team to pull the inoperable
vehicle back to the contact point and clear the passage.
3-152. If the platoon receives indirect fire during their passage, they continue
movement to the RP as the stationary unit has responsibility for directing counterbattery
fire. The platoon leader should give a spot report (SPOTREP) to the stationary unit
command post to ensure they have situational awareness.
3-153. If the platoon receives direct fire during the passage, they return fire as they
maneuver to the RP. It is important that the platoon stay within the passage lane to avoid
fratricide. The stationary unit returns fire on enemy positions, and has clear lanes of fire
to effectively accomplish this.
3-154. Upon reaching the RP, the platoon deploys in sector. Elements cross the LD
when adequate cover is available and permission is given prior to crossing. Once all
elements reach the LD and assume covered positions to observe the assigned sectors,
the platoon leader notifies the commander. The passing commander notifies the
stationary commander and assumes responsibility of the AO forward of the
reconnaissance handover line and BHL. The platoon then starts their primary mission as
outlined in the OPORD.
EXECUTING A REARWARD PASSAGE OF LINES AS THE PASSING FORCE

3-155. In an RPOL as the passing force, the platoon is forward of the reconnaissance
handover line or BHL conducting reconnaissance or security tasks. The PSG or a
designated platoon representative maneuvers to the contact point forward of the
stationary unit’s positions. It is very important to display that weapons orientation and
recognition signals to avoid fratricide. Upon linkup at the contact point, the PSG or
platoon representative verifies passage instructions with the stationary unit
representative. Collect all information and transmit instructions to the remainder of the
platoon. On the order of the higher commander, the platoon begins movement to the
contact point.
3-156. As vehicles or personnel reach the contact point, count them and continue
moving to the SP of the passage lane. Platoon elements may not all arrive at the contact
point simultaneously, but still continue movement to the rear. Once elements enter the
passage lane, they do not stop until they reach the RP and the tactical assembly area
located nearby. The PSG is the last element of the platoon to enter the passage lane.
After existing the lane and passing the RP, the PSG notifies the commander that upon
the platoon clearing the passage lane.
3-157. The first elements of the platoon that reaches the tactical assembly area take up
the 12 o’clock position and ensure the following elements take up positions on the
perimeter. As the platoon sets in the tactical assembly area, they report to the platoon
leader. Once the entire platoon reaches the tactical assembly area, the platoon leader
notifies the commander and begins movement rearward.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 3-65

Chapter 4
Security
Scout platoons conduct security missions to provide early and

accurate warning of enemy actions, provide time and maneuver
space to react to the enemy, and develop a situation that allows the
commander effective use of the protected force. The scout platoon
conducts security tasks in conjunction with reconnaissance
missions.
The scout platoon may operate at considerable distances from the

friendly elements it is protecting, limited only by communications
capabilities and the range of direct fire, CAS, and indirect fire
support. Scout platoons can conduct security missions
independently or as part of a larger force.
Contents
Page
SECTION I. Basics of Security Tasks 4-1
SECTION II. Forms of Security Tasks 4-6
SECTION III. Counterreconnaissance 4-31
SECTION I – BASICS OF SECURITY TASKS

4-1. Security is inherent in all operations and is always the first priority of work.
Continual reconnaissance and the development of information requirements are the
means to provide security. Security operations follow the fundamentals of security to
ensure early and accurate warning of enemy forces and provide reaction time and
maneuver space to develop the situation and allow the commander to determine the most
effective use of force to neutralize, defeat, or destroy enemy forces. There are five forms
of security operations: screen, guard, cover, area security, and local security. Each form
provides varying levels of protection to the main body with the desired form selected by
weighing operational and mission variables with the end state.
4-2. The main difference between security operations and reconnaissance operations
is that security operations orient on the protected force or facility, while reconnaissance
is enemy and terrain oriented. However, security operations cannot be divorced from
reconnaissance missions as one of the fundamentals of security is to perform continuous
reconnaissance. Security operations prevent enemy reconnaissance assets from
determining friendly locations, strengths, and weaknesses.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-1

Chapter 4
FUNDAMENTALS OF SECURITY
4-3. The fundamentals of security are important to the scout platoon because they
provide the platoon direction and focus when executing security tasks. Successful
security missions depend on the scout platoon properly applying the five fundamentals
of security.
4-4. Provide early and accurate warning. Detecting the enemy force quicklyand
reporting accurate and timely information providesearly warning to the protected force
commander. Early warning provides the time, space, and details needed to retain the
tactical initiative, enabling the commander to choose the time and place to concentrate
friendly forces and assets against the observed enemy.
4-5. Provide reaction time and maneuver space. The scout platoon normally operates
as far from the protected force as possible, consistent with the factors of METT-TC.
Greater distances generally yield greater reaction time and maneuver space for the
protected force commander. If necessary, the scout platoon fights to gain time and space
for the commander.
4-6. Orient on the force, area, or facility to protect. While reconnaissance tasks focuses
on a reconnaissance objective, security tasks orients on the protected force or facility.
The scout platoon directs all of its actions on securing the protected force or facility and
providing maximum early warning of enemy activity. While the platoon orients on the
force to protect, they still focus on the terrain, the enemy, or civilian population. The
scout platoon operates between the protected force and known or suspected enemy
elements. The scout platoon moves as the protected force moves, either to the protected
force’s flank or to the protected force’s rear.
4-7. Perform continuous reconnaissance. The scout platoon conducts continuous
reconnaissance during security missions to gain as much information as possible about
the AO and enemy. The platoon uses combinations of observation posts, Army aviation,
UAS, patrols, and other information collection assets to perform continuous
reconnaissance in an attempt to determine enemy composition and disposition as well
as key factors about the AO.
4-8. Maintain enemy contact. Scout platoons maintain contact with the enemy once
contact is made unless otherwise directed. Although contact does not have to be
maintained by the individual section or team, the scout platoon stays in contact
collectively and continuously by maintaining the capability to use one or more of the
forms of contact, including depth of observers in time and space. Maintaining enemy
contact through one or more of the eight forms of contact enables the platoon leader to
make recommendations to the commander and generate options for the protected force
commander to identify and exploit windows of opportunity.
SECURITY PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

4-9. Scout platoons augment with assets such as engineer or Infantry squads, ground
surveillance systems, artillery observers, air defense assets, and UAS assets when
4-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
conducting security tasks. Scout platoon leaders should take the following into
consideration when planning to execute security missions:
 Location and orientation of the security area.
 Initial observation post locations.
 Types and duration of observation posts.
 Time available to establish the security force.
 Criteria for ending the security mission.
 Augmentation requirements of the force.
 Intelligence support to security mission.
 Special requirements or constraints.
 Direct and indirect fires planning.
 Integration of ground and air operations.
 Use of movement corridors.
 Planning the engineer effort.
 Reporting criteria.
 Concept of sustainment.
COMMANDER’S SECURITY GUIDANCE

4-10. The troop commander develops security guidance based on the squadron
commander’s guidance and overall plan. An understanding of this guidance aids the troop
commander in planning and executing the troop’s mission. The squadron commander’s
security guidance enables the commander to specify guidance and intent for subordinate
leaders. Platoon leaders must disseminate the commander’s guidance to the lowest level
to ensure all leaders and Soldiers understand and can execute the mission. The
commander’s security guidance consists of the same four elements included in
reconnaissance guidance.
4-11. Focus. The focus of security tasks defines what the scout platoon is to protect and
why – the focus describes the expected results of the security mission. The focus of
security is enemy, terrain, or civilian populations. Terrain includes weather effects and
civilian population includes society and infrastructure networks. The security objective
clarifies and prioritizes the security tasks for the scout platoon nested within the maneuver
plan of the protected commander. The security objective helps leaders understand the
expected results of the security mission. This can also include the social/human
demographics, infrastructure, or a combination of factors.
4-12. Tempo of security. Clearly articulating the tempo of security tasks, which allows
the scout platoon leader to establish associated time requirements that drive planning such
as the method of establishing observation posts (either mounted or dismounted),
requirements for UAS, and required sustainment and communications support necessary
to execute the mission. Additionally, it describes the haste scouts employed in occupying
and establishing observation posts.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-3

Chapter 4
 Short duration: scout platoons conduct short-duration observation posts for

periods less than 12 hours.
 Long duration: scout platoons conduct long-duration observation posts for
greater than 12 hours.
4-13. Engagement/disengagement criteria. Just as the commander issues guidance
concerning engagement and disengagement criteria in reconnaissance guidance, the
same criteria apply for security guidance. Engagement criteria should be defined using
precise doctrinal terms.
4-14. Displacement criteria. The displacement criteria dictates a set of conditions
required before the scout platoon conducts movement and maneuver to a subsequent
fighting position or assumes a follow-on mission.
METHODS AND MANAGEMENT

4-15. Security operations use the same methods and management as reconnaissance to
maintain enemy contact. No single reconnaissance asset can answer every intelligence
requirement and there are rarely enough reconnaissance assets to cover every
requirement. The squadron/battalion and BCT staffs use a mix of reconnaissance
management methods, such as cueing, mixing, and redundancy, in addition to task
organizing, in an attempt to use limited assets effectively and collect the most critical
information with the fewest assets as quickly as possible.
4-16. Cueing. Cueing is the integration of one or more types of reconnaissance or
surveillance systems to provide information that directs follow-on collecting of more
detailed information by another system. An example of cueing in a security screening
mission is the cueing of an aerial asset for a RHO to allow the scout platoon to begin
displacement.
4-17. Another example is a screening element identifying the enemy’s main body from
the screen and cueing an attack asset to begin the attack, displacement, or a battle
handover (see figure 4-1).
4-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-1. Use of cueing during a security mission
4-18. Mixing. Mixing is using two or more different assets to collect against the same
intelligence requirement. Employing a mix of systems not only increases the probability
of collection, but also tends to provide more complete information. For example, the
utilization of a combination of mounted and dismounted observation posts and aerial
reconnaissance assets in support of answering PIR on the same NAI. Another form of
mixing is the collection of information in support of answering PIR using different
capabilities. For example, signals intelligence mixed with HUMINT on the same NAI.
4-19. Redundancy. Redundancy is using two or more like assets to collect against the
same intelligence requirement. In security missions, an example would be the utilization
of more than mounted observation posts on an NAI covering an avenue of approach
which achieves the same through observing the same NAI with the same method from
different locations.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-5

Chapter 4
4-20. Figure 4-2 illustrates an example of an observation post observing an NAI to the
north. Another observation post is observing the same NAI from the east.
Figure 4-2. Use of redundancy during security tasks
SECTION II – FORMS OF SECURITY TASKS

4-21. The five forms of security tasks are screen, guard, cover, area security, and local
security. Scout platoons conduct guard and cover as part of a larger force. The
paragraphs below discuss each task. (Refer to FM 3-98 for more information.)
SCREEN
4-22. A screen is a security task that scout platoons conduct to provide early warning to
the protected force and report information related to a commander’s PIR. Within its
4-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
capabilities and based upon the higher commander’s guidance, the scout platoon
conducts counterreconnaissance to destroy or repel enemy reconnaissance forces.
Screen tasks are defensive in nature and prevent enemy observation of the protected
force. Scout platoons conduct screens to the front, flanks, or rear of a stationary friendly
force, and to the flanks or rear of a moving friendly force. Scout platoons do not conduct
screening missions forward of a moving friendly force.
4-23. The scout platoon accomplishes a screen by establishing a series of observation
posts and conducting patrols to ensure adequate reconnaissance and surveillance of the
assigned sector or area. Commanders direct the scout platoon to screen when they want
advance warning of when and where the enemy is attacking. Operating over an extended
area, the platoon fights to prevent enemy observation of the protected force, or engage
targets of opportunity. Scout platoons plan screens in-depth. Depth prevents the threat
from easily identifying and penetrating the screen, prevents gaps from occurring when
observation posts displace, allows platoons to gain and maintain enemy contact, and
facilitates the destruction of enemy reconnaissance elements without compromising
tasks.
TASKS
4-24. Execution considerations guide screen planning. Tasks that a scout platoon
conducts for the screen—
 Allow no enemy ground element to pass through the screen undetected and
unreported.
 Maintain continuous surveillance of all avenues of approach that affect the
main body’s mission.
 Conduct counterreconnaissance to destroy, defeat, or disrupt all enemy
reconnaissance elements, within capabilities and according to the
commander’s security guidance.
 Locate and identify the lead elements of an echeloned enemy force that
indicate the enemy’s main attack, as prescribed in the enemy’s order of battle.
 Determine the direction of enemy movement, maintain contact, and report
threat activities, even while displacing.
 Impede and harass the enemy within capabilities without becoming
decisively engaged and while displacing to provide the protected force
commander with additional time and maneuver space.
 Detect and report all enemy elements attempting to pass through the screen,
both ground and aerial, to provide the protected force commander early
warning of enemy activities.
4-25. Stationary or moving screens are relative to the actions of the force to protect.
Inactivity in a stationary screen leads to identifiable and exploitable gaps for the threat.
After issuing a WARNORD, the scout platoon leader analyzes the mission and
determines what to accomplish by evaluating the following:
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-7

Chapter 4
 Commander’s security guidance.

 Information received about the threat from the squadron or battalion’s S-2
assessment that also determines which enemy activity to expect.
 Actions on contact through the eight forms of contact.
 Terrain the platoon maneuvers through during the execution of security tasks.
 Nonorganic assets requests and integration to support the platoon’s mission.
4-26. Once the platoon leader has a thorough understanding of the surveillance
requirements, assessment of available assets to execute these requirements occurs.
Based on the platoon leaders own analysis and the IPB products possessed, the platoon
leader must consider where to focus the reconnaissance assets and determine their fields
of observation.
4-27. The scout platoon uses cueing, mixing, and redundancy of organic and nonorganic
assets to answer the CCIRs. The scout platoon also employs a variety of observation
techniques (mounted, dismounted, aerial, and sensor) to ensure no gaps exist in the
assigned sector and accuracy of information collected. A few of these observation
techniques are listed below:
 Width of the screened sector.
 Requirements to observe specific NAIs or TAIs.
 Possible follow-on missions: branches and sequels to the operation.
 Range of supporting fires.
 Location of the initial screen – The higher headquarters establishes the
general location of the initial screen. Adjust the screen closer or farther to the
protected force only with approval.
 Communications plan (PACE, no commo [communication], communications
security compromise plans).
 Location and times for resupply.
ASSETS
4-28. The initial screen plan needs to be executable without additional assets. If success
hinges on planned assets that become unavailable during the mission, because of
weather or enemy, it opens the platoon’s plan to mission failure. Using the platoon’s
organic assets, the platoon leader develops a plan to provide early warning on the most
likely mobility corridors. Nonorganic and higher assets can provide earlier information
to cue other observation assets. These assets may patrol along exposed flanks or in gaps
between ground observation posts, augment the surveillance of NAIs, or add redundancy
and depth within the sector. To extend the depth of the scout platoon further, augmenting
aerial reconnaissance assets may execute reconnaissance in their own AO. Aviation
assets can provide continuous observation of threat elements to allow reconnaissance
ground troops to displace to subsequent positions.
4-29. Fire planning includes the integration of indirect and direct fires, attack aviation,
and CAS. The scout platoon leader should plan indirect fire targets at chokepoints, along
likely avenues of approach, in areas where the threat must slow down, or in conjunction
4-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
with emplaced obstacles. The platoon leader should also plan engagement areas to help
focus fires in areas along likely threat mobility corridors where the fires have the greatest
likelihood of achieving desired effects. Most targets are not easily destroyed by
supporting fires such as armored targets. It is critical that the higher headquarters clearly
identify what indirect fire is available for the scout platoon during screening operations,
identify the command or support relationship, develop the communications plan,
pinpoint artillery and mortar firing positions. Higher headquarters must also identify fire
support coordination measures, such as no fire areas, covering friendly observation posts
or sections. The platoon leader can also add to the fires plan with approval from the
FSO. The platoon leader should plan indirect fires for the initial screen and for alternate
and subsequent locations.
DEPTH
4-30. Depth allows one element of the screen to pass enemy contact to another element
without engaging or displacing by conducting a platoon internal RHO. Depth is critical
in a screen. Depth is achieved by positioning observation posts, UAS, and other attached
assets between the front line trace and rear boundary of the scout platoon. Depth prevents
the enemy from identifying the screen, prevents gaps, allows contact, and facilitates
destruction of enemy elements without compromising observation posts.
4-31. Scout platoon leaders assign section boundaries that allow multiple observation
posts to establish a screen and create depth within the screen (see figure 4-3, page 4-10).
Whenever possible, observation posts should be within supporting distance of each other
to enhance security through mutual support and to enable RHO between observation
posts. The mortar section positions behind the screen where they can support all
elements of the screen. The ability to achieve depth is a result of several factors,
including:
 Higher commander’s intent and concept as expressed in the OPORD.
 Geographical location of the screen based on time-distance analysis.
 Location of the protected force, area, facility, or population.
 Engagement criteria, disengagement criteria, displacement criteria.
 Size of the scout platoon’s AO.
 Terrain.
 Attachments and detachments.
 Logistical and indirect fires support from the main body.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-9

Chapter 4
Figure 4-3. In-depth positioning of observation posts
STATIONARY SCREEN
4-32. Planning considerations for a stationary screen include establishing observation
posts in-depth and conducting patrols to ensure adequate surveillance of the assigned
AO. Screens are active, with stationary observation posts as only one part of the mission.
To ensure that continuous overlapping surveillance occurs, the scout platoon employs
observation posts, patrols (mounted and dismounted), aerial reconnaissance, and
sensors.
4-33. Scout platoon leaders especially consider the war fighting functions of mission
command, protection, and security while developing their scheme of fires concept of
4-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
sustainment and movement technique and maneuver formation to occupy the screen in
relation to the enemy force to screen.
4-34. A platoon executing a screen requires the following minimum guidance from
higher headquarters. The scout platoon leader evaluates each of the following
considerations when developing the platoon’s plan.
 Location of the initial screen and time to establish.
 Assigned AO for subordinate elements.
 Air and ground assets integration.
 Surveillance and acquisition assets available.
 Control of displacement to subsequent positions.
 RHO between screening elements.
 Width of the screened sector.
 Rear boundary of the screening force.
 Possible follow-on missions.
4-35. The screening force may have a wide frontage. A phase line placed along
identifiable terrain graphically indicates the forward line of own troops and can serve as
a LOA for the scout platoon. A boundary depicts the rear limit of the screen. The scout
platoon is responsible for the area between the screened enemy force and the rear screen
boundary. The boundary may serve as a battle handover line or a reconnaissance
handover line. Other phase lines control maneuver of the sections and aid in both
reporting and orientation. The scout platoon leader designates section AO to control
lateral movement of sections (see figure 4-4, page 4-12).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-11

Chapter 4
Figure 4-4. SBCT scout platoon stationary screen mission
Moving Screen
4-36. Scout platoons execute a moving screen in the same way it conducts a stationary
screen, except for additional movement techniques. Scouts do not screen in front of a
moving force. The screen’s movement relies upon time and distance factors associated
with the main body’s movement. Responsibilities for a moving flank screen begin at the
front of the main body’s lead combat element, and ends at the rear of the protected force
(excluding front and rear security forces). The scout platoon may conduct moving flank
screens or screen the rear of the main body. As with a stationary screen, phase lines,
4-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
checkpoints, contact points, and lateral boundaries aid to orient and control the scout
platoon’s movement. The LD, which is the same as the protected force’s, initiates the
screen mission and becomes the rear boundary of the moving screen. The planning
considerations discussed earlier for stationary screens also apply to a moving screen.
However, emphasis may shift because the main body is moving.
4-37. As the main body moves, the scout platoon occupies a series of successive
screens, regulating movement to maintain the time and distance factors desired by the
main body commander. As with the stationary screen, integrating attack and
reconnaissance aviation and UAS into the screen affords increased flexibility, fires
platforms, and sensors to the mission. Ground and aerial reconnaissance assets may use
four basic methods of movement. They are as follows:
 Alternate bounds by individual observation posts.
 Alternate bounds by sections.
 Successive bounds by sections.
 Continuous marching as a platoon.
Screen Location
4-38. The scout platoon leader determines the likely enemy avenues of approach based
on the squadron or battalion S-2’s assessment, and directs the screen accordingly. The
platoon leader uses platoon boundaries, phase lines, and recognizable terrain features to
assign section boundaries. The platoon leader takes the capabilities and limitations of
organic and attached sensors into consideration and arrays them along the screen,
accordingly to maximize their effects. The commander establishes the general location
of the initial screen. To prevent fratricide, the platoon adjusts closer to the protected
force only with approval from higher. The initial screen often represents the forward
line of own troops and it is considered a restrictive control measure requiring
coordination when units move beyond it to conduct aerial or ground reconnaissance.
4-39. If requiring operations forward of the screen, the commander establishes a phase
line to designate the scout platoon’s LOA. Key considerations include determining
observation and fields of fire, requirements to observe specific NAIs or TAIs, and the
range of supporting indirect fire assets. With permission from the supported unit, the
scout platoon can adjust the initial screen to meet these considerations.
SCREEN OCCUPATION
4-40. Select occupation of the screen from three primary methods: zone reconnaissance,
infiltration, or tactical road march. The factors that determine the employment of a
specific method, or a combination of methods, are the enemy situation (and the
knowledge available about the enemy), the squadron commander’s intent, the speed at
which the main body is moving, available assets capability and the terrain. All three
methods require the scout platoon to maintain contact with the main body and orient the
screen in relation to the main body’s maneuver or position.
4-41. Zone reconnaissance is the preferred method to occupy a screen as it provides
useful information and intelligence regarding terrain and maximizes the opportunity to
identify enemy forces located within the zone prior to occupying the screen. The tactical
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-13

Chapter 4
road march method is the fastest but least secure. The scout platoon may use the
infiltration method when requiring a covert posture for the security mission. The scout
platoon will need to make additional efforts to maintain a stealthy posture throughout
the infiltration. The scout platoon focuses only on maneuver (not reconnaissance) when
using this method which gives the platoon more speed to occupy observation posts.
Scouts will still send reports to the scout platoon leader and the platoon leader will
continue to report to the troop as necessary. Infiltration ensures the most stealth.
4-42. The scout platoon crosses the LD separately from the main body in the first
technique and conducts a tactical road march within an AO parallel to the protected
force. The platoon then deploys from a RP to the initial screen positions. Scout platoons
occupy observation posts as they reach them. UAS can conduct surveillance forward of
the scout platoon or assist in maintaining contact with the main body. Sensors can
augment observation posts by providing long-range surveillance of enemy avenues of
approach (see figure 4-5).
4-14 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-5. ABCT scout platoon moving screen mission
Observation Posts
4-43. The scout platoon conducts three steps for an observation post. These steps are
set, establish, and occupy. After completing terrain analysis, the leaders in the platoon
identify the number of observation posts required and template locations that allow the
best observation of NAIs/TAIs and provide depth through the sector. Section/squad
leaders and team leaders then select the exact position for each observation post once
they are physically at the planned location. Observation posts should have the following
characteristics:
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-15

Chapter 4
 Covered and concealed routes to and from the observation post. Scouts are
able to enter and leave the observation post without being detected by the
enemy.
 Unobstructed observation of the assigned area or sector. Ideally, the fields of
observation of adjacent observation posts overlap to ensure full coverage of
the sector.
 Effective cover and concealment. Scouts should select positions with cover
and concealment to reduce their vulnerability. They may need to bypass a
position with favorable observation capability but without cover and
concealment in favor of a position that affords better survivability.
 A location that does not attract attention. Do not establish observation posts
in locations such as a water tower, an isolated grove of trees, or a lone
building or tree. These locations draw enemy attention and may be enemy
artillery TRPs. The one exception to this rule is during stability missions
where urban emplacement is necessary. The observation posts should also be
away from natural lines of drift along which a moving enemy force can travel.
These locations might include a route on the floor of a valley or a site near a
major highway.
 A location that does not skyline the observers. Avoid hilltops. Position
observation posts farther down the slope of the hill or on the side, provided
there are covered and concealed routes into and out of the position.
Camouflage observation post sites with foliage around the observation post
site, and camo netting secured as tight as possible so wind cannot cause
movement that will attract observation.
4-44. The above considerations apply to general areas in selecting locations. During this
process, scouts should Apply the principles summarized by the mnemonic BLUES:
 B – Blend in with the surrounding area. Does the site look natural? Does it
attract unwanted attention?
 L – Low-to-the-ground constructed sites. Does the site provide protection
against small arms and direct weapons fire?
 U – Unexpected sites. Does the enemy expect Soldiers to look out the
window, or out the small hole in the wall?
 E – Evacuation routes planned during site selection. Where is the link-up
location with friendly forces?
 S – Avoid silhouetting of the site. Use the sides of hills not the crests; and
always have a backdrop. Can the enemy see a scout silhouetted against the
skyline, wall, or other object?
4-45. Scout platoons should position observation posts to provide observation of NAIs
and TAIs, to support clear radio communications, and provide security in accordance
with the commander’s intent. The scout platoon leader and section leaders should all
record observation post locations and report any relocation of the observation post to
troop. Limit access to the observation post to authorized personnel only observation
posts in-depth maximize vehicle-mounted positions with dismounted scouts forward of
4-16 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
the vehicle, or a combination of dismounted scouts and vehicle-mounted scouts (see

table 4-1 for observation post manning capabilities by organization).
Table 4-1. Dismounted observation post capabilities
Organization Number Dismounted Possible Possible Possible

of Scouts per Platoon Platoon OPs** (with
Sections Section* OPs** (up OPs** (12+ patrols)
to 12 hours)
hours)
ABCT (6x36) 2-3 6-9 6 3 2
ABCT (3x5) 2-3 +HQ 4-7 3 2 2
SBCT (6x36) 2-3 6-9 6 3 2
IBCT, 2-3 2-3 3 1 2
Mounted
(6x24)
IBCT, 3 +HQ 8 6 3 2
Dismounted
IBCT 2-3 8 6 3 2
Battalion
*Number of available scouts depend on section configuration, does not count vehicle
commander or crews.
**Assumes vehicles and dismounts operating as mutually supporting OPs.
Legend: ABCT – Armored brigade combat team, HQ – headquarters, IBCT – Infantry
brigade combat team, OPs – observation posts, SBCT – Stryker brigade combat team
4-46. In-depth observation post placement allows the scout platoon to observe the entire
sector. This method works well when the platoon has a sector with several avenues of
approach or when the platoon operates in heavily vegetated terrain. In-depth placement
allows for redundancy in observation and better interlocking coverage of the sector. The
platoon leader provides mission orders and security guidance from higher to sections
and other attachments with the commander’s intent and security guidance. That
guidance also develops the indicators for subordinates to look for within NAIs.
4-47. There are other tactical tasks that encompass the observation post. These duties
are broken down into teams. Teams consist of the observation team, the support-by-fire
team, and the security team. All Soldiers are observers and can still report as if they are
on the observing team, however they have specific jobs to support the observers and
enhance the survivability of the section. A minimum of three scouts should man each
respective team. Observation teams are equipped to observe the area, report information,
protect themselves, and call for and adjust fire. One scout observes the area while the
other scout provides local security, the last scout records information, and sends reports
to the section/squad leader or platoon leader.
4-48. The observers should switch duties every 20 to 30 minutes because the observer’s
effectiveness decreases quickly after that time. The support-by-fire team has crew-
served weapons to provide direct fires in support of the observing team’s displacement.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-17

Chapter 4
The security team overwatches both the observing team and the support-by-fire teams.
They accomplish this by providing local reconnaissance of the dead space that the other
teams are not observing. Essential equipment for each observation post is CWORMS.
Observation Post Vignette

4-49. The following vignette describes an example of how a scout section may occupy
an observation post. The scout platoon section stops short of its observation post site,
they may conduct a SLLS check. The section leader directs the drivers into positions to
overwatch the observation post site, and any terrain the enemy could use to interfere
with movement into or out of the position. Leader dismounts with scouts from each
vehicle and moves forward to reconnoiter the observation post. Drivers and gunners
remain in their vehicles to overwatch the dismounted personnel.
4-50. The section leader moves the dismounted scouts to the observation post site,
establishes security overwatching the far side of the site, and checks the site for mines,
booby traps, and enemy personnel. After verifying that they can observe the sector or
area of responsibility from this site, the section leader issues a five-point contingency
plan using the mnemonic “going, others, time, what happens if the leader fails to return,
actions,” (known as GOTWA), see figure 5-33 on page 5-53) and displacement criteria
to the observing teams before returning to the vehicles.
4-51. The section leader selects observation, and security positions for the vehicles and
dismounted teams. A well-established observation post has an observation team, an SBF
team, and a security team. SBF teams and security teams overlap supporting range to
have more observation teams. At this point, the observation post is set.
4-52. Drivers and dismounted scouts from each vehicle mark or stake their vehicle
observation position. Once they reconnoiter and secure the area around the observation
post, the section leader signals the vehicles and dismounts forward to move into their
positions.
4-53. The gunners and vehicle commanders for each vehicle complete and check their
range card. The section leader checks the cards to ensure they provide complete
coverage of the sector. Range cards are a valuable reference if the vehicle is ordered to
fight.
4-54. The drivers and dismounts camouflage the vehicle and dismounted positions, by
breaking up the outlines of the vehicle with natural vegetation and the crew’s camo
(camouflage) netting. The section leader will make a sector sketch using the range cards
from all positions in the section leader’s observation post. The sector sketch is similar
to a range card but with some important differences. At a minimum, the sketch includes
the following:
 Key and significant terrain, including NAIs and avenues of approach.
 Location of the observation team.
 Location of the SBF position.
 Locations of security positions.
 Alternate positions (hide, fighting, and observation).
4-18 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
 Routes to and from the observation post and fighting positions.

 Sectors of observation, with dead space identified.
 Preplanned indirect fire targets.
 TRPs for direct fire.
 Prepared SPOTREPs and calls for fire based on trigger lines and projected
locations where the enemy will first be seen.
 Locations of protective obstacles, such as claymore mines and trip flares.
4-55. The section leader keeps a copy of the sector sketch and forwards one to the scout
platoon leader. The section leader then returns the range cards to the gunner. The
observation post is established and the scout platoon leader sends the appropriate
BLUE 2 report to the troop.
MAINTAINING THE POSITION

4-56. Once the section leader establishes the observation post and assigns the scouts
their sectors of observation, the section improves the position. Scouts manning the
observation post site begin providing protection from indirect and direct fires. They also
camouflage the position, install wire communications equipment, and emplace hasty
obstacles for local protection. As the observation post improves, displaced soil and other
materials are disposed behind the observation post site not to the front. Which prevents
detection. Vehicle commanders (or gunners) and drivers reconnoiter the routes to their
fighting/observation positions and alternate positions, perform maintenance, and
camouflage vehicles and positions. The section leader’s observation post sketch is
accurate. (See figure 4-6, on page 4-20.) An azimuth obtained from a hull-down position
is attainable and observable from hide and turret-down positions. The same principle
applies for dismounted observation posts.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-19

Chapter 4
Figure 4-6. Vehicles overwatching an observation post
Observation Post Communications

4-57. The scouts occupying the observation post use wire or radios as their primary
means of communication. As a last resort, use messengers to report information if
jamming occurs. Scouts moving to and from the observation post as messengers ensure
the enemy does not detect their movement. The scout in the vehicle monitoring
observation post communications relays reports or information to the platoon leader by
digital communications or radio. The scouts in the observation post will carry a radio as
a primary means of communications; they can use it to send reports or to talk directly to
their fire support team or mortar section for indirect fire support. Scouts will adhere to
the PACE, NO-COMMS, and communications security compromise plans published in
their signal operating instructions.
Observation Post Security

4-58. Scouts are vulnerable in an observation post, and their best self-defense is not
being seen, heard, or otherwise located by the enemy. They employ active and passive
measures to protect themselves from enemy detection, and from direct and indirect fires.
4-20 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
4-59. To provide early warning of enemy movement around a screen line or observation
post position, scouts emplace unattended ground sensors in areas in dead space around
and between their observation posts. Trip flares and claymore mines provide additional
early warning and protection from enemy personnel. Once these devices trigger the
enemy has an indication there is an overwatching element for that device.
4-60. Active patrolling by security teams around and between observation posts also
enhances security. Patrols give the platoon the ability to observe areas they cannot
observe from the observation posts and clear the area around the observation post of
enemy. A patrol can consist of a minimum of three scouts. The platoon executes
continuous reconnaissance by patrolling immediately after occupation of the position to
discover enemy elements that possibly detected occupation of the observation post. The
patrol reconnoiters likely and favorable enemy observation positions, also checking the
camouflage of the friendly positions. Route selection is critical when organizing patrols
because scouts must assume the observation post position is under observation.
Observation posts cannot always avoid being seen by the enemy but take actions to limit
their vulnerability. Covered positions provide protection from enemy fires and vehicle
dispersion, and further reduce the effects of these fires. The vehicles in the fighting
positions extract the scouts from the observation post when enemy identify and attack
the position. Scouts will at all times adhere to noise and light and litter discipline.
4-61. METT-TC may dictate an extended screen across frontages in excess of what the
scout platoon can effectively accomplish. The commander, as part of the mission
analysis, will determine where to accept risk in the extended screen based on the
squadron or battalion staff’s IPB analysis and identifies what additional augmentation is
required to cover the AO.
Search and Scan

4-62. Crew or squad search (observation) is the act of carefully observing or watching
the AO. Scouts conduct observation during both reconnaissance and security missions.
Crewmembers use the unaided eye and vehicle optics to search or scan the
predetermined sector to acquire (detect, locate, and identify) targets. Sectors are
assigned to crewmembers based on the scout team organization and the scout platform.
(See figure 4-7, on page 4-22, and figure 4-8, on page 4-23.) Sectors are also adjusted
when the vehicle buttons up. Sectors of observation are best found in unit SOPs and
adjusted to mission requirements.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-21

Chapter 4
Figure 4-7. Sectors
4-22 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-8. Vehicle sectors
Ground Search Techniques

4-63. Crewmembers scan their areas of observation at all times to detect targets or
possible target locations. Also consider engagement priorities for threat during scanning
with the most dangerous being a priority. There are three ground search techniques that
enable crewmembers to locate targets quickly: rapid scan, slow (50-meter) scan, and
detailed search. All crewmembers may use these techniques using the unaided eye,
binoculars, or vehicle optics, in either clear or limited visibility conditions.
4-64. Rapid scan. The rapid scan method is used to quickly detect obvious signs of
enemy activity (see figure 4-9, on page 4-24. Rapid scan is usually the first method used,
whether scouts are stationary or moving. The vehicle commander may use binoculars or
the unaided eye; the gunner may use the gunner’s primary sight, binoculars, or the
unaided eye; all other crewmembers use the unaided eye. Perform the following actions
when conducting the rapid scan:
 Start in the center of the sector and rapidly scan from the nearest to the
farthest visible point.
 Then orient left or right and conduct a rapid scan, from near to far. This sweep
must overlap the center area of the previously scanned sector.
 Once one side of the center is scanned completely, scan the other side in the
same manner.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-23

Chapter 4
Figure 4-9. Rapid scan technique
4-65. Slow (50-meter) scan. If no obvious targets are present in the rapid scan,
crewmembers conduct a more deliberate scan of the terrain using their optics or
binoculars (see figure 4-10). The slow scanning method is best used by the vehicle
commander or gunner from a hull-down position or during a short halt. Perform the
following actions when conducting the slow scan:
 Pausing at short intervals to give the eyes time to focus, search a strip of the
target area 50 meters deep from right to left.
 Then search a strip farther out from left to right, overlapping the first area
scanned.
 Continue this method of scanning until the entire target area has been
searched.
 When a suspicious area or possible target signature is detected, stop and
search the immediate area thoroughly using the detailed search technique.
4-24 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-10. Slow scan technique
4-66. Detailed search. If no targets are found using the rapid or slow scan technique and
time permits, crews should use their optics (day and night) to make a careful, deliberate
search of specific areas in their assigned area (see figure 4-11, on page 4-26). This
method is also used to search in detail small areas or locations with likely or suspected
avenues of approach. Perform the following actions when conducting the detailed
search:
 Concentrate on one specific area or location and study that area intensely.
 Look for direct or indirect target signatures by scanning in a clockwise
direction around the focal point (terrain feature) of the area. Some examples
of signatures to look for include the following:
 Dust created by movement of vehicles.
 Diesel smoke or exhaust.
 Track or tire marks.
 Reflections or flashes from glass or metal.
 Angular objects that do not conform to the surrounding area.
 Vegetation that appears out of place.
 Flash or smoke from a weapon or missile.
 Entrenchments or earthworks.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-25

Chapter 4
Figure 4-11. Detailed search
Off-Center Vision Method

4-67. Day and night scanning techniques (rapid, slow, and detailed) are similar.
Crewmembers can use these techniques:
 At night, using daylight optics or the unaided eye, crewmembers should not
look directly at an object, but a few degrees off to the side of the target object.
 Crewmembers move their eyes in short, abrupt, irregular movements when
scanning with off-center vision.
 At each likely target area, crewmembers should pause a few seconds to
attempt to detect a target or any movement.
 If crewmembers detect an object as a possible target, they use their off-center
vision to observe it.
 While observing the object, frequent eye movement is necessary to prevent
object fade-out.
 Cupping their hands around the eyes also increases their night vision.
4-26 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Air Search Techniques

4-68. There are two methods to detect aerial targets quickly: flat terrain scan and hilly
terrain techniques (see figure 4-12). Both methods are based on the slow (50-meter)
scanning technique with the following adjustments:
 In flat terrain, crewmembers search the horizon by moving their eyes in short
movements from object to object. More detail is registered this way than with
a continuous scan of the horizon. Crewmembers should always search from
near to far for possible targets.
 In hilly terrain, crewmembers search the sky just below the horizon and move
upward. They use prominent terrain features as points of reference to ensure
overlapping areas of search, scanning from far to near, low to high.
Figure 4-12. Air search technique
Crew Search Tips

4-69. The following considerations and suggestions can help scouts make more
effective use of target search techniques:
 Optical devices can acquire targets at ranges greater than are possible with
the unaided eye. These devices include binoculars, night-vision goggles,
starlight scopes, and vehicle-mounted optics systems.
 Initial scanning is always done with the unaided eye first, then with an
appropriate optical system (such as binoculars or sights).
 Target search is continuous. Any possible target missed on the first or second
scan may be seen on the third or fourth scan.
 The entire crew must look for likely targets, using proper scanning techniques
within their assigned sectors of observation.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-27

Chapter 4
 While on the move, the gunner should use the rapid scan technique,
constantly scanning their sector limits from their right to their left.
 Targets on the edge of the peripheral field of view are harder to locate.
 Operations under CBRN conditions limit the crew’s ability to acquire and
locate targets. The crew’s field of vision is greatly narrowed while wearing
the protective mask. Continuous scanning is a must.
 Concentrate the search in areas where targets are most likely to appear, such
as identified avenues of approach, wood lines, and reverse slope firing
positions.
 Do not neglect to scan 360 degrees. Targets that are impossible to spot from
the front are often visible from the flank or rear.
DEFINE TRIGGER LINES AND DECISION POINTS

4-70. The commander develops specific engagement and disengagement criteria for the
scout platoon to trigger specified actions. These can include displacement to secondary
observation posts or the initiation of direct or indirect fires against the enemy. Producing
a well-developed set of engagement, disengagement, and displacement criteria for the
scout platoon allows the commander to exercise effective control over the platoon.
During screening missions, emplacing graphic control measures at possible enemy
reaction areas will aid in the reporting to higher. Identifying these locations within your
AO is important.
4-71. Triggers are physical points on the ground, or actions, or events. During the
offensive tasks, a trigger is often a maneuver action or event. In the defense, a trigger is
more often a physical spot on the ground. See table 4-2 for the suggested sequence for
trigger development.
Table 4-2. Trigger development sequence
Steps Actions
Position on the ground. Determine where fires will engage the enemy, for
Step 1 example, the impact of high explosive rounds on target or location of
illumination rounds employed at night to discover a possible threat.
Enemy rate of movement. To engage a moving target, determine rate of
Step 2 movement through estimation, past experience, doctrinal literature, or
from scout reports of enemy speed.
Time of flight of the rounds. Determine the time of flight of the rounds from
Step 3 the weapon system firing the mission.
Processing time. Determine processing time which is the time required
Step 4 from the call for fire to rounds being fired from the weapon system.
The total mission time. Determine total mission time which is time of flight
Step 5 plus processing time.
Location. Place the trigger point the required distance from a
Step 6 planned target location based on the following: {total mission time x
speed of enemy = distance}.
4-28 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Preparation Tasks
4-72. Preparation tasks include reconnaissance to the screen and observation post
positions, hasty occupation of observation posts, and deliberate occupation of the screen.
Prior to movement, leaders conduct engagement area development located in
counterreconnaissance section in paragraph 4-73, PCC and PCI) and rehearsals.
Reconnaissance to the Screen

4-73. The scout platoon conducts reconnaissance, movement, or infiltration to the
templated screen location. Once on the ground, the platoon leader must direct and
conduct reconnaissance to ensure enemy counterreconnaissance elements have not
already infiltrated the area, as well as identify the actual locations for observation posts
or BPs. A technique to sequence this reconnaissance:
 Plan collection and security.
 Move and infiltrate to the templated location.
 Defeat or bypass enemy or counterreconnaissance according to the
commander’s guidance.
 Establish observation posts or BPs.
 Observe and defend or conduct counterreconnaissance.
 Displace to conduct battle or RHO in accordance with commander’s
guidance.
 Transition to the next mission.
4-74. Once reconnaissance, movement, or infiltration is complete, the platoon leader

will confirm or adjust the security plan from map reconnaissance and tentative plan
before the platoon OPORD is issued. If the adjustments change any aspect of the troop’s
order, the platoon leader will inform the commander before executing the changes. If
the scout platoon leader is unable to issue the full OPORD during the reconnaissance,
the platoon leader should, at a minimum, issue a detailed WARNORD and conduct
rehearsals.
4-75. When conducting the reconnaissance of the screen and observation post positions,
scouts should use marking materials (for daylight and limited visibility recognition) to
indicate key locations. They should record the eight-digit grid coordinates for key
locations manually on their maps and using electronic means such as Global Positioning
System (GPS) or joint capabilities release (if available).
4-76. To be most effective, the reconnaissance begins from the enemy’s perspective in
the engagement area, with the party looking toward the observation post or BP. The
platoon leader must receive permission from the commander to move in front of the
observation post or BP.
4-77. The platoon leader explains the enemy situation, outlining probable COAs and
the effects of terrain on enemy movement. They also identify the enemy’s potential SBF
positions as well as avenues through the platoon’s BP.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-29

Chapter 4
4-78. The platoon leader and section leaders then mark the engagement area with
platoon and section sectors of fire. They may also mark TRPs and tentative obstacle
locations. As necessary, designate fire control measures and mark using easily
identifiable terrain features.
4-79. When reconnaissance of the engagement area is complete and all observation
posts understand where the platoon leader wants to defeat the enemy’s reconnaissance
elements, the platoon leader and section leaders move back to their positons. They
discuss details of the platoon fire plan, including the trigger lines, engagement criteria,
direct fire control measures, disengagement criteria and disengagement plan, and routes
to supplementary or subsequent observation post or BPs. They also make plans to
identify and mark primary and alternate fighting positions.
Rehearsal
4-80. Rehearsals are especially effective in helping the platoon to practice and
coordinate necessary tactical skills, including the following:
 Observation post occupation steps.
 Calls for fire.
 Initiation, distribution, and control of direct and indirect fires.
 Engagement area.
 Movement to alternate and supplementary fighting positions.
 Displacement to subsequent BPs.
4-81. Rehearsals can begin as soon as the platoon receives the troop WARNORD, with
individual crews practicing berm drills, snake board exercises, and ammunition transfer
drills. Initial walk-through rehearsals on a sand table can focus on deliberate or hasty
occupation procedures, fire distribution, and the disengagement plan. The scout platoon
also conducts mounted movement and force on-force rehearsals. The platoon continues
to raise the level of difficulty by conducting the rehearsals at night, and at various
mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) levels, using these rehearsal techniques.
The platoon leader should integrate voice and digital radio traffic, as well as, calls for
fire during all rehearsals.
Reporting
4-82. Use contact reports, SPOTREPs, and SITREPs as appropriate to report enemy in
the scout platoon’s AO. In the defense, use contact reports to alert the platoon to
previously unidentified enemy targets. The SPOTREPs and SITREPs are sent to list the
number, types, and locations of enemy vehicles observed, engaged, or destroyed, and to
provide the strength and status of friendly forces.
4-83. All scouts involved in the reporting process must avoid sending redundant or
inflated descriptions of the situation. Such reports not only are confusing, but also may
trigger unnecessary, and possibly dangerous, actions by higher headquarters. Scouts
need to provide higher headquarters with accurate and detailed reports using
standardized size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment (SALUTE). Platoon
4-30 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
leaders need to analyze reports and make recommendations to the troop command post
on the enemy situation in relation to SIR, indicators, PIR, and CCIR.
Repositioning the Screen

4-84. The speed of the main body, distance to the objective, and the enemy situation
determines the movement of the screen. The scout platoon’s movement centers on a
designated route of advance. The route is parallel to the axis of advance of the main
body and is large enough to accommodate rapid movement of the scout platoon and to
facilitate the scout platoon’s occupation of the screen. The scout platoon keeps the route
clear to ensure rapid movement of the troop’s enablers, sustainment, and mission
command assets. Both ground and aerial reconnaissance assets use the four basic
movement methods: alternate bounds by observation posts, alternate bounds by units,
successive bounds, and continuous marching to reposition the screen.
Hasty Occupation
4-85. Scout platoons conduct a hasty occupation of the screen under a variety of
circumstances. Scout platoons may transition from reconnaissance to security by
conducting a hasty occupation of observation posts or BPs or attack-by-fire positions in
defensible terrain or after identifying, securing, or occupying key terrain. During
security operations, hasty occupation may occur after disengagement and movement to
subsequent observation posts or BPs, or in response to FRAGORDs reflecting a change
of mission. As a minimum, the scout platoon leader must have the following information
for ordering the scout platoon to conduct a hasty occupation:
 Commander’s intent and security guidance.
 Information collection plan.
 The tentative location of the screen and any control measures.
4-86. The scout platoon leader must pass this information to the platoon. The platoon
leader designates observation posts and NAIs or BPs and an engagement area with TRPs
based on this minimum information. The platoon leader must define the NAI and
engagement area, platoon observation and direct fires plans, or to identify locations
where the scout platoon can mass fires or observation. Depending on the situation, the
platoon leader issues the information in person, over the radio, or by a digital overlay (if
available). The platoon leader continues to develop the situation. As time permits, the
platoon leader establishes the following fire control measures:
 The trigger line and engagement criteria for sections and weapon systems.
 The fire pattern to be used.
 Disengagement and displacement criteria and the disengagement and
displacement plan according to the commander’s guidance and scheme of
maneuver.
Movement Considerations
4-87. Individual vehicles move from hull-down to turret-down firing positions within
their primary and alternate positions based on two considerations: the necessity to
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-31

Chapter 4
maintain direct fire on the enemy and the effectiveness of enemy fires. Each vehicle
commander’s decision to move between firing positions are influenced by the enemy’s
movement rate, the number of advancing enemy vehicles, the accuracy in which the
enemy is acquiring and engaging friendly fighting positions, and the lethality of enemy
weapon systems.
Disengagement and Repositioning

4-88. The platoon may be required to disengage and reposition to a subsequent BP as
specified by the commander’s security guidance. If the scout platoon must disengage
direct fire contact, the scout platoon leader chooses between two methods of maneuver
depending on whether or not the move is conducted with overwatch (and cover) by an
adjacent platoon. In all cases, the platoon leader must ensure that responsibility for
contact with the enemy is maintained by elements of the platoon or handed off to another
asset or maneuver element.
Disengagement and Repositioning With Cover

4-89. If the scout platoon’s maneuver is covered by an adjacent platoon, the entire
platoon usually bounds as a whole. The displacing platoon employs smoke grenades and
obscuration fires, if possible, to screen their displacement.
4-90. The platoon leader issues instructions or uses a prearranged signal to initiate
movement. The platoon simultaneously backs down to hide positions, remounts all
dismounted scouts, keeping front hulls toward the enemy, until adequate cover protects
each vehicle. Individual vehicles orient weapon systems toward the enemy as they move
to the subsequent or supplementary positions along previously identified and
reconnoitered routes.
Completion of Disengagement and Repositioning

4-91. When the scout platoon occupies the subsequent set of observation posts/BP and
all vehicles are ready to continue the screen, the displacement is complete. If the scout
platoon identified and reconnoitered the subsequent positions during the reconnaissance
or movement to the screen and rehearsed the displacement and occupation, the
occupation should go quickly. The platoon leader must conduct the actions of a hasty
occupation outlined previously in this chapter.
Limited Visibility
4-92. The scout platoon leader must plan for limited visibility conditions, as these
conditions often occur during the conduct of a screen mission. The platoon leader should
never allow gaps in the screen when aircraft cannot fly or scouts cannot observe their
assigned area. The scout platoon can take the following actions to guard against gaps:
 Adjust ground observation posts for day and night.
 Employ night and thermal observation devices.
 Increase the use of electronic surveillance devices, ground-based sensors, and
the LRAS3.
4-32 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
 Place trip flares and observation posts along dismounted avenues of

approach.
 Conduct dismounted patrols.
4-93. Depth in the screen facilitates acquisition of enemy forces that may elude forward
elements. Coordinating the conduct of patrols can help prevent misidentification and
fratricide. Rigorous noise, light, and litter discipline during limited visibility prevents
compromise and bypass of observation posts by enemy forces. Additional observation
posts established as listening posts take advantage of the extended distance sound travels
at night. Observation posts plan and use indirect fires, visible and infrared (IR),
illumination rounds, as needed.
Graphic Control Measures for Security Missions

4-94. The scout platoon’s use of control measures provides flexibility in terms of
mission execution. The platoon leader issues FRAGORDs to adjust their plans to the
enemy situation and uses graphic control measures to direct and orient the platoon
accordingly. Use graphic control measures to control a screen. The platoon leader uses
phase lines to control the unit’s movement. The platoon leader plans to use these phase
lines as on-order boundaries to control the platoon’s movement. The commander and
scout platoon leader establishes phase lines based on the planned size of the scout
platoon’s screen.
4-95. The platoon leader does not divide avenues of approach with a phase line. The
platoon leader use phase lines rearward of the initial screen to control the platoon’s
retrograde movement (toward the main body). The platoon leader can also use NAIs,
and checkpoints to control the observation and movement of task organized sections and
assets operationally controlled by the platoon. The platoon leader positions these forces
to support the scouts on the screen. If the scouts make enemy contact, the platoon leader
can use these control measures to designate alternate and subsequent locations to occupy
if not previously planned. The conduct of a delay by the platoon using these battle
positons will provide additional time for the protected force to react to the enemy attack.
4-96. The platoon leader uses mortar firing points or checkpoints to track the locations
of the mortar section. The commander is operationally controlling the mortar section,
but the scout platoon leader can reconnoiter favorable locations for the mortars. The
scouts reconnoiter positions rearward of the screen where they allow the mortars to fire
two-thirds of their maximum range forward of the screen. The platoon leader plans
subsequent (on-order) mortar firing points between the screen line and the main body,
if not already done by the commander. (See ATP 3-21.90 for mortar employment,
survivability, and position selection considerations.)
Control of Displacement to Subsequent Positions

4-97. Phase lines and checkpoints help control the event-driven task of displacing to
subsequent positions. The troop and squadron’s plan defines the event criteria that
triggers the scout platoon’s displacement including RHO between screening elements.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-33

Chapter 4
4-98. Displacement of the scout platoon to subsequent positions is event-driven. The

approach of an identified and specified enemy element, detection by an enemy force,
relief by a friendly unit, or movement of the protected force may dictate displacement.
Collapsing of the screen requires well-rehearsed displacement drills performed at the
squad, section, and platoon level, local security, and for the platoon to maintain contact
with the enemy as it displaces.
GUARD
4-99. Guard is a security task to protect the main body by fighting to gain time while
also observing and reporting information and preventing enemy ground observation of
and direct fire against the main body. Units conducting a guard mission cannot operate
independently because they rely upon fires and functional and multifunctional support
assets of the main body. BCT commanders might assign a guard mission when they
expect contact or has an exposed flank that requires greater protection than a screen can
provide. The guard force conducts reconnaissance, attacks, defends, and delays as
necessary to provide reaction time and maneuver space to the protected force. There are
three types of guard missions: advance guard, flank guard, and rear guard. Additionally,
a commander may assign a guard mission to protect a stationary or moving force. (Refer
to FM 3-98 and ATP 3-20.97 for greater detail on guard missions).
4-100. A scout platoon does not usually conduct a guard mission by itself, but may
participate in a guard mission as part of a larger force. During a guard mission, a scout
platoon may reconnoiter, attack, defend, and delay to prevent enemy observed indirect
fires, direct observation, and direct fires against the protected force.
COVER
4-101. Cover is a security task that is a self-contained force that is capable of operating
independently of the main body to allow early development of the situation, deceive,
disorganize, and destroy enemy forces. The covering force protects the main body by
fighting to gain time while also observing and reporting information and preventing
enemy ground observation of and direct fires against the main body. The key distinction
to remember is unlike the screen or guard, cover is tactically self-contained, meaning,
because the covering force or portions of it often engage with enemy forces, it must have
substantial combat power and sustainment resources to engage the enemy and still
accomplish its mission. In addition, a covering force accomplishes all the tasks of screen
or guard. Cover force is generally conducted by a reinforced BCT-sized element. (Refer
to FM 3-98 for a better understanding of cover.)
4-102. A scout platoon will never conduct a cover mission by itself, but may participate
in a cover mission as part of a larger force. While participating as part of a cover mission,
scout platoons usually conduct either zone reconnaissance or screen missions depending
on higher headquarters’ scheme of maneuver. During a cover mission, a scout platoon
may reconnoiter, attack, defend, and delay to prevent enemy indirect fires, direct
observation, and direct fires against the protected force.
4-34 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
AREA SECURITY
4-103. Area security is type of security operation conducted to protect friendly forces,
lines of communications, and activities within a specific area (ADP 3-90). It includes
the reconnaissance of the area. Area security missions include protecting personnel,
airfields (as well as terrain around airfields from which enemy may fire surface-to-air
missiles), convoys, critical and key infrastructure, terrain features, towns, main supply
routes, lines of communications, and equipment.
4-104. Scout platoons conduct area security missions to neutralize or defeat enemy
operations in a specified area. It operates in an area delineated by the headquarters
assigning the area security mission. Scout platoons may screen, reconnoiter, attack,
defend, or delay as necessary to accomplish its area security mission. Area security
missions may be offensive or defensive in nature while focusing on the enemy. Scout
platoon leaders may balance the level of security measures with the type and level of
threat posed in the specific area; however, all-around security is essential.
4-105. Area security missions deny the enemy the ability to influence friendly actions
in a specific area or to deny the enemy use of an area which may entail occupying and
establishing a 360-degree perimeter around the area to secure, or taking actions to
destroy enemy reconnaissance forces already present. The area to secure may range from
specific points (building, bridges, defiles) to areas such as terrain features (ridgelines,
hills) to large population centers and adjacent areas.
4-106. Proper engagement area development is vital for the scout platoon to develop a
plan to provide adequate security for the assigned area. The environmental factors and
capabilities of the scout platoon with all attached enablers will determine specific
platoon missions. Common enablers include engineers, UAS, and attack/reconnaissance
aviation. The environmental factors are as follows:
 The natural defensive characteristics of the terrain.
 Existing roads and waterways for military lines of communication and
civilian commerce.
 The control of land and water areas and avenues of approach surrounding the
area to be secured extending to a range beyond that of enemy artillery,
rockets, and mortars.
 The control of airspace. The proximity to critical sites such as airfields, power
generation plants, and civic buildings.
4-107. Due to the possibility of commanders tying their forces to fixed installations or
sites, these types of security missions may become defensive in nature which must be
carefully balanced with the need for offensive action. Early warning of enemy activity
is paramount in the conduct of area security missions and provides the commander with
time to react to any threat. Proper reconnaissance and planning coupled with
dismounted/mounted patrols and aerial reconnaissance is key to successful missions.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-35

Chapter 4
4-108. Establish a perimeter when a scout platoon must secure an area not tied
defensively to an adjacent unit. Perimeters vary in shape depending on the military
aspects of terrain and the required reaction time and maneuver space needed by the
supported unit. If the commander determines the most probable direction of enemy
attack, the commander may weight that part of the perimeter to cover that approach. The
perimeter shape conforms to the terrain features that best use observation and fields of
fire.
4-109. At the scout platoon level, perimeters are divided into sectors with boundaries
and contact points. The scout platoon leader must then assign sectors to individual
sections and squads. Mutual support and coordination between defensive elements
require detailed planning, positioning, and coordination due to the employment of both
mounted and dismounted security positions.
4-110. Establish a screen by integrating observation posts, unmanned ground sensors,
ground surveillance radar, unmanned aerial systems, and patrols. Scouts use of long-
range scout surveillance systems will allow the scout platoon to identify and observe the
enemy early, and will provide more reaction time and better situational awareness.
4-111. Depth is provided through the use of alternate and subsequent fighting
positions. The mobility and firepower of armored forces will allow for rapid traverse of
large areas and the ability to quickly mass to destroy any enemy penetration.
4-112. Immediate reaction to information or any type of attack is vital. Leaders execute
discipline initiative. Reaction operations or commitment of the force to protect is simple,
planned, and rehearsed day and night.
ASSETS
4-113. The initial plan for the area security mission should not rely on additional assets.
If assets cannot execute because of weather or enemy, the platoon may assume risk by
solely relying on the use of the additional assets. Using the platoon’s organic assets (such
as LRAS3, optics, and observers), the platoon leader develops a plan to provide early
warning on the most likely mobility corridors. External assets can provide earlier
information to cue other observation assets. These assets may patrol along exposed
flanks or in gaps between ground observation posts, augment the surveillance of NAI,
or add redundancy and depth within the sector. To further extend the security area of the
platoon, augmenting aerial reconnaissance assets may operate in the platoon AO.
Aviation assets provide continuous observation of threat elements to allow
reconnaissance ground troops to displace to subsequent positions.
4-114. Fire planning includes the integration of indirect and direct fires, attack
aviation, and CAS. The scout platoon leader should plan targets at chokepoints on likely
approaches, in areas where the threat must slow down, due to natural obstacles, or in
conjunction with emplaced obstacles. It is critical that the higher headquarters clearly
identify what supporting indirect fires are available for the scout platoon, the command
or support relationship, the communications plan, artillery and mortar positioning, and
fire support coordination measures such as a no fire area covering the scout platoon’s
observation posts and positions. The platoon leader also adds to the fires plan with
4-36 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
approval from the FSO. The platoon leader also plans fires for the initial area security
as well as for alternate and subsequent locations. It is important for the scout platoon’s
supporting elements to know which targets to activate and which targets are inactive,
giving the supporting fires the ability to send rounds to the target faster.
OUTPOSTING
4-115. Outposting is a technique used during route security to screen the route after it
has been reconnoitered. Platoons can also use this technique during route reconnaissance
missions to cover lateral and boundary routes. Outposting provides early waning of
advancing enemy elements attempting to interdict on key portions of the route or key
avenues of approach. Outposting differs from a conventional screen operation in that the
outposts are oriented on the route rather than on the friendly main body. Normally, the
outposting platoon follows the platoon that is executing the route reconnaissance.
Outposts have a limited ability to destroy small enemy forces attempting to influence
the route. Their primary purpose is to acquire the enemy and then direct reaction forces
or indirect fire to destroy the enemy. Crews must understand that this technique is
limited by mutual support and communication between observation posts and from the
platoon to the supported maneuver unit (see figure 4-13, on page 4-38).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-37

Chapter 4
Figure 4-13. Scout platoon outposting a route
LOCAL SECURITY
4-116. Local security consists of observation posts, local security patrols, perimeter
security, and other measures to provide close-in security for a force. This is an important
part of maintaining the initiative. The requirement for maintaining local security is
inherent in all missions. The scout platoon may support local security as part of a larger
unit or maintain local security independently away from friendly elements. In some
cases, it maintains its own assembly area and local security within the larger unit’s
footprint. Local security includes all measures taken to prevent surprise by the enemy,
4-38 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
including missions against the platoon’s location. It involves avoiding detection by the
enemy or deceiving the enemy about friendly positions and intentions.
4-117. Scout platoons dismount to provide local security around their vehicles
whenever they come to a halt during mission execution which prevents surprise and the
loss of Soldiers and equipment to dismounted enemy elements. While dismounted,
scouts present as small a target as possible while still observing the area and approaches
around their location. Security teams need to bring antitank weapons as a protection
measure against the armor and aviation threats. They are ready to engage the enemy
under favorable conditions such as—
 Employing observation posts.
 Employing patrols to cover perimeters and dead space.
 Enforcing stand-to.
 Enforcing proper communications procedures.
 Employing camouflage.
 Enforcing noise and light discipline.
 Employing sensors for surveillance of the area around the unit.
SECTION III – COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE

4-118. Counterreconnaissance is the sum of all actions taken at each echelon to counter
enemy reconnaissance efforts throughout the AO. Counterreconnaissance is active and
passive and includes action to destroy or repel enemy reconnaissance elements and deny
the enemy information about friendly units. Counterreconnaissance is an inherent task
in all security operations. Counterreconnaissance keeps enemy reconnaissance forces
from observing the main body by defeating or blocking them. Scout platoons conduct
tactical tasks to defeat, neutralize, or cause the withdrawal of enemy reconnaissance
forces within their capabilities and within the commander’s engagement and
disengagement.
4-119. The counterreconnaissance plan should address how to acquire and defeat
enemy reconnaissance elements. The squadron and battalion S-2 provides key input into
the planning process for executing counterreconnaissance missions. The
counterreconnaissance plan identifies avenues of approach into the scout platoon’s
sector, what type of enemy reconnaissance elements the unit expects in the sector, and
when enemy forces are most likely to move into the sector. The scout platoon leader
uses this information to formulate the counterreconnaissance plan and develop the
specified tasks to execute the plan. Often, the counterreconnaissance plan calls on a
scout platoon to conduct a screen mission to acquire, identify, and defeat enemy
reconnaissance forces.
4-120. The scout platoon may task organize to accomplish its mission against the
enemy. Whatever option the platoon leader employs, the counterreconnaissance fight
requires firm control, monitoring at the higher headquarters, early coordination, and a
thorough rehearsal. An effective counterreconnaissance fight defeats the enemy’s
reconnaissance effort, forcing the enemy to attack without information about the friendly
force’s composition and disposition.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-39

Chapter 4
ENGAGEMENT AREA DEVELOPMENT

4-121. Screens and tactical tasks the scout platoons conduct during security missions
use engagement areas, where the platoon leader anticipates engaging enemy
reconnaissance elements. The engagement area is the area where the scout platoon
leader intends to destroy an enemy force using the massed fires of all available weapons.
The platoon engagement area development is a complex function and requires parallel
planning and preparation for the scout platoon to accomplish its mission.
4-122. The platoon leader and subordinate leaders use a standardized set of procedures
to develop an engagement area. Leaders may use the mnemonic “I ID PEPR” to aide in
engagement area development. Steps 1 to 3 are in order. During steps 4, 5, and 6 the
troop emplaces obstacles first to ensure they tie into terrain and shape the engagement
area, then emplaces observation and direct fire to overwatch those obstacles, and finally
plans indirect fires to support the plan and cover any dead space that the engagement
area might have. However, leaders may conduct steps 4 to 6 in any order. The steps for
engagement area development are—
 Step 1. I – Identify likely enemy avenues of approach.
 Step 2. I – Identify most likely enemy COA.
 Step 3. D – Determine where to kill the enemy.
 Step 4. P – Plan and integrate obstacles.
 Step 5. E – Emplace direct fire weapon systems.
 Step 6. P – Plan and integrate fires.
 Step 7. R – Rehearse the execution of operations within the engagement area.
IDENTIFY LIKELY ENEMY AVENUES OF APPROACH

4-123. The platoon leader conducts an initial reconnaissance from the enemy’s
perspective, along each avenue of approach into the engagement area. Review chapter 2
of this publication for a discussion on avenues of approach. The platoon leader confirms
key terrain identified by the troop commander. The platoon leader considers positions
that provide an advantage over the enemy, natural obstacles, and choke points that
restrict forward movement during this reconnaissance. The platoon leader determines
which avenues of approach provide cover and concealment for the enemy. The platoon
leader also evaluates lateral routes that adjoin each avenue of approach (see figure 4-14).
4-40 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-14. Possible or likely enemy avenues of approach
IDENTIFY ENEMY SCHEME OF MANEUVER

4-124. The platoon leader greatly enhances this step of the engagement area
development process by gaining information early. (See figure 4-15, page 4-42.) The
scout platoon leader receives guidance from the battalion staff and the troop commander
to the following questions from:
 Where does the enemy want to go?
 Where will the enemy go based on terrain?
 What is the enemy’s mission (or anticipated mission)?
 What are the enemy’s objectives?
 How will the enemy structure their attack?
 How will the enemy employ their reconnaissance assets?
 What and where will the enemy employ high-value targets or high-payoff
targets?
 What are the enemy’s expected rates of movement?
 How will the enemy respond to friendly actions?
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-41

Chapter 4
Figure 4-15. Likely enemy scheme of maneuver
4-125. Determine where to kill the enemy. The scout platoon leader must determine
where to mass combat power on the enemy to accomplish their purpose. The platoon
leader decides the platoon’s engagement area based on an assessment of how the enemy
will fight. This entry point is normally marked by prominent terrain. (See figure 4-16.)
4-42 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-16. Locations to kill the enemy
PLAN AND INTEGRATE OBSTACLES

4-126. The scout platoon leader must integrate tactical obstacles with the direct fire
plan, to be successful in the defense. The platoon leader must consider the intent of each
obstacle. The scout platoon must have a clear task and purpose to properly emplace a
tactical obstacle. Due to the prioritization of the defensive effort, the platoon leader
might instead integrate natural obstacles into the platoon’s plan. The troop may
designate the purpose of the tactical obstacle. The purpose influences many aspects of
the operation, from selection and design of obstacle sites, to actual conduct of the
defense. The platoon leader must report the platoon’s location and the gaps in the
obstacle to the troop commander once the platoon has emplaced. (See figure 4-17, page
4-44.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-43

Chapter 4
Figure 4-17. Plan for and integration of obstacles
EMPLACE WEAPONS SYSTEMS AND OBSERVATION POSTS

4-127. Leaders must know the characteristics, capabilities, and limitations of the scout
platoon’s weapons as well as the effects of terrain and the tactics used by the enemy to
effectively position weapons. The scout platoon leader should position
weapons/observation posts where they have protection, where they can avoid detection,
and where they can surprise the enemy with accurate and lethal fires. The platoon leader
must know where they want to destroy the enemy, and what effect they want the
weapons to achieve (see figure 4-18). The platoon leader must consider the following to
position the weapons/observation posts effectively:
 Selecting tentative defensive positions for each observation post.
 Conducting a leader’s reconnaissance of the tentative defensive positions.
 Walking the engagement area to confirm that the selected positions are
tactically advantageous (time permitting).
 Confirming and marking the selected defensive positions.
4-44 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
 Developing a direct fire plan that accomplishes the platoon’s purpose.

 Ensuring the defensive positions do not conflict with those of adjacent units
and is effectively tied in with adjacent positions.
 Selecting primary, alternate, and supplementary observation posts or fighting
positions to achieve the desired effect for each TRP.
 Ensuring that scouts position their vehicles, observation posts, and weapon
systems to effectively cover each TRP in the platoon’s engagement area.
 Inspecting all positions. Ensure they are able to observe the TRPs and cannot
be detected from the engagement area.
Figure 4-18. Emplace weapon systems
PLAN AND INTEGRATE INDIRECT FIRES

4-128. The platoon leader, with the FO, mortar leader, or troop FSO if available must
accomplish the following when planning and integrating indirect fires (see figure 4-19,
page 4-47):
 Determine the purpose of fires and where to best achieve this purpose.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-45

Chapter 4
 Establish the observation plan with redundancy for each target.

 Include members of subordinate elements with fire support responsibilities.
 Establish triggers based on enemy movement rates.
 Obtain accurate target locations using survey and navigational equipment.
 Refine target locations to ensure coverage of obstacles.
4-129. The entry point is normally marked by a prominent TRP. Ensure all platoon
elements can engage with their direct fire weapon systems into the engagement area Plan
so leaders can control fires in the engagement area. In addition, the scout platoon
leader—
 Identifies TRPs that match the enemy’s scheme of maneuver, allowing the
platoon (or troop) to identify where it will engage the enemy through the
depth of the engagement area.
 Identifies likely engagement location of enemy targets.
 Identifies and records the exact location of each TRP.
 Determines weapons systems availability to distribute fires to achieve the
desired purpose.
 Begins development of a direct fire plan that focuses at each TRP.
4-46 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-19. Integration of direct and indirect fires
RANGE CARD AND PLATOON FIRE PLAN

4-130. Each scout position and vehicle develops a range card in preparation for
observation post defensive operations. The range card aids scouts in target acquisition
and provides information for the platoon leader to develop the platoon fire plan.
Additionally, if scouts change location, they can quickly orient to the terrain. (See
figure 4-20, on page 4-48.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-47

Chapter 4
Figure 4-20. Completed range card, example
4-131. Each scout leader develops a sector sketch card or platoon fire plan as it
prepares its observation posts for defensive operations. This is a rough topographical
sketch of the observation post’s assigned sector, which may be hand written or prepared
using the vehicle’s digital equipment. The range card aids scouts in target acquisition
4-48 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
and provides information for the platoon leader to develop the platoon fire plan. (See
figure 4-21, on page 4-50.)
4-132. The platoon fire plan should provide information necessary to distribute and
control the fires of all available direct and indirect fire weapons, both organic and
attached.
4-133. Leaders combine all the observation post and vehicle’s range cards, along with
section sector sketches, and prepares a platoon sector sketch and platoon fire plan. The
platoon sector sketch is drawn as close to scale as possible and includes a target list for
direct and indirect fires. The platoon fire plan should provide information necessary to
distribute and control the fires of all available direct and indirect fire weapons, both
organic and attached. A copy is given to the troop commander, another to the platoon
sergeant, and one stays with the platoon leader. The platoon sector sketch should
illustrate all the elements contained in figure 4-21, page 4-50.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-49

Chapter 4
Figure 4-21. Platoon fire plan
REHEARSE ENGAGEMENT AREA ACTIONS

4-134. Rehearsals are meant to provide every member of the scout platoon an
understanding of the plan and to prepare them to cover their assigned areas with direct
and indirect fires. The scout platoon should participate in a troop-level engagement area
rehearsal for the screen or guard. The platoon may use full dress rehearsals to gain a
better understanding of the plan. Designated personnel may move through the
engagement area to depict the attacking enemy force, while the platoon leader and
section leaders rehearse anticipated actions from the platoon observation posts. The
rehearsal should cover—
 Rearward passage of security forces (as required).
4-50 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
 Closure of lanes (as required).

 Use of fire commands, triggers, and maximum engagement lines to initiate
direct and indirect fires.
 Shifting of fires to refocus and redistribute fire effects.
 Disengagement criteria.
 Identification of displacement routes and times.
 Preparation and transmission of critical reports.
 Assessment of the effects of enemy weapons systems.
 Displacement to alternate, supplementary, or subsequent defensive positions.
 Cross-leveling or resupply of class V.
 Evacuation of casualties.
DIRECT FIRE PLANNING AND ENGAGEMENTS

4-135. Scout platoon leaders plan to engage and destroy enemy forces. The platoon
leader will integrate direct fire control measures into their missions, and brief them during
the operations order. The scout platoon will use the detect, identify, decide, engage, and
assess (known as DIDEA) process during reconnaissance and security missions. Direct
fire planning and incorporation of the DIDEA process during direct fire engagements
increases the lethality and survivability of the scout platoon.
DIRECT FIRE CONTROL MEASURES
4-136. Fire control measures are the means by which the scout platoon leader or their
subordinate leaders control direct fires. Application of these concepts, procedures, and
techniques helps the unit acquire the enemy, focus fires on the enemy, distribute the
effects of the fires, and prevent fratricide. At the same time, no single measure is enough
to control fires effectively. At troop level, fire control measures are effective only if the
entire unit has a common understanding of what they mean and how to employ them.
Table 4-3, page 4-52, lists terrain-based and threat-based fire control measures.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-51

Chapter 4
Table 4-3. Common fire-control measures

Terrain-Based Fire-Control Measures Threat-Based Fire-Control Measures
Target reference point Fire patterns
Engagement area Target array
Sector of fire Engagement priorities
Direction of fire Weapons ready posture
Terrain-based quadrant Engagement criteria
Friendly-based quadrant Weapons control status
Maximum engagement line Rules of engagement
Restrictive fire line Weapons safety posture
Final protective line Engagement techniques
TERRAIN-BASED FIRE-CONTROL MEASURES

4-137. The platoon leader uses terrain-based fire-control measures to focus and control
fires on a particular point, line, or area rather than on a specific enemy element. The
following paragraphs describe the techniques associated with this type of control
measure.
4-138. A TRP is an easily recognizable point on the ground that leaders use to orient
friendly forces and to focus and control direct fires. In addition, when TRPs are
designated as indirect fire targets, they can be used in calling for and adjusting indirect
fires. Leaders designate TRPs at probable (or known) enemy locations and along likely
avenues of approach. TRPs, natural or man-made, can be established sites such as hills
or buildings. They can also be expedient, temporary features designated as TRPs on the
spot such as a burning enemy vehicle or smoke generated by an artillery round. While
not ideal, TRPs can also be made by the unit with items such as engineer pickets with
visible or IR chemical light sticks or IR strobe in the recessed groove of the picket.
Ideally, TRPs should be permanent features and visible in three observation modes
(unaided, passive-IR, and thermal) so all forces can identify them, for example:
 Prominent hill mass.
 Distinctive building.
 Observable enemy position.
 Destroyed vehicle.
 Ground-burst illumination.
 Smoke round.
 Laser pointer.
ENGAGEMENT AREA FIRE-CONTROL MEASURES

4-139. This fire control measure is an area along an enemy avenue of approach where
the platoon leader intends to mass the direct fires of available weapons to destroy an
enemy force. The size and shape of the engagement area is determined by the degree of
relatively unobstructed IV available to the unit’s weapons systems in their firing
positions and by the maximum range of those weapons. Typically, platoon leaders
4-52 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
delineate responsibility within the engagement area by assigning each section a sector
of fire.
SECTOR OF FIRE
4-140. A sector of fire is a defined area covered by direct fire. It distributes fires within
an engagement area. Leaders assign sectors of fire to subordinate elements, crew-served
weapons, and individual Soldiers to ensure coverage of an area of responsibility. They
may also limit the sector of fire of an element or weapon to prevent accidental
engagement of an adjacent unit. In assigning sectors of fire, commanders and
subordinate leaders consider the number and types of weapons available. They also
consider acquisition system type and field of view in determining the width of a sector
of fire. For example, while unaided vision has a wide field of view, its ability to detect
and identify targets at distant ranges and in limited visibility conditions is restricted.
Conversely, most fire control acquisition systems have greater detection and
identification ranges than the unaided eye, but their field of view is narrow. Means of
designating sectors of fire include—
 TRP.
 Clock direction.
 Terrain-based quadrants.
 Friendly based quadrants.
DIRECTION OF FIRE
4-141. A direction of fire is an orientation or point used to assign responsibility for a
particular area on the battlefield that must be covered by direct fire. Leaders designate
directions of fire for the purpose of acquisition or engagement by crew-served weapons,
or individual Soldiers. Direction of fire is most commonly employed when assigning
sectors of fire would be difficult or impossible because of limited time or insufficient
reference points. Means of designating a direction of fire include:
 Closest target reference point.
 Clock direction.
 Cardinal direction.
 Tracer on target.
 Infrared laser pointer.
QUADRANTS
4-142. Quadrants are subdivisions of an area created by superimposing imaginary
perpendicular axes over the terrain to create four separate areas or quadrants. Quadrants
can be based on the terrain, on friendly forces, or on the enemy formation. The technique
in which quadrants are based on the enemy formation is usually referred to as the target
array and is covered in threat-based fire control measures. The method of identifying
quadrants is established in the unit SOP, but the unit must take care to avoid confusion
when using quadrants based on terrain, friendly forces, and enemy formations
simultaneously.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-53

Chapter 4
Terrain-based Quadrant
4-143. A terrain-based quadrant entails use of a TRP, either existing or constructed, to
designate the center point of the axes that divide the area into four quadrants. This
technique can be employed in both offensive and defensive operations. In the offense,
the platoon leader designates the center of the quadrant using an existing feature or by
creating a reference point such as using a ground burst illumination round, a smoke
marking round, or a fire ignited by incendiary or tracer rounds. The axes delineating the
quadrants run parallel and perpendicular to the direction of movement. In the defense,
the platoon leader designates the center of the quadrant using an existing or constructed
TRP. In figure 4-22, the quadrants are marked using the letter “Q” and a number (Q1 to
Q4); quadrant numbers are in the same relative positions as on military map sheets (from
Q1 as the upper left quadrant clockwise to Q4 as the lower left quadrant).
Figure 4-22. Terrain-based quadrants, examples
Friendly Based Quadrant

4-144. The friendly based quadrant technique entails superimposing quadrants over
the unit’s formation. The center point is based on the center of the formation, and the
axes run parallel and perpendicular to the general direction of travel. For rapid
orientation, the friendly quadrant technique might be better than the clock direction
method because different elements of a large formation are rarely oriented in the same
exact direction and because the relative dispersion of friendly forces causes parallax to
the target. Figure 4-23 shows use of friendly-based quadrants.
4-54 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-23. Friendly-based quadrants, example
MAXIMUM ENGAGEMENT LINE

4-145. A maximum engagement line is the linear image of the farthest limit of effective
fire for a weapon or unit. This line is determined both by the weapons or units maximum
effective range, and by the effects of terrain. For example, slope, vegetation, structures,
and other features provide cover and concealment that may prevent the weapon from
engaging out to the maximum effective range. A maximum engagement lines serves
several purposes. The platoon leader may use it to prevent engaging beyond the
maximum effective range of their weapons, to define criteria for the establishment of
triggers, and to delineate the maximum extent of battle space on the sector sketch.
RESTRICTIVE FIRE LINE

4-146. A restrictive fire line is a line established between converging friendly forces
(one or both might be moving) that prohibit fires and effects across the line without
coordination with the affected force. In the offense, the platoon leader may designate a
restrictive fire line to prevent a base of fire element from firing into the area where an
assaulting element is maneuvering. In the defense, the platoon leader may establish a
restrictive fire line to prevent the platoon from engaging a squad positioned in restricted
terrain on the flank of an enemy avenue of approach.
FINAL PROTECTIVE LINE

4-147. The final protective line is a line of fire established where an enemy assault is
halted by the interlocking fires of all available weapons. The unit reinforces this line
with protective, tactical, and supplemental obstacles and with final protective fires
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-55

Chapter 4
whenever possible. Initiation of the final protective fire is the signal for elements and
individual Soldiers to shift fires to their assigned portion of the final protective line.
THREAT-BASED FIRE-CONTROL MEASURES

4-148. The platoon leader uses threat-based fire control measures to focus and control
direct fires by directing the unit to engage a specific enemy element rather than to fire
on a point or area. The following paragraphs describe the techniques associated with this
type of fire control measure.
Fire Patterns
4-149. Fire patterns are a threat-based fire control measure designed to distribute the
fires of a unit simultaneously among multiple, similar targets. They are most often used
by platoons to distribute fires across an enemy formation. Leaders designate and adjust
fire patterns based on terrain and the enemy formation. The basic fire patterns are frontal
fire, cross fire, and depth fire.
Frontal Fire
4-150. Leaders may initiate frontal fire (see figure 4-24) when targets are arrayed in
front of the unit in a lateral configuration. Weapons systems engage targets to their
respective fronts. For example, the left flank weapon engages the left-most target, and
the right flank weapon engages the right-most target. As the unit destroys targets,
weapons shift fires toward the center of the enemy formation and from near to far.
Figure 4-24. Frontal fire
4-56 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Cross Fire
4-151. Leaders initiate cross fire (see figure 4-25) when targets are arrayed laterally
across the unit’s front in a manner that permits diagonal fires at the enemy’s flank or
when obstructions prevent unit weapons from firing frontally. Right flank weapons
engage the left-most targets, and left flank weapons engage the right-most targets. Firing
diagonally across an engagement area provides more flank shots, thus increasing the
chance of kills. It also reduces the possibility of the enemy detecting friendly elements.
As the unit destroys targets, weapons shift fires toward the center of the enemy
formation.
Figure 4-25. Cross Fire
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-57

Chapter 4
Depth Fire
4-152. Leaders initiate depth fire (see figure 4-26) when targets are dispersed in-depth,
perpendicular to the unit. Center weapons engage the closest targets, and flank weapons
engage deeper targets. As the unit destroys targets, weapons shift fires toward the center
of the enemy formation.
Figure 4-26. Depth fire
4-58 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Target Array
4-153. Target array permits the platoon leader to distribute fires when the enemy force
is concentrated and terrain-based controls are inadequate. This threat-based distribution
measure is similar to the quadrant method mentioned in terrain-based fire control
measures. The platoon leader creates the target array by superimposing a quadrant
pattern over an enemy formation. The pattern centers on the enemy formation, with the
axis running parallel and perpendicular to the enemy’s direction of travel. Quadrants are
described using their relative locations. Figure 4-27 illustrates examples of the target
array technique.
Figure 4-27. Target arrays, example
ENGAGEMENT PRIORITIES
4-154. Engagement priorities entail the sequential ordering of targets to be engaged.
They serve one or more of the following critical fire control functions; prioritize targets,
employ best weapons for targets, and distribute the platoon’s fires.
Prioritize Targets
4-155. In concert with the concept of the operation, the platoon leader determines
which target types provide the greatest threat to the platoon and sets these as engagement
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-59

Chapter 4
priorities. For example, they may decide that destroying enemy engineer assets is the
best way to prevent the enemy from breaching an obstacle.
4-156. Three target threat levels are used to articulate which threat of multiple threats
presented require immediate attention, the most dangerous targets are engaged first. The
three target threat levels are most dangerous, dangerous, and least dangerous.
4-157. When multiple targets of the same threat level are encountered, the targets are
prioritized according to the threat they represent. The standard prioritization of targets
establishes the order of engagements. Firers engage similar threats by the following
guide:
 Near before far.
 Frontal before flank.
 Stationary before moving.
Employ Best Weapons for Target

4-158. Establishing engagement priorities for specific friendly systems increases the
effectiveness with which the unit employs its weapons. When selecting the appropriate
weapon and ammunition for use against threats, the leader or Soldier considers the
determined threat type and the range to target. As an example, the engagement priority
for the Javelin could be enemy fortifications first, then enemy armored vehicles.
Distribute Unit’s Fires

4-159. Establishing different priorities for similar friendly systems helps to prevent
overkill and achieve effective distribution of fires. For example, the platoon leader may
designate the enemy fortifications as the initial priority for one section while making the
enemy vehicles the priority for another section. This decreases the chance of multiple
Javelins being fired against two enemy armored vehicles while ignoring the dangers
posed by the fortifications.
DETECT, IDENTIFY, DECIDE, ENGAGE, AND ASSESS

4-160. DIDEA is a process that provides a standardized method of engagement for
platoon weapons and platforms on the battlefield. The process allows Soldiers and
leaders to maximize the effects of lethal fires against the enemy while at the same time
reducing or eliminating the effects of fires on friendly or neutral personnel, equipment,
or facilities. Figure 4-28 represents this process.
4-60 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Security
Figure 4-28. Direct fire engagement process
4-161. Direct fire weapons, platforms, squads, and small units incorporate the
principles of combat identification into the direct fire engagement process. The DIDEA
process provides an iterative, standardized, and systematic approach to target
engagement activities with direct fire.
 Detect. The target detection process takes practice and skill to acquire
potential threats successfully in various environments and visibility
conditions. This process includes all actions to actively search, acquire, and
locate potential targets.
 Identify. Once a potential threat is detected and acquired, the firer accurately
identifies the range to target, and effectively establishes the threat as friend,
foe, or neutral. Target identification is systematic process supporting the
characterization of detected objects. Once identified as a hostile threat, crews
classify the threat as most dangerous, dangerous, or least dangerous from
their perspective.
 Decide. The determination is made by the crew to engage or not. Soldiers and
leaders use all the situational information at their disposal to ensure an
appropriate level of response to the threat.
 Engage. Engage is the specific application of military options or weapons to
defeat, neutralize, or destroy the threat. Successful implementation of the
weapons or military options at the disposal of the firer efficiently and
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 4-61

Chapter 4
effectively alters, disrupts, or halts the threat’s DIDEA process, and

ultimately eliminates the threat to friendly force.
 Assess. This step evaluates the weapons or options employed to defeat the
threat or threats. It is the process the crew uses to determine if the applied
weapons or options deliver the desired effect.
4-62 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Chapter 5
Basic Scout Skills
Scouts must master basic scout skills that they incorporate, both
individually and collectively, into all reconnaissance and security
missions. These skills are requisite in all scouts regardless of rank.
Scouts have to perform reconnaissance and security in a dangerous
and unknown environment, which requires these basic skills to be
automatically understood and executed.
Contents
Page
SECTION I. Fundamentals of Tactical Movement 5-1
SECTION II. Navigation 5-5
SECTION III. Mounted Scout Platoon Formations 5-11
SECTION IV. Movement Techniques 5-19
SECTION V. Dismounted Operations 5-24
SECTION VI. Actions on Contact 5-48
SECTION VII. Chemical, Biological, Radiological
and Nuclear Operations 5-69
SECTION I – FUNDAMENTALS OF TACTICAL MOVEMENT

5-1. Scouts determine movement techniques based primarily on enemy expectations,
but also the troop-leading procedures, assets, and sensors such as; joint capabilities
release, ground sensors and surveillance systems, and UAS. This section focuses on
several critical aspects of tactical movement, including:
5-2. Movement fundamentals and formations: Allow the platoon to maneuver in a way
to accomplish the mission but minimize causalities and retain freedom of maneuver.
5-3. Movement techniques: Successfully employed traveling, traveling overwatch,
and bounding overwatch movement techniques allow the platoon to conduct
reconnaissance without compromise. They also help the platoon leader minimize the
platoon’s exposure to enemy observation and fire and maximize the number of tactical
options available to the platoon.
5-4. Mission considerations: Section leaders maintain situational awareness regarding
the location of enemy forces, observable areas, and weapon systems capability by
conducting stealthy movement and gaining visual contact with enemy forces. Obtaining
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-1

Chapter 5
visual contact with the enemy first allows friendly forces to make contact on terms of
their choosing.
5-5. Chance contact: The scout platoon takes steps to minimize chance contact with
enemy forces by executing detailed IPB, visually clearing IV lines and templated danger
areas, and utilization of proper movement techniques. The use of information collection
assets and sensors such as the UAS and ground sensors reduce the possibility of chance
contact. Scout platoons utilize dispersion and operate in supporting distance to make
contact with the smallest element possible allowing freedom of maneuver and
maximizing tactical options.
5-6. Timelines: Tactical movements are made in accordance with the timelines and
operational phases directed by the higher commander. The platoon leader must adapt
movement formations to meet the timeline directed by higher.
MOVEMENT AND MANEUVER

5-7. Sound tactical movement is the essence of all scout platoon missions. The platoon
maneuvers in a way to accomplish the mission, but minimizes casualties and retains
freedom of maneuver.
5-8. Effectively employed, the guidelines in this section can help scouts see the enemy
first and observe them undetected which helps to achieve a number of tactical goals,
including retaining the initiative, confirming or denying CCIR, and retaining freedom
of movement to gain information. Tactical movement involves movement of a unit
assigned a mission under combat conditions when not in direct ground contact with the
enemy. Tactical movement is based on the anticipation of early ground contact with the
enemy, either en route or shortly after arrival at the destination. Movement ends when
ground contact is made or the unit reaches its destination. Movement is not maneuver.
Maneuver happens once a unit has made contact with the enemy and combines
movement with direct fires to gain a position of advantage over the enemy.
5-9. Platoon leaders plan movement and maneuver during the TLP and is based on the
platoon’s mission. The movement and maneuver plan must match the commander’s
intent, and ties closely to suspected enemy and terrain found within the platoon’s AO.
The platoon leader determines the platoon’s routes, movement techniques, formations,
and when to transition to maneuver based on the likelihood of enemy contact. Conduct
maneuver to avoid enemy strengths and create an opportunity that increases the effects
of combat power.
5-10. The platoon transitions to maneuver when enemy contact is made. To assist in the
maneuver of the platoon to their objective, the platoon leader integrates multiple assets
and other combat multipliers into the scheme of maneuver, such as the employment of
fires, dismounted antitank teams, small unmanned aircraft systems assets.
5-11. Plan movement and maneuver using the war-game technique during the platoon
planning process. The platoon leader, assisted by experienced members of the platoon,
identifies expected enemy engagement areas, most likely enemy BPs, and areas best
suited for the emplacement of enemy obstacles to slow or stop friendly forces, and plans
5-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
their maneuver to counter the enemy threats. The platoon leader designates friendly
TRPs along the proposed routes and assigns sectors of fire, observation, and weapons
orientation.
USE TERRAIN FOR COVER AND CONCEALMENT

5-12. Leaders look at the terrain, foliage, structures, and other features along avenues
of approach (and on objectives or key terrain) to identify sites offering cover (protection
from the effects of direct and indirect fire) and concealment (protection from
observation). Cover and concealment is just as vital as clear fields of fire. Terrain offers
concealment from enemy observation and cover from enemy fires. Scouts make
maximum use of natural protection to accomplish their mission and avoid enemy
detection as seen in figure 5-1. Scouts use cover whenever possible. When no cover is
available, scouts use the concealment offered by trees, shadows, brush, and man-made
structures.
Figure 5-1. Use of natural terrain for concealment
5-13. During all movement, individual vehicles and personnel should avoid becoming
silhouetted against a skyline. Vehicles should take precautions to avoid moving directly
forward from a defilade position as this can enable the enemy to pinpoint the vehicle
and engage it as it moves. Instead, vehicles should back up and move left or right around
the previous position to get to the next location. Leaders should use dismounted scouts
to clear past IV lines and use crest and berm drills to their maximum advantage (see
figure 5-2, page 5-4).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-3

Chapter 5
Figure 5-2. Crest and berm drill
5-14. The platoon avoids movement through these areas by combining proper terrain
driving techniques with carefully selected routes that maximize security and reduce the
signature of the vehicle. The platoon should stop short of danger areas and use
dismounted scouts to reconnoiter ahead of them. For example, when encountering an
open area, the platoon sends dismounts to a concealed position to observe the area.
Scouts carefully check the other side of the open area for enemy positions. Vehicles
provide overwatch for the dismounts while using combat identification techniques to
mitigate the risk of fratricide. When clear, the platoon then quickly crosses the open
area.
REDUCE VEHICLE-RELATED SIGNATURES

5-15. Reduce the scout platform’s major signatures (audible, thermal, and visual) by
shutting off the vehicle and related systems such as heaters or older thermal sights
whenever the vehicle is not moving or when not using the system (normally referred to
as a short count). Short count is most effective when conducted with multiple vehicles.
Scouts further reduce visual and thermal signatures by erecting camouflage nets and use
foliage found in the AO to alter the natural box shape of the vehicle, which helps hide a
stationary vehicle visually and thermally. Nets tied to the vehicle reduce dust and
exhaust signatures and reduce the thermal signature while moving. Scouts must employ
camouflage materiel appropriately on vehicles during movement to break up the color
and silhouette. If camouflage nets are not available, scouts can use foliage or camouflage
nets along with foliage to break up colors and silhouettes. Another way scouts can
reduce their vehicle’s signature is to keep their hatches closed, which reduces noise and
light signatures, as well as mask internal lights from outside observation. Other
techniques to reduce the vehicle’s signature are:
5-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
 Placing meal, ready to eat boxes or ponchos over windows, windshields, and
periscope covers to minimize white light signature from the joint capabilities
release/blue force tracking.
 Conducting external PCIs of vehicles using night observation devices to spot-
check friendly light signatures.
 Reducing vehicle glass reflection from periscopes and windows by removing,
covering, or camouflaging them (for example, placing a net over the
windshield).
USE OF DISMOUNTED SCOUTS

5-16. Generally, the platoon sends out dismounts in elements of no fewer than three
scouts, which enhances mission accomplishment and survivability. While vehicles
easily alert enemy by their visual, sound, and exhaust signatures, dismounted patrols
and observation posts are very difficult to notice. Scouts should dismount their vehicles
and use optical devices to gain information on objectives or NAIs. Sending out the
smallest element possible to gain observation and clear danger areas increases
survivability for the platoon. For example, during reconnaissance tasks, scouts dismount
beyond the direct fire range of suspected enemy positions and weapon systems. They
then move in ahead of their vehicles using the cover and concealment of a dismounted
avenue adjacent to the mounted route. Leaving the vehicles in hide or overwatch
positions, the dismounted scouts occupy observation posts that provide critical
information enhancing the unit’s survivability.
SECTION II - NAVIGATION
5-17. Whether mounted or dismounted, scouts must be proficient in navigation.
Technology has made navigation easier, but the enemy can degrade mission command
systems so the scout must use several methods to aid in the navigation of the platoon
throughout their AO. Leaders need to identify good ground along the route that
facilitates movement and aid in the navigation from one area to the next. Leaders need
to choose their terrain wisely, and choose routes that meet the tempo and focus
established by the troop commander.
MAP CORRELATION
5-18. Scouts retain freedom of maneuver. To do so it is imperative they navigate by
maintaining situational awareness within an AO. Leaders receive information from their
higher headquarters in different formats and scales. For example, there may be
operational graphics sent digitally through mission command systems such as joint
capabilities release or on a simple piece of acetate. Conceptual graphics might be digital
or sent as paper copy of power point slides. Map sheets may range from 1:50,000 to
1:250,000 scale. Soldiers have become accustomed to automatic navigational products
such as GPS, which is subject to spoofing. Leaders must quickly correlate, process, and
disseminate this information into comprehensible and quickly usable information to
their subordinates.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-5

Chapter 5
5-19. Leaders consider terrain displayed on maps and products as it relates to their
mission, anticipating likely cover, concealment, danger areas, built up areas and other
military aspects of terrain. They anticipate potential weather effects on the terrain during
their map reconnaissance. Swollen streams from high rain activity or loss of vegetation
due to drought may affect the unit’s movement plan. Leaders account for these
conditions and consider how the enemy may use them to their advantage. Leaders must
learn terrain appreciation to anticipate attacks or ambush at choke points and identify
these areas during planning.
COMMON REFERENCE POINTS

5-20. After orienting their map, leaders lay out their operational graphics and other
related products. Find common reference points on the graphics and maps such as
hilltops, towns, lakes, bridges. Use these common reference points to align the various
mission products to the map and quickly develop understanding of the mission in
relation to the terrain.
5-21. After orienting terrain data to the map, locate graphic control measures. Transfer
the relevant NAI’s, LOA’s, routes, and phase lines to the map. Identify coordination
points and contact points.
DETERMINE SCALE
5-22. Finally, determine the scale of each product. Map legends typically provide
distance scales. Staff products with no terrestrial association require estimation to
determine distances. Ensure subordinates understand all graphics, their purpose, and the
associated terrain.
5-23. When transferring map data, precision is key. Finer writing instruments are more
useful than large markers. When copying acetate overlays, line the reference points up
between the original and the copy prior to copying the graphics. This is generally done
by outlining two grid squares, on opposite sides of the map, and labeling these grid
reference marks with the appropriate vertical and horizontal grid line numbers. Ensure
to outline four grid square lines and their numbers in the upper right and lower left to
properly align the map.
NAVIGATION AIDS
5-24. There are two categories of navigational aids: linear, and point. Linear
navigational aids are terrain features such as trails, streams, ridgelines, wood lines,
power lines, streets, and contour lines. Point terrain features include hilltops, and
prominent buildings. Navigation aids usually are assigned control measures to facilitate
communication during the movement. Typically, linear features are labeled as phase
lines, while point features are labeled as checkpoints. There are three primary categories
of navigation aids: catching feature, handrails, and navigational attack points
(TC 3-25.26).
5-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
CATCHING FEATURES
5-25. Catching features are obvious, prominent terrain features beyond a waypoint or
control measure and are either linear or point. These features act as back stops indicating
the unit has gone past their navigation point.
THE OFFSET-COMPASS METHOD

5-26. If there is the possibility of missing a particular point along the route (such as the
end point or a navigational attack point), it is sometimes preferable to deliberately aim
the leg to the left or right of the end point toward a prominent catching feature. Once
reached, the unit simply turns the appropriate direction and moves to the desired
endpoint. This method is especially helpful when the catching feature is linear.
HANDRAILS
5-27. Handrails are linear features parallel to the proposed route such as roads or
highways, railroads, power transmission lines, ridgelines, or streams. These linear
features run parallel to a unit’s direction of movement. The general idea is to use the
handrail to keep the unit oriented in the right direction. Guiding off of a handrail can
increase the unit’s speed while also acting as a catching feature.
BOXING-IN THE ROUTE

5-28. One of the techniques leaders can use to prevent themselves from making
navigational errors is to “box-in” the leg or the entire route. This method uses catching
features, handrails, and navigational attack points to form boundaries. Creating a box
around the leg or route assists in easily recognizing and correcting deviation from the
planned leg or route.
NAVIGATIONAL ATTACK POINTS

5-29. Navigational attack points are obvious landmarks that are found easily near the
objective, LOA, or checkpoint. Upon arriving at the navigational attack point, the unit
transitions from rough navigation (terrain association or general azimuth navigation) to
point navigation (dead reckoning). Typically, label navigational attack points as
checkpoints.
METHODS OF NAVIGATION
5-30. There are three methods of navigation: terrain association, general azimuth
method, and point navigation (dead reckoning). When elements are in combat vehicles
there is the stabilized turret alignment navigation method also available. Leaders use
whichever type or combination that best suits the situation.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-7

Chapter 5
TERRAIN ASSOCIATION
5-31. Terrain association is the ability to identify terrain features on the ground by the
contour intervals depicted on the map. The leader analyzes the terrain and identifies
major terrain features, contour changes, and man-made structures along their axis of
advance. As the unit moves, they use these features to orient the unit and to associate
ground positions with map locations. The major advantage of terrain association forces
the leader to continually assess the terrain.
GENERAL AZIMUTH METHOD

5-32. For the general azimuth method, the leader selects linear terrain features; then
while maintaining map orientation and a general azimuth, the leader guides on the terrain
feature. An advantage the general azimuth method has is it speeds movement, avoids
fatigue, and often simplifies navigation because the unit follows the terrain feature. The
disadvantage is it usually puts the unit on a natural line of drift. This method should end
like terrain association, with the unit reaching a catching feature or a navigational attack
point, then switching to point navigation.
DEAD RECKONING (POINT NAVIGATION)

5-33. Dead reckoning, also called point navigation, is accomplished by starting from a
known point and strictly following a predetermined azimuth and distance. This form of
navigation requires a high level of leader control because even a slight deviation over
the course of a movement can cause navigation errors. This method uses the dismounted
compass and a distance from the pace count (or a vehicle’s odometer when mounted) to
follow a prescribed route. Point navigation requires the leader to follow these step:
 Use the compass to maintain direction.
 Use the pace count or a vehicle odometer to measure the distance traveled for
each leg or part.
 Review the written description of the route plan to help prevent navigational
errors.
Note. Do not take compass reading from inside vehicles. Move away from
vehicles when using a lensatic compass.
5-34. When performed correctly, point navigation is very reliable, but time-consuming.
It is best when the need for navigational accuracy outweighs the importance of using
terrain association. Point navigation is particularly useful when recognizable terrain
features do not exist or are too far away to be helpful. For example, deserts, swamps,
and thick forest make terrain association difficult. Using point navigation early on in a
long movement can stress the compass Soldier and it may be advisable to switch them
out. One of the problems with point navigation is negotiating severely restrictive terrain
or danger areas.
5-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
STABILIZED TURRET ALIGNMENT NAVIGATION

5-35. Another method for vehicles with a stabilized turret is to align the turret on the
azimuth of travel, then switch the turret stabilization system on and engage the gun
stabilization function. Activate the stabilizer according to the vehicle operating
procedures. With the stabilization function engaged the gun tube remains pointed toward
the destination no matter which way the vehicle turns. This technique is not harmful to
the stabilization system. It is subject to stabilization drift, so use it for no more than
5,000 meters before resetting. If engaging a target from the turret, repeat the entire
process.
COMBINATION
5-36. Leaders can benefit from combining the different methods of navigation and also
having several members of the platoon backing up navigation by utilizing alternative
methods to ensure accuracy. Terrain association and the general azimuth method enable
leaders to set a rough compass bearing and move as quickly as the situation allows
toward a catching feature or a navigational attack point. Once reached, leaders switch to
point navigation by paying close attention to detail, asking for as much time as necessary
to analyze the situation and find their point. Terrain association and the general azimuth
method allow for some flexibility in the movement, and do not require the same level of
control as point navigation. Point navigation, on the other hand, enables leaders to
precisely locate their objective or point.
ROUTE TYPES
5-37. There are three types of routes leaders can plan, those which follow linear terrain
features; those which follow a designated contour interval; and those which go cross
compartment. Terrain association is used with all three route types. Use the general
azimuth method with the contour and terrain feature method. Point navigation is used
primarily with cross compartment.
TERRAIN FEATURES
5-38. Following a terrain feature is nothing more than moving along linear features such
as ridges, valleys, and streets. The advantage of this method is the unit is moving with
the terrain, which is normally the least physically taxing of the methods. The
disadvantage is following terrain features also means following natural lines of drift,
which leads to a higher probability of chance contact with the enemy.
CONTOURING
5-39. Contouring (remaining at the same height the entire leg) is following the
imaginary contour line around a hill or along a ridgeline. Contouring has two
advantages. First, it prevents undue climbing or descending. Second, following the
contour acts as handrail or catching feature. The disadvantage of contouring is it can be
physically taxing by adding distance traveled.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-9

Chapter 5
CROSS COMPARTMENT
5-40. Cross compartment means following a predetermined azimuth and usually means
moving against the terrain. The advantage of this method is it provides the most direct
route from the SP to the end point of the leg or route. There are two primary
disadvantages to this type of route. First, this method is physically taxing. Second, the
unit might expose itself to enemy observation.
DEVELOP A LEG
5-41. The best way to manage a route is to divide it into segments called “legs.” By
breaking the overall route into several smaller segments, the leader is able to plan in
detail. Legs typically have only one distance and direction. A change in direction usually
ends the leg and begins a new one.
5-42. A leg must have a definite beginning and ending, marked with a control measure
such as a checkpoint, phase line, or way point (when using GPS). When possible, the
SP and end point should correspond to a navigational aid (catching feature or
navigational attack point).
5-43. To develop a leg, leaders first determine the type of navigation and route best
suiting the situation. Once these two decisions are made, the leader determines the
distance and direction from the SP to the end point. The leader then identifies critical
METT-TC information as it relates to the specific leg. Finally, leaders capture this
information and draw a sketch on a route chart as depicted in figure 5-3.
5-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Figure 5-3. Sketching of legs, example
DANGER AREAS
5-44. During the execution of reconnaissance and security, the platoon encounters
specific types of terrain features or regions that expose them to enemy fire. These danger
areas are likely points of enemy contact due to the scout platoon’s inherent
vulnerabilities while navigating. Identify and highlight enemy cover, concealment, and
observation danger areas when the platoon leader performs map reconnaissance and
platoon analysis during TLP. There is no perfect way to counter every danger area so
leaders at all levels need to use disciplined initiative when reacting to danger areas.
Examples of danger areas include—
 Open areas.
 Wooded areas.
 Roads, trails, and rail lines.
 Urban areas.
 Minefields and obstacles.
 Streams.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-11

Chapter 5
LATERAL OR BOUNDARY ROUTES

5-45. As the platoon executes reconnaissance and security missions, routes, or mobility
corridors that provide access into the terrain between the platoon and friendly elements
to its flanks and rear are to be expected. These lateral mobility corridors pose a security
threat to the platoon and the other friendly elements by allowing the enemy and scouts
to move into the terrain around the platoon flanks unobserved. Leaders coordinate
missions with adjacent units to prevent confusion, fratricide, or possible enemy
exploitation. Scouts should not reconnoiter lateral routes beyond one-half the distance
of the maximum effective range of overwatching weapon systems. It is critical that the
platoon maintain continuous surveillance of these mobility corridors to protect against
infiltrating enemy forces. If necessary, the platoon uses a series of contact and
coordination points to enhance security during movement through the area. The UAS
can monitor areas already cleared by the scout platoon and assist in mitigating enemy
infiltration between adjacent elements.
5-46. To maintain surveillance of areas along known or suspected paths of enemy travel,
the platoon can establish outposts to maximize the reconnaissance effort forward. This
security technique uses short duration observation posts consisting of two Soldiers with
equipment. A section or squad should deploy an outpost when it is at risk of losing
observation of a possible enemy approach route that no other element can observe. Once
deployed, the outpost maintains surveillance of the avenue of approach until the rest of
the reconnaissance element returns. In doing so, this outpost provides security with early
warning of enemy activity that the mounted element would not have detected.
SECTION III – MOUNTED SCOUT PLATOON FORMATIONS

5-47. During either mounted or dismounted movement, the scout platoon employs
combat formations when the terrain and enemy situation supports their use or when the
mission or reconnaissance objective is precisely focused, such as in a route
reconnaissance.
5-48. The eight mounted scout platoon formations—line, vee, column, staggered
column, wedge, echelon (left or right), coil, and herringbone—are intended to be
flexible. Modify them to fit the situation, terrain, and combat losses; they do not have
exact geometric dimensions and design. Transition into and out of the various
formations must be second nature to each squad.
5-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
LINE FORMATION
5-49. Regardless of the platoon organization, the line formation is applicable to most
scout platoon missions. (See figure 5-4.) This allows maximum reconnaissance forward
and covers a wider AO. It also requires the platoon to have some form of overwatch
because vehicles only provide local security.
Figure 5-4. Line formation (ABCT scout platoon)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-13

Chapter 5
VEE FORMATION
5-50. The platoon maintains relative positioning based on terrain and combat losses.
The vee formation lends itself to immediate mutual support and provides depth due to
its flexibility. (See figure 5-5.) Using any of the techniques of movement, the two
forward vehicles perform most of the information gathering and reporting. The rear
vehicles provide overwatch.
Figure 5-5. Vee formation (ABCT scout platoon)
5-14 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
COLUMN FORMATION
5-51. When speed is essential as it moves on a designated route, the platoon uses the
column formation which offers good fields of fire to the flanks but little to the front and
rear (see figure 5-6). Normally, the platoon leader briefs the section leaders on the route
and speed, and then allows the lead section to control the column movement. This
enables the platoon leader to concentrate on the subsequent mission. However, the
platoon leader still has the responsibility of tracking the movement of the platoon. The
order of march in the column may depend on which organization the platoon uses at the
end of the movement.
Figure 5-6. Column formation (SBCT scout platoon)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-15

Chapter 5
STAGGERED COLUMN
5-52. The platoon uses the staggered column formation for rapid movement across less
restrictive terrain, affording all-around observation and fields of fire. The enemy
emplaces explosive devices and mines just off the roadway, so platoons exercise caution
to avoid driving on or just beyond the road shoulder when using this formation (see
figure 5-7).
Figure 5-7. Staggered column formation (SBCT scout platoon)
5-16 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
WEDGE FORMATION
5-53. Maneuver unit platoons primarily use the wedge formation. (See figure 5-8.)
Although this is not a typical reconnaissance formation, it may be used when enemy
contact is likely and the platoon fights for information. The wedge can be formed with
six-, three-, or two-vehicle organizations. This formation allows firepower to focus
forward or shift to either flank. In the event the platoon makes enemy contact while
moving, the wedge formation permits the platoon to gain contact with the smallest
possible maneuver element—the section.
Figure 5-8. Wedge formation (ABCT scout platoon)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-17

Chapter 5
ECHELON (LEFT OR RIGHT)

5-54. When the platoon wants to maintain security or observation of one flank, and
when the platoon does not expect enemy contact, they use the echelon formation shown.
(See figure 5-9.)
Figure 5-9. Echelon left or right (ABCT scout platoon)
5-18 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
COIL FORMATION
5-55. The platoon coil provides all-around security and observation when the platoon is
stationary. (See figure 5-10.) Each vehicle has a particular position to occupy in the coil,
and the platoon leader designates the orientation of the coil using a cardinal direction. In
the absence of orders, the direction of travel becomes 12 o’clock. The platoon develops
a coil SOP. The platoon usually executes this formation from the column or staggered
column with the lead vehicle occupying the 12 o’clock position. Other vehicles occupy
the clock positions according to the order of march. Vehicles position 100 to 150 meters
apart or as dictated by terrain.
Figure 5-10. Coil formation (ABCT scout platoon)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-19

Chapter 5
HERRINGBONE FORMATION
5-56. The herringbone provides 360-degree security during a temporary halt from a
march column, and scouts should dismount to provide greater security. The formation
may widen to permit passage of vehicles down the center of the column. (See
figure 5-11.) All vehicles should move completely off the road if terrain allows. Vehicle
commanders reposition their vehicles as necessary to take advantage of the best cover,
concealment, and fields of fire. As with the staggered column formation, platoons
exercise caution when they use the herringbone formation to avoid explosive devices
and mines emplaced just off the roadway.
5-20 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Figure 5-11. Herringbone formation (SBCT scout platoon)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-21

Chapter 5
SECTION IV – MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES

5-57. Movement techniques minimize exposure, maintain freedom of movement,
maximize available tactical options, and react successfully to contact as seen in table 5-1
and figure 5-12. Effectively employed, movement techniques allow the platoon to find
and observe threats without compromise. The movement techniques that the scout
platoon use when conducting reconnaissance and security missions, both mounted and
dismounted, are; traveling, traveling overwatch, and bounding overwatch.
5-58. The platoon leader adjusts movement based on the mission and enemy situation.
Terrain considerations may also affect the choice of movement technique. In most
tactical missions, the platoon moves as separate sections or teams under the mission
command of the platoon leader. Leaders, particularly at the section level, should employ
a degree of overwatch when enemy contact is possible. Regardless of which technique
they use, the section leader gives the order explaining what each team does. Overwatch
becomes more critical as the likelihood of enemy contact increases.
Table 5-1. Movement techniques and characteristics

When Characteristics
Movement
Normally
Techniques Control Dispersion Speed Security
Used
Contact not
Traveling More Less Fastest Least
likely
Traveling Contact
Less More Slower More
overwatch possible
Bounding Contact
Most Most Slowest Most
overwatch expected
5-22 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Figure 5-12. Movement techniques usage chart
5-59. Platoon leadership will encourage crewmember communication during training

events. Drivers communicate with the vehicle commander about terrain that would
impact the maneuver of their vehicle such as wadis, trenches, mud, and obstacles.
Gunners need to request additional time from the vehicle commander when needing to
scan hotspots along routes, and threats in danger areas such as passes and condensing
terrain. Dismounted scouts and squad leaders communicate potential vehicle drop off
points that could positively or negatively impact their dismount mission. Working
together enhances the crew’s ability to successfully accomplish their mission.
5-60. Crewmembers must remain vigilant while conducting mounted movement and
maneuver. Drivers continuously scan their surroundings ever alert for any changes
within the operating environment. Drivers should be constantly on the lookout for cover
and concealment, moving to positions of advantage without having to be directed.
Gunners are always aware of their sectors of fire and strive for 360-degree security.
Vehicle commanders and section leaders maintain constant communications amongst
vehicle crews and adjacent forces/vehicles. Good crosstalk and situational awareness
within squads makes for greater lethality.
TRAVELING
5-61. Employ traveling in secured areas when speed is important and enemy contact is
not likely. Traveling is the fastest but least secure movement technique. In this
technique, the lead and trail elements move together as a unit. Movement is continuous,
and squads maintain interval as terrain and weather permit. The platoon does not intend
to engage in combat, but it disperses to prevent destruction in case of unexpected air or
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-23

Chapter 5
ground attack. During traveling, formations are essentially not altered except for effects
of terrain (see figure 5-13).
5-62. Traveling is the fastest technique of movement. Leaders must remain aware to use
this technique only when speed is important. Squads must increase their vigilance
because of the threat of a surprise attack. Always assume that the enemy is present even
when an area has been cleared. Enemy combatants are always ready to exploit
weaknesses and catch scout platoons off guard.
Figure 5-13. Traveling movement technique
TRAVELING OVERWATCH
5-63. The platoon leader uses traveling overwatch when they think contact is possible
(see figure 5-14). The trailing element moves at variable speeds and may pause for short
periods to overwatch the lead element. It keys its movement to terrain and the lead
element. The trailing element overwatches at such a distance that, should the enemy
engage the lead element, it will not prevent the trailing element from firing or moving
5-24 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
to support the lead element. In some cases, improved awareness might prompt the
trailing element to increase these distances. Leaders track the movement of forward
elements. They observe and receive position updates to ensure the forward element
remains on azimuth and within range of supporting direct fires.
Figure 5-14. Traveling overwatch movement technique
BOUNDING OVERWATCH
5-64. When the platoon leader expects enemy contact, they use bounding overwatch
with alternate or successive bounds. They initiate it based on reports received during
planning about the enemy situation and on SITREPs received during movement.
Bounding overwatch is similar to fire and movement in one unit stationary and
concealed as much as possible, overwatches the movement of another. The difference is
enemy contact is only expected. The key to this technique is the proper use of terrain.
5-65. Bounding overwatch is the most secure technique to use to find, fix, and destroy
the enemy. The stationary positions of one section provide overwatch for the other
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-25

Chapter 5
section as they are moving. The stationary element is set and using all available sensors,
sights, and equipment to find the enemy. If a Stryker platoon were bounding, then they
would use their remote weapon systems along with their long-range scout surveillance
systems to identify the enemy for both sections (stationary and bounding sections).
Sections bound half of the max effective range of the platoon’s weapons systems, and
each vehicle commander sends “moving” and “set,” with their front line trace to the
other section. By providing their front line trace, the other section will automatically
know how far to advance during successive or alternating bounds.
ALTERNATE BOUNDS
5-66. In this method, the trail element advances past the lead element to the next
overwatch position. This technique is usually more rapid than successive bounds and
creates a more stable fire platform and better position for the overwatching vehicle (see
figure 5-15).
5-26 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Figure 5-15. Bounding overwatch (alternate bounds)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-27

Chapter 5
SUCCESSIVE BOUNDS
5-67. In successive bounding, the trail element moves to an overwatch position that is
approximately abreast of the lead element. This method is slower but easier to control
and more secure (see figure 5-16).
Figure 5-16. Bounding overwatch (successive bounds)
5-28 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
SECTION V – DISMOUNTED OPERATIONS

5-68. Although all platoons conduct dismounted operations at times, dismounted
operations are the scout platoon’s primary means for gathering information. The basic
dismounted elements within the platoon are the team, squad, section, and platoon. Each
scout vehicle has a designated dismounted team.
5-69. Every dismounted element consists of a reconnaissance element and a security
element. The purpose of the reconnaissance element is to obtain data on information
requirements. The security element’s primary responsibility is to protect the
reconnaissance element. The security element may also serve as a reconnaissance
element or have alternate responsibilities. Whichever role the security element plays, its
primary objective is protecting the dismounted element. A two-scout team is the smallest
dismount element within the platoon. It takes a minimum of two Soldiers to establish an
observation post, and then they can only operate that observation post effectively for no
more than 12 hours. Observation posts occupied for more than 12 hours require, as a
minimum, a squad or scout section to ensure continuous operation (refer to FM 3-90-2
for more information).
5-70. The following dismounted organizations describe other basic configurations and
dismounted techniques within the platoon. This discussion; however, does not cover all
the possible organizations or combinations.
5-71. METT-TC circumstances often require the scout platoon leader to task organize
employing variations of the basic platoon organizations discussed previously. In
addition, attachments, such as a section of infantry or engineers, may change the
composition and number of squads or sections (See chapter 6 for augmentation
considerations).
DISMOUNTED THREE-SCOUT TEAM

5-72. The three-scout dismounted team is the basic dismounted element within a typical
scout squad (single scout vehicle, see chapter 1 for scout squad definition). It can
perform reconnaissance tasks, security tasks, observation post and surveillance tasks,
liaison, or a combination of these tasks. It is typically headed by a team leader or higher.
One of the crewmembers can dismount to provide security for the vehicle and to serve
as an antitank (Javelin) element. In this organization (as well as the other dismounted
organizations), the vehicle may provide security for the entire element.
DISMOUNTED FOUR-SCOUT TEAM

5-73. The four-scout organization is the basic dismounted team configuration. In most
scout platoons, this team combines the dismounted scouts from at least two squads,
within a scout section. This attachment should be habitual, rehearsed, with clear
command support established. It is typically headed by a squad leader or higher.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-29

Chapter 5
DISMOUNTED SIX-SCOUT TEAM

5-74. The dismounted squad combines the strength of two dismounted teams (from two
scout vehicles). The platoon leader, PSG, or a staff sergeant squad leader heads this
squad, which always includes an element designated for security and control. The squad
is large enough to have an antitank and machine gun team as part of its security element.
DISMOUNTED PLATOON
5-75. The platoon leader or PSG heads the dismounted platoon element, which always
includes an element designated for security and control. The dismounted platoon
organization may be used if the threat is high (security of the element requires mutual
support) or vehicular movement is impossible. Infiltration, for example, may require the
platoon to conduct dismounted tactical movement. As noted, the platoon’s vehicles may
provide security for the entire element; this organization normally leaves crews mounted
on each vehicle.
SPECIAL TEAMS
5-76. The leader must plan carefully to ensure they identify and assign all required tasks
in the most efficient way. Where possible, the platoon leader should maintain squad and
section integrity in assigning tasks. The chain of command continues to lead its elements
during dismounted operations. The following elements are common to all dismounted
operations:
 Headquarters element. It may consists of the leader of any attachments what
that leader controls directly, such as an FO or engineers.
 Aid and litter team. Aid and litter teams are responsible for treating and
evacuating casualties.
 EPW team. EPW teams are responsible for controlling prisoners. This team
may also be the search team. If contact results in wounded or killed enemy
Soldiers, this team searches those individuals for information and material
they may have been carrying while the rest of the patrol provides security.
 Reconnaissance team. The reconnaissance team keeps watch on the objective
from the time that the leader’s reconnaissance ends until the unit deploys for
actions on the objective.
 Security team. The security team provides overwatch and local security for
the reconnaissance team.
 Point. The scout on point selects the actual route through the terrain, guided
by the compass scout or patrol leader.
 En route recorder. The en route recorder records all information collected by
the patrol.
 Compass scout. The compass scout assists in navigation by ensuring that the
team remains on course at all times.
5-30 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
 Pace count scout. The pace count scout maintains an accurate pace at all
times. The platoon or squad leader should designate how often the pace count
is to report the pace.
Note. Individual Soldiers may have several of the duties listed above.
DISMOUNTED MOVEMENT
5-77. The selection of a movement technique is based on METT-TC. Factors to consider
for each technique are control, dispersion, speed, and security. Movement techniques
are not fixed formations. They refer to the distances between scouts, teams, and squads
that vary based on mission, enemy, terrain, visibility, and any other factor that affects
control. Scouts must be able to see their patrol leaders, and the patrol leader should be
able to see their leaders. Leaders should control movement with hand-and-arm signals,
using radios only when necessary. (Refer to ATP 3-21.8 for more information on
dismounted movement fundamentals and procedures.)
FACTORS IN DISMOUNTED MOVEMENT

5-78. Scout platoons organize patrols based on the mission. There are several
dismounted planning factors to address to ensure mission success.
Ensure that Patrol Members Can Navigate

5-79. Preparations are worthless if the patrol cannot find the objective in time or if the
patrol encounters unexpected enemy contact during movement. Always plan to use a
compass and pace count on a patrol.
Avoid Detection
5-80. Patrols must use stealth and the cover and concealment of the terrain to its
maximum advantage. Whenever possible—
 Move during limited visibility.
 Use concealment of foliage and IV lines.
 Exploit the enemy’s weaknesses.
 Synchronize movements through the use of triggers to coincide with other
operations.
Maintain Constant Security

5-81. Always maintain 360-degree security. The patrol must constantly use both active
and passive security measures—
 En route.
 At danger areas.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-31

Chapter 5
 At patrol bases.
 In the objective area.
Plan for Use of Supported Fires

5-82. Patrol Leaders must plan for fire support:
 TRPs and pre-planned targets. Fire support coordination measure must be
coordinated with the FO and the tactical operations center prior to movement.
 Artillery.
 Mortars.
 Close combat attack/CAS.
 Naval gunfire.
 No fire areas.
Use Appropriate Movement Techniques and Formations

5-83. The enemy situation determines which of the three movement techniques to use.
Using overwatch is preferred and METT-TC dependent. Vary movement techniques to
meet changing situations.
Maintain Dispersion in Open Terrain

5-84. When enemy contact is possible and manpower permits, one team should be well
forward and a security team should provide overwatch. Assign duties for the patrol’s
movement. Security teams maintain visual contact, but the distance between them
should be such that the entire patrol does not become engaged if contact is made. Patrols
should distribute their formations as necessary to gain better observation to the flanks.
Although widely spaced, scouts must retain their positions relative to one another when
in a wedge formation. Only in extreme situations should the file formation be used in
the open.
Assign Responsibilities and Positions

5-85. The lead elements must secure the front along with assuming responsibility for
navigation. For a long movement, the patrol leader may rotate the responsibilities of the
lead elements. The elements in the rear conduct rear security. Leaders should move
inside the formation where they can best maintain control of the patrol.
Use Control Measures

5-86. During movement, leaders use control measures (such as head counts, rally points,
or phase lines) to maintain the patrol’s effectiveness and security. Practice the platoon’s
SOP for actions on contact with inferior and superior forces so that the patrol’s reaction
to contact is a reflex action.
5-32 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Plan for Contact

5-87. Leaders maneuver the patrol to ensure that enemy contact is made with the
smallest element possible. They plan formations based on expected enemy actions.
DISMOUNTED MOVEMENT FORMATIONS

5-88. Every scout has a standard position within a dismounted movement formation.
Soldiers can see their team leader. Leaders control their squads using hand and arm
signals and intra-squad/team communications. Formations also provide 360-degree
security and allow units to give the majority of their firepower to the flanks or fronts in
anticipation of enemy contact. Using formations also gives the scout squad the ability to
react to various forms of enemy contact and positions personnel where they are needed
to perform the right task.
5-89. Dismounted scout squads, sections, and platoons could use up to seven combat
movement formations that are grouped into two different categories: formations with
one lead element, and formations with more than one lead element. The common
formations that dismounted scouts utilize during reconnaissance and security missions
are the:
 File.
 Wedge.
 Modified Wedge/Rolling T.
 Diamond.
5-90. Scouts could also use the line, vee, box, or echelon formation types when
conducting dismounted movements with the platoon. It is important for leaders to
maintain flexibility in their formations and use the best primary formation in regards to
the anticipated enemy threat in the scout platoon’s AO. Figure 5-17, page 5-34, displays
the characteristics, advantages, and disadvantages of the primary formations.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-33

Chapter 5
Figure 5-17. Formation comparison chart
5-34 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
File
5-91. Platoons often use the file formation in severely restrictive terrain such as dense
vegetation, when there is limited visibility and when scouts are inside a building. The
file formation provides the dismounted team leader or squad leader the best control of
the element, but this formation provides the least amount of security. Scouts generally
use this formation when the threat is low and stealth is of importance. Figure 5-18
illustrates the file formation.
Figure 5-18. File formation
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-35

Chapter 5
Wedge
5-92. The wedge formation is the scout squad’s primary dismounted movement
formation and used during reconnaissance and security mission. The interval between
scouts in the wedge is normally 10 meters, and scouts adjust their intervals in relation to
the terrain. The wedge formation provides the best security and allows for immediate
fires in all directions. The wedge also provides good control of the scout, dismounted
element for the leaders. Figure 5-19 illustrates the wedge formation.
Figure 5-19. Wedge formation
5-36 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Modified Wedge/Rolling T
5-93. Scouts could modify the wedge formation when terrain dictates, and a common
modified formation is the rolling T formation. The rolling T formation still provides
good firepower to the front and sides, but places some scouts behind each other like the
file. The rolling T formation provides good control for the dismounted elements leaders
especially when operating in a sparsely vegetated AO. Figure 5-20 illustrates the
modified wedge, rolling T formation.
Figure 5-20. Modified wedge/rolling T formation
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-37

Chapter 5
Diamond
5-94. The diamond formation is very similar to the wedge formation and is a great
formation to use when the dismounted element is small, and the element is operating
with an increased level of threat such as a built up or urban AO. This formation provides
dispersion, 360-degree security, and great control for the dismounted team leader. Figure
5-21 illustrates the diamond formation.
Figure 5-21. Four-scout diamond formation
5-38 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
SECURITY HALTS
5-95. During short halts, team members drop on one knee, face out, and freeze in place.
The security halt should not exceed five minutes. If the halt exceeds five minutes, the
team should move to the prone position. For extended halts, team members may sit with
their feet facing outward and shoulders touching (see figure 5-22). This aids quick and
quiet communication, and guarantees all-round security at all times. This technique
offers the smallest signature and it is the most difficult to detect and is best used in dense
vegetation.
Figure 5-22. Security halt
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-39

Chapter 5
ACTIONS AT DANGER AREAS

5-96. A danger area is one that increases chance of detection or a direct fire engagement.
When moving, the patrol tries to avoid danger areas if possible. In many situations,
however, the patrol must cross danger areas to continue the mission. Typical danger
areas are the following:
 Known enemy positions.
 Roads and trails.
 Streams.
 Open areas.
 Urban environments.
OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
5-97. Specific plans are made before crossing danger areas. These plans are very similar
to actions during mounted operations; however, they require more practice and rehearsal
because a dismounted patrol does not have the same mobility, protection, and firepower
to extract itself should it encounter a threat. In addition, plans are made for crossing
unexpected danger areas; these can be modified quickly to fit the situation.
5-98. The patrol uses bounding overwatch or variations of it to cross a danger area. The
leader designates procedures the patrol uses based on the time available, the size of the
patrol, the size of the danger area, the fields of fire into the area, and the amount of
security they can provide. A small patrol may cross all at once, in pairs, or one scout at
a time. A large patrol normally crosses its subordinate elements one at a time. As each
element crosses, it moves to an overwatch position or to the far side rally point until told
to continue movement.
5-99. To cross a danger area, a patrol must take these actions:
 Designate near side and far side rally points.
 Secure the near side.
 Secure the far side.
 Cross the danger area.
5-100. Securing the near side may involve nothing more than observing it. In some
places; however, it may involve posting security teams far enough out on both flanks
and to the rear of the crossing point to give warning of an approaching enemy element
and to overwatch the crossing of the rest of the patrol (see figure 5-23).
5-40 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Figure 5-23. Securing the near side of a danger area
5-101. Once flank and rear security elements position, the danger area is quickly
crossed by a team that then reconnoiters and secures the far side (see figure 5-24, on
page 5-42). Thermal sights, if available, are able to scan and detect threats under
moderate concealment due to their heat signatures. The area secured on the far side must
be large enough for the entire patrol to occupy. Prior to crossing, the patrol leader issues
a five-point contingency plan with detailed engagement criteria to the patrol. When the
team leader is sure the far side is secure, they send two scouts back to signal the rest of
the patrol to cross. As the near side elements begin to cross the danger area, the rest of
the patrol is scanning with weapons and ready for possible enemy fire. When the patrol
has crossed the danger area, the security teams cross and rejoin the patrol (see
figure 5-25 on page 5-43).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-41

Chapter 5
Figure 5-24. Securing the far side of a danger area
5-42 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Figure 5-25. Crossing the danger area
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-43

Chapter 5
SCROLL TO THE ROAD TECHNIQUE

5-102. The lead team member identifies the danger area and moves across placing their
left or right shoulder toward the danger area (see figure 5-26). The second team member
faces in the opposite direction from the lead team member. This gives security in both
directions. Each member crosses in the same manner.
Figure 5-26. Scroll to the road technique
5-44 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
SMALL OPEN AREA TECHNIQUE

5-103. When crossing a small open area, the team uses the contour or detour bypass
method (see figure 5-27). They avoid crossing directly through the open area, if possible.
Figure 5-27. Crossing a small open area
BREAK CONTACT
5-104. The team breaks contact as soon as possible, since it lacks assets to stay and
fight. METT-TC determines which drill to execute.
BREAK CONTACT (FRONT)

5-105. The team executes fire and movement by two- or three-scout teams until contact
with the enemy is broken. When contacted from the front, the senior observer and
another observer return fire with one full magazine each. An observer and the team
leader move to a position to provide support for the withdrawal of the senior observer
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-45

Chapter 5
and observer. Once the senior observer and observer have fired a complete magazine,
team leader and observer begin firing, covering the withdrawal of the senior observer
and observer to the next firing position. The process of fire and movement continues
until contact is broken (see figure 5-28 and figure 5-29). The RTO and assistant team
leader may place a claymore with a time-delay fuse to slow the enemy. It is placed in
the position where the RTO was when the team began the break contact drill. When
using a claymore mine in a battle drill, the mine is dual-primed (electrically and time-
delay fuse).
Figure 5-28. Break contact (front)
5-46 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
Figure 5-29. Break contact (front) (four scout)
5-106. Australian peel is a method to break contact from the front or rear. This
technique is most effective while the team is in a file formation, the vegetation is dense,
or during limited visibility. The second through the sixth team members take one or two
steps to the left or right, depending on the terrain. One member at a time passes back
through the formation (see figure 5-30, on page 5-48).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-47

Chapter 5
Figure 5-30. Break contact (Australian peel)
5-107. When contacted from the front, the first member fires a full magazine (with the
selector switch on full automatic or three round burst). Every other member does the
same, one at a time. Each scout waits until the scout in front of them is even or left or
right before firing a weapon. Individuals move straight back through the inside of the
formation, avoiding masking the fires of the members providing covering fire. The
assistant team leader or the last member throws a hand grenade (fragmentary). During
limited visibility, the battle drill may be executed without firing weapons. In this event,
the battle drill is still executed in the same sequence. Upon completion of the first
iteration, the team can emplace a claymore mine with a time-delay fuse to slow the
enemy. The team initiates fires only if it has been compromised. If the enemy element
breaks contact and ceases fire, the team should cease fire immediately to prevent
revealing their new position.
5-108. If contact occurs from the rear, the battle drill is executed in the reverse
sequence. The first scout is the last to throw a hand grenade (fragmentary). Once the
battle drill is completed, the team moves to the designated rally point.
5-48 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
BREAK CONTACT (LEFT OR RIGHT)

5-109. If a patrol finds itself in a threat ambush, it must get out of the kill zone or face
destruction. Team members in the kill zone, without order or signal, immediately return
fire, throw smoke, and move quickly out of the kill zone by the safest route (see
figure 5-31 and figure 5-32, on page 5-50). There is no set procedure for this; scouts
must decide the best way for their situation. A team may assault through a near ambush.
Soldiers not in the kill zone fire to support the withdrawal or hasty assault of the men in
the kill zone.
Figure 5-31. Break contact (left or right)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-49

Chapter 5
Figure 5-32. Break contact (left or right) (four scout)
TRACKING METHODS
5-110. The scout platoon may utilize tracking to follow the trail of a specific enemy
force. Tracking is one of the best sources of combat information. Indicators may be so
fresh that the tracker becomes an enemy stalker, or they find information that helps the
commander plan a successful operation.
ORGANIZATION
5-111. When the patrol requires the use of tracking, the patrol leader assigns the task
to only one squad. The remaining squads provide security or act as a reserve if making
contact. They are—
 Squad leader—carries the radio, is the primary navigator, and has overall
responsibility for accomplishing the mission, organizing the force, and
setting each Soldier’s load.
5-50 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
 Primary tracker—focuses on following the main trail left by the tracked

group.
 Security—observes to the front and flanks of the trail and provides security
for the primary tracker. Usually, this is the assistant squad leader.
 Rear security—provides security for the rear by looking back along the trail
at irregular intervals to keep from being ambushed from behind. If the squad
makes enemy contact to the front or flank, the rear security Soldier is in the
best position to support those in contact. Recording the traveled azimuths to
assist in navigation is also part of the duties.
CONCEPT OF TRACKING
5-112. A tracker has patience and moves slowly, quietly, and steadily while observing
and interpreting available indicators. Reckless speed may result in overlooking
important signs, losing the trail completely, or blundering into an enemy force. Attention
to detail, common sense, logic, and knowledge of the environment and enemy habits
allow Soldiers to obtain valuable information from signs in the AO. Any indicator that
the tracker discovers falls into one or more of the following concepts:
 Displacement. Displacement takes place when anything moves from its
original position. A well-defined footprint in soft, moist ground, or bent
branches and rearward facing footprints are a good example of displacement.
By studying this indicator, the tracker can determine several important facts.
The print may indicate the direction of travel, or a print left by worn footwear
or by a barefoot person may indicate lack of proper equipment.
 Stains. A stain occurs when any substance from one organism or article
smears or deposits onto something else. The best example of staining is blood
from a profusely bleeding wound. They are often in the form of spatters or
drops but are not always on the ground. Blood may smear on leaves, twigs,
or bushes. Staining can also occur when muddy footgear is dragged over
grass, stones, and shrubs. Staining and displacement combine to indicate
movement and direction. Crushed leaves may stain rocky ground that is too
hard to leave footprints. Roots, stones, and vines may stain where moving
feet crush leaves or berries. In some instances, it may be hard to determine
the difference between staining and displacement since both terms can apply
to some indicators. For example, muddied water may indicate recent
movement. Stones in streams may be mud stained from footwear; algae can
displace from stones in streams and stain other stones or the bank. Water that
collects in footprints in swampy ground is muddy if the tracks are recent.
With time, however, the mud settles and the water clears. The tracker can use
this information to indicate time. Normally, the mud clears in about one hour.
Clearing time, of course, varies with the terrain.
 Weather. The natural elements can aid or hinder the tracker. Wind, snow,
rain, or sunlight may completely erase indicators. By studying the effects of
weather on indicators, the tracker can determine the age of the clue. For
example, when bloodstains are fresh, they are bright red. Air and sunlight
change the color of blood to a deep ruby red that then turns into a dark brown
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-51

Chapter 5
crust when the moisture evaporates. Scuff marks on trees or bushes darken
with time; sap oozes and then hardens when it makes contact with the air.
Footprints are greatly affected by weather and by carefully studying this
weather process, the tracker can determine the approximate age of the
footprint. If particles are just beginning to fall into the print, the tracker should
become a stalker. If the edges of the print are dry and crusty, the prints are
probably at least an hour old. Weather indicators vary with the terrain and
should only be thought of as a guide.
 Litter. A poorly trained or poorly disciplined force moving over a piece of
terrain is likely to leave a clear trail of litter. Gum, ration or candy wrappers,
ration cans, cigarette butts, remains of fires, or even piles of human feces are
signs of recent movement. Conversely, spit bottles are generally American
litter. The tracker considers weather when estimating the age of such litter.
Rain flattens or washes litter away and turns paper into pulp. Ration cans
exposed to weather rust first at the exposed edge of the opening and then
moves toward the center. The last rain or strong wind can be the basis for a
time frame.
 Camouflage. Camouflage applies to tracking when the enemy employs
techniques to confuse or slow down the tracker. Walking backward to leave
confusing prints, brushing out trails, and moving over rocky ground or
through streams are examples of techniques they employ to confuse the
tracker. If the travelling party attempts to throw off the tracker by walking
backward, the footprints are deepened at the toe, and soil appears scuffed or
dragged in the direction of movement. By following carefully, the tracker
normally finds a turnaround point.
 Immediate-use intelligence. The tracker constantly asks questions and finds
indicators that help form a picture of the enemy. The tracker avoids reporting
interpretations as facts. Including the indications of certain things should also
be in the report. Immediate-use intelligence is information concerning the
enemy that can be put to use right away. It helps gain surprise, and keeps the
enemy off balance or from escaping the area entirely.
TYPES OF RALLY POINTS

5-113. The most common types of rally points are initial, en route, objective, reentry,
near- and far-side. Soldiers must know which rally point to move to at each phase of the
patrol mission. They should know what actions are required there and how long they are
to wait at each rally point before moving to another. The following are descriptions of
these five rally points:
 Initial rally point. An initial rally point is a place inside of friendly lines where
a unit may assemble and reorganize if it makes enemy contact during the
departure of friendly lines or before reaching the first en route rally point. It
is normally selected by the commander of the friendly unit.
 En route rally point. The leader designates en route rally points based on the
terrain, vegetation, and visibility.
5-52 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
 Objective rally point. Objective rally point is a point out of sight, sound, and
small-arms range of the area. It normally is located in the direction the
platoon plans to move after completing its actions on the objective.
Note. Isolated Soldiers able to function on their own make an attempt to move to
the objective rally point, or a rally point designated in the patrol plan.
 Reentry rally point. The reentry rally point is located out of sight, sound, and
small-arms weapons range of the friendly unit through which the platoon
returns. This also means the reentry rally point should be outside the final
protective fires of the friendly unit. The platoon occupies the reentry rally
point as a security perimeter.
 Near- and far-side rally points. These rally points are on the near and far side
of danger areas. If the platoon makes contact while crossing the danger area
and control is lost, Soldiers on either side move to the rally point nearest
them. They establish security, reestablish the chain of command, determine
their personnel and equipment status, continue the patrol mission, and linkup
at the objective rally point.
FIVE POINT CONTINGENCY PLAN

5-114. A five-point contingency plan is issued every time a leader or other individual
separates from the main body. If a leader is going to conduct a reconnaissance of a hasty
fighting position then they would give their five-point contingency plan to the rest of
the squad, section, or platoon. This is done so all the members of the platoon understand
where the leader is going, who is going with them, and how long they plan to be gone.
If the leader fails to return then the platoon knows what actions to take. If either element
receives contact then they know what to do for actions on contact, using GOTWA. (See
figure 5-33.)
Figure 5-33. Five-point contingency plan
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-53

Chapter 5
SECTION VI – ACTIONS ON CONTACT

5-115. Actions on contact are a series of combat actions, often conducted
simultaneously, taken upon contact with the enemy to develop the situation. Prior to
every reconnaissance and security mission, leaders analyze the mission with a focus on
the enemy threat. The platoon leader must determine the probability of contact and
identify locations where contact is most likely to occur. To do this, they use information
from all available assets, including UASs, ground surveillance system reports on Force
XXI Battle Command, brigade and below, information collected by dismounted patrols,
and intelligence from the S-2. The leaders are then able to plan for contact and determine
how to employ movement techniques, battle drills, and TTP to avoid chance contact.
5-116. The scout platoon should execute actions on contact using a logical,
well-organized process of decision making and action entailing these five steps:
 Deploy and report.
 Evaluate and develop the situation.
 Choose a COA.
 Execute the selected COA.
 Recommend a COA to the commander.
5-117. The commander should specify actions on contact for the scout platoon. These
specific instructions should include engagement criteria and desired COA, based on the
size and activity of the enemy force encountered. By knowing these details ahead of
time, the scout can develop the situation more rapidly and arrive at and execute the
desired COA. The platoon should strive to make contact with the smallest possible
element: the dismounted scout. Visual contact, in which the enemy is observed but the
scout remains undetected, is the goal. This gives the platoon the greatest possible
flexibility to maneuver and develop the situation.
5-118. When scouts platoons make contact with an enemy obstacle they must treat the
obstacle like enemy contact, and assume that the obstacles are observed and covered
with enemy direct fire. The steps that make up actions on contact must be thoroughly
trained and rehearsed so that the platoon can react instinctively as a team whenever it
encounters enemy forces.
5-119. Leaders understand properly executed actions on contact require time at the
squad and platoon levels. To develop the situation, a scout platoon may have to execute
flanking movements, conduct reconnaissance by fire, or call for and adjust indirect fires.
Each of these activities requires time, and the leader balances the time required for
subordinate elements to conduct actions on contact with the need for the troop or
squadron to maintain momentum.
STEP 1 – DEPLOY AND REPORT

5-120. When a scout makes contact with the enemy, they react to the circumstances of
the contact. The section or squad that makes initial visual contact with the enemy
deploys to covered terrain that affords good observation and fields of fire. If the scout
5-54 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
receives fire from the enemy, they return fire, but only with the intent of breaking direct
fire contact. Scouts want to refrain from being decisively engaged with the enemy and
focus on their mission.
5-121. The scout or element in contact sends a contact report to the platoon leader and
follows as soon as possible with a SPOTREP using SALUTE. If the scout or element in
contact is unable to report or cannot report quickly, another squad in the section must
report.
5-122. Scouts that are not in contact temporarily halt in covered terrain, monitor the
incoming reports, and plot the situation on their maps. Once they determine that they
cannot be influenced by the enemy or are not needed to support the element in contact,
they continue their mission with the platoon leader’s approval. The platoon leader or
PSG relays the contact report to the commander, followed as soon as possible by a
SPOTREP and updates.
STEP 2 – EVALUATE AND DEVELOP THE SITUATION

5-123. The scouts next concentrate on defining the current situation. If they have not
sent a SPOTREP at this point, they initially focus on getting enough information to send
one. If they have not been detected and time is available, the scouts reconnoiter the
enemy position, emphasizing stealth, dismounted reconnaissance, and use of such assets
as ground surveillance systems and UAS.
5-124. If the enemy is aware of their presence, the scouts use a combination of
mounted and dismounted reconnaissance. They conduct dismounted reconnaissance to
get detailed information on enemy dispositions. Use mounted reconnaissance to move
additional assets into the area to support the element in contact. The platoon leader uses
as many available assets as they can to develop the situation. The platoon analyzes and
gathers information using surveillance, dismounts, UAS, and indirect fire. Once the
platoon leader feels that they have enough information to identify operational
considerations, they choose a COA.
STEP 3 – CHOOSE A COURSE OF ACTION

5-125. Developing the situation is a critical step in choosing the correct COA and
providing an accurate, timely report to the commander. Once the platoon leader has
enough information to make a decision, they select a COA that is within the capabilities
of the platoon, that allows the platoon to continue the reconnaissance as quickly as
possible, and that supports the commander’s concept of the operation. The platoon
leader considers various possible COAs, based on well-developed TTP and battle drills,
to react appropriately to the types of contact the platoon may encounter. At a minimum,
the platoon must rehearse and be ready to execute these potential COAs:
 Disengage from enemy contact.
 Break contact and bypass.
 Maintain contact and bypass.
 Maintain contact to support an attack on an inferior force.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-55

Chapter 5
 Conduct an attack against an inferior force.

 Conduct a hasty defense.
 Conduct a RHO.
 Conduct a battle handover, if applicable.
5-126. Once the element in contact develops the situation and the platoon leader has
enough information to make a decision, the platoon leader selects a COA. The platoon
leader ensures that the COA is within the capabilities of the platoon, that it allows the
scouts to continue the reconnaissance as quickly as possible, and that it supports the
commander’s concept of the operation and intent. The platoon leader considers all
available COAs, including those outlined in the following discussion.
DISENGAGE FROM ENEMY DIRECT OR INDIRECT FIRE CONTACT

5-127. The scout platoon cannot conduct its mission if it becomes decisively engaged.
If it is engaged, the platoon must have a plan to break direct or indirect fire contact with
the enemy. As a general rule, the platoon, section, or squad should disengage from the
enemy as soon as direct or indirect fire contact occurs. This allows for continuation of
the mission and reduces the chance of any loss of combat power.
5-128. At platoon level, observation posts or patrols gain contact with the enemy, then
report and prepare to displace to successive positions. These platoon members should
report the enemy contact to the overwatching vehicles and to the platoon leader.
5-129. When the enemy force triggers the observation posts displacement criteria (the
point at which the observation posts must displace or risk detection and engagement by
the enemy), the observation posts pass off responsibility for tracking the enemy to other
observation posts in-depth. The platoon then displaces its observation posts to
successive positions in-depth while maintaining contact with the enemy. Patrols request
permission to return to the platoon vehicles. When permission has been granted, they
use covered and concealed routes back to the vehicle positions and remount the vehicles
5-130. Once the platoon has reported initial contact to higher headquarters and the
order to break contact has been given, disengagement should be executed with one
section or squad acting as overwatch for the displacing section/squad as it moves. The
section or squad that moves first keeps its weapon systems oriented on the enemy as it
uses covered and concealed routes to move to a designated rally point that preclude
enemy observation and provides cover and concealment. This element may also use on-
board smoke generators or obscurant munitions (such as grenades) to cover its
movement. The overwatching section or squad provides suppressive fires, both indirect
and direct (if necessary), to cover the movement of the displacing section or squad.
Mortars can also provide effective and responsive support when elements must break
contact. The overwatching section must also employ its dismounts with the Javelin
missile system.
5-131. Once the displacing section/squad has arrived at the rally point, it takes up
defensive positions and reports its arrival to the overwatch section or squad. The
overwatching element then calls for protective fires and uses an alternate covered and
concealed route to move to the rally point. When the entire platoon or section has moved
5-56 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
back to the rally point, it consolidates and reorganizes, reports its status to the higher
headquarters, and continues the mission. Figure 5-34 illustrates a situation in which a
scout platoon breaks contact by sections.
Figure 5-34. IBCT scout platoon disengages from contact
BREAK CONTACT AND BYPASS

5-132. This COA may be selected when the platoon does not have the resources to
leave an element in contact and still continue to accomplish its priority reconnaissance
tasks. It may also be selected when the platoon has made contact with an enemy force
that cannot adversely affect the mission of the platoon’s higher headquarters. Because
breaking contact is a violation of reconnaissance fundamentals, the platoon leader must
be sure that the higher headquarters is informed of and approves this COA (refer to
figure 5-35, on page 5-58, and figure 5-36 on page 5-59).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-57

Chapter 5
Figure 5-35. IBCT scout platoon breaks contact and conducts bypass
MAINTAIN CONTACT AND BYPASS

5-133. This COA is appropriate when an enemy force, based on its current disposition,
is not in a position to influence the platoon’s supported commander. An element
(normally a section or squad) is left to maintain contact while the rest of the platoon
continues the reconnaissance mission. The element that remains in contact maintains
visual contact with the enemy and report if the enemy situation changes. The platoon
must keep scouts in contact with the enemy unless specifically authorized to do
otherwise. Depending on the applicable task organization, the platoon leader must
carefully assess METT-TC before selecting this COA. Mission constraints may force
the platoon leader to leave one vehicle in contact. If this is the case, the platoon leader
must ensure that the vehicle is antitank-heavy (Javelin/TOW). To regain the use of all
5-58 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
assets, the platoon leader continues coordination to execute reconnaissance or to conduct

a battle handover of the contact with a follow-on element (see figures 5-36 through
5-38, pages 5-59 and 5-61).
Figure 5-36. Scout platoon maintains contact and conducts bypass (phase I)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-59

Chapter 5
Figure 5-37. Scout platoon maintains contact and conducts bypass (phase II)
5-60 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills

(phase III)
STEP 4 – EXECUTE THE SELECTED COURSE OF

ACTION
5-134. The platoon leader updates the SPOTREP to the commander with any new
information and then recommends a COA to the commander. The commander approves
or disapproves the recommended COA based on how it affects the parent unit’s mission.
5-135. If the commander and the S-2 have anticipated the enemy situation the platoon
reports and addresses the contingency in the OPORD and provides guidance to their
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-61

Chapter 5
subordinates on what COA the platoon should execute. In such a case, the platoon leader
can evaluate the situation, choose a COA consistent with the supported commander’s
intent or concept, and execute it without further guidance. The platoon leader keeps the
commander informed of what they are doing as they execute the COA.
STEP 5 – RECOMMEND A COURSE OF ACTION TO

THE COMMANDER
5-136. Once the platoon leader selects a COA, keeping in mind the commander’s
intent, the troop commander is informed, and has the option of approving or
disapproving it based upon its impact on the overall mission. To avoid delay, a unit SOP
may provide automatic approval of certain actions.
SECTION VII –CBRN OPERATIONS

5-137. CBRN operations are the employment of capabilities that assess, protect
against, and mitigate the entire range of CBRN incidents to enable freedom of action.
CBRN operations support operational and strategic objectives to counter weapons of
mass destruction and operate safely in a CBRN environment. Many state and nonstate
actors (including terrorists and criminals) possess or have the capability to possess,
develop, or proliferate CBRN weapons. U.S. policy prohibits the use of chemical or
biological weapons under any circumstances, but it reserves the right to employ nuclear
weapons. Many potential enemies are under no such constraint. (Refer to FM 3-11 for
more information.)
MISSION ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE

ANALYSIS
5-138. Protecting Soldiers from the harmful hazards associated with CBRN attacks in
an AO is essential to preserving combat power. Leaders determine the appropriate
MOPP level based on higher-level guidance and the MOPP analysis provided by CBRN
and medical personnel. CBRN MOPP analysis process takes into account METT-TC,
estimating unit/personnel effectiveness (for example, mission degradation), estimating
additional logistic requirements (for example, water resupply and individual protective
equipment replenishment), and assessing and weighing the tradeoffs between agent
exposures versus degraded performance (for example, wearing of MOPP 4).
5-139. Leader involvement is necessary to ensure safe and sustained operations under
various climatic conditions. Leaders should develop standard responses and COAs for
each projected mission. If the probability of CBRN threats exists all Soldiers carry a
protective mask, and ensure that individual protective gear is available within two hours.
Second set available in six hours. The standard MOPP levels are—
 MOPP level 0. Carry a protective mask, and ensure that individual protective
gear is within arm’s reach.
 MOPP level 1. Suit worn. Mask, gloves, and boots carried.
 MOPP level 2. Suit and boots worn. Gloves and mask carried.
5-62 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Basic Scout Skills
 MOPP level 3. Suit, boots, and mask worn. Gloves carried.

 MOPP level 4. All protection worn.
5-140. Leaders know that they cannot expect the same work rates in MOPP level 4 as
they achieved in MOPP level 0. They reevaluate the ability to meet mission requirements
and communicate changes to the force. MOPP reduction decisions are the most difficult
to make because of the many considerations that affect the final decision. Commanders
must evaluate the situation from the Soldier and mission perspectives. Factors include
the criticality of the current mission, potential effects of personnel exposure, and the
impact on the casualty care system. ATP 3-11.32/MCWP 10-10E.8/
NTTP 3-11.37/AFTTP 3-2.46 provides work/rest cycles and water replacement
guidelines for CBRN MOPP levels.
5-141. Leaders determine the appropriate MOPP level by assessing mission variables
and weighing the impact of increased protection levels. Higher headquarters provide
MOPP level directives to subordinate elements, and subordinate elements may increase
but not decrease MOPP levels.
5-142. When a CBRN attack is recognized, everyone in the company team must
receive the warning and assume the appropriate MOPP level. Soldiers in immediate
danger need warnings they can see or hear. The alarm or signal must be simple and
unmistakable if it is to produce a quick and correct reaction.
5-143. If a CBRN hazard is located mark the contaminated area. The CBRN warning
and reporting system and standardized contamination markers contribute to orderly
warning procedures. Warning methods include automatic alarms, vocal alarms (a shout
of GAS is the most frequently used alarm), nonvocal alarms (horn blasts or banging of
metal-to-metal objects), and visual alarms, most commonly the appropriate hand-and-
arm signals.
UNMASKING PROCEDURES
5-144. Scouts should unmask as soon as possible except when expecting a live
biological or toxin attack. After notifying the next higher headquarters, use the
procedures outlined in the following paragraphs to determine if unmasking is safe.
UNMASKING WITH A M256A2 DETECTOR KIT

5-145. If an M256A2 detector kit is available, use it to supplement unmasking
procedures. The kit does not detect all agents; therefore, follow proper unmasking
procedures, which take approximately 15 minutes. Once performing all tests with the kit
(including a check for liquid contamination using M8 detector paper) and the results are
negative, use the following procedures:
 The senior person selects one or two Soldiers to start the unmasking
procedures. If possible, they move to a shady place; bright, direct sunlight
can cause pupils in the eyes to constrict, giving a false symptom.
 Selected Soldiers unmask for 5 minutes, then don, seal, and clear their masks.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 5-63

Chapter 5
 Observe the Soldiers for 10 minutes. If no symptoms appear, request

permission from higher headquarters to signal ALL CLEAR.
 Watch all Soldiers for possible delayed symptoms. Always have first-aid
treatment immediately available in case it is needed.
UNMASKING WITHOUT A M256A2 DETECTOR KIT

5-146. If an M256A2 kit is not available, this unmasking procedure takes
approximately 35 minutes. Use M8 paper to check the area for possible liquid
contamination. Conduct unmasking using these procedures:
 The senior person should select one or two individuals to start the unmasking
procedures.
 If possible, move to a shady place (bright, direct sunlight can cause pupils in
the eyes to constrict, giving false signs of nerve agent exposure).
 Have the selected individuals unmask—take a deep breath, hold it, and break
the seal for 15 seconds, keeping their eyes wide open.
 Have the selected individuals clear and reseal their masks.
 Observe the selected individuals for 10 minutes.
 If no symptoms appear, the commander or leader has the selected individuals
break the seal of their masks, take two or three breaths keeping their eyes
wide open, and clear and reseal their masks.
 Observe selected individuals for 10 minutes (if no symptoms appear, have
the selected individuals unmask for five minutes and then remask).
 If no symptoms appear in 10 minutes after remasking, the commander
considers issuing a directive for an all-clear.
 Continue to watch personnel for possible delayed symptoms (always have
first aid treatment immediately available in case it is needed).
5-64 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Chapter 6
Enablers
Combat power augmentation provided by other units enhances the

maneuver of the scout platoon during reconnaissance and security
missions. Commanders employ combat power augmentation to
enhance the effectiveness of the scout platoon’s missions. The unit
commander and their subordinate leaders must understand the
capabilities and limitations of these elements to effectively
incorporate them into unit missions.
The integration of enablers provides the scout platoon leader with

the right additional assets to accomplish the mission while
achieving the higher commander’s intent. Enablers should
complement the scout platoon’s mission, not detract from it. The
platoon’s integration of these assets begins during platoon planning
and continues through rehearsals and execution.
Contents
Page
SECTION I. Brigade Combat Team Assets 6-1
SECTION II. External Brigade Combat Team Assets 6-23
SECTION I – BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM ASSETS

6-1. The BCT has several organic assets that attach to or provide support to enhance
the scout platoon’s effectiveness during certain missions. Fires assets allocated to a scout
platoon can support reconnaissance and security during decisive action operations.
Engineers have resources and knowledge to compliment the scout platoon and bring
many additional advantages to support all scout platoon missions. Information collection
assets such as HUMINT collection teams, UAS, military intelligence company, and
sensor teams provide additional means to gain tactical advantage during missions.
CBRN assets often attach to the scout platoon and provide a great asset to provide a
capability for contamination avoidance, protection, and decontamination in a contested
operational environment.
6-2. Any time the scout platoon receives augmentation; the platoon leadership needs
to clearly understand the task organization, capabilities, limitations, task and purpose,
sustainment requirements, and any special considerations for the new attachment. The
scout platoon leader should rapidly apply the first three principles of the mission
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-1

Chapter 6
command philosophy to “build cohesive teams through mutual trust, create shared
understanding, and provide a clear commander’s intent” when integrating enablers.
6-3. Other TTPs to effectively integrate new team members are to provide them with
a copy of the current mission order and graphics, a copy of the platoon tactical SOP; add
the attachments to the units digital address book and distribute the digital graphics; and
add the new unit’s attachments’ frequencies and call signs to the scout platoon’s
communications listing. During the initial link up, the gaining unit scout platoon
leadership should also increase the new team member’s situational understanding of the
operational environment by providing them with a current situational update.
6-4. The responsibilities of integrating enabling units not only lie with the gaining unit,
but also with the arriving element. These enabling elements bring specialized
capabilities, require specific resources, and may arrive with a task and purpose provided
by the shared higher headquarters. It is important that both the scout platoon leadership
and the new team members have a shared understanding of the capabilities of each
organization. To assist both elements in achieving this understanding the enabling
attachment should prepare a capabilities brief. An example checklist of topics is
provided in table 6-1.
6-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Table 6-1. Enabler integration checklist
✓ Enabler Integration Checklist Unit Information

Unit call sign.
Task organization.
Task and purpose from higher
headquarters.
Training readiness to accomplish required
task.
Recommended scheme of maneuver for
employment.
Specialized information collection assets
and their requirements.
Specialized fires assets.
Specialized protection assets.
Personnel.
Supply status by classes of supply.
Maintenance status.
Immediate repair or recovery needs.
Contact information of losing unit for
sustainment cross over.
Specialized sustainment assets.
Frequencies.
Digital joint capabilities release address.
Specialized monitoring, control, and
surveillance equipment and requirements.
ENGINEER SUPPORT
6-5. Engineers conduct technical reconnaissance to collect specialized information
about a designated zone, area, or route. Engineers conduct these missions regardless of
enemy action and may require task organized security elements when threat of enemy
action is expected. Technical reconnaissance mission is normally a specified task from
higher headquarters or derived from mission analysis. Combat engineers can substantially
increase capability and capacity of the scout platoon when integrated during
reconnaissance and security missions. Engineers task organized to the platoon generally
focus on reconnaissance and mobility tasks during reconnaissance missions. Technical
reconnaissance is especially useful during route reconnaissance or terrain oriented zone
or area reconnaissance where engineers can inspect and classify natural and man-made
structures and areas. Engineer reconnaissance teams (ERTs) can also execute covert or
overt breaching of obstacles to allow the scout platoon to continue its reconnaissance.
6-6. Attachments from the brigade engineer battalion may be a CBRN reconnaissance
platoon, a route clearance platoon, breaching sapper squads, horizontal construction
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-3

Chapter 6
squads, or engineer squads. The platoon leader must understand the purpose for the
attachments and ensure the scheme of maneuver supports them accomplishing their
mission.
ENGINEER RECONNAISSANCE TASKS

6-7. Engineer reconnaissance consists of tasks that are undertaken to obtain (by visual
observation or other detection methods) information about the activities and resources
of an enemy or adversary or to secure data concerning the meteorological,
hydrographical, or geographical characteristics of a particular area. Reconnaissance is a
focused collection effort performed before, during, and after missions to provide
information used in the IPB process and by the commander to format develop, confirm,
or modify a COA. Engineer units do not have designated reconnaissance organizations;
however, engineer reconnaissance is prescribed and task organized in orders, but it
depletes resources from other engineer missions.
ENABLING AND TEAMING WITH OTHER RECONNAISSANCE CAPABILITIES

6-8. ERTs that team directly with dedicated reconnaissance assets or scout platoons
increase the tempo and effectiveness of the reconnaissance mission. ERTs are organized
from organic personnel and equipment from the brigade’s engineer battalion or engineer
units task organized to the BCT combat engineers are typically task organized in direct
support of maneuver units. Under this command relationship, the maneuver unit
commander can employ the organic scout platoon attached with an ERT to collect
information that will satisfy tactical information requirements. When employed in this
fashion, the scout platoon conducts the overall reconnaissance mission while the ERT
focuses on the collection of specific technical information supporting mobility and
countermobility (obstacles, bypasses, river crossing sites, landing zones (LZ), and
combat road or trail capacity).
ENGINEER RECONNAISSANCE TASKS

6-9. Engineers support all forms of reconnaissance. The majority of engineer
reconnaissance capabilities enable the collection of technical information in support of
combat engineering. (See figure 6-1.) Reconnaissance in support of mobility,
countermobility, and survivability is conducted primarily by ERTs, which are
(composed of combat engineers) and focuses on collecting tactical and technical
information to support the BCT’s mobility.
6-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Figure 6-1. Engineer reconnaissance capabilities
LIMITATIONS OF AN ENGINEER RECONNAISSANCE TEAM

6-10. An ERT primary task with regard to tactical and protective obstacles is the
reconnaissance of those obstacles and locating and marking bypasses around obstacles
and restrictions. An ERT has the following limitations:
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-5

Chapter 6
 An unaugmented ERT has extreme limitations in its ability to destroy or repel

enemy reconnaissance units and security forces.
 The ERT has restrictions in the distance it operates away from the main body
due to the range and type of communications, the range of supporting indirect
fires, and the ability to receive sustainment.
 The amount of technical reconnaissance equipment has limitations when
lacking organic transportation.
SUSTAINMENT
6-11. Some units may need to request augmentation to conduct sustainment operations.
Specifically IBCT dismounted and ABCT combined arms battalion scouts which have
inherent CASEVAC challenges. See sustainment chapter for further discussion.
FIRES SUPPORT
6-12. Scout platoons may receive indirect fire support from mortars, field artillery,
naval gunfire, aviation assets such as CAS, or aviation call for fire. To make effective
use of these assets, scouts must understand their capabilities, limitations, and
employment requirements. (Refer to ATP 3-20.97, FM 3-09 and ATP 3-21.90 for more
information.)
6-13. Except as specifically directed, the scout platoon rarely engages enemy with direct
fire. When needing lethal fires, the scout platoon usually employs indirect fire, CAS, or
aviation call for fire assets, and may direct fires on specific targets to disengage from
the enemy or to attack targets provided in the commander’s high-payoff target list. Scout
use fires during both reconnaissance and security to engage the enemy without
disclosing their position and preserve their combat powers capabilities and basic load of
ammunition. Additionally, fires provide the ability to break direct fire contact.
6-14. Mortars and field artillery assets are the primary indirect fire support resources
available to the scout platoon, although additional support can also come from aircraft
and naval ships. In addition to understanding the capabilities and limitations of these
assets, scouts must know what fire request channels to use when calling for fires. The
scout platoon leader must be prepared to work with the troop and squadron/battalion
FSOs to plan and coordinate fire support.
6-15. The planning process begins with receipt of the mission. The scout platoon leader
and FSO interact throughout planning and execution to provide necessary support
continuously. While developing plans for employment of forces, the commander and
the FSO prepare for the best use of fires by determining:
 Lethal and nonlethal assets tasked to support the scout platoon.
 Targets to attack, including the high payoff target list.
 Lethal and nonlethal assets to employ, along with ammunition and delivery
provisions.
6-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
 Communications plan (digital/FM).

 Desired target effects.
 Engagement priorities.
6-16. The scout platoon leader clearly states the intent for fires and ensures the fires
plan is developed to support each phase of the mission. The following list covers areas
the platoon leader coordinates with the FSO:
 Scheme of maneuver. Includes the AO, timing of advance, rate of movement,
passage of lines, and Army aviation in the AO.
 Priority of fires. Identify which scout section has priority of fires.
 Priority targets. Identify priority targets and how long they will remain in
effect.
 High-payoff target list. This is a list of targets whose loss to the enemy
significantly contributes to the success of the friendly COA.
 Close air support. The scout platoon leader and FSO, in coordination with the
squadron tactical air control party, determine what CAS assets are available,
when they are available, and how to use them, including target selection and
the desired effects.
 Fire support coordination measures. Establish existing or proposed,
permissive or restrictive control measures, or recommend for establishment,
by the appropriate commander.
 Ammunition restrictions. These place limitations on the use of obscurants,
improved conventional munitions, or other ammunition including the
established controlled supply rates.
6-17. The fire support plan outlines how to use both lethal and nonlethal fires. The
troop FSO develops the fire support plan, and constantly refines it as the mission
continues. The fire support plan ranks targets in priority order, matches them with the
available indirect fires systems, eliminates duplication with platoon targets, and allows
fires to execute quickly and without specific direction from the commander. A fire
support plan includes:
 The general concept of how indirect fires support the reconnaissance or
security mission.
 A target list that includes planned locations of fires.
 Priority of fires.
 High-payoff targets and priority targets.
 Allocation of priority targets and final protective fires, if available.
 Execution matrix.
 Required airspace coordination areas.
 Fire support coordination measures.
 Rules of engagement.
 Clearance of fires.
6-18. The troop FSO disseminates the fire support plan during the troop OPORD brief
or by other means, such as a digital message. It contains all the elements listed above
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-7

Chapter 6
and adjusted upon receiving the platoon indirect fire plans. The fire support officer
develops a fire support matrix that coincides with the fire support plan, and distributed
to all key leaders including the scout platoon leader. The troop, fire support execution
matrix is a tool used to aid in executing a squadron plan. The matrix is a graphical way
of assigning target responsibilities and allocating fire support resources to the squadron
or battalion, troop and scout platoon. See figure 6-2 for an example of a troop, fire
support matrix.
Figure 6-2. Troop fire support execution matrix, example
6-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
FIRES IN DIRECT CONTACT

6-19. Scout platoons use supporting fires while in direct fire contact during
reconnaissance and security missions. Unexpected contact requires disengaging from
the enemy. Use of contact supporting fires for disengagements often slows the enemy
by degrading their effectiveness. Indirect fires may cause the enemy to seek cover or
fight with their vehicles buttoned up which gives the scout platoon more freedom of
maneuver to disengage. Suppression of the enemy and obscuration of friendly
movement is usually the desired effect for the scout platoon during chance or unexpected
contact.
TARGET LOCATION ERROR

6-20. The difference between the coordinates generated for a target and the actual
location of the target location error is the target location error (TLE), which is expressed
primarily in terms of circular and vertical errors or infrequently as a spherical error.
6-21. Accurate target location is crucial to achieving first round effects on targets. The
use of position locating systems, mensuration tools, and laser designators and
rangefinders operating from known locations are critical to accurately locating targets
and achieving first round fire for effect. When these capabilities are not available and
the observer is operating in a degraded mode, the observer must rely on thorough terrain
map study to locate targets accurately. Frequently in these degraded situations, the
observer is unable to locate targets accurately and must correct errors in target location
by adjusting fires onto a target, thereby forfeiting surprise and effects on target. In order
to consistently determine an accurate target location, a good observer—
 Must be able to determine an accurate target location through mensuration
using current target location tools.
 Must be able to self-locate to within 10 meters (100 meters if degraded by
lack of position locating systems or other navigational aids).
 Uses prominent terrain features to relate potential target areas to grid
locations on a map.
 Makes a thorough study of terrain by drawing a terrain sketch (in a static
location).
 Associates the direction in which the observer is looking with a direction line
on the map.
 Must be able to use electronic navigational aids with map analysis
verification.
6-22. Boresight. Scout platoons conduct PMCS on their optics in accordance with
technical manuals. Scouts ensure their boresight of optics by verifying lasers against
known terrain features or by placing vehicles downrange in a known location (GPS) and
verify accuracy thus reducing target location error.
6-23. Location of observer. Accuracy for the observer’s location is fundamental to
effective fires. Observers verify locations of properly encrypted LRAS3 or other devises
with handheld GPS devises to confirm the location of the observer.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-9

Chapter 6
6-24. Direction. Scouts provide the most accurate direction for the employment of fires.
When using a lensatic compass ensure the reading to the target is as accurate as possible.
Do not place compass near metal such as the hood of a vehicle but place the compass on
a berm or ground to increase accuracy.
6-25. Distance estimation. One of the biggest challenge for a scout is distance
estimation. Scouts can perform the following techniques to estimate distance.
 Mental estimation.
 Estimating when visibility is good.
 Estimating by using known dimensions.
 Estimating from a terrain study.
6-26. Triangulation. Triangulation is another possible means to provide reduced target

location error, although it is time consuming, and therefore limited to situations not
requiring immediate responsiveness. Perform triangulation using one or more sensors.
The more sensors used, the greater the accuracy. When more than one observer or sensor
is available, multiple sensors locate the target and provide target coordinates to the FDC.
If only one sensor or observer is available, then they must obtain target data from a
minimum of two different locations at least 100 meters apart. The farther the observer
moves between readings, and the more locations from which readings are taken, the
more accurate the resulting target location will be.
6-27. Cavalry scouts should be intimately familiar with ATP 3-09.30. Especially the
target location and identification chapter which contains distance estimation techniques.
MORTAR EMPLOYMENT
6-28. Mortars provide indirect fire support that is extremely responsive to the scout
platoon’s needs. They provide a heavy volume of fires that are ideal for attacking targets
on reverse slopes, in narrow ravines or trenches, and in forests, towns, and other areas
that are difficult to strike with low-angle fires. Suppression, obscuration, and
illumination are the three types of mortar support available to the scout platoon.
MORTAR CAPABILITIES
6-29. Mortars are most effective—
 In urban areas or mountainous terrain.
 When requiring a fast response time.
 Against light skinned vehicles and troops.
MORTAR LIMITATIONS
6-30. Drawbacks to using mortars are—
 Short-range capability.
 Limited munitions selection.
 Vulnerability to enemy counterfire radars due to the high angle of fire.
 Limited basic loads of ammunition.
6-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
 Effectiveness against armored vehicles.
FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT

6-31. The brigade’s organic field artillery battalion can provide supporting indirect
fires to the scout platoon. The fires battalion has several different munitions available
such as high explosive, dual-purpose improved conventional munitions; white
phosphorus, scatterable mines; high explosive rocket-assisted projectiles; Excalibur
guided projectiles; obscuration; and illumination munitions.
ARTILLERY CAPABILITIES
6-32. Artillery elements support the scout platoon by—
 Providing continuous all-weather and all-terrain fire support.
 Shifting and massing fires rapidly.
 Supporting in-depth with long-range fires.
 Employing a variety of conventional shell and fuze combinations.
 Engaging stationary point targets with 155-mm Excalibur guided munitions
or Guided Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) munitions accurately.
ARTILLERY LIMITATIONS
6-33. Artillery elements supporting the scout platoon have—
 Limited effectiveness on moving targets.
 Limited ability to destroy point targets without considerable ammunition
expenditure.
 Increased vulnerability to enemy counterfire due to firing signature.
6-34. Field artillery employs a wide variety of munitions tailorable for the
engagement of different types of targets. These ammunition types include—
 High explosives for use against personnel, field fortifications, and vehicles.
 Obscurants for obscuration and screening.
 Illumination.
 White phosphorus for obscuration, marking, screening, and incendiary
effects against materiel targets.
 Guided MLRS rockets and 155-mm Excalibur rounds for use against point
targets.
 Dual-purpose improved conventional munitions s for use against personnel
and light armored vehicles in the open.
 Scatterable mines.
6-35. Scatterable mines include area denial munitions for use against personnel, remote
antiarmor mine systems, and armored vehicles. When firing a scatterable mines mission,
the battery is not available for other fire missions because it requires slightly more lead
time than other field artillery delivered munitions.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-11

Chapter 6
FIRE REQUEST PROCESS

6-36. Scouts are the primary elements responsible for requesting and adjusting indirect
fire, and every scout in the platoon must be familiar with the request and adjustment
process. The request will ultimately be processed through the troop fire support team.
FIRE REQUEST CHANNELS

6-37. Normally, Scouts send all requests for indirect fire support through the fire
support team on the troop command net and the commander approves the request. The
fire support team selects the best available fire support asset to engage a target.
Adjustments to the fire mission are normally also sent to the fire support team, which
then relays the message to the artillery unit on a digital fire direction net or to the mortars
on the fire support net.
6-38. Besides specific requests sent to the fire support team, the platoon can request fire
support in several other ways:
 Calls for fire can result from SPOTREPs sent on the troop command net; the
troop fire support team eavesdrops on the net and requests fires on targets of
opportunity and on targets approved by the commander.
 Requests for fire can be submitted through preformatted SPOTREPs and
contact reports sent via the joint capabilities release system.
FIRE DIRECTION AND CONTROL PROCEDURES

6-39. The following are the different methods and procedures for indirect fire. All
scouts in the platoon must be proficient in calls for fire.
INITIAL CALL FOR FIRE

6-40. The standard call for fire comprises six elements (see figure 6-3). They include
three basic transmissions:
 Observer identification and WARNORD (first transmission).
 Target location (second transmission).
 Target description, method of engagement, and method of fire and control
(third transmission).
6-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Figure 6-3. Indirect fire request format
Observer Identification and Warning Order (First Transmission)

6-41. Observer identification tells the FDC who is calling. The WARNORD clears the
net for the fire mission and tells the FDC the type of mission, size of element, and the
method of locating the target. The types of indirect fire missions are the following:
 Adjust fire. This is used when the observer is uncertain of the exact target
location. The observer says, ADJUST FIRE.
 Fire for effect. The observer strives for first-round fire for effect when they
are sure the target location is correct. The observer should also be sure the
rounds of the first volley have the desired effect on the target so little or no
adjustment is required. The observer announces, FIRE FOR EFFECT.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-13

Chapter 6
Note. With digital systems, properly updated positioning data and an accurate
range to the target provide extremely accurate target location. This enables
observers to call FIRE FOR EFFECT on the first transmission.
 Suppression. The word SUPPRESS is used to quickly bring fire on a

preplanned target when unable to observe. This is a simplified call for fire
and is sent in one transmission. Example: THUNDER 11—THIS IS RED 1—
SUPPRESS AF2401—OVER. Target description is not announced.
 Immediate suppression. This is used to bring fire quickly on a planned target
or a target of opportunity that is firing at a friendly unit or aircraft. As an
example, the observer says, THUNDER 11— THIS IS RED 2—
IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION AF2402—OVER. Target description is not
announced.
 Immediate smoke. This is used to place smoke quickly on a planned target or
a target of opportunity that is firing at a friendly unit. Sample transmission:
THUNDER 11—THIS IS RED 4—IMMEDIATE SMOKE AF2405—
OVER.
6-42. The polar and shift methods are announced to the FDC as part of the first
transmission. They are covered more in the following paragraph.
6-43. Following the type of mission, the method of target location is announced; this
prepares the FDC to receive the data sent by the observer and apply it to locate the target.
The three methods for locating targets are grid, polar plot, and shift from a known point.
The polar and shift methods are announced to the FDC. If the observer does not specify
either polar or shift, the FDC knows the grid method is being used; the word “grid” is
not announced. Example: THUNDER 11—THIS IS RED 3—FIRE FOR EFFECT—
POLAR—OVER
Target Location (Second Transmission)

6-44. The third element of the call for fire is target location. There are five methods of
establishing target location. They are grid, laser grid, polar plot, laser polar, and shift
from known point. When utilizing precision targeting devices to establish location, it is
required to transmit the target location error in the target location portion of the call for
fire request.
Grid Method
6-45. In the grid method, the target location normally includes a two-letter grid zone
identifier with eight digits (example: “AB13572468”). The direction from the observer
to the target (in milliradians [mils], if possible) must be given to the FDC after the call
for fire, but before the first adjusting rounds are shot. With the likelihood of operating
in built-up areas, crewmembers should call for fire using 8- or 10-digit grids to reduce
collateral damage.
6-14 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Laser Grid Method

6-46. The laser grid method is the same as described in paragraph 6-4 except the target
grid is given at a greater level of accuracy (8 to 10 digits depending on targeting device
accuracy). The far target locator can be used to acquire the target. The transmission also
includes the target location error (if known). For example, GRID AB1357924680, target
location error 4.0 OVER.
Note. A mission is not a laser grid mission just because the observer used a laser
to determine the initial target location. If the observer plans to send normal left,
right, add, or drop corrections, the mission is a normal grid mission. The mission
is a laser grid mission only when the method for subsequent corrections are laser
burst corrections.
Polar Plot Method

6-47. This method requires that the observer and the FDC know the observer’s exact
location. The observer determines the direction (to the nearest 10 mils) of the
observer-target (known as OT) line and the distance (to the nearest 100 meters) from the
position to the target.
Laser Polar Plot Method

6-48. The laser polar method differs from a polar mission in that the direction is
determined to the nearest mil (instead of 10 mils) and the distance is to the nearest
10 meters (instead of 100).
Shift From a Known Point Method

6-49. This is the least preferred and most difficult method of target location. The
observer may have one or more known points in the area of responsibility and only
works if the observer and the FDC have a common known point such as an artillery
target or significant feature like a bridge or tower. To locate the target, the observer first
determines the direction to the known point to the nearest 10 mils. If the observer has
no compass, direction can be determined by using a map and protractor or by using the
binocular reticle pattern and a known direction to the known point. The observer then
determines direction to the target using the right add, left subtract rule (known as RALS).
6-50. The observer then determines the lateral and range shifts (see figure 6-4, page
6-16). Lateral shifts are left or right from the known point to the OT line and are given
to the nearest 10 meters. Range shifts are given as ADD (when the target is beyond the
known point) or DROP (when the target is closer than the known point). Range shifts
are given to the nearest 100 meters. (Refer to ATP 3-09.30 for more information.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-15

Chapter 6
Figure 6-4. Lateral and range shifts from a known point
Target Description, Method of Engagement, and Method of Fire and Control

(Third Transmission)
6-51. The observer includes the target description, method of engagement, and method
for fire and control in the call for fire using the guidelines discussed in paragraphs 6-52
through 6-56.
Target Description
6-52. The observer describes the target to the FDC, and then the FDC determines the
type and amount of ammunition needed. The target description should be brief but
accurate. This is the last required element in the call for fire.
6-53. A target description may be DISMOUNTED INFANTRY SQUAD IN THE
OPEN or TWO TANKS IN TURRET DOWN POSITION.
6-16 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Method of Engagement
6-54. The observer requests how to attack the target (including type of ammunition,
fuse, and distance from friendly personnel). The FDC may change the ammunition type
and fuse based on availability or other constraints. If the target is within 600 meters of
friendly personnel, the observer announces DANGER CLOSE.
Method of Fire and Control

6-55. The observer states who will give the command to begin firing. If the observer
wants to control the time of firing, they say, AT MY COMMAND. The FDC tells the
observer when the unit is ready to fire. At the proper time, the observer says, FIRE. If
the observer does not say, AT MY COMMAND, the FDC directs the designated unit(s)
to fire as soon as the platoon or battery is ready. (See table 6-2).
Table 6-2. Methods and procedures for indirect call for fire
FIRST TRANSMISSION THIRD TRANSMISSION
1. Observers Identification (call signs) 4. Target Description
2. Warning Order Type
Adjust fire Activity
Fire for effect Number
Suppress Degree of protection
Immediate suppression/immediate Size and shape (length/width or radius)
smoke 5. Method of Engagement
SECOND TRANSMISSION Type of adjustment
3. Target Location Danger close
Grid coordinate Mark
Shift from a known point Ammunition
Polar plot Distribution
6. Method of Fire and Control
Method of fire
Method of control
ADJUSTING INDIRECT FIRE

6-56. Once the call for fire has been made, the observer’s next concern is to get rounds
on the target. If the observer can locate the target accurately, fire for effect is requested
in the initial call for fire. When the observer cannot accurately locate the target, for any
reason such as deceptive terrain, lack of identifiable terrain features, or poor visibility,
they must execute an adjustment to bring fires on the target. Normally, one artillery
piece or mortar is used in adjustment.
6-57. The observer must first pick an adjusting point. For a destruction mission
(precision fire), the target is the adjusting point. For an area target (area fire), the
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-17

Chapter 6
observer must pick a well-defined adjusting point at the center of the area or close to it.
The observer must spot the first adjusting round and each successive round and send
range and deviation corrections, as required, back to the FDC until fire hits the target.
The observer spots by relating the burst or group of bursts to the adjusting point. (Refer
to ATP 3-09.30 for more information.)
Deviation Spotting
6-58. As applied to deviation (left or right), spotting involves measuring the horizontal
angle (in mils) between the burst and the adjusting point (see figure 6-5). A burst to the
right (or left) of the target is spotted as (number) MILS RIGHT (LEFT).
Figure 6-5. Deviation spotting
Reticle Method
6-59. The mil scale on military binoculars or the hand-and-fingers method is a technique
to determine deviation. In the M22 and M24 binoculars, the horizontal and vertical
scales are divided into 10-mil increments with shorter hash marks at 5 mil increments.
The binocular reticle is shown in figure 6-6. The scale cannot be used to determine
vertical angle. Only a leveled measuring device can accurately measure vertical angle.
The hand-and-fingers technique may be used as shown in figure 6-7 on page 6-20.
6-18 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Figure 6-6. M22 and M24 binocular reticle pattern
Hand and Finger Method

6-60. When all other means to measure angular deviation are not available, the observer
may use the hand and fingers as a measuring device. Figure 6-7 illustrates the
approximate numbers for an average hand.
6-61. Each scout should calibrate their own hand and fingers to determine the width in
mils for the various combinations of finger and hand positions shown, and then
memorize those numbers. Calibrate hand measurements by comparing measurements
taken with the hand and measurements taken with a more accurate measuring device.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-19

Chapter 6
6-62. When using hand and fingers in measuring angular deviation, the scout fully
extends the arm (elbow locked) so that the hand and fingers are always the same distance
from the eyes. The scout always points the palm of the hand toward the target area and
holds the fingers as demonstrated in figure 6-7. Anything that changes the method, such
as wearing a glove or not keeping the fingers together, affects the measurement.
Figure 6-7. Use of hand and fingers method to determine deviation
6-20 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
6-63. A burst on the OT line is spotted as ON LINE. Deviation to the left or right should
be measured to the nearest 5 mils for area targets, with measurements taken from the
center of the burst. Scouts estimate the deviation for a destruction mission (precision
fire) to the nearest mil. Figure 6-8 shows the adjusting point at the center of the
binocular’s horizontal scale.
Figure 6-8. Deviation spotting with binoculars
6-64. Once the observer determines the observed deviation (in mils), the observer must
convert it into a deviation correction (in meters). Deviation correction is the distance in
meters the scouts must move to be in line between observer and target. It is sent, with
the range correction, to the FDC for the next adjusting round or when calling for fire for
effect.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-21

Chapter 6
6-65. The first step in determining deviation correction is to calculate the OT factor, the
distance from the observer to the target in kilometers. The observer calculates the
distance to the target in meters and divides by 1,000; see table 6-3 for examples of this
process. The precise correction is determined by multiplying the observed deviation by
the OT factor; it is expressed to the nearest 10 meters (see figure 6-9).
Table 6-3. Determining the observer target factor
Guide for Determining the OT (observer-target) Factor

OT distance greater than 1,000 meters. Round to the nearest thousand, and express in
thousands of meters.
EXAMPLES: OT distance, 4,200 meters –
OT factor, 4.0
OT distance, 2,700 meters –

OT factor, 3.0
OT distance less than 1,000 meters. Round to the nearest 100 meters and express in
thousands of meters.
EXAMPLES: OT distance, 800 meters –
OT factor, 0.8
6-22 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Figure 6-9. Converting mil deviation to deviation correction
6-66. The observer’s goal in making the correction is to move the adjusting rounds close
enough to the OT line so that range spotting can be made accurately. Minor deviation
corrections (10 to 20 meters) are necessary in adjustment of precision fire. In adjustment
of area fire, however, the observer should ignore small deviation corrections (20 meters
or less) except when such a small change is necessary to determine a definite range
spotting.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-23

Chapter 6
Range Spotting
6-67. Range spotting is the second type of adjustment required to get fire on the target
(see figure 6-10). Any range spotting other than DOUBTFUL, LOST, or
UNOBSERVED is definite. Usually, an adjusting round’s burst that is on or near the
OT line will give a definite range spotting. However, even experienced observers use
caution and good judgements when range spotting.
Figure 6-10. Range spotting
6-68. The observer can sometimes make a definite range spotting even when the burst
is not on or near the OT line. The observer uses personal knowledge of the terrain or
wind and observes debris scattered by the explosion. Possible range spottings calls
include—
 OVER – a round that impacts beyond the adjusting point.
 SHORT – a round that impacts between the observer and the adjusting point.
 TARGET – a round that impacts on the target. Use this spotting only in
precision fire (registration or destruction missions).
 RANGE CORRECT – a round that impacts at the correct range.
 DOUBTFUL – a round that can be observed but cannot be spotted as OVER,
SHORT, TARGET, or RANGE CORRECT.
6-24 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
 LOST – a round whose location cannot be determined by sight or sound.

 UNOBSERVED – a round not observed but known to have impacted (usually
heard).
 UNOBSERVED OVER or UNOBSERVED SHORT – a round not observed
but known to have impacted over or short.
Range Correction
6-69. The observer gives range corrections so that, with each successive correction, the
adjusting round intentionally lands over or short of the adjusting point, closing on the
target.
Successive Bracketing
6-70. Successive bracketing is best when observers are inexperienced or when precise
adjustment is required, such as precision registrations and destruction missions. It
mathematically ensures fire-for-effect rounds are within 50 meters of the target.
6-71. After the first definite range spotting is determined, the observer should send a
range correction to the FDC to establish a range bracket of known distance (one round
over and one round short). Once the observer establishes the bracket, they successively
split the bracket until confident that the rounds will impact within 50 meters of the
adjusting point when requesting fires for effect. Normally, range changes of 100, 200,
400, or 800 meters make splitting the bracket easier. The observer enters fire for effect
when the rounds impact within 50 meters of the adjusting point. (See figure 6-11, on
page 6-26.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-25

Chapter 6
Figure 6-11. Successive bracketing
Hasty Bracketing
6-72. Hasty bracketing is best when responsive fires are required and the observer is
experienced in the adjustment of fire.
6-73. Experience has shown that effectiveness on the target decreases as the number of
rounds used in adjustment increases. An alternative to successive bracketing is hasty
bracketing. While successive bracketing mathematically ensures that the fire-for-effect
rounds will strike within 50 meters of the adjusting point, it is a relatively slow and
unresponsive technique. Therefore, if the nature of the target dictates that effective fires
are needed faster than successive bracketing can provide them, hasty bracketing should
be used.
6-74. The observer gets a bracket on the first correction much as in the successive
bracketing technique. The observer uses this initial bracket as a yardstick to determine
6-26 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
the subsequent correction. The observer sends the FDC the correction to move the
rounds to the target and FIRE FOR EFFECT (see figure 6-12).
Figure 6-12. Hasty bracketing
Creeping (DANGER CLOSE)

6-75. The creeping method of adjustment is used in DANGER CLOSE situations. The
initial round is fired beyond the target. Adjusting rounds are moved closer to the target,
50 meters or less at a time, until the target is engaged (see figure 6-13, page 6-28). This
method is slow and tends to use more ammunition than other adjustments; therefore, it
should be used only when Soldier safety is a major concern.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-27

Chapter 6
Figure 6-13. Creeping method of adjustment
6-28 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Refinement and Surveillance

6-76. The observer notes the results of the fire for effect. Table 6-4 illustrates various
alternatives available to the observer after fire for effect rounds have been fired.
Table 6-4. Results and observer actions
Observer’s Actions
Results of Fire for Effect
(Radio Transmission in Parentheses)
End of mission, surveillance (END OF MISSION,
Accurate and sufficient
RPG SILENCED, OVER)
Request replot, end of mission, surveillance
Accurate, sufficient, target
replot desired (RECORD AS TARGET, END OF MISSION,
BMP NEUTRALIZED, OVER)
Refinement, end of mission, surveillance
Inaccurate and sufficient (RIGHT 20, ADD 20, END OF MISSION, RPG
SILENCED, OVER)
Refinement, request replot, end of mission,
Inaccurate, sufficient, target surveillance (RIGHT 10, RECORD AS TARGET,
replot desired END OF MISSION, BMP NEUTRALIZED,
OVER)
Refinement, repeat and reenter, adjust fire
Inaccurate and insufficient (RIGHT 10, ADD 50, REPEAT, or RIGHT 10,
ADD 100, ADJUST FIRE, OVER)
Accurate and insufficient Repeat (REPEAT, OVER)
Legend:
BMP--Russian amphibious tracked infantry fighting vehicle; RPG--rocket
propelled grenade
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-29

Chapter 6
EXAMPLES OF A CALL FOR FIRE TRANSMISSIONS

6-77. Table 6-5 is an example of a GRID mission. Table 6-6 is an example of a shift
from known point fire mission.
Table 6-5. Example of a GRID mission

Observer Firing Unit
F24, this is J42, ADJUST FIRE, J42, this is F24, ADJUST FIRE,
OVER. OUT.
GRID WM 180513, DIRECTION GRID WM 180513, DIRECTION
0530, OVER. 0530, OUT.
Infantry platoon dug in, OVER. Infantry platoon dug in, OUT.
SHOT OUT. SHOT OVER.
SLASH OUT. SPLASH OVER.
End of mission, 15 casualties, End of mission, 15 casualties,
platoon dispersed, OVER. platoon dispersed, OUT.
Table 6-6. Example of a shift from a known point

Observer Firing Unit
J42, this is F24, ADJUST FIRE, J42, this is F24, ADJUST FIRE,
SHIFT AB1001, OUT. SHIFT AB1001, OUT.
DIRECTION 2420, RIGHT 400, DIRECTION 2420, RIGHT 400,
ADD 400, OUT. ADD 400, OUT.
5T72 Tanks at POL site, OVER. 5T72 Tanks at POL site, OUT.
I AUTHENTICATE Tango, OVER. AUTHENTICATE Juliet,
November, OVER.
SHOT OUT. SHOT OVER.
SPLASH OUT. SPLASH OVER.
End of mission, two tanks destroyed, End of mission, two tanks
three in wood line, OVER. destroyed, three in wood line,
OUT.
Legend: POL – petroleum, oils, and lubricants
6-78. In addition to the supporting cannon units, MLRS/High Mobility Artillery Rocket
System elements may also provide fires. Unlike cannon artillery, MLRS units fire rocket
and missile munitions delivering only high explosive, dual-purpose improved
conventional munitions, or antipersonnel and antimateriel warheads. They provide
rocket or missile fires but do not offer special munitions such as obscuration,
illumination, or white phosphorus. The maximum range of a MLRS rocket is 32,000 to
45,000 meters, depending upon the type of munitions. The planning range for MLRS
missiles in the Army Tactical Missile System is 100,000 to 300,000 meters, depending
upon the type of munitions.
6-30 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
SNIPER EMPLOYMENT
6-79. The sniper’s primary mission in combat is to deliver precision long-range fires on
selected targets. Effective long-range fires create casualties, slow movement, instills fear
and influences enemy decisions and actions, lowers morale, and adds confusion to
enemy operations. Snipers observe, collect, and provide critical, detailed information.
Examples include snipers providing overwatch during a dismounted portion of zone
reconnaissance or adding depth to a screen in complex terrain.
MILITARY INTELLIGENCE COMPANY

6-80. The military intelligence company personnel task organized according to the
BCT commander and staff based on the mission variables. Soldiers from the military
intelligence company support the BCT and its subordinate commands by executing
HUMINT, signals intelligence, and tactical UAS collection; document and media
exploitation; and, in certain instances, biometrics and forensic collection.
UNMANNED AERIAL SYSTEM

6-81. UAS are a mix of hand or rail launched reconnaissance and surveillance tools
which are remote operated aircrafts controlled from an on the ground operator. These
UAS transmit live airborne video images, compass headings, and location information
to a ground control station, a reconnaissance, surveillance and target acquisition laptop
(if connected), and a one-station remote viewing terminal. They are tools that tactical
commanders could employ to gather mission critical information about the operational
environment, and reduce the tactical risk within their formation.
6-82. Integration of UAS in reconnaissance and security missions increases the
informational gathering capability for scout platoons. These systems can provide the
scout platoon a flexible, low-risk means for gaining basic information in a speedy and
efficient manner. The scout platoon’s use of UAS can provide quick information
gathering of a designated AO covering dead space that cannot be seen by ground forces.
They provide an alternate way to observe an area through a different point of view. UAS
provide operational capabilities in force protection, convoy security, target
identification, and battle damage assessments.
6-83. Information derived from UAS assets helps the scout platoon leader determine
which routes and cross-country terrain best accommodate reconnaissance tasks. In
addition, the scout platoon takes information generated by UAS units and immediately
sends SPOTREPs to organizations that need combat information. Information gathered
by the UAS range from very near (over the next hill or around the next block) to
hundreds of kilometers away. (Refer to ATP 3-04.1 for more information.) Scout
platoons employ the man-portable UAS assets but also have direct access to real-time
or near-real-time feeds from other UAS such as the BCT asset, the RQ-7 Shadow.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-31

Chapter 6
EMPLOYMENT
6-84. Scout platoon leaders have to tactically integrate UAS positions forward of
mounted observation post positions along the screen to provide early warning of enemy,
and observation of dead space in their engagement areas and AO. Small UAS category
includes handheld (such as mini or micro) UAS. At this time, airspace requirements
have not been determined for these mini or micro UAS. The UAS teams will be
operating independently from other platoon elements and need to conduct similar
priorities of work when conducting UAS operations as an observation post team. The
UAS team needs to camouflage their positions, place no fire areas over their location,
and report all required information to higher as needed. Security of the UAS site is very
important.
6-85. Observation posts are not a desired launch point for a UAS and should only be
used as a last resort. If a system launches from an observation post, then that observation
post would most likely be compromised and would have to immediately relocate to their
secondary or tertiary observation post position. Enemy forces could easily identify the
observation post through sight and sound of a UAS launch site and would immediately
attempt to destroy the threat. Scout platoon leaders and commanders need to carefully
plan the separation between the raven operator and the team member conducting the
launch.
Planning
6-86. Terrain considerations such as how the elevation of surrounding terrain and line
of sight between the ground control station and the objective will affect the mission.
UAS operators will consider the ground contour along proposed flight routes, foliage
effects on the radio frequency link, and the effect of operation in high altitude areas.
Time considerations include coordination times for launch and on target, expected
duration of UAS missions, and set-up and recover time.
6-87. Troops available for the launch team (two-person minimum), security for the UAS
team, training level of the small unmanned aircraft systems team, and other
support/augmentation (data capture, remote launch/recovery) need to be considered
during the scout platoon’s TLP.
Launch and Recovery

6-88. Launch and recovery are the two most high-risk times when conducting UAS
operations. Include risk mitigation when planning for the launch and recovery of UASs.
Operators have to ensure continuous security of the launch and recovery site, while the
platoons focus remains on the tactical situation. The aircraft will be at its lowest point
of the flight and within sight and sound of any enemy in close proximity to friendly
forces. The enemy will take every opportunity to observe a UAS during flight in an
attempt to observe the launch or recovery location. Regardless of UAS size, the scout
platoon should be on full alert during launch and recovery, observing assigned sectors
and not the UAS take-off and landing.
6-32 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
RESTRICTED OPERATING ZONE

6-89. UAS operators need to submit either a preplanned or an immediate ROZ request
as the first step to fly their systems in the AO during missions. Operators work with their
commander and scout platoon leader to establish what type of ROZ they plan to use and
to ensure the request is submitted to the squadron or battalion command post. The
common three ROZ types are circular, box, and route.
6-90. A circular ROZ requires a center point grid and the UAS operator then puts in a
request expanding a circular area over a center point grid with a radius in miles or
kilometers. The circular ROZ is one of the easiest types of ROZs to establish (see
figure 6-14).
Figure 6-14. Circular restricted operating zone
6-91. The box ROZ requires the UAS operator to establish an area they want their
system to fly over and using a box graphic with a minimum of four grid locations for
each corner of the box graphic. The box ROZ could have more than four grid locations
if needed (see figure 6-15, page 6-34).
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-33

Chapter 6
Figure 6-15. Box restricted operating zone
6-92. When requesting a ROZ, the operator will transmit the request along with a list of
other required information. There is no standardized UAS mission request form, but
units should be familiar with the information needed for the request process. The
information the scout platoon provides is what the squadron/battalion is going to
request. The scout platoon conducting the launch ensures they are tracking all the
submitted information. It is common for UAS information such as frequencies, launch
and recovery grid locations, ROZ names, and flight times to change after the ROZ
approval process and this could delay UAS operations. Table 6-7 is an example of the
information transmitted for a nonstandard UAS mission request.
6-34 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Table 6-7. Nonstandard unmanned aerial system mission request, example
Unmanned Aerial System Mission Request Information

REQUESTOR INFORMATION
Unit: C TRP, 2-1 CAV
Point of Contact: 1LT Brown
Phone: 123-456-7890
Email: [email protected]
Contact Frequency: FM: Frequency 431
Mission Purpose: Area Reconnaissance
Requested Name of Airspace Control Measure: PL RED
Launch Site (Grid): 11S EC 12345 34543 Recovery Site (Grid): 11S EC 12300 34500
Launch Site Altitude (MSL): 800 Meters Recover Site Altitude (MSL): 845 Meters
SUAV Channel: 45
Type of Measure (Shape) Mark an “X” next to type requested:
ROZ (Circle) Grid: Grid coordinate of center point_11S EC 12600 34900
Coordinate of Center Point Radius (nm/miles/km) 3 Miles
Route (Corridor) Enter two coordinates and width for each segment.
Identify (nm/miles/km)
1. 11S EC 12345 67890 W: 1 KM 2. 11SEC 23451 789056 W: 1.5 KM
3. 11S EC 67890 12345 W: 1 KM 4. 11S EC 54321 09876 W: 2 KM
5. 11S EC 89765 76234 W: 1.5 KM 6. 11S EC 24531 76854 W: 0.9 KM
Box (can have more than 4 points). Enter a coordinate for each corner of the shape:
1. 11S EC 12345 67890 2. 11S EC 23451 78906 3. 11S EC 89765 76234
4. 11S EC 24531 76854 5. 11S EC 54321 09876 6. 11S EC 67890 12345
Flight Altitude in AGL: Minimum: 600 Meters Maximum: 1200 Meters
DTG of Mission: Start (Launch): 280400JAN 2020 Stop (Recovery):280900JAN2020
NOTE: ZULU TIME ONLY! Zulu – Local +/- 14 Hours
DTG Request submitted to battalion/squadron S-3: 151300JAN2020
OFFICIAL USE
Battalion S-3: Reviewed by SFC Taylor, Michael
Sent to ADAM/BAE (POC and DTG)
Comments: ROZ has been submitted and waiting on ADAM/BAE Cell for approval.
Legend: ADAM – air defense airspace management, AGL – above ground level, BAE –
brigade aviation element, DTG – date-time group, km – kilometers, MSL - missile, nm –
nautical miles, POC – point of contact, ROZ – restricted operating zone, S-3 – battalion
or brigade operations staff officer, UAV – unmanned aerial vehicle, W – width
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-35

Chapter 6
WEATHER EFFECTS
6-93. Winds. Unmanned aircrafts have crosswind and total wind limitations that may
affect launch and recovery operations. Winds at altitude may have significant effects on
unmanned aircrafts range, transit time, and time on station. High surface winds at UAS
communications and relay sites may force antenna stowage and delaying or curtailing
missions. UAS will operate in blowing sand and dust with wind speeds up to 20 knots.
Wind speeds over 20 knots will reduce mission capability and create a higher risk of
damage during launch, landing, and recovery. Operators will need to determine if it is
safe to launch their system in higher wind speeds and make their recommendation to the
troop commander. The squadron weather officer can provide real time weather reports
to UAS operators. Leaders must also understand the effects of precipitation visibility,
and temperature effect on UAS operations.
UNMANNED AERIAL SURVEILLANCE RECONNAISSANCE TASKS

6-94. Small UASs can operate approximately 10 km forward of the scout platoon
(METT-TC dependent), and conduct reconnaissance of areas that are particularly
dangerous to ground elements, such as open areas and defiles. Upon enemy contact, the
UAS provides early warning for the scout platoon and maintains contact with the enemy
until the platoon moves forward for handover.
UNMANNED AERIAL SURVEILLANCE SECURITY TASKS

6-95. The UAS complements the scout platoon during security tasks by assisting in
identifying enemy reconnaissance and main body elements, and providing early warning
forward of the platoon. The UAS also has a critical role in providing security through
the depth of the screen by observing dead space between observation posts.
6-96. Usually the UAS positions forward of the ground observation posts, which
provides added depth to the screen, especially during operations in daylight. Ultimately,
the positioning of UAS always depends on the specific METT-TC situation (see
figure 6-16).
6-36 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Figure 6-16. Unmanned aircraft system complementing

a ground scout platoon’s screen
AREA SECURITY
6-97. The UAS element can complement the scout platoon during area security missions
by providing additional 360-degree security, or conducting reconnaissance for
additional maneuver space. An aerial screen can provide early warning for a scout
platoon executing a convoy escort mission or securing a critical point. (See figure 6-17,
on page 6-38.) The UAS can identify enemy ambush positions forward of the convoy or
bypass an obstacle (as illustrated in figure 6-18 on page 6-39.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-37

Chapter 6
Figure 6-17. Unmanned aircraft system providing additional security

for a scout platoon
6-98. UAS supporting the scout platoon can identify an enemy element before visual or
physical contact with the scout platoon preventing unwanted detection and engagement.
The lead vehicle and the overwatch element occupy positions allowing them to observe
the enemy and, if necessary, destroy the enemy while the UAS provides the scout
platoon with overhead security. The UAS may also establish and maintain contact with
a moving enemy element while friendly units conduct a RHO during a screen mission.
6-38 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Figure 6-18. Unmanned aircraft system reconnoitering a bypass

for a scout platoon
CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL,

NUCLEAR
6-99. BCT CBRN assets may attach to the platoon and provide capability for advanced
CBRN detection and presumptive or field confirmatory identification capabilities and
subject-matter expertise in recognizing indicators of enemy CBRN related operations.
The standoff CBRN sensors of the CBRN reconnaissance platoon will enable
contamination avoidance and reduce operational risk. BCT CBRN elements are limited
to reconnaissance elements in the brigade engineer battalion, and do not provide
decontamination support.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-39

Chapter 6
6-100. In the ABCT and SBCT, CBRN reconnaissance platoons will be equipped with
the nuclear, biological, chemical reconnaissance vehicle. IBCT reconnaissance platoon
are vehicle-equipped but conduct reconnaissance dismounted.
6-101. Advantages of mounted CBRN reconnaissance (nuclear, biological, chemical
reconnaissance vehicle) are—
 Speed. When time is limited, conducting the reconnaissance mission
mounted without exiting the vehicle provides the commander faster feedback
and the capability to cover large areas. Vehicles offer increased mobility in
open terrain. Mounted reconnaissance may be conducted in high-mobility,
multipurpose wheeled vehicles or nuclear, biological, chemical
reconnaissance vehicles.
 Protection. Vehicles provide the reconnaissance and security element
additional protection from CBRN and conventional hazards. These
advantages depend on the specific vehicle employed. Reconnaissance
vehicles may include the following:
 Armor protection.
 Enhanced navigation and communications capability.
 Enhanced optics providing stand-off detection before entering
contamination.
 Firepower to defeat light-skinned armor vehicles and some infantry
fighting vehicles (IFVs).
 Vehicle collective protection.
 Meteorological data.
 Remaining mounted allows the reconnaissance and security element to
conduct detailed CBRN reconnaissance at a speed greater than
dismounted CBRN reconnaissance and security could achieve.
6-102. Disadvantages of mounted CBRN reconnaissance (NBCRV) are—
 Loss of stealth due to the visual, noise, and thermal signatures of vehicles.
 Loss of accuracy to pinpoint actual contamination.
 Higher probability of false positives.
 Higher probability of false negatives.
 Decontamination requirements for personnel and vehicles.
 CBRN reconnaissance vehicles are often not equipped with dismounted
reconnaissance capabilities for buildings or other places not accessible by
vehicles.
6-103. Advantages of dismounted CBRN reconnaissance are—
 Permitting elements to benefit from the concealment offered by vegetation
and terrain.
 Providing IBCTs and light forces the capability to exploit narrow gaps
between CBRN contamination, and enabling penetration of forces at an
enemy’s perceived denied terrain.
 Reducing visual or audio signature.
6-40 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
 Providing the ability to conduct reconnaissance operations when the CBRN

hazard is in close proximity to adversary positions.
 Conducting reconnaissance operations in restricted terrain, such as dense
urban environments and subterranean facilities.
6-104. Disadvantages of dismounted CBRN reconnaissance are—
 A slow rate of movement and increased time to complete.
 A greater work/rest requirement and oxygen consumption rates to execute
operations.
 An extensive requirement for detailed preliminary planning and coordination.
 Considerable risks to Soldiers conducting dismounted CBRN reconnaissance
operations.
 Requirements for technical decontamination planning.
 Limited range of communications capabilities.
 Reduced protection from—
 Working in direct contact with CBRN threats and hazards.
 Adversary direct and indirect fires.
 Booby traps.
 IEDs.
6-105. The purpose of CBRN reconnaissance and security reconnaissance is to provide
commanders with detailed, timely, and accurate information about the CBRN threat, by
visual observation or CBRN detection methods, and to gain situational understanding of
CBRN threats and hazards. Information that is collected from multiple sources and
analyzed becomes intelligence that provides answers to the CCIR and PIR concerning
an enemy’s use of CBRN weapons or regarding impacts of an accidental release of
CBRN material.
SECTION II – EXTERNAL BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM ASSETS

6-106. When required, the troop may request augmentation for the scout platoon from
outside the BCT. Both habitual and other augmentation assets are below.
AIR AND MISSILE DEFENSE SUPPORT

6-107. Due to the scarcity of air defense assets, scout platoons cannot plan on always
receiving dedicated air and missile defense (AMD) protection assets. Consequently,
scout platoons must employ passive and active measures to nullify and reduce the
effectiveness of enemy attack or surveillance by enemy aircraft, UAS, and missiles.
These measures include avoiding detection, limiting the damage if attacked, and if
necessary, engaging enemy aircraft with intent to destroy or disrupt the attack.
PASSIVE AIR AND MISSILE DEFENSE

6-108. Passive AMD is the scout platoon’s first line of defense, which includes two
types: attack avoidance and damage-limiting measures. To avoid an attack, scouts use
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-41

Chapter 6
concealment, camouflage, deception, and any other necessary action to prevent the
enemy from observing their location. Concealment is the most effective measure to
remain undetected from visual and thermal sensors. To remain concealed from enemy
air attacks and UAS, scouts must occupy locations that prevent overhead observation.
These locations must afford scouts clear observation and fields of fire to provide early
warning of approaching aircraft. When effective concealment is not available, vehicles
must camouflage, hide track marks leading to the position, and cover all reflective
shiny or bright-colored surfaces that could attract attention. To limit the damage of an
attack, scout platoons must prepare to disperse and use natural or man-made cover to
reduce the effects of enemy munitions. Dispersion is especially important when
occupying static positions such as assembly areas or preparing to cross a water or
breached obstacle. If an attack is imminent, vehicles must disperse quickly to concealed
positions if possible and remain stationary, as they are more difficult to see than a
moving vehicle. Effective cover and concealment can include folds in the earth,
depressions, and buildings.
ACTIVE AIR AND MISSILE DEFENSE

6-109. Execute active AMD measures based on the situation, the capabilities of
organic weapon systems, and whether AMD assets have been task organized to the scout
platoon. If engaging enemy aircraft with organic weapon systems, the most effective
action is a coordinated, focused, volume of fire, including the scout platoon leader’s
synchronizing crew-served weapons or guided munitions, such as TOW missile systems
when equipped. The football field technique is recommended for aircraft engagement
with unguided organic weapon systems. For rotary-wing aircraft, aiming should lead the
aircraft by one-half football field for crossing or overhead courses, and slightly above
the fuselage for aircraft flying directly at the platoon’s position (see figure 6-19).
6-42 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
Figure 6-19. Football field technique: rotary-wing aiming points
6-110. For fixed-wing aircraft, aiming should lead the aircraft by two football fields
for crossing or overhead courses and slightly above the nose if flying directly at the
scout’s position (see figure 6-20, on page 6-44). If AMD assets such as an Avenger
element or Stinger man-portable air defense system task-organize into the platoon, they
will be the primary means of engaging enemy aircraft with support from organic weapon
systems.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-43

Chapter 6
Figure 6-20. Football field technique: fixed-wing aiming points
6-111. If dedicated AMD assets are task organized to the scout platoon, it is essential
to factor their capabilities and limitations into the platoon’s scheme of maneuver. Some
of the factors the platoon should consider are—
 Acquisition and munition range and type.
 AMD asset sustainment.
 Mutually supporting and overlapping fires.
 AMD engagement criteria.
ARMY AVIATION SUPPORT

6-112. Army aviation conducts air-ground operations as the aerial maneuver force of
the combined arms team, or as an independent maneuver force in support of ground
forces. During reconnaissance and security missions, scouts platoons are primarily
supported by air assets from the attack reconnaissance squadron (known as ARS) of the
combat aviation brigade. Assets from the ARS provide accurate and timely information
collection; provides reaction time and maneuver space; and destroys, defeats, delays,
diverts, or disrupts enemy forces. Although ARS assets are fully capable of conducting
an attack, the integration of UAS platforms make the ARS the best aerial formation for
conducting reconnaissance, security, and movement to contact as primary missions.
6-113. Scout platoons may receive support from the attack reconnaissance battalion;
however, attack reconnaissance battalion assets have less overall reconnaissance
6-44 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
capabilities than the ARS due to the lack of organic UAS platforms, making attack
operations their primary mission. Refer to FM 3-04 for more information on the
difference between ARS and attack reconnaissance battalion assets, as well as other
aviation brigade assets.
6-114. Attack reconnaissance squadron assets are capable of conducting the following
tasks in support of scout platoons:
 Zone, area, route, reconnaissance, and reconnaissance in force.
 Screen.
 Guard and area security.
 Movement to contact.
 Attack.
7-115. Scout platoons use plain and direct language when speaking to aircraft crews.
They describe the situation and what they want the aircraft to do. Do not broadcast
overly complicated or stilted and formal transmissions. When transmitting procedural
requirements, follow the format exactly. Aviation attack reconnaissance units use a
standardized check-in brief format to transmit information to the supported ground
unit. The check-in brief format in table 6-8 provides the scout platoon with key and
essential information about the aviation assets that should be transmitted.
Table 6-8. Air to ground check-in brief, example

Air to Ground Check-In Brief
1. Check-in call: “Red One, this is Bravo Three-Four.”
(ground unit) (aircraft call sign)
2. Aircraft team composition and location:
“Two AH-64Es approximately 12 kilometers north of your position."
(Compositional) (Location)
3. Munitions available.
“Weapons load: 100 rounds of 30 millimeter, 14 point detonating rockets,
4 hellfires.”
4. Night vision capability and type: “Night vision and forward looking infrared
capable.”
5. Station time: “We have approximately 120 minutes of play time: request your
SITREP.
Legend: SITREP – situation report
6-116. Aviation attack reconnaissance units will request a ground SITREP from of the
scout platoon following the check-in brief to gain situational awareness of the following:
 Location of all friendly ground forces in the AO.
 Scout platoon’s mission.
 Enemy situation (if applicable).
 Aircraft task and purpose.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-45

Chapter 6
 Any other aircraft or UAS operating in the AO.

 Any hazards to aircraft.
RECONNAISSANCE
6-117. Scout platoons leverage aviation reconnaissance capabilities to conduct
reconnaissance at greater distances and in severely restricted terrain. Regardless of
whether reconnaissance is a specified task or not, it is always an implied task for every
aviation element to gather and report information on enemy and friendly disposition,
terrain, and civil activities observed during the course of all operations. During route
reconnaissance, aviation assets can focus on terrain, ensuring maneuverability for the
scout platoon by identifying potential obstacles and hazards
SECURITY
6-118. Similar to reconnaissance, aviation reconnaissance assets conduct security
tasks; however, the only security task that aviation can perform autonomously is the
screen. Screens are the only form of security scout platoons can employ aviation
reconnaissance assets as an additional, independent maneuver element. When the scout
platoon is operating as part of a guard or cover operation, aviation reconnaissance assets
can conduct tactical, enabling, and sustaining tasks in support of the scout platoon
including screen, zone and route reconnaissance, movement to contact, and attacks.
When directly supporting the scout platoon they also conduct area security, including
convoy and route security.
6-119. Since aviation assets are unbound by complex terrain, they add depth to the
overall security operation for the protected force. For example, UAS in the deep area
conduct reconnaissance on a NAI to provide early and accurate warning of impeding
enemy forces to manned assets screening along the forward line of troops. The manned
assets then gain and maintain enemy contact to provide early and accurate warning to
the scout platoon, or call for fires on the enemy position.
MOVEMENT TO CONTACT
6-120. The speed, range, lethality, long-range communications, and reconnaissance
capabilities of attack aviation reconnaissance assets ideally suit them to conduct
movement to contact, especially with the employment of manned-unmanned teaming.
Scout platoons may increase their freedom to maneuver by having aviation assets
develop the situation and create favorable conditions to conduct subsequent tactical or
enabling tasks.
ATTACK
6-121. Army aviation may conduct hasty or deliberate attacks in support of friendly
forces in close contact or out of contact with enemy forces. When attack reconnaissance
assets support the scout platoon, the scout platoon leader controls the synchronization
and integration of aviation maneuver, and the distribution and de-confliction of aviation
fires. The air mission commander is the final release authority for any munitions fired
6-46 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
by the aircraft. Air-ground integration requires detailed planning; however, lack of time
often prevents this integration. In this case, scout platoons use the attack aviation call
for fire, a standardized 5-line format for employing attack aircraft as depicted in
table 6-9, to transmit coordinates.
Table 6-9. Attack aviation call for fire, example
Attack Aviation Call for Fire (5-Line)

1. Observer/Warning Order: “Red One, this is Bravo Three-Four, fire mission,
over.”
(Aircraft call-sign) (Ground Unit)
2. Friendly location/mark: “My position is QS1234567, marked by ”infrared strobe."
(Location) (Mark)
3. Target location: “Target location QS82134563.”

(Grid, target reference point, bearing [magnetic] and range [meters])
4. Target description/mark: “Armored vehicle, marked by tracer and infrared pointer."
(Target description) (Target Mark)
5. Remarks: “At my command, over.”

(Threats, danger close clearance, restrictions, at my command, when ready, and so
forth.)
6-122. Alternatively, Army aviation may conduct attacks against enemy forces out of
friendly contact to preemptively divert, disrupt, delay, or destroy enemy capabilities
before they can be brought to bear on friendly forces. While these operations may require
more detailed planning and range from relatively low-risk to extremely high-risk, they
may be effective at shaping the enemy force prior to the scout platoon’s mission. The
air mission commander controls the maneuver and fires for these missions.
CLOSE AIR SUPPORT

6-123. The scout platoon may employ CAS from fixed-wing aircraft to augment other
supporting fires or to attack targets of opportunity. The speed, range, and
maneuverability of aircraft allow them to attack targets that other supporting fires may
not be able to effectively engage due to limiting factors such as target type, range,
terrain, or the ground scheme of maneuver.
6-124. Ground commanders are the ultimate authority for all supporting fires in their
respective AO. The ground commander at the lowest level is responsible for the
employment of CAS assets unless responsibility is specifically retained by a higher level
commander in the ground force’s chain of command.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-47

Chapter 6
IMMEDIATE CLOSE AIR SUPPORT

6-125. Requests for immediate CAS occur when identifying requirements that are
identified too late to meet the air tasking order cutoff time. If there are no immediate
CAS sorties available when identifying and targets of opportunity, then other aircraft
may divert to engage these targets or provide CAS for scout platoon missions.
6-126. CAS mission success relates directly to thorough planning based on the
following considerations:
 Weather.
 Identification of enemy and friendly forces.
 Target acquisition and identification procedures.
 Target type and desired weapon effects.
 Final attack heading.
 Suppression of enemy air defenses.
 CAS and artillery integration.
NIGHT CLOSE AIR SUPPORT

6-127. As with weather considerations, the use of GPS and laser-guided munitions
enhance the ability of CAS assets to provide support at night. The two most important
requirements of a night CAS mission are target identification, and positive marking, and
identification of friendly unit locations.
6-128. Flares from terminal controllers or other CAS aircraft can effectively illuminate
target areas. Artillery and mortar-fired illumination provide longer sustained rate of fire.
Flares used during limited visibility such as fog or obscuration can make it more difficult
for aircraft to find targets. During a low cloud ceiling, flares can highlight the aircraft
against the clouds.
6-129. Tracers and infrared beacons can improve safety and provide target area
reference. Strobe and IR lights are very useful for marking friendly locations, especially
in overcast conditions. Aside from obvious security considerations, almost any light that
a scout has filtered, covered, or uncovered is useful for signaling aircraft.
CLOSE AIR SUPPORT REQUEST

6-130. The CAS request provides situational awareness and the information necessary
for the crew of the aircraft to successfully engage target(s). The terminal controller,
normally a joint terminal attack controller (JTAC) or forward air controller-airborne,
transmits via radio to the attack aircraft, providing the aircrew enough time to write
down the information and set up their navigational equipment. Table 6-10 provides the
CAS request format. Lines 4 and 6 and any restrictions are mandatory read-back items
by the aircrew, but the controller may request read-back of additional items.
6-48 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Enablers
6-131. Scout platoons may employ joint fire observers if no JTAC/forward air
controller-airborne support is available. Scout platoons working forward and
independent of the troop may conduct emergency control of CAS missions in the
absence of JTAC/forward air controller-airborne or joint fire observers personnel.
Referred to as, ‘CAS by a nonqualified controller,’ non-JTAC controllers clearly state
to attacking aircraft that they are ‘non-JTAC qualified’ during aircraft check-in. (Refer
to ATP 3-09.32/MCRP 3-16.6A/NTTP 3-09.2/AFTTP 3-2.8, chapter 3 for additional
information on CAS coordination.)
Table 6-10. Close air support briefing (game plan and 9-line)
CAS Briefing (Game Plan and 9-Line)
Do not transmit line numbers. Units of measurement are standard unless briefed. Lines 4, 6, and
restrictions are mandatory read-back. Terminal controller may request additional read-back.
JTAC: “(Aircraft call sign), advise when ready for game plan.”
JTAC: “Type (1, 2, 3) control (method of attack, effects desired or ordnance, interval). Advise when
ready for 9-line.”
1. IP/BP: “________________________________________________________________”
2. Heading: “______________________________________________________________”
(degrees magnetic, initial point or battle position-to-target)
Offset: “________________________________________________________________”
(left of right, when requested)
3. Distance: “______________________________________________________________”
(initial point-to-target in nautical miles, battle position-to-target in meters)
4. Target elevation: “________________________________________________________”
(in feet, mean seal level)
5. Target description: “______________________________________________________”
6. Target location: “_________________________________________________________”
(latitude and longitude or grid coordinates, or offsets or visual)
7. Type mark / terminal guidance: “____________________________________________”
(description of mark;
if laser handoff, call sign of lasing platform and code)
8. Location of friendlies: “____________________________________________________”
(from target, cardinal direction and distance in meters)
9. Egress: “________________________________________________________________”
Remarks / *restrictions:
 Laser to target line (LTL) / point target line (PTL)
 Desired type and number of ordnance or weapons effect (if not previously coordinated).
 Surface-to-air threat, location, and type of suppression of enemy air defenses.
 Additional remarks (for example, gun-to-target line, weather, hazards, friendly marking.)
 Additional calls requested.
 *Final attack headings or attack direction.
 *Airspace coordination areas.
 *Danger close and initials (if applicable).
 *Time on target (TOT) / time to target (TTT).
Legend: CAS – close air support, JTAC – joint terminal attack controller, IP – initial position,
BP – battle position
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 6-49

Chapter 6
EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE DISPOSAL

6-132. Explosive ordnance disposal teams support scout platoons by detecting,
identifying, conducting on-site evaluation, rendering safe, exploiting, and achieving
final disposition of all explosive ordnance, including IED and weapons of mass
destruction. (See ATP 4-32 and ATP 4-32.3 for more information.) Explosive ordnance
disposal units support scout platoons conducting reconnaissance and security by
protecting the force. The principles for explosive ordnance disposal operations are in
ATP 4-32.
INTERPRETERS
6-133. Interpreters are valuable assets to assist in reconnaissance tasks when scout
platoons operate in close proximity to civilian populations. Early in the planning
process, the scout platoon leader should request an interpreter who is familiar with the
AO. Using an interpreter improves communication between the local population and the
scout platoon, helps improve information collection, and fosters acceptance of the scout
platoon within the particular AO. Interpreters often operate during searches, including
tasks at roadblocks and checkpoints. It is very important to use approved interpreters
when collecting or verifying information and take into consideration the security
clearance level of the interpreter.
6-134. The role of the interpreter is to pass and receive information in a contextually
correct manner in a designated language. The scout platoon leader must brief the
interpreter on expected duties. The scout platoon leader must also ensure they are in
control of conversations, not the interpreter.
6-50 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Chapter 7
Sustainment
Sustainment is the provision of logistics, personnel services, and

health service support necessary to maintain operations until
mission completion. Sustainment for the scout platoon is a
potentially challenging task due to the wide-ranging, low profile,
and at times, decentralized nature of their mission. The scout
platoon often operates well in front of maneuver forces while
conducting reconnaissance and security missions. Distance and the
need to keep sustainment tasks undetected by the threat hinder
resupply operations for the platoon.
Contents
Page
SECTION I. Basics of Sustainment 7-1
SECTION II. Sustainment Planning 7-6
SECTION III. Platoon Resupply Operations 7-13
SECTION IV. Maintenance 7-21
SECTION V. Medical Support 7-24
SECTION VI. Enemy Prisoners of War/Detainees 7-31
SECTION I – BASICS OF SUSTAINMENT

7-1. Every member of the scout platoon participates in sustainment activities.
Sustainment elements arm, fuel, fix, feed, and provide transportation and personnel for
the scout platoon. Sustainment creates unique planning and operational challenges, with
most of the responsibility falling to the platoon sergeant.
LEADERS RESPONSIBILITIES
7-2. Sustainment responsibilities for the scout platoon include reporting and
requesting support requirements through the troop and ensuring that they properly
execute sustainment operations when support elements arrive in the platoon’s AO. The
PSG is normally in charge of these functions with guidance and oversight provided by
the platoon leader. The PSG must track and submit accurate personnel and logistical
reports, along with other necessary information and requests.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-1

Chapter 7
PLATOON LEADER
7-3. The scout platoon leader is responsible for the platoon’s execution of the platoon’s
sustainment plan. The platoon leader is responsible for the development of the platoon
sustainment plan, the readiness of the platoon, and everything in between. The platoon
leader receives assistance from the experienced NCOs of the platoon, but is overall
responsible for the maintenance, sustainment, and medical plans and requisite training,
which starts upon taking over a platoon. Operator qualifications, maintenance, and
lifesaving training which all falls under sustainment is something that the platoon leader
needs to address as soon as they are given the responsibilities of leading a platoon.
Proper and adequate training are necessary for the platoon members to operate platoon
equipment and to hold designated platoon duties such as CLSs, vehicle recovery
specialists, and drivers and it is the responsibility of both the platoon leader and
subordinate leaders to ensure that the platoon members meet all training requirements
for the positions in which they fill.
7-4. The platoon leader is overall responsible for the platoon sustainment, but the
platoon leader directs subordinate leaders to accomplish all maintenance, sustainment,
and MEDEVAC aspects. The platoon leader develops the platoon sustainment plan,
addressed later in this chapter, but the platoon leader delegates certain functions to
subordinate leaders. The platoon leader cannot delegate responsibility so the platoon
leader maintains an active role in all sustainment functions.
7-5. Maintenance is vital to the platoon, and the platoon leader ensures that all platoon
vehicles, weapon systems, and equipment such as radio’s, night vision devices, and
optics, are combat ready at all times. The platoon leader ensures tracking, managing,
and repairing of all broken equipment even when conducted by higher-level
maintenance. The platoon leader and platoon’s noncommissioned officers are present,
provide leadership, supervise, and assist maintenance operations during dedicated
maintenance times. The platoon leader ensures the platoon does preventive maintenance
on all equipment in accordance with the equipment’s technical manual. The platoon
leader gathers all the platoon’s DA Form 5988-Es (Equipment Maintenance and
Inspection Worksheets) or DA Form 2404s (Equipment Inspection and Maintenance
Worksheets) to track and address all deficiencies.
7-6. The platoon leader knows the status of the current platoon maintenance activities,
including corrective actions for equipment faults, maintenance work orders, and
requisition of repair parts. The platoon leader always keeps the commander and XO
informed of the scout platoon’s maintenance status. The platoon leader is responsible
for checking all personnel with active operator’s licenses can operate their equipment.
7-7. Sustainment is vitally important for the platoon as the scout platoon operates as
far forward on the battlefield as possible, and relies on internal supplies for sustainment.
The platoon leader knows the current logistic status of the platoon, additionally, how
quickly their platoon consumes or expends each resource (water, fuel, ammunition, and
subsistence). The platoon leader receives the logistics status report from the PSG, and
provides it to the platoon XO or troop commander when necessary. The platoon leader
leads the platoon sustainment rehearsal with the assistance of the PSG.
7-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
PLATOON SERGEANT
7-8. The PSG is the scout platoon’s primary sustainment planner, coordinator, and
operator; reporting directly to the scout platoon leader. The PSG executes the scout
platoon’s logistical plan, relying heavily on platoon and troop SOPs. The PSG directly
supervises and controls the platoon’s assets. During preparations for the mission, the
PSG works closely with the platoon leader and section leaders to determine specific
sustainment requirements to support the tactical plan. The PSG advises the platoon
leader as they develop the sustainment paragraph of the platoon OPORD. The PSG then
ensures proper arrangements occur to meet are made to provide those sustainment
requirements.
7-9. During missions, the PSG’s first priority is assisting the platoon leader with the
conduct of the mission. The PSG maintains accountability of the platoon’s sustainment
uses and requirements during mission execution. The PSG gathers reports from squad
teams, squads, and section leaders, and coordinates sustainment requirements directly
with the troop 1SG and XO.
7-10. The PSG is as important in the platoon’s maintenance readiness as the platoon
leader. The PSG supervises the platoon’s operators during PMCS on weapons,
equipment, and vehicles, and shares the maintenance status with maintenance personnel,
and other troop leadership. The PSG is the person with the most experience in platoon
operations as they relate to maintenance and is the platoon’s subject matter expert on all
maintenance related subjects. The PSG coordinates with the appropriate personnel at all
friction points to ensure all of the platoon’s equipment is operational. If there is a
communications issue then the PSG works with battalion or brigade signal staff officer
for repairs, if there is an issue with ordered parts being taken off the DA Form 5988-E
then they coordinate with the XO and maintenance personnel. The PSG has the
experience and knowledge to improve the operational readiness of the platoon.
7-11. The PSG is the medical coordinator for the platoon. When needed, the PSG
establishes and maintains the platoon CCPs and controls casualty and MEDEVAC
requests for the platoon. The PSG transports the platoon medic and coordinates with the
troop headquarters for additional medical assets. The PSG bears the responsibility for
collecting, identifying, and transferring all human remains to the mortuary collection
point. The PSG advises the platoon leader about the medical portion of all missions, and
assists in establishing a well thought-out and effective MEDEVAC/CASEVAC plan that
includes—
 Planning:
 Determines the location of the scout platoon’s resupply points during
mission execution.
 Conducts close coordination with the troop 1SG and XO for planning and
resourcing the scout platoon’s missions.
 Maintains the scout platoon’s manning roster and crew rosters.
 Maintenance:
 Informs the scout platoon leader of the platoon’s maintenance and
logistics status.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-3

Chapter 7

Directs and supervises maintenance of the platoon’s equipment, vehicles,
and weapon systems.
 Collects reports of the scout platoon’s maintenance status in the field and
sends the appropriate consolidated reports to maintenance personnel.
 Medical:
 Directs and supervises treatment and evacuation of casualties.
 Identifies and establishes platoon CCPs during combat missions.
7-12. Sustainment: Before, during, and after missions, the PSG tracks changes in
consumption of the classes of supplies for the platoon and reports those changes to the
XO or 1SG. The PSG monitors the platoon member’s actions during resupply operations
and ensures that everyone in the platoon understands actions at the resupply point. The
PSG’s crew meets the troop LOGPAC at the designated LRP and then guides the platoon
level sustainment operation. The PSG oversees and directs crews to cross-level supplies
and equipment throughout the platoon and does the following:
 Tracks changes in consumption of class I (Subsistence), class III (Fuel),
class IX (Repair Parts) and expenditure rates of class V (Ammunition);
reports the logistical status report to the XO or 1SG.
 Monitors actions during resupply operations and ensures each squad or
section leader understands actions at the resupply point.
 Ensures vehicles receive adequate fuel in the field and stay topped off in
garrison.
 Ensures the scout platoon executes the troop’s sustainment operations
according to the sustainment plan.
 Assists the platoon leader in leading a platoon level sustainment rehearsal
with squad and section leadership present.
 Meets the LOGPAC at the designated LRP and guides platoon level
sustainment operations.
 Cross-levels supplies and equipment throughout the platoon.
SECTION LEADERS
7-13. Section leaders are responsible for overseeing that all members of their section
understand the scout platoon’s sustainment plan. Section leaders provide the direct
guidance and supervision down to the lowest level and play an integral role in all
sustainment tasks.
7-14. Section leaders provide the required oversight needed when operators are
conducting PMCS, and ensure that dispatch records are accurate, and turned in on time.
For sustainment, section leaders compile personnel and logistic reports from the section
and submit them to the PSG. Section leaders make sure everything is accurate and turned
in according to the platoon tactical SOP. The section leaders obtain supplies, equipment,
and mail from the PSG and ensure proper distribution within the section. They transfer
and cross-level equipment and supplies when required, and provide direct guidance
during platoon resupply operations. Additionally, section leaders correct hygiene
deficiencies and monitor the health and welfare of the members of their section.
7-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
SUSTAINMENT FUNCTIONS
7-15. Sustainment involves the interrelated functions of conducting logistics, providing
personnel services, and providing health service support. (See table 7-1.) Logistics
determines the depth and duration of troop operations and is essential to retaining and
exploiting the initiative.
Table 7-1. Sustainment functions

Sustainment Functions
Logistics Personnel Services Army Medical Department
Human resources Organic and area medical
Maintenance
support support
Hospitalization (including
chemical, biological,
Transportation Financial management
radiological and nuclear
patients)
Supply Legal support Dental treatment
Behavioral health and
Field services Religious support
neuropsychiatric treatment
Distribution Band support Clinical laboratory services
Medical evacuation
Operational contract
(including en route care
support
and medical regulating)
General engineering Medical logistics (including
support blood and blood products)
CLASSES OF SUPPLY
7-16. There are ten classes of supply. Each class has a major impact on the scout
platoon’s ability to accomplish its mission. The PSG obtains supplies and delivers them
to the scout platoon based upon the established priorities for delivery set by the platoon
leader. Combat operations demand class I, III, V, and IX supplies and equipment take
priority because they are the most critical to the scout platoon during reconnaissance
and security missions. (See table 7-2, on page 7-6 for the classes of supply.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-5

Chapter 7
Table 7-2. Classes of supply

Class I Rations and gratuitous issue of health, morale, and welfare items
such as water and ice.
Class II Clothing, individual equipment, tool sets, administrative and
housekeeping supplies and equipment, and chemical, biological,
radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) equipment.
Class III Petroleum (bulk and packaged), oils, and lubricants
Class IV Construction fortification and barrier, engineering materials such
as pickets, sandbags, and concertina wire.
Class V Ammunition, including mines and explosives.
Class VI Personal-demand items, which include candy, soaps, and
cameras.
Class VII Major end items, such as vehicles and radio sets.
Class VIII Medical, including medical-peculiar repair parts supplied through
the squadron/battalion medical platoon.
Class IX Repair parts and components for equipment maintenance,
including documents required for equipment maintenance tasks.
Class X Nonstandard items to support nonmilitary programs such
agriculture and economic development.
Miscellaneous. Anything that does not fall into one of the existing classes of
supply.
SECTION II – SUSTAINMENT PLANNING

7-17. Platoon leaders fully integrate sustainment planning into all operational planning.
The troop SOP should be the basis for sustainment operations, with planning conducted
to determine specific requirements and to prepare for contingencies. The platoon
OPORD should address specific sustainment matters of the mission. Address deviations
from the sustainment SOP early in the planning process. In some situations, sustainment
planning begins before receipt of the mission, as part of the ongoing process of refining
the sustainment plan.
SUSTAINMENT PLANNING FACTORS

7-18. Planning for sustainment is primarily a troop and squadron-level task. While the
troop commander and XO plan the task, the scout platoon leader and PSG are
responsible for the execution of the plan. Concurrent with higher level planning, the
scout platoon must plan, prepare, and execute its portion of the sustainment plan. The
platoon leadership develops and refines their sustainment plan during the TLP process.
7-19. Maneuver battalion scout platoons coordinate directly with the battalion S-4,
headquarters and headquarters company commander, and forward support company.
Battalion staffs conduct the majority of battalion scout platoons planning and anticipate
and coordinate directly with the platoon leader and PSG.
7-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
7-20. The scout platoon leader develops the sustainment plan by determining exactly
what they have on hand to accurately estimate their support requirements. It is critical
for the troop to know what critical supplies the platoon has on hand. This process is
important not only in confirming the validity of the sustainment plan but also in ensuring
the platoon’s support requests are submitted as early as possible. The platoon leader can
formulate the sustainment execution plan and submit support requests based on the
results of the maneuver plan.
7-21. The sustainment plan provides answers to the operational questions that are
identified during platoon mission analysis. Leaders should develop questions in relation
to mission requirements, the threat, terrain and weather, time and location, and other
considerations.
MISSION REQUIREMENTS
7-22. When conducting sustainment planning, the platoon leader and subordinate
leaders need to address mission requirements. Reconnaissance requirements may vary
from security requirements, so leaders address additional classes of supply they require
outside of the basic load. Platoon leadership should forecast their status on the classes
of supply and figure out if an emergency resupply of class III and V may be necessary
during the mission. While planning for mission requirements, the platoon leadership
identifies locations to possibly place prestocked supplies. The platoon analyzes
attachments and their requirements and whether they may need additional supplies for
the attachments. Finally, the platoon will have to determine if the developed sustainment
plan is nested with, and will support the tactical plan. Adequate tracking and especially
reporting to higher headquarters is essential in staff planning and forecasting.
THREAT
7-23. While conducting sustainment planning, the platoon leader determines the current
enemy situation and future enemy activity, enemy capabilities, and how threat contact
affects sustainment resupply during the mission. The platoon leader determines if
planned LOGPACs need additional security due to expected enemy actions. The platoon
leader determines expected enemy contact, and plans CASEVAC/MEDEVAC and
sustainment that addresses the enemy.
TERRAIN AND WEATHER

7-24. Terrain and weather can have a significant impact on sustainment planning for the
scout platoon. When conducting sustainment planning the platoon leader assesses the
terrain to determine locations that provide the best security and feasibility for the trains,
maintenance collection points, and CCP. The platoon leader identifies CASEVAC
routes, and routes for the evacuation of contaminated personnel and equipment. Platoon
leaders consider weather effects on operations during sustainment planning. Weather
may increase or decrease sustainment requirements. Heat will increase water
consumption, but cold can increase calorie intake.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-7

Chapter 7
TIME AND LOCATION

7-25. When conducting sustainment planning, one important factors of the plan is time
and location. The platoon leadership determines when and where resupply will be
required. They have to ensure that their methods and techniques nest with troops
resupply plans. Leadership estimates to determine if their vehicles and personnel have
the required resources available to accomplish the mission, and receive sustainment at
the dates prescribed. The platoon leadership addresses resupply of mounted and
dismounted positions, using the best techniques.
OTHER PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

7-26. Detainees. During protection planning, the platoon needs to develop a plan for
detainees. Detainee planning is later in this chapter, but the platoon needs to know how
to secure detainees, what the platoon detainee plan is, identify detainee collection points,
and plans to transfer detainees as transportation becomes available.
PRIORITY OF SUPPORT
7-27. Sometimes the platoon leadership designates who is priority to receive
sustainment. One section or observation post takes priority over others.
FORECASTING LOGISTICS
7-28. Mission essential items and supplies make, or possibly break, a reconnaissance
and security mission. Sustainment is an extremely important task platoon leadership
needs to focus on, always. Accurately forecasting logistic requirements for the scout
platoon is crucial to the success or failure of a mission. Scouts operating in a hot and
humid environment need extra water. Vehicles that operate in a dry desert climate, for
instance, will burn through oils and other class III products. Weapons need cleaning and
maintaining at an increased rate.
7-29. Forecasting required logistic items is a fairly simple task, as long as the platoon
leadership remains active, and aware of historical platoon usage, and needs. While
performing mission analysis the platoon leadership will ask themselves, what supplies
they have on hand, what are they going to be doing, and what supplies do they need.
Leaders then have to go out and acquire the resources. If the platoon plans to send out
more dismounted observation posts than usual, then anticipate burning through more
batteries, water, and meal, ready to eat than they typically would during a mounted
reconnaissance mission. The following class of supply discussion highlights only the
most common for the scout platoon.
CLASS I (SUBSISTENCE)
7-30. Class I is one of the most important supplies in regards to sustainment planning
for a scout platoon. Forecast class I based on the amount of scouts and attachments
operating within the scout platoon. Meals and water consumption will provide the scout
platoon the nutrients and hydration needed during reconnaissance and security.
7-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
7-31. Plan meals while understanding the troop and squadron feeding cycle. Meal, ready
to eat is available to the scout platoon when there are no heat and serve meal options
available. Water is a resource that all leaders carefully watch and maintain in abundance,
during all missions. Mission requirements and environmental factors always alter water
consumption within a platoon. Tables 7-3 and 7-4, on page 7-10, are estimates for class
I (water consumption) that the scout platoon can use to provide forecasting assistance in
planning reconnaissance and security.
Table 7-3. Water consumption chart
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-9

Chapter 7
Table 7-4. Daily environmental water consumption chart in gallons per

person
Use Temperate Tropical Arid Arctic
Drinking water 1.5 3.0 3.0 2.0
Personal hygiene 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
Field feeding 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
Heat injury treatment .1 .2 .2 .1
Vehicle maintenance .2
Standard planning factor 6.1 7.7 7.9 6.6
CLASS III (PETROLEUM, OILS, AND LUBRICANTS)

7-32. The scout platoon relies heavily on their vehicle platforms to retain freedom of
maneuver. They use the advanced sight and optics systems to see and report. Scouts rely
on the protection of their vehicles protective armor. Although vehicles are great to use,
they require substantial amounts of class III to operate. Scout platoon leaders have the
added responsibility to plan and forecast required class III so they meet their objectives.
Table 7-5 assist the scout platoon leadership in understanding their vehicles burn rate,
and can identify the need to bring more class III in fuel cans on their vehicles, or plan
sustainment operations during the mission.
Table 7-5. Scout platoon vehicle burn rates

Cross- Road
Fuel Capacity
Vehicle Idle (Gal/Hr) Country Primary/Secondary
(Gallons)
(Gal/Hr) (Gal/Hr)
M2/3 BFV 175 1.70 19.11 21.96/21.57
STRYKER 56 1.23 7.66 4.07/4.60
HMMWV
26 1.29 4.53 2.64/2.87
(Armored)
M1 ABRAMS 436 12.80 61.90 59.12/58.28
LMTV 52 1.02 7.05 2.82/3.34
Legend: BFV – Bradley fighting vehicle, Gal – gallon, HMMWV – high mobility multipurpose
wheeled vehicle, Hr – hour, LMTV – light medium tactical vehicle
7-33. Although the following table is only an estimate that assists in planning, the scout
platoon can use an equation to figure out their fuel consumption prior the start of a
mission. If a scout platoon leader is operating six M2A3 Bradley fighting vehicles for a
zone reconnaissance mission followed by establishing a screen, for roughly a 24-hour
period then they would calculate the following formula.
7-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
Scout Platoon Vehicle Burn Equation

Zone recon followed by screen mission (24 hr period)
Zone recon (8 hrs): 6 BFV x 19.11 (cross country) x 8 (hrs) = 917.28
gals
Screen mission (16hrs): 6 BFV x 1.70 (idle) x 16 (hrs) = 163.2 gals
24hr period= 917.28 + 163.2= 1080.48 gals of fuel (estimated to be
used)
Each vehicle will use 1080.48 / 6 BFV = 180.08 gals per vehicle
If the platoon carries an additional 20 gals of fuel and uses silent
watch when they are established on the screen, they could go
24 hrs without a class III resupply.
Legend: BFV – Bradley fighting vehicle, gal – gallons, hr – hour,
hrs – hours
CLASS V (AMMUNITION)
7-34. Scout platoons forecast, request, and carry as much ammunition as they can,
depending on their mission. There is no one size fits all unit basic load issued for combat
operations, each mission receives a unit basic load determined by squadron and brigade
planners, and requested through the Total Ammunition Management Information
System, approved by the S-4.
7-35. The scout platoon receives their class V from the squadron and requests additional
class V throughout the mission. Enemy capabilities drive the scout platoon to anticipate
more. Vehicles carry distributed ammunition and the crew secures it appropriately.
BASIC AND COMBAT LOADS

7-36. Prior to any mission, platoon members ensure they have all appropriate supplies.
Accomplish these tasks at the lowest level and verify by PSG and platoon leader during
PCIs. Throughout the mission, the PSG ensures basic loads are replenished. (See
ATP 4 -35 for more information.)
7-37. The basic load is the quantity of supplies required on hand, and which a unit or
formation can move. It is expressed according to the wartime organization of the unit or
formation and maintained at the prescribed levels.
7-38. The combat load is the minimum mission-essential equipment and supplies,
determined by the platoon leader responsible for carrying out the mission, required for
scouts to fight and survive immediate combat operations. Base the combat load on
mission requirements and further dictated by the platoon leader.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-11

Chapter 7
LOAD PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

7-39. Vehicle load plans should be standardized amongst every vehicle type in the
platoon. Not every vehicle is going to have the same equipment, but each vehicle load
plan needs to match, or be as similar to each other as possible. Standardized load plans
are done so in the event of an emergency all crewmembers will know where all the
platoon equipment is stored and located in each vehicle. If a dismount needs to grab a
CLSs bag out of a vehicle then they should be able to run to any vehicle to grab the bag
and know its location. Pack items in reverse order of use. The most essential items
should be the last thing loaded. Standardized load plans are put into platoon tactical
SOPs, and verified during PCC and PCI.
7-40. Preparing a military vehicle for combat operations is one of the most tedious,
tiresome, and laboring tasks for the crewmembers. Each piece of vehicle and platoon
equipment has to be stored appropriately. Ammunition needs to be placed within reach
of vehicle crewmembers, maintenance equipment and tools have to be available for the
driver, recovery equipment will be required during missions, and all this equipment will
have to be readily available. Water and fuel cans are placed outside of the vehicle but
are separated from each other. Grenades will have to be stored in a location that they
could be used, but in a position where they can be grabbed without being “set off.”
Javelins have to be placed somewhere in the vehicle where a crewmember could grab
quickly while dismounting to react to an armored threat. These are all examples of why
load planning considerations are so important for reconnaissance and security mission
preparation.
SUSTAINMENT OVERLAY
7-41. The key to understanding the scout platoon’s sustainment plan is the development
and distribution of sustainment overlay. The sustainment overlay should include current
and proposed train’s locations with LRPs, CCP including the marking methods, MCP,
helicopter LZ, ambulance exchange point, and any friendly sustainment locations such
as forward operating bases, or combat outposts. See ADP 1-02 for control measures
necessary for the overlay. When developing paragraph 4 of the OPORD, the platoon
leader should include the following areas, not all inclusive:
 Orientation. Orient all scouts to the sustainment overlay.
 Maintenance. Include all equipment, maintenance control points, and
procedures such as utilizing and exchange of the DA Form 5988-E and
DA Form 2404.
 Transportation. What is the current transportation plan, order of march with
timeline to line up and be ready condition 1 (known as REDCON), bump
plans, and recovery assets/plan?
 Supply. List specifics of who is carrying what by class of supply. For
example, each Soldier will have a three day supply of class 1.
 Personnel services. Include who is responsible for detainee processing and
locations for detainee collection areas.
7-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
 Medical. Include locations of established treatment facilities, preventive

medicine, evacuation procedures, and responsibilities.
SUSTAINMENT REPORTING
7-42. The resupply of the scout platoon and the reporting of their status should be in
accordance with the troop SOP; however, this should not limit the scout platoon from
reporting or requesting supplies, as needed. Request supply needs typically through the
appropriate yellow or red reports by voice or digital means. The PSG submits these
reports by voice or digital communications based on the timeline in the troop SOP or
immediately following enemy contact or a major loss of supplies. See appendix A for
all standardized report formats.
SECTION III – PLATOON RESUPPLY OPERATIONS

7-43. Scout platoons use a large amount of equipment, operate as far forward on the
battlefield as possible, and require frequent and substantial amounts of supplies to
accomplish their assigned missions. Leaders at all levels report their classes of supplies
which allow leaders to anticipate expenditures and plan for resupply operations
throughout an expected mission. There are planned and emergency resupply methods
that the squadron uses to bring in LOGPACs and supplies. Troop 1SGs use a technique
(service station, tailgate, or combination of both) to get supplies to the scout platoon.
RESUPPLY METHODS
7-44. Resupply operations fall into one of two methods of resupply: planned and
emergency. Examples of planned resupply include LOGPACs, caches, modular system
exchange (like flat-rack exchange), or pre-positioned supplies. Emergency resupply is
not a planned method of resupply, but made available when a unit uses more supplies
than expected. The troop and platoon SOPs should specify cues and procedures for each
method. The platoon rehearses resupply operations during platoon training exercises.
The actual method selected for resupply in the field depends on the mission variables of
METT-TC.
EMERGENCY RESUPPLY
7-45. Emergency resupply, commonly referred to as immediate resupply, normally
involves fuel and ammunition, and executed when the scout platoon has such an urgent
need for resupply and they cannot wait for routine LOGPAC. Conduct at the section and
platoon level by redistributing ammunition between vehicles/squads to cross-level
loads.
7-46. The PSG reports the need for emergency resupply to the 1SG who relays the
request to the squadron S-4. The unit’s combat trains maintain a small load of class III
and V for these situations. The S-4 coordinates a linkup between the combat trains and
the troop 1SG. The troop 1SG designates a LOGPAC site and provides guidance on
what technique (tailgate, service station, or combination) the scout platoon will use.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-13

Chapter 7
Note. Use emergency resupply only when the scout platoon expended more
class III and class V than planned and should not become a routine substitute due
to poor skills.
PLANNED RESUPPLY
7-47. The LOGPAC is a simple and efficient method to accomplish routine resupply
operations. These operations include regular resupply of items in classes I, III, V, and
IX and any other items requested by the platoon and troop. The squadron staff plans
LOGPAC at their level and conducts sustainment operations at every opportunity. The
LOGPAC comprises troop and squadron assets that transport supplies to the troop, and
the troop distribute supplies to the scout platoon.
7-48. The tactical situation dictates which technique of resupply the troop and scout
platoon uses. The situation also dictates when to conduct resupply. Generally, the scout
platoon should attempt to avoid resupply during the execution of reconnaissance
missions and plan to resupply during mission transitions.
RESUPPLY PROCEDURES
7-49. Scout platoons must conduct resupply as quickly and efficiently as possible to
ensure operational effectiveness and to allow the Cavalry troop LOGPAC to return to
the logistics RP on time. In most cases, the troop 1SG will only have about two hours to
conduct sustainment operations, so efficiency at the resupply point is important. Once
the scout platoon completes resupply operations, the troop 1SG prepares the LOGPAC
vehicles for the return trip.
RESUPPLY SITE SELECTION

7-50. The troop 1SG carefully chooses the logistics RP site to provide responsive
support for the troop, to support the movement of wheeled resupply vehicles, and to
limit exposure to enemy fires. The 1SG may task the scout platoon to conduct the on-
ground reconnaissance of the resupply site. The 1SG or scout platoon ensures the
LOGPAC site meets the following criteria:
 Provides excellent cover and concealment.
 Reduces the platoon’s thermal signature.
 Offers adequate dispersion for vehicles.
 Provides level terrain to allow refueling.
 Allows proximity to the scout platoon positions (3 to 8 km behind the forward
line of own troops and the center of the AO).
 Offers a road or trail network to support the wheeled resupply vehicles and
heaviest troop vehicles.
7-14 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
RESUPPLY TECHNIQUES
7-51. Resupply techniques are how the troop gets supplies to maintain their combat
power. There are two techniques scout platoons utilize to conduct resupply operations:
tailgate and service station. Certain situations may call for a portion of the scout platoon
to receive resupply by one technique, and another portion to receive resupply by a
different technique. Resupply operations are done in conjunction with the task and the
mission variables of METT-TC.
7-52. Scout platoons may use the tailgate technique while they are in static positions
such as a screen or an assembly area. The 1SG may use unit or support personnel and
vehicles to go to each scout platoon position to conduct resupply. The scout platoon can
remains in position when using this technique and reconnaissance vehicles require little
or no movement. The PSG ensures each position conducts resupply. If supply vehicles
are unable to move near the scout platoon due to enemy fire or observation, the PSG
may have to assist the resupply personnel in moving the supplies and equipment
forward. Tailgate resupply technique is very time-consuming and requires an adequate
road network for the wheeled supply vehicles to reach each scout vehicle’s position.
(See figure 7-1, page 7-16.)
7-53. The following procedures will take place during the tailgate resupply technique:
 Scout vehicles remain in place. Petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL) and
ammunition trucks travel around the assembly area, or in the most feasible
order to each vehicle position and conduct resupply.
 Crewmembers rotate quickly through the feeding area and pick up supplies,
water, and mail. The scout platoon maintains security throughout the resupply
process.
 The PSG coordinates with the 1SG for the pick-up of Soldiers killed in action
(KIA), and their personal effects.
 PSG ensures KIA casualties are brought to a mortuary affairs collection point.
 Ambulances pick up, treat, and evacuate seriously wounded in action
Soldiers. All casualties are transported to the troop medical assets to receive
emergency medical treatment and disposition. Soldiers are either returned to
duty or evacuated to the next role of care for further treatment.
 Consolidate and secure. Troop trains transport detainees on a returning
supply vehicle.
 The unit armorer, communications technician, and supporting maintenance
personnel repairs known problems and spot check other equipment.
Dispatching of vehicles should occur according to the troop SOP.
 Mechanics can repair vehicles on site or evacuate vehicles to the MCP.
 The PSG monitors the resupply of the platoon.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-15

Chapter 7
Figure 7-1. Tailgate resupply technique
SERVICE STATION RESUPPLY TECHNIQUE

7-54. The service station resupply technique is inherently faster than the tailgate
technique but can create security problems due to movement and concentration. During
screening missions, the scout platoon must be careful not to compromise the location of
the observation posts. Units typically use this technique during mission transition.
7-55. Resupply for individual scout platoons or sections happen at the LOGPAC while
the remainder of the troop stays in position. The 1SG sets up the LOGPAC as shown in
figure 7-2. Platoon vehicles complete with resupply and Soldiers from the trains not
assisting in resupply operations provide LOGPAC security.
7-56. The following procedures take place during the service station resupply:
 The PSGs supervise the operation and coordinate with the 1SG for any
special requirements.
 Scout platoon’s platoon leader or PSG designates certain vehicles to rotate
through the LOGPAC at a designated location and follow the one-way traffic
flow.
7-16 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
 Transport Soldiers needing medical attention to combat medics for treatment,

or are prepared for further evacuation to the next level of care.
 The vehicle transporting KIA moves to the mortuary affairs holding area, out
of the view of scouts, and transfers the remains and personal effects.
 Vehicle commanders and section leaders make contact with the scout platoon
leader for orders, logistic status, and SITREP.
 Vehicles requiring maintenance support move to the maintenance area.
 The troop armorer, communications technician, and supporting maintenance
personnel repairs known problems and spot check other vehicles.
 When the platoon or section resupplies completely they move back to their
designated position.
Figure 7-2. Service station resupply technique
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-17

Chapter 7
Note. The platoon order should state the sequence for moving squads, sections,
or Soldiers from positions. Troops may vary the technique by establishing a
resupply point for each scout platoon or squad and moving the supplies to that
point.
COMBINATION OF SERVICE STATION AND TAILGATE RESUPPLY

7-57. The scout platoon leader can vary the specifics of the two basic techniques or use
them in combination. For example, the platoon could use the tailgate technique during
a screening mission for the observation posts and use the service station technique for
the observation posts in-depth. (See figure 7-3.)
7-58. The scout squads rotate individually to eat, pick up mail and sundries, and refill
or exchange water cans. When all platoon vehicles and squads complete resupply, they
move to a holding area and establish security.
7-18 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
Figure 7-3. Combination of tailgate and service station resupply
PREPOSITIONED RESUPPLY OR CACHE

7-59. At times, the scout platoon will need prestocked supplies. These are also known
as pre-positioned or “cached” resupply. Normally, the platoon only pre-positions
classes IV and V items, but can also pre-position class III supplies. When the platoon
conducts this type of resupply, the platoon leader directs the platoon sergeant to rotate
vehicles or squads or sections through prestock positions based on the enemy situation
and shortages within the platoon. Security requires planning to prevent enemy dismounts
from destroying or sabotaging prestocked supplies.
7-60. The scout platoon must carefully plan and execute pre-stock requirements and
every scout must know the exact locations of prestock sites. During reconnaissance or
rehearsals, platoons verify cached locations and ensure the survivability of the
prestocked supplies. These measures include selecting covered and concealed positions
and digging in the prestock positions. The plan should include a grid to the location of
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-19

Chapter 7
the sites and have a removal and destruction plan to prevent the enemy from capturing
pre-positioned supplies.
AERIAL RESUPPLY
7-61. Helicopters and fixed wing assets can be a vital lifeline when scouts are forced to
operate forward of friendly lines for extended periods. Aerial assets are useful in
resupplying dismounted scouts manning observation posts in restricted terrain. This
option is not always available due to availability of aircraft or degraded weather
conditions. Careful choice of resupply routes, LZ, and drop zones help minimize the risk
of signature to the resupply aircraft.
LOGISTICS PACKAGE SURVIVABILITY

7-62. The very nature of an ambush—a surprise attack from a concealed position—
places the unit conducting the LOGPAC at a disadvantage. Combat situations often
prevent a convoy from taking all the measures necessary to avoid being ambushed;
therefore, it takes all possible measures to reduce its vulnerability. These are generally
passive measures, supplemented by active measures, taken to defeat or escape from an
ambush.
7-63. No single defensive measure, or combination of measures, prevents or effectively
counters all ambushes or IED detonations. The effectiveness of counter ambush
measures relates directly to the state of Soldiers’ training and the ability of their leaders.
ACTIONS TO AVOID AN AMBUSH

7-64. Crews need to take actions to avoid possible ambush from the enemy.
Crewmembers, leaders, and Soldiers always maintain vigilant observation of the route
ahead of the convoy to detect anything suspicious. Crewmembers need to observe
indicators of a potential ambush. Leaders will conduct a map, ground, and aerial
reconnaissance of a route, and also select the best convoy route available. The platoon
leader will receive an updated enemy SITREP of a route from the S-2 prior to the
mission, and they use OPSEC to deny the enemy threat foreknowledge of the convoy.
Convoy vehicles need to present a formidable target, and take actions which reduce the
effectiveness of an ambush.
PRESENT A FORMIDABLE TARGET

7-65. Convoy vehicles present a formidable target by keeping all convoy crew-served
weapons manned at all times. The enemy often chooses to avoid an ambush when the
convoy is actively scanning, prepared to react to enemy actions. Turrets need to be
actively moving, and providing direct fire weapon coverage at all times. Crewmembers
will remain alert, and gunners will remain in an aggressive posture during convoy
movements. Convoy leaders never routinely schedule convoys by time or route.
7-20 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
REDUCE EFFECTIVENESS OF AN AMBUSH

7-66. Convoys are always vulnerable and present the enemy with an opportunity to
disrupt logistics to an element so the enemy will ambush logistic convoys. Leaders and
Soldiers need to harden vehicles using sandbags emplaced throughout the floorboards of
vehicles, fabricated armor add-ons welded over existing armor, and add enhanced
ballistic glass enclosures for the gunner. Crews cover their loads with available tarps and
covers. Place vehicles throughout the convoy based on tactical cross load, and separate
vulnerable vehicles. Designate assistant drivers to reduce fatigue, and provide relief and
aid if driver is injured during an ambush. Rehearse the following drills prior to all convoy
movements:
 Down driver and gunner drill.
 React to contact (direct, indirect, and IED).
 Fire and evacuation drills.
 Vehicle rollover drill.
 Grenade-in vehicle drill.
SECTION IV – MAINTENANCE
7-67. The purpose of the Army maintenance system is to generate/regenerate combat
power and preserve the equipment to enable mission accomplishment. Maintenance of
scout platoon weapons and equipment is continuous. Every scout needs to know how to
properly conduct maintenance according to the technical manual for all platoon
equipment.
LEVELS OF MAINTENANCE
7-68. Maintenance includes inspecting, testing, servicing, repairing, requisitioning,
recovering, and evacuating vehicles and equipment. Maintenance at the scout platoon
level comprises thorough preventive maintenance checks, and services, and accurate
reporting of maintenance problems to the troop.
7-69. There are two levels of Army maintenance—sustainment maintenance and field
maintenance. Field maintenance primarily replaces parts on the user’s system and
sustainment maintenance repairs components off the user’s platform.
FIELD MAINTENANCE
7-70. Field maintenance is an on-system maintenance mainly involving preventive
maintenance and replacement of defective parts. The goal of field maintenance is to
repair and return equipment to the Soldier. It covers tasks previously assigned to
operator/crew, organization or unit, and direct support maintenance levels; and includes
some off-system maintenance critical to mission readiness.
7-71. Scout squad and section leaders are the platoon’s first-line maintenance
supervisors. The scout platoon’s maintenance status and combat readiness depends on
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-21

Chapter 7
their commitment to proper maintenance procedures. The squad and section leader
duties in this area include—
 Ensuring operators fill out and update DA Form 5988-E and
DA Form 2408-18 (Equipment Inspection List) according to
DA PAM 750-8.
 Training the squad and section in proper PMCS procedures.
 Ensuring the training and licensing for all crewmembers as drivers in
preparing for continuous operations. At a minimum, ensuring the assigned
vehicle driver or equipment operator is licensed.
 Installing repair parts upon receipt or store in authorized locations.
 Ensuring all tools and basic issue items are properly marked, stored,
maintained, and accounted for.
 Ensuring the operator always tops off the vehicle in the garrison and that the
vehicle receives as much fuel as possible, and at every opportunity in the
field.
 Constantly updating the PSG on the maintenance and logistics status of the
vehicles.
7-72. Operator maintenance includes the proper care, use, and maintenance of assigned
vehicles and crew equipment such as weapons, optics, CBRN equipment, and night
vision devices. The driver and other crewmembers perform daily PMCS such as
inspecting, servicing, tightening, lubricating, cleaning, preserving, and adjusting
vehicles and equipment. The driver and gunner are required to use a DA Form 5988-E
to record these checks and services, and all equipment faults that cannot be immediately
corrected. These reports are the primary means for reporting equipment faults through
the vehicle commander/section leader to the PSG, platoon leader, and ultimately to
organizational maintenance personnel. Checks and services prescribed for the
automotive system, weapon systems, and turret are divided into three groups—before-
mission, during mission, and after-mission.
WEAPONS MAINTENANCE
7-73. Platoon leadership provides time for platoon members to conduct weapons
maintenance. Environmental conditions will have serious effects on weapons and
platoon leadership will counter those effects by providing time to conduct maintenance
on weapons. Maintenance on weapons is the proper disassemble, cleaning, lubrication,
reassemble, and function checks on individual and crew weapons, according to the
weapons technical manual. Leadership has to also schedule time to reconfirm zeros on
sights, and to conduct weapon test fires prior to missions. Weapons cleaning, lubrication,
and zeroing are high on the priority of work lists established from the PSG and issued
to subordinate leaders. Maintenance of weapons will ensure proper and accurate firing
of weapons systems.
 Before-mission.
 During-mission.
 After-mission.
7-22 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
VEHICLE RECOVERY
7-74. Recovery is the process of freeing or retrieving immobile, inoperative, or
abandoned equipment from its current position and returning it to service or to a
maintenance site for repairs. These actions typically involve extracting, towing, lifting,
or winching. Limit towing usually to a field maintenance site or the nearest MCP.
7-75. Damaged and inoperable equipment on the battlefield can strain dedicated
recovery resources. Strategically place dedicated recovery assets in the AO to effectively
support battlefield recovery operations. Platoon leaders must emphasize the use of self
and like vehicle recovery methods to the greatest extent possible. These practices will
minimize the use of dedicated recovery assets for routine recovery missions.
WARNING
Recovery operations on the battlefield and in
general can be extremely hazardous. Conduct a
risk assessment and safety must remain a top
priority for each recovery mission. Proper
maintenance of recovery vehicles and
serviceability of authorized rigging and other
equipment is essential to ensure safe recovery
missions. Consider operational variables prior to
and during all recovery operations.
7-76. Prior to missions, the scout platoon leader and platoon sergeant should know what
the plan of action for repair and recovery of disabled equipment. This information is put
out during the OPORD and through subsequent rehearsals. It is critical that PCCs include
inspection of tow bars and extraction straps to ensure they are complete, and are rated for
the types of vehicles operating in and attached to the scout platoon. The platoon
leadership needs to know the location of the closest maintenance control point.
Depending on the level or the severity of battle damage, recovery is usually by the
following methods: self-recovery, like-vehicle recovery, dedicated-recovery, and
expedients.
SELF-RECOVERY
7-77. Self-recovery starts at the location where the equipment becomes mired or
disabled. The operator and crew use the basic issue items and additional authorized list
or on-vehicle equipment items to perform self-recovery. When the equipment has a
mechanical failure, the operator and crew will use the equipment’s technical manual to
perform troubleshooting procedures with the tools available in the basic issue items and
additional authorized list or on-vehicle equipment. When self-recovery fails, the
operator and crew can request assistance from available like vehicles.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-23

Chapter 7
LIKE-RECOVERY
7-78. Use like-vehicle recovery when self-vehicle recovery fails. The principle is to use
another piece of equipment “of the same weight class or heavier” to extract the mired,
disabled, or damaged equipment by using tow bars, chains, tow cables, and/or allied
kinetic energy recovery rope. When self-recovery and like-recovery are not practical or
are unavailable, put in a request to use dedicated recovery assets.
7-79. The most common form of self-recovery is recovery of like vehicle with a tow
bar. Before using a two bar (or any piece of recovery equipment), scouts answer the
following questions: Is the tow bar safe to use; does it have all the safety pins and clips?
Is the tow bar approved and have the capacity to tow the disabled vehicle? Is the towing
vehicle equal to or greater than the weight of the vehicle being towed? (If not do not
use).
DEDICATED RECOVERY
7-80. Dedicated recovery vehicles are specifically designed and equipped for
recovering other vehicles. Wheeled wreckers and tracked recovery vehicles are examples.
These are used when self-recovery or like-vehicle recovery is not possible because of the
severity of the situation, safety considerations, or the inability to use like-vehicle assets
employed in their primary mission. In general, wheel recovery systems recover wheeled
vehicles, and track recovery systems recover tracked vehicles. Requests from the PSG or
platoon leader for dedicated recovery systems located with the forward support company
go to the XO.
Note. Check the vehicle technical manual prior to recovery and towing
operations. Crewmembers need to check towing requirements such as disabling
of the transfer case, disengaging of final drives, and hooking up air lines.
SECTION V – MEDICAL SUPPORT

7-81. Army Health System support to maneuver forces is provided by organic medical
assets. The focus of the medical effort at the BCT-level and below is to rapidly locate,
acquire, treat, stabilize, and evacuate patients. The Army Health System is a component
of the Military Health System that is responsible for operational management of the
health service support and force health protection missions for training, predeployment,
deployment, and post deployment operations.
WOUNDED SCOUTS
7-82. The scout platoon’s operating distance away from its higher headquarters make
the treatment and evacuation of wounded scouts two of the most difficult tasks the scout
platoon execute. To ensure successful handling of wounded scouts, squadrons and
battalions must specifically allocate adequate assets to the scout platoon to assist in
7-24 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
evacuation. In addition, operational planning or SOPs must address evacuation

procedures in detail.
7-83. It is the squad leaders’ responsibility to ensure wounded scouts receive immediate
first aid and immediate tactical combat casualty care, in conjunction with self-aid,
buddy-aid, and CLS care performed by nonmedical personnel, and then immediately
notify the platoon leader or PSG of all casualties. The use of scouts trained as CLSs is
critical. As a minimum, one member of each scout squad must train as a CLS. If
wounded scouts require evacuation, the platoon leader or PSG can take one of the
following actions:
 Coordinate with the closest troop or company for ground evacuation.
 Request the troop or squadron/battalion to task organize a dedicated
ambulance to the scout platoon for operations forward of the larger element.
 Conduct self-evacuation with organic platoon assets.
 Coordinate for aerial evacuation through the troop/company or
squadron/battalion.
7-84. Aerial evacuation, if it is available, is preferred because of speed. The scouts
coordinate with their higher headquarters and then switch to the designated frequency
to coordinate directly with the MEDEVAC aircraft. They must pick a relatively flat,
open, and covered and concealed position for the aircraft’s LZ. The location should be
given to the aircraft by FM and marked with colored smoke as the aircraft approaches
the area. The scout platoon provides local security of the LZ until the evacuation is
complete.
MEDICAL EVACUATION
7-85. When possible, the medical platoon ambulances provide evacuation and en route
care from the scout’s point of injury or the troop’s CCP to the SAS. The ambulance team
supporting the mission makes coordination with the senior trauma specialist supporting
the platoons. In mass casualty situations, use nonmedical vehicles to assist in
CASEVAC as directed by the scout platoon leader. Include plans for nonmedical
vehicles performing CASEVAC in the unit tactical SOP.
GROUND EVACUATION REQUEST

7-86. The scout PSG requests a ground evacuation over troop net to the 1SG for—
 Soldiers not having life threating injuries.
 When time distance analysis shows that ground evacuation is faster.
 When air evacuation is not possible due to inclement weather or enemy
situation
AIR EVACUATION
7-87. Use aerial evacuation, if available and meeting mission criteria regarding stealth
because of speed. For evacuation by air, the scout platoon uses the standard 9-line air
evacuation request format (see figure 7-4, on page 7-27). The medical company
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-25

Chapter 7
prioritizes the request to determine if air evacuation is possible. In conducting the

evacuation operation, the scout PSG accomplishes the following tasks:
 Prepares and secures a suitable landing and pick up zone for the aircraft.
 Provides terminal guidance during the aircraft’s approach.
 Marks the helicopters LZ.
 Establishes security of the LZ and has casualties ready to load.
 Provides SITREP to troop command post on wheels down and wheels up
time.
7-88. Scouts coordinate with higher headquarters and then switch to the designated
frequency to coordinate directly with the MEDEVAC aircraft. They must pick a
relatively flat, open, terrain and masked by tree line or other intermediating terrain
feature for the aircraft’s LZ. Give the location to the aircraft by FM and once the air
crew requests smoke, mark with colored smoke as the aircraft approaches the area. The
air crew will call back with the proper color of the smoke. The scout platoon provides
local security of the LZ until the evacuation is complete.
MEDICAL EVACUATION REQUEST

7-89. Immediately following an attack and upon learning of a casualty within the
platoon the vehicle commander, squad or section leader, and PSG will start working up
a 9-line MEDEVAC request. Along with the standard 9-line MEDEVAC request format,
higher level care will request a mechanism of injury, injury type, signs, and treatment
(MIST) report, which should be provided by the platoon medic or combat life saver on
site. Figures 7-4 (front) and figure 7-5 (back) are a MEDEVAC request card that is
laminated and carried by every Soldier within the platoon.
7-26 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
Figure 7-4. Graphic training aid 08-01-004 (front)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-27

Chapter 7
Figure 7-5. Graphic training aid 08-01-004 (back) (continued)
MEDICAL TREATMENT
7-90. The combat medic, the physician, the physician assistant, or the health care
specialist in the squadron or battalion aid station provides medical treatment for scouts
after initial care. Tactical combat casualty care, also known as immediate far forward
care, includes lifesaving steps that do not require the knowledge and skills of a
physician.
FIRST RESPONSE
7-91. First response is the initial, essential, stabilizing medical care rendered to
wounded, injured, or ill Soldiers at the point of initial injury or illness. The first
responder is the first individual to reach a casualty and provide tactical combat casualty
care, such as self-aid, buddy-aid (first aid), or enhanced first aid (CLS). First aid for the
casualty includes (self-aid) or another individual (buddy-aid), while enhanced first aid
is provided by the CLS. The individual who has medical military occupational specialty
training is the combat medic (trauma specialist). They provide tactical combat casualty
care for life threatening trauma and stabilizes and prioritizes (triages) wounded for
evacuation to the SAS. At the SAS, wounded Soldiers receive advanced trauma
7-28 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
medicine by the clinicians assigned (the physician and physician’s assistant). Platoon
leaders and PSGs should incorporate tactical combat casualty care; self-aid and
buddy-aid training for all scout platoon members into all training activities. Self-aid and
buddy-aid is the first steps to saving a life and is trained to all members of the platoon.
The goal for every platoon is to have everyone within the platoon to attend CLS training.
COMBAT LIFESAVER
7-92. The CLS is a nonmedical Soldier trained to provide advanced first aid or
lifesaving procedures beyond the level of self-aid or buddy-aid. The CLS does not take
the place of medical personnel, but slows deterioration of a wounded Soldier’s condition
until treatment by medical personnel is possible. Each certified CLS has a CLS aid bag
PSGs ensure CLS keep their aid bag stocked and inspected by a combat medic.
Whenever possible, the troop platoon leader ensures there is at least one CLS in each
dismount team or vehicle. An emerging first responder program expands CLS trauma
treatment with increased emphasis on combat and away from training injuries.
7-93. CLSs are section members trained in enhanced first aid. They are the only medical
assets for the section until a medic or another more qualified medical person becomes
available. Because combat lifesaving is an organic capability, the platoon and troop
should make it a training priority.
7-94. The CLS ensures the section CLS bag is packed, all IVs are present, and litters
are properly packed, and identifies class VIII shortages to the platoon medic. They
participate in all casualty treatment and litter carry drills. The CLS must know the
location of the CCP and the tactical SOP for establishing them. They carry a laminated
quick reference 9-line MEDEVAC card.
MEDIC OR TRAUMA SPECIALIST

7-95. The platoon medic is the dedicated medical asset in the platoon. The medic is the
most experienced person in the platoon to provide medical treatment to a casualty, and
to provide recommendations to the platoon leadership for CASEVAC/MEDEVAC
planning. During combat planning and preparation, they inspect platoon CLS bags,
verify that IVs are placed in litters, and fill class VIII shortages. The platoon medic
recommends the location for the platoon CCPs and the tactical SOP for establishing
them. They rehearse casualty treatment and litter carries with all platoon members, and
conduct CLS refresher training The platoon medic is responsible for filling out a
DD Form 1380 (See figure 7-6, page 7-30.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-29

Chapter 7
Figure 7-6. DD Form 1380, Tactical Combat Casualty Care (TCCC) Card
HEALTH AND HYGIENE

7-96. All leaders in a scout platoon emphasize and enforce high standards of health and
hygiene. A preventive-medicine approach covers all aspects of Soldiers’ health and
well-being, and leaders check for the following:
 Daily shaving to ensure proper fit of the protective mask when threatened by
a CBRN attack.
 Regular bathing and changing of clothes as often as the situation permits.
 Weather-related problems, including frostbite, trench foot, immersion foot,
and wind.
 Chill that can occur in cold weather and heat exhaustion and heat stroke that
are common in hot weather.
 Sunburn, which can occur at any time.
 Preventing diseases, including insect-borne diseases such as malaria and
Lyme disease.
 Effective field sanitation measures, including unit waste control, water
purification, rodent control, and insect repellents.
 Operational stress control, preventing fatigue, and implementing a strict unit
sleep plan.
 Fatigue, including strict implementation of the unit sleep plan.
7-30 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
COMBAT AND OPERATIONAL STRESS CONTROL

7-97. Leaders focus on protecting the force through treatment and prevention of combat
and operational stress. Every Soldier responds differently to stressors found on today’s
current battlefield. All leaders, peers, and platoon members look out for indicators of
combat and operational stress. A few examples of those indicators include:
 Witnessing death.
 Fearing for your life.
 Losing a close friend or valued leader.
 Experiencing relationship stress.
 Fatigue and lack of sleep over extended periods.
 Extended deployments over a short period of time.
7-98. Soldiers will start to display symptoms of combat and operational stress, and will
need treatment from someone qualified to provide that treatment. Soldiers will start to
display signs or symptoms of combat and operational stress such as angry outbursts,
depression, trouble sleeping and nightmares, confusion, and withdrawal. Those are just
a few of the symptoms, and every Soldier responds differently.
7-99. The brigade support battalion has a combat and operational stress control team
consisting of a behavioral science officer and a mental health specialist. Chaplains can
assist with combat stress control by identifying Soldiers who are under extreme stress.
When leaders identify a Soldier with the signs and symptoms mentioned above, then
leaders need to get the Soldier treatment immediately.
SECTION VI –DETAINEES
7-100. Detainees and captured enemy equipment or materials often provide excellent
combat information. This information is of tactical value only if the scout platoon
processes and evacuates detainees and material to the rear quickly. In tactical situations,
the scout platoon will have specific procedures and guidelines for processing detainees
and captured material. Detainees under Department of Defense (DOD) control will be
given humanitarian care and treatment and treated in accordance with FM 2-22.3 and
DODD 2310.01E
7-101. All persons captured, personnel detained or retained by U.S. Armed Forces
during the course of military operations, are considered detained persons until their
status is determined by higher military and civilian authorities. However, as a practical
matter, when scout sections and platoons capture enemy personnel, they must provide
the initial processing and holding for detainees. Detainee planning considerations must
be part of the scout platoon’s overall planning process. Detainee handling is a resource
intensive and politically sensitive task requiring detailed training, guidance, and
supervision. (See figure 7-7, page 7-32.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-31

Chapter 7
Figure 7-7. Detainee handling flow chart
7-32 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
7-102. All detained persons shall be given humanitarian care and treatment
immediately. U.S. Armed Forces never torture, maltreat, or purposely place detained
persons in positions of danger. There is never a military necessity exception to violate
these principles.
7-103. Scouts must process detainees using the “Search, Silence, Segregate, Speed to
safe area or rear, Safeguard, and Tag” (5Ss and T) technique. (Refer to FM 2-22.3,
appendix D for more information.)
7-104. Search. Neutralize a detainee and confiscate weapons. Remove explosives,
personal items, and items of potential intelligence or evidentiary value. Detainees
maintain possession and CBRN protective equipment.
7-105. Silence. Prevent detainees from communicating with one another or making
audible clamor such as chanting, singing, or praying. Silence uncooperative detainees
by muffling them with a soft, clean cloth tied around their mouths and fastened at the
backs of their heads. Do not use duct tape or other adhesives, place a cloth or other
objects inside the mouth, or apply physical force to silence detainees.
7-106. Segregate. Segregate detainees according to policy and SOPs. (Segregation
requirements differ from operation to operation.) The ability to segregate detainees may
be limited by the availability of manpower and resources at the point of capture. At a
minimum, try to segregate detainees by grade, gender, age (keeping adults from
juveniles and small children with mothers), and security risk. Military intelligence,
military police personnel, and unit legal advisors can provide additional guidance and
support in determining the appropriate segregation criteria.
7-107. Safeguard. Protect detainees and ensure the custody and integrity of all
confiscated items. Scouts must safeguard detainees from combat risk, harm caused by
other detainees, and improper treatment or care. Report all injuries. Correct and report
violations of U.S. military policy that occur while safeguarding detainees. Acts,
omissions, or both that constitute inhumane treatment are violations of the law of war,
and as such, must be corrected immediately. Simply reporting violations is insufficient.
If a violation is ongoing, a Soldier has an obligation to stop the violation then report it.
7-108. Speed. Quickly move detainees from the continuing risks associated with other
combatants, and to quickly learn valuable information they may possess. If there are
more detainees than the scouts can control, call for additional support, search the
detainees, and hold them in a safe area until reinforcements arrive. Evacuate detainees
from the battlefield to a holding area or facility as soon as possible. Transfer captured
documents and other property to the forces assuming responsibility of the detainees.
7-109. Tag. Each DD Form 2745, (Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) Capture Tag) has
three parts. The parts are as follows:
 Using Part A of the DD Form 2745, tag each detainee (see figure 7-8, on page
7-34). Confiscated equipment, personal items, and evidence links to the
detainee using the DD Form 2745 number.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-33

Chapter 7
 Part B of the DD Form 2745 is the unit record copy. (See figure 7-9.) When
a DA Form 4137 (Evidence/Property Custody Document) documents
confiscated items, it links to the detainee by annotating Part B.
 Part C of DD Form 2745 should be attached to the detainee’s confiscated
property. (See figure 7-10.)
Figure 7-8. DD Form 2745, Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) Capture Tag
(Part A)
Figure 7-9. Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) Capture Tag (Part B)
7-34 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Sustainment
Figure 7-10. Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) Capture Tag (Part C)
7-110. Evacuate detainees as soon as practical to the BCT detainee collection point.
Tactical question detainees relative to collection of CCIRs as outlined by the
requirements of the DOD Intelligence Interrogations, Detainee Debriefings, and Tactical
Questioning policy as set forth in DODD 3115.09. However, always treat detainees in
accordance with the U.S. Law of War Policy as set forth in the DODD 2311.01E. A
military trained interrogator interrogates detainees and not scouts in the scout platoon.
(See FM 2-22.3 for more information.)
7-111. Scouts capturing equipment, documents, and detainees should tag them using
the DD Form 2745, take digital pictures, and report the capture immediately.
Photograph all of the contents found on the detainee during the search with the detainee
and place in a bag that remains on the detainee as they go to the detention facility.
Detainees need their eyes and ears covered before they are placed into a transporting
vehicle so they cannot see or hear common military reporting and tracking systems.
Troop medics need to conduct a detainee medical screening and document all injuries
prior to handing over any detainees.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 7-35

Appendix A
Analog Reports
Communication is imperative to a scout platoons success. To be

able to quickly and accurately report, scouts require proficiency in
communication equipment, procedures, and reports.
Scouts use the following report formats to ensure clear

communications between units and echelons to facilitate common
reporting formats.
CONTACT REPORT
A-1. Soldiers issue a contact report immediately upon contact with a threat or unknown
force in the AO. A contact report is an alert, which can be very brief. A contact report
takes priority over all other communications traffic and is primarily by radio. If Soldiers
are already in a hide position and have detected the enemy before being detected first
(and time permits) this initial report may be digital. State CONTACT, followed by a
description of the threat or unknown force (dismounts) and the cardinal direction from
the sender (north).
CONTACT REPORT
THIS IS WHITE 4, CONTACT, TANK, NORTH, OUT.
BLUE 1―SPOT REPORT

A-2. Soldiers use a SPOTREP when scouts observe any known or suspected threat
activity. A SPOTREP is necessary when any characteristic in the AO can effect current
and future missions, or when required by the OPORD. Soldiers always send threat
information in the clear. A SPOTREP takes priority over all other routine radio traffic.
The initial SPOTREP should follow no more than one minute after the contact report.
State SPOTREP or UPDATED SPOTREP followed by pertinent information on these
lines:
 Line ALPHA: Observer or source (omit if it is the calling station, otherwise
use call signs or description).
 Line BRAVO: Activity or characteristic observed. Use the SALUTE format:
 Size: The number of sighted personnel, vehicles, or other equipment.
 Activity: What the threat is doing.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 A-1

Appendix A
 Location: Grid coordinates. Report the center of mass for identical,

closely grouped items, otherwise, report multiple grid coordinates of
traces.
 Unit: Patches, signs, or markings.
 Time: Time the observed activity occurred.
 Equipment: Description or identification of all equipment associated
with the activity.
 Line CHARLIE: Actions the reporting Soldier has taken and personal
recommendations. Actions usually involve conducting additional
reconnaissance to determine the complete threat situation or recommending
and executing a specific COA.
 Line DELTA: Self-authentication (if required).
BLUE 1 SPOT REPORT, EXAMPLE

YELLOW 4, THIS IS YELLOW 2. BLUE ONE, OVER. ONE BRDM,
STATIONARY, ORIENTED SOUTH AT GRID MS289546; 1725
HOURS. CONTINUING TO OBSERVE, OVER.
BLUE 2―SITUATION REPORT

A-3. Subordinate units submit a SITREP on the tactical situation and status to their
higher headquarters. Submit the SITREP daily, after significant events, or when the
platoon leader or commander requests it. State SITREP followed by pertinent
information on these lines:
 Line 1: The as-of DTG.
 Line 2: Brief summary of threat activity, casualties inflicted, and prisoners
captured.
 Line 3: Friendly locations (encoded using control measures or TIRS points).
 Line 4: Combat vehicles, operational tanks.
 Line 5: Defensive obstacles (encoded using codes, control measures, or TIRS
points). The type and location can be listed as—
 Obstacles. Abbreviations can include MF (for minefield), TD (for tank
ditch), AB (for abetis), RC (for road crater), and CW (for concertina
wire).
 Executed demolition targets.
 Reserved demolition targets.
 Line 6: Personnel strength classified using the following status levels:
 Green: Full strength; 90 percent or more fit for duty.
 Amber: Reduced strength; 80 percent to 89 percent fit for duty.
 Red: Reduced strength; 60 percent to 79 percent fit for duty; the unit is
mission capable.
 Black: Reduced strength; 59 percent or less fit for duty.
A-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Analog Reports
 Line 7: Classes III and V supplies available for combat vehicles. Status levels
for ammunition and petroleum, oil, and lubricants are the same ones used for
personnel strength (Green, Amber, Red, or Black) with percentages referring
to the amount of basic load level available. (Refer to line 6 of this report.)
 Line 8: Summary of tactical intentions.
Note. If an item is status level Black on lines 6 or 7, the appropriate yellow

(logistics) report follows the transmission.
BLUE 2 SITUATION REPORT, EXAMPLE

YANKEE 21, THIS IS YANKEE 02, BLUE TWO, OVER. LINE 1:
062230. LINE 2: NEGATIVE CONTACT. LINE 3: VISIT 7. LINE 4B:
2. LINE 5: ABATIS, FROM X19 EAST ZERO POINT THREE
NORTH ONE POINT SEVEN. LINE 6: GREEN. LINE 7A: GREEN.
LINE 7B: AMBER. LINE 8: CONTINUING MISSION.
BLUE 4―REPORT FOR BRIDGE, OVERPASS, CULVERT, UNDERPASS, OR

TUNNEL
A-4. To send a bridge report (known as a BRIDGEREP), state BRIDGEREP, followed
by pertinent information on these lines:
 Line ALPHA: Type and location (for a long tunnel, include the entrance and
exit locations). Use a TIRS point or grid coordinates.
 Line BRAVO: Overall length.
 Line CHARLIE: Width of roadway.
 Line DELTA: Height restrictions.
 Line ECHO: Length and number of spans.
 Line FOXTROT: Computed classification.
 Line GOLF: Bypass locations and conditions. Use a BLUE 5 report, if
necessary.
BLUE 5―REPORT FOR FORD, FERRY, OR OTHER CROSSING SITE

A-5. To send the CROSSREP, state CROSSREP followed by pertinent information on
these lines:
 Line ALPHA: Type and location, using a TIRS point or grid coordinates.
 Line BRAVO: Length of crossing in meters.
 Line CHARLIE: Usable width.
 Line DELTA: Current speed in meters per second.
 Line ECHO: Maximum depth in meters.
 Line FOXTROT: Bottom material and condition.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 A-3

Appendix A
 Line GOLF: Capacity classification of any existing ferry equipment.

 Line HOTEL: Slope of entry bank.
 Line INDIA: Slope of exit bank.
 Line JULIETTE: Other comments as necessary.
BLUE 7―ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE REPORT

A-6. To report the results of a route reconnaissance, scouts should send an initial route
reconnaissance report (known as ROUTEREP) at the SP. At a minimum, updates follow
the initial report when obstructions, phase lines, and route changes become necessary.
These update reports should include only the line(s) that have changed from the initial
ROUTEREP. To send the report, state ROUTEREP, followed by pertinent information
on these lines:
 Line ALPHA: From location, reported using a control measure or TIRS point.
 Line BRAVO: To location, reported using a control measure or TIRS point.
 Line CHARLIE: Type of route, reported using the following designations:
 Highway: number 1.
 Road: number 2.
 Trail: number 3.
 Cross-country: number 4.
 Line DELTA: Classification of route. Check for height, width, and weight
restrictions to determine the appropriate class and report which vehicles the
route can handle using the following designations:
 All squadron and battalion vehicles (70-class minimum), reported using
the number 1.
 Tracked vehicles only, number 2.
 Bradley or Cavalry fighting vehicles only (35-class restriction),
number 3.
 Line ECHO: Seasonal limitations of route based on weather support
capability, reported as follows:
 All weather (usable year-round), reported using the letter X.
 Limited all weather (use limited during bad weather), letter Y.
 Fair weather (may be impassable during bad weather), letter Z.
 Line FOXTROT: Rate of movement the route supports, reported as follows:
 Fast: Reported using the number 1.
 Slow: Reported using the number 2.
 Line GOLF: Location and type of any critical points (send the applicable
report). Report the following obstructions in all cases:
 Curves with a radius of 45 meters or less.
 Uphill slopes with grades of five percent or greater.
A-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Analog Reports
 Width restrictions of six meters or less for one-way traffic, 10 meters or

less for two way traffic.
 Overhead clearance of 4.3 meters or less.
BLUE 9―OBSTACLE REPORT

A-7. Report all pertinent information using the following format:
 Line ALPHA: Type of obstacle or obstruction.
 Line BRAVO: Location, using grid coordinates. For large, complex
obstacles, send the coordinates of the ends and all turn points.
 Line CHARLIE: Dimensions and orientation.
 Line DELTA: Composition.
 Line ECHO: Threat weapons influencing obstacle.
 Line FOXTROT: Observer’s actions.
BLUE 10―BYPASS REPORT

A-8. Report all pertinent information using the following format:
 Line ALPHA: Observer or source.
 Line BRAVO: Length, width, surface type, grade.
 Line CHARLIE: Coordinates of from and to locations.
 Line DELTA: Seasonal and weather limitations. Use letter designation (X,
Y, or Z) as described in the BLUE 7 ROUTEREP (line Echo).
 Line ECHO: Bypass markings.
 Line FOXTROT: Observer’s actions.
BLUE 11―STAND-TO REPORT

A-9. Send the stand-to report (known as STANREP) to the platoon leader or tactical
command post, as applicable, when stand-to is completed. To send this report, state
STANREP, followed by pertinent information on these lines:
 Line ALPHA: Time stand-to was complete.
 Line BRAVO: Weapons on hand functional. Use the term UP for functional
weapons on hand. Use EXCEPTION for weapons that are not on hand or not
functional.
 Line CHARLIE: Sensitive and accountable items on hand. Use UP or
EXCEPTION, as applicable.
 Line DELTA: Vehicles and radios on hand functional. Use UP or
EXCEPTION, as applicable.
 Line ECHO: Report the on-hand or functional status of any other equipment
using UP or EXCEPTION.
Note. For lines B, C, D, and E, refer to the Yellow 1 equipment status report for
equipment line numbers.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 A-5

Appendix A
BLUE 11 STAND-TO REPORT, EXAMPLE

BLACK 3, THIS IS RED 1; BLUE 11, OVER. LINE ALPHA:
COMPLETE TIME 0600. LINE BRAVO: UP. LINE CHARLIE: ITEM
38, MISSING 1 EACH. LINE DELTA: RED 3 WILL NOT START.
STATUS REPORTS
A-10. Units routinely send reports to account for friendly equipment, captured enemy
materiel, and personnel. These reports are significant because they relay information
that has possible value in a concise format.
GREEN 2—SENSITIVE ITEMS REPORT

A-11. Units send the sensitive items report (known as SENSEREP) daily at prescribed
times (before and after significant movement, after significant events, and after any
consolidation or reorganization). Items covered include machine guns, personal
weapons, night vision devices, binoculars, CBRN equipment, communications-
electronics operating instruction materials, maps and graphics, and special equipment
assigned to platoons for particular operations. To send this report, state SENSEREP
followed by pertinent information on these lines:
 Line ALPHA: Reporting unit (use call sign).
 Line CHARLIE: Results of sensitive items check. Use the term UP for
on-hand or functional items. For missing items, report the line description
and serial number and provide an explanation. Use additional lines from the
Yellow 1 report.
 Line ECHO: Initials of person sending report.
GREEN 2 SENSITIVE ITEMS REPORT, EXAMPLE

THIS IS RED 1. GREEN TWO, OVER. LINE ALPHA: RED. LINE
CHARLIE: ALL UP. LINE ECHO: ROMEO WHISKY
GREEN 3―SPLASH REPORT

A-12. Units use the splash report for downed or missing aircraft. To send this report,
provide all pertinent information on these lines:
 Line 1: Call sign.
 Line 2: Aircraft data (type and status).
 Line 3: Pilot status.
A-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Analog Reports
GREEN 4―PATROL REPORT

A-13. Units may submit the patrol report by radio or digital, when required. The
following debriefing format can be used to ensure all pertinent information is provided
in the patrol report:
 Designation of patrol. Include these elements:
 To: (Command unit.)
 From: (Patrol unit.)
 Maps: (Include maps used.)
 Size and composition of patrol.
 Task.
 Time of departure.
 Time of return.
 Routes (out and back).
 Terrain, includes a description of terrain by type (such as dry, swampy, and
so forth), depth of ravines and draws, condition of bridges (type, size, and
strength), and effect of terrain on tracked and wheeled vehicles.
 Threat includes details of threat strength, disposition, defenses, equipment,
weapons, attitude, morale, exact location, and movements. The report should
include the time of observation of the threat activity and coordinates for the
location where the activity occurred.
 Any map corrections.
 Miscellaneous information includes pertinent details of CBRN warfare, if
applicable.
 Results of encounters with the threat, includes threat prisoners and casualties,
captured documents and equipment, identification of threat elements, and
threat disposition after the contact.
 Condition of the patrol, includes disposition arrangements for any dead or
wounded.
 Conclusions and recommendations, includes the extent of mission
accomplishment and any patrol equipment and tactics recommendations.
 Additional remarks by the debriefed.
Note. The report should conclude with the name, rank or grade, and organization
or unit of the patrol leader.
GREEN 6―DETAINEE AND CAPTURED MATERIAL REPORT

A-14. The detainee’s captured materiel report informs the troop or squadron tactical
command post of detainees and captured materiel of immediate tactical value only.
Usually, units tag detainees and captured materiel immediately to show the place, time,
and circumstances of capture to ensure information of value is not lost. Provide all
pertinent information on the following lines (examples are in parentheses):
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 A-7

Appendix A
 Line 1: State Green 6.

 Line 2: Item captured (state enemy prisoner of war).
 Line 3: DTG of capture (260845SEP83).
 Line 4: Place of capture using grid coordinates (NS 621434).
 Line 5: Capturing unit (appropriate call sign).
 Line 6: Circumstances of capture described as briefly as possible.
A-15. Format for reporting captured materiel. Provide all pertinent information on the
following lines (examples in parentheses):
 Line 1: State Green 6.
 Line 2: Item captured (state MATERIEL).
 Line 3: Type of document or equipment (communications-electronics
operating instruction).
 Line 4: DTG of capture (160900JUN83).
 Line 5: Place of capture, using grid coordinates (NE824615).
 Line 6: Capturing unit (appropriate call sign).
 Line 7: Circumstances of capture described as briefly as possible.
Note. After sending the report to the platoon or troop commander, provide
disposition instructions or recommendations, if necessary.
LOGISTICS REPORTS
A-16. Units use a logistics report to report the status of sustainment items and request
resupply. Units should immediately follow a status report with a request report.
YELLOW 1―EQUIPMENT STATUS REPORT

A-17. Each platoon sergeant sends the equipment status report by courier or voice radio
to the troop or task force tactical command post every day. The information is as of 1200
hours that same day. Units record the equipment status using one of these terms:
operational, inoperative, or combat loss. Provide all pertinent information using the
following categories and lines:
 Weapons.
 Line 1: Bayonet multipurpose system, XM9.
 Line 2: Pistol, 9 mm, automatic, M9 with equipment.
 Line 3: Rifle, 5.56-mm, M4 with equipment.
 Line 4: Launcher, grenade, M203A2/M320A1, with equipment.
 Line 5: Machine gun, M2, .50 caliber heavy barrel.
 Line 6: Machine gun, 7.62-mm, M240B.
 Line 7: Machine gun, light 5.56-mm, M249.
 Line 8: Machine gun, grenade, 40-mm, MK19 MOD III.
 Line 12: Command launch unit, Javelin.
A-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Analog Reports
Note. Use lines 13, 14, 15, and 16 as needed for additional weapons assigned to
the platoon.
 Vehicles and vehicle equipment.

 Line 17: HMMWV, M1151, 50 Cal.
 Line 18: HMMWV, M1151, MK19.
 Line 18: HMMWV, TOW M1151.
 Line 19: Bradley or Cavalry Fighting Vehicle, M3.
 Line 20: Stryker.
Note. Use lines 21, 22, 23, and 24 as needed for additional vehicles and vehicle
equipment assigned to the platoon.
 CBRN equipment.
 Line 25: Radiac set.
 Line 26: Radiac set, dosimeter.
 Line 27: Chemical detection.
 Line 28: Mask, chemical-biological.
Note. Use lines 29, 30, and 31 as needed for additional CBRN equipment
assigned to the platoon.
 Radios.
 Line 32: Radio set: AN/PRC-119F I.
 Line 33: Radio set: Hand Held AN/PRC-148.
 Line 34: Radio set: Radio Set: AN/PSC-5.
 Line 35: Radio set: AN/VRC-8I I.
 Line 36: Radio set: AN/VRI1F I.
 Line 37: Radio set: ANIC-92F I.
 Line 38: Radio set: AN/VRC-104(V) 6, 150 WATT W/PRC-150 high
frequency radio.
Note. Use lines 39, 40, and 41 as needed for additional radios assigned to the
platoon.
 Miscellaneous equipment.
 Line 42: Demolition set, explosive, initiating, electric, and semi-electric.
 Line 43: Detecting set, mine, portable, metallic, AN/PSS-11.
 Line 44: Night vision goggles, AN/PVS-7B.
 Line 45: Battlefield Anti-Intrusion System, AN/PRS-9.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 A-9

Appendix A
 Line 46: Binoculars, modular construction, mil scale reticle, 7 x 50-mm

with equipment.
 Line 47: Telescope, straight, military.
Note. Use lines 48, 49, and 50 as needed for any additional equipment assigned
to the platoon.
YELLOW 1A―BATTLE LOSS SPOT REPORT

A-18. The platoon leader or platoon sergeant transmits the Yellow 1A report as soon
as possible after items are lost or damaged in battle. Losses are reported using line
numbers from the Yellow 1 report. Provide pertinent information on the following lines:
 Line 1: Time of loss.
 Line 2: Number of equipment pieces to be evacuated to troop and battalion
or higher for maintenance. Refer to the appropriate line numbers from the
Yellow 1 report.
 Line 3: Number of equipment pieces destroyed, abandoned, and left in pieces.
Refer to the appropriate line numbers from the Yellow 1 report.
 Line 4: Location (encoded) of abandoned equipment.
Note. Yellow 1A reports are not cumulative. Units send a Yellow 1A report
showing total unit status no later than 1300 hours once daily. The Yellow 1A
report gives equipment status as of 1200 hours that day.
YELLOW 2―AMMUNITION STATUS REPORT

A-19. Transmit an ammunition status report once daily at 1300 hours or immediately
upon completion of threat contact, the following status codes are used:
 Green: 90 percent or more on hand, all ammunition types.
 Amber: 80 percent to 89 percent on hand, all ammunition types.
 Red: 60 percent to 79 percent on hand, all ammunition types.
 Black: 59 percent or less on hand, all ammunition types.
Note. Black status in a Yellow 2 report requires immediate follow-up with a

Yellow 2A report. Green, Amber, or Red status does not require submission of a
Yellow 2A report.
YELLOW 2A―AMMUNITION REQUEST

A-20. The required quantity of each type of ammunition is requested using the
following line numbers:
 Line 1: Report as-of DTG.
A-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Analog Reports
 Line 2: 5.56-mm mix.

 Line 3: 5.56-mm ball.
 Line 4: 5.56-mm tracer.
 Line 5: 7.62-mm (coax).
 Line 6: Grenade, 40-mm, high explosive.
 Line 7: Grenade, 40-mm, white phosphorous.
 Line 8: Grenade, 40-mm, antipersonnel.
 Line 9: .50 caliber (M2).
 Line 10: .50 caliber (M85).
 Line 11: 40-mm, high explosive/dual purpose.
 Line 12: 25-mm high explosive.
 Line 13: 25-mm antipersonnel.
 Line 14: TOW.
 Line 15: AT4.
 Line 16: Javelin.
 Line 17: Grenade, fragmentation.
 Line 18: Grenade, smoke.
 Line 19: Grenade, thermite.
 Line 20: Blasting cap, nonelectric.
 Line 21: Fuse, igniter.
 Line 22: Fuse, blast, time.
 Line 23: Mine, claymore.
 Line 24: Mine, antitank.
 Line 25: Mine, antipersonnel.
Note. All Yellow 2A requests are for the quantity of ammunition the platoon
requires unless otherwise specified. When sending a Yellow 2A report, use only the
lines required for specific requests. Use additional lines (beginning with line 26) to
request any other types of ammunition that the platoon needs. Attached units should
coordinate with the S-4 for additional line numbers for their ammunition
requirements.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 A-11

Appendix A
YELLOW 3―PETROLEUM, OILS, AND LUBRICANTS STATUS REPORT

A-21. Units send the POL report twice daily, or as requested. Use the following status
codes:
 Green: 90 percent or more of the required quantity on hand.
 Amber: 80 to 89 percent on hand.
 Red: 60 to 79 percent on hand.
 Black: 59 percent or less on hand.
YELLOW 3A― PETROLEUM, OILS, AND LUBRICANTS REQUEST

A-22. Use the following line numbers to request the required quantity of each type of
POL product:
 Line 1: Report as of DTG.
 Line 2: Diesel gallon (gal).
 Line 3: Oil, OE-30 (gal).
 Line 4: Oil, OE-90 (gal).
 Line 5: Antifreeze (gal).
 Line 6: Brake fluid (gal).
 Line 7: Hydraulic fluid, OHA quart (qt).
 Line 8: Hydraulic fluid, OHT (qt).
 Line 9: Grease, GAA pound (lb).
Note. Use lines 10, 11, and 12 as needed for any other equipment assigned to the
platoon. Use additional lines (beginning with Line 21) to request any other POL
products the platoon or attached elements require.
PERSONNEL REPORTS
A-23. Units use personnel reports to notify the command group of casualties and to
request replacement personnel. A request for replacements must immediately follow a
casualty report.
RED 2―PERSONNEL BATTLE LOSS REPORT

A-24. Units transmit a Red 2 report to the troop and task force tactical command post
as casualties occur. The unit also completes DA Form 1156, (Casualty Feeder Card)
with witness statements, and submits all to the 1SG. Red 2 is an interim report to update
information sent in the last Red 1 report. Provide all pertinent information using the
following lines:
 Line 1: Battle roster number.
 Line 2: DTG of the incident.
 Line 3: Location of the incident (encoded).
A-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Analog Reports
 Line 4: Type of casualties, encoded by letter as follows:

 ALPHA: KIA, hostile action.
 BRAVO: KIA, nonhostile action.
 CHARLIE: Body recovered.
 DELTA: Body not recovered.
 ECHO: Body identified.
 FOXTROT: Body not identified.
 GOLF: Missing in action.
 HOTEL: Captured.
 INDIA: Wounded in action, slight, hostile action.
 JULIET: Wounded in action, serious, hostile action.
 KILO: Wounded in action, slight, nonhostile action.
 LIMA: Wounded in action, serious, nonhostile action.
 MIKE: Accident.
 Line 5: Location of casualties or evacuation.
RED 3―MEDICAL EVACUATION REQUEST

A-25. Units send a Red 3 report to the medical team on the troop or company
command net to request MEDEVAC support.
A-26. The following is the ground evacuation format. Provide pertinent information
on the following lines:
 Line 1: State EVAC (not spoken: evacuation).
 Line 2: Location for pickup (encoded).
 Line 3: Number of casualties.
 Line 4: Category of patient condition, encoded by letter designation as
follows:
 ALPHA: Urgent.
 BRAVO: Priority.
 CHARLIE: Routine.
Note. Use the letter designation with the number of patients in each category; for
example, TWO ALPHA indicates that two patients require evacuation on an
urgent basis.
A-27. The air evacuation format is as follows:

 Line 1: Location. Specify the grid coordinates for the six-digit grid location
preceded by the 100,000-meter grid identification.
 Line 2: Radio frequency and call sign. The frequency and call sign is the radio
frequency and call sign at the site of the unit requesting evacuation.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 A-13

Appendix A
 Line 3: Patient category of precedence. Classify the casualties’ priority for

evacuation using the following terms:
 Urgent. Evacuation required within two hours saving life or limb.
 Priority. Patient’s medical condition is deteriorating, becoming urgent
within four hours.
 Routine. Evacuation required, but several hours until patient’s condition
expected to deteriorate.
 Tactical immediate. Evacuation required so casualties do not endanger
the tactical mission.
 Line 4: Special equipment and emergency medical supplies.
 Line 5: Number and type of casualties.
 Line 6: Security of pickup site. Describe conditions for security at the pickup
zone.
 Line 7: Signaling and site marking. Specify the signaling and marking
methods to use.
 Line 8: Patient nationality and status.
 Line 9: CBRN contamination area. Specify locations of any contaminated
areas affecting the evacuation operation.
CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL,

NUCLEAR, EXPLOSIVE REPORTS
A-28. Units use CBRN explosives reports to describe contaminated areas, means of
delivery, persistence, and initial agent identification. Units ensure that appropriate
protective postures occur before gathering information for CBRN reports.
CBRN-1―OBSERVER’S INITIAL REPORT

A-29. The CBRN 1 report may use CHEM/BIO/RAD/NUC to represent a chemical
report, biological report, radiological report, or nuclear report respectively. To send the
CBRN-1 report, state CBRN ONE and give the type of CBRN incident (nuclear,
biological, radiological, or chemical). Other information that may be sent includes
precedence of the report, date and time of the report (universal time [also called ZULU]),
and security classification with the FROM and TO times the classification is applicable.
Provide all pertinent information on the following lines:
 Line ALPHA: Strike serial number (if known).
 Line BRAVO: Position of observer (universal transverse Mercator [known
as UTM] coordinates or name of place).
 Line DELTA: DTG attack started, ZULU.
 Line FOXTROT: Location of attack (UTM coordinates) and vicinity of attack
(actual or estimated, specify which is given).
 Line GOLF: Means of delivery and quantity (if known).
 Line HOTEL: (For CBRN 1 NUC reports) Type of burst (air, surface,
unknown), type of toxic agent, or type of attack.
A-14 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Analog Reports
 Line INDIA: Release information (Number of shells, other data) not

mandatory for RAD or NUC.
 Line INDIAR: (For CBRN 1 RAD reports) Release and sampling information
on radiological incidents.
 Line JULIET: Flash-to-bang time (in seconds).
 Line KILO: Crater present or absent, diameter in meters (if known).
 Line LIMA: Cloud width (degrees or mils, specify which) five minutes after
burst.
 Line MIKE: Description and status of chemical, biological, and radiological
incidents. Cloud height (top or bottom, specify which) ten minutes after burst
(degrees or mils, specify which).
 Line SIERRA: DTG of reading or initial detection of contamination (local or
ZULU time).
Note. DO NOT DELAY REPORTS in an attempt to provide complete format

information. Omit information that is not applicable or available. Items always
reported are the type of report; lines D and H; and one of the following lines: B,
C, F, or G. Carefully specify the units of measure used (such as degrees, mils, or
grid azimuth).
CBRN-3―IMMEDIATE WARNING OF EXPECTED CONTAMINATION

A-30. The CBRN-3 report is by radio. The CBRN 3 report will be prepared by the
CBRN cell and transmitted to provide warning to units in or near the expected area of
contamination. The CBRN-3 report will contain the location of attack and grid
coordinates for plotting the area of expected hazard area. report format is CBRN
THREE, followed by pertinent information on these lines:
 Line ALPHA: Strike serial number (if known).
 Line DELTA: DTG when attack started.
 Line FOXTROT: Location of attack (actual or estimated, specify which).
 Line PAPA: Area of expected contamination.
 Line YANKEE: Bearing or azimuth of left, then right radial lines (specify
degrees or mils, use four digits for each line).
 Line ZULU: Effective downwind speed (in kilometers per mile, use three
digits), downwind effective distance of zone (in kilometers, use three digits),
and cloud radius (in kilometers, use two digits).
CBRN-4―RECONNAISSANCE, MONITORING, AND SURVEY RESULTS
A-31. Units submit CBRN-4 report, used for reporting CBRN hazards as required by
the OPORD. To send this report, state CBRN FOUR, followed by pertinent information
on these lines:
 Line INDIA: Release information (not mandatory for RAD or NUC).
 Line INDIA: Release and sampling information on radiological incidents.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 A-15

Appendix A
 Line QUEBEC: Location of reading or detection and type of detection, use

friendly graphics or encryption. Omit this line when transmitting on a digital
system.
 Line ROMEO: Dose rate in centigray per hour (cGy/hr) (average total dose
rounded to the nearest 10 cGy). Specify whether the dose rate is INITIAL,
INCREASING, PEAK, or DECREASING. Specify SHIELDED if the dose
rate was measured inside a vehicle.
 Line SIERRA: DTG of reading. Specify the time zone.
Note. Repeat lines Q, R, and S as often as necessary. Ideally, measure radiation

dose rates in the open one meter above the ground. If the rate is measured in a
shielded location, it is converted (as accurately as possible) to a rate in the open.
CBRN-5―REPORT OF AREAS OF CONTAMINATION

A-32. The CBRN 5 report will be prepared by the CBRN cell or controlling
headquarters and transmitted to distribute information about the contaminated area
consolidated from CBRN 4 reports. Units may send other information including
precedence of the report, date and time of the report (ZULU), and security classification
with from and to for the length of time the classification is applicable. Provide all
pertinent information on the following lines:
 Line ALPHA: Strike serial number, if known.
 Line OSCAR: Reference DTG for estimated contours of contaminated areas.
 Line SIERRA: DTG when detection of contamination occurred.
 Line TANGO: H+1 DTG or DTG of latest reconnaissance of contamination
in the area.
 Line UNIFORM: Coordinates of contour lines marking dose rate of 1000
cGy/hr.
 Line VICTOR: Coordinates of contour lines marking dose rate of 300 cGy/hr.
 Line WHISKEY: Coordinates of contour lines marking dose rate of 100
cGy/hr.
 Line X-RAY: Coordinates of contour lines marking dose rate of 20 cGy/hr.
A-16 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Appendix B
Platoon Operating Distances
Platoon leaders develop platoon operating distances for planning

considerations based on manning, available weapons systems, and
the desired amount of depth. The primary considerations are the
mission variables of METT-TC. Additional considerations to
emphasize when developing planning distances include enemy,
friendly optics and laser capabilities, weapons ranges, and terrain.
Platoon leaders may apply the following basic equations prior to

mission execution to calculate an approximate operating area for
their platoons. Using the formula described below, leaders can make
tentative plans for positions and fires coverage.
Below are several examples platoon leaders can use as a reference

to develop operating distances specific to their particular mission.
Many factors of METT-TC are not available in these generic
examples. Leaders must apply all planning specifics to their
mission.
ARMORED BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM SCOUT

PLATOON
B-1. An ABCT scout platoon maximizes its capabilities in firepower and optics. The
scout platoon has protection allowing for greater risk against ABCT-arrayed threats. An
ABCT platoon leader can use the following method to calculate their planning distances
and depth for unrestricted terrain for a six-vehicle scout platoon:
 Disperse vehicles based on enemy fires capability yet still within friendly
fires coverage; 500 meters between vehicles is the minimum recommended
planning factor to provide force protection against enemy indirect fire.
 Optics available usually allows acquisition of enemy targets up to 10 km and
identification at 3 km.
 Weapons systems vary across formation types and significantly influence
distance-planning considerations. As an example, the M242 25-mm cannon
would allow over 1000 meters between vehicles while maintaining mutual
support and sufficient weapons range beyond the supported vehicle.
B-2. Analyze terrain as unrestricted, restricted, or severely restricted. (Refer to
ATP 2-01.3.) Unrestricted terrain is free of any restriction to movement. Unrestricted
terrain for armored or mechanized forces is typically flat to moderately sloping terrain
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 B-1

Appendix B
with scattered or widely spaced obstacles such as trees or rocks. As an example, in desert
terrain, troops are able to screen more area by maximizing the use of optics and weapons
capabilities.
B-3. Given the planning factors above, to find the planning screen front, take half of
the maximum effective range of the weapons system and multiply that by three quarters
the number of vehicles to account for mutually supporting position. Incorporate a factor
of one for the terrain classification. Finally, add in the maximum effective range of the
weapons system to cover the flank security factor to establish a front of 9 km. To find
the planning screen depth, divide the front in half to establish a depth of 4,500 meters.
By changing the planning factors to meet their variables, commanders can rapidly
estimate their fires protection and planning distance. (See figure B-1.)
Figure B-1. ABCT scout platoon operational distance (unrestrictive terrain)
B-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

INFANTRY BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM MOUNTED

SCOUT PLATOON
B-4. The firepower, mobility, and mix of weapons systems allows leaders the
flexibility to array forces in an IBCT scout platoon to meet the mission variables of
METT-TC. An IBCT platoon leader can use the following method to calculate their
planning distances and depth starting for severely restricted terrain for a six-vehicle
scout platoon:
 Disperse vehicles based on enemy fires capability yet still within friendly
 Optics available allows acquisition of enemy targets up to 10 km and
 Weapons systems (the combination of the .50 caliber heavy machine gun,
MK19 grenade launcher, and TOW II) allow for up to 1000 meters between
vehicles to maintain mutual support and sufficient weapons range beyond the
supported vehicle.
 Severely restricted terrain severely hinders or slows movement in combat
formations. Commanders may attempt to enhance mobility by committing
engineer assets to improving mobility or deviating from doctrinal tactics,
such as moving in columns instead of line formations or at speeds much lower
than those preferred.
B-5. Given the planning factors above, to find the planning screen front, take half of
the maximum effective range of the weapons system and multiply that by three quarters
of the number of vehicles, which will account for the mutually supporting position.
Incorporate a factor of 0.25 for the terrain classification. Finally, add in the maximum
effective range of the weapons system to cover the flank security factor, which will
establish a front of 3 km. To find the planning screen depth, divide the front in half,
which establishes a depth of 1,500 meters. (See figure B-2, page B-4.)
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 B-3

Appendix B
Figure B-2. IBCT scout platoon operational distances (severely restrictive)
INFANTRY BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM DISMOUNTED

SCOUT PLATOON
B-6. The IBCT dismounted scout platoon allows discreet, stealthy execution of
reconnaissance and security tasks. An IBCT platoon leader can use the following
method to calculate their planning distances and depth, starting for severely restricted
terrain. For this example, an area reconnaissance is demonstrated using NAIs.
 Disperse based on enemy fires capability yet still within friendly fires
coverage; 250 meters between observation posts is the minimum
recommended planning factor to provide force protection against enemy
indirect fire.
 Weapons systems vary across formation types and significantly influence
distance-planning considerations. For example, the M240B/L allows
400 meters between positions to maintain mutual support and sufficient
weapons range beyond the supported observation post.
 Severely restricted terrain severely hinders or slows movement in combat
formations unless the commander makes some effort to enhance mobility.
(See figure B-3.)
B-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Figure B-3. IBCT dismounted scout platoon
STRYKER BRIGADE COMBAT TEAM SCOUT

PLATOON
B-7. The SBCT scout platoons platform commonality allows commanders simplicity
in planning. SBCT platoon leader can use the following method to calculate their
planning distances and depth starting at the platoon level for restricted terrain for a six-
vehicle scout platoon:
 Disperse vehicles based on enemy fires capability, yet still within friendly
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 B-5

Appendix B

 For weapons systems, the 50 caliber heavy machine gun and MK19 grenade
launcher would allow up to 1,000 meters between vehicles to maintain mutual
support and sufficient weapons range beyond the supported vehicle.
B-8. Restricted terrain hinders movement to some degree. Units may have difficulty
maintaining preferred speeds, moving in combat formations, or transitioning from one
formation to another. Restricted terrain slows movement by requiring navigating
through vegetation or frequent detours. Restricted terrain for armored or mechanized
forces typically consists of moderate-to-steep slopes or moderate-to-densely spaced
obstacles such as trees, rocks, or buildings. (See figure B-4 and tables B-1 through B-7
on pages B-7 to B-11.)
Figure B-4. SBCT scout platoon operational distances (restrictive)
B-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Table B-1. Scout platoon width/depth formula
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 B-7

Appendix B
Table B-2. ABCT scout platoon operational distances in unrestrictive terrain
Table B-3. IBCT scout platoon operational distances in severely restricted

terrain
B-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Table B-4. SBCT scout platoon operational distances in restricted terrain
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 B-9

Appendix B
Table B-5. Scout platoon optics systems estimated distances

Daysights Target Recognition Target Identification
Binocular: Modular Construction Mil
2000 meter *Not tested
Scale Reticle 7X50mm W/E
Telescope:
Straight – ELCAN M145 Straight 900 meters with M240B No data
Telescope
Soldier Carried
Laser Target Locator Module 4.2 km day / 900 meter 2.7 km day / .45 km
(LTLM) night night
Crew System
Range Finder-Target Designator:
Laser ANPED-1 4.3 km day / 1.4 km
No data
Lightweight Laser Designator night
Rangefinder (LLDR)
Command Launch Unit (Javelin) 2000 meters Block D
No data
13305405-119 2500 meters Block I
Soldier Weapon Sight
Sight: Night Vision (SNS)
AN/PVS-30 Clip-on Sniper Night 600 meters ½ Moon No data
Sight
Sight: Thermal AN/PAS-13B(V)1 820 meters No data
Medium Weapon Thermal Sight 1200 meters (MWTS I)
No data
(MWTS): AN/PAS-13(V2) 1430 meters (MWTS II)
Heavy Weapon Thermal Sight 2200 meters (HWTS I)
No data
(HWTS): AN/PAS-13(V3) 2753 meters (HWTS II)
Legend: ITAS – improvised target acquisition system, km – kilometer, Mil – milliradians,
mm – millimeters, RF – radio frequency, TOW – tube launched, optically tracked, wire
guided, W/E – with equipment
B-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Table B-6. ABCT scout platoon weapon system list

Weapon Max Range
M242 25mm 1,600 m to 3,000 m
M320A1 Grenade Launcher 150 m to 300 m
M2 MG .50 caliber 1,500 m to 1,830 m
MK 19 MOD III MG 40-mm Grenade 100 to 2,212m
M240B/240L MG 7.62 mm 600 m to 1,800 m
M9 9 mm 50 m
M4 5.56 mm 600 m
12 gauge Shotgun 50 m
120 mm Mortar 7,200 m
TOW Missile 3,750 m to 4,250 m
CLU Javelin 2,000 m
Legend: CLU – command launch unit, max – maximum, m – meter,
mm – millimeter, MG – machine gun, MOD – module, TOW – tube-launched optically-
tracked wire-guided missile
Table B-7. IBCT scout platoon weapon system list

Weapon Max Range
(depending on Ammo type)
M2 MG .50 caliber 1,500 m to 1,830 m
MK 19 MOD III MG 40-mm grenade 100 to 2,212 m
M320A1 grenade launcher 150 m to 300 m
M240B/240L MG 7.62-mm 600 m to 1,800 m
M249 5.56-mm link 650 m
M9 9-mm 50 m
M4 5.56-mm 550 m
12 gauge shotgun 50 m
120-mm mortar 7,200 m
M225 60-mm mortar 3,649 m
ITAS TOW missile 3,750 m to 4,200 m
CLU javelin 2,000 m
Legend: cal – caliber, CLU – command launch unit, ITAS-- improvised target
acquisition system, max – maximum, m – meter,
mm – millimeter, MG – machine gun, MOD – module, TOW – tube-launched optically-
tracked wire-guided missile
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 B-11

Glossary
The glossary lists acronyms and terms with Army or joint

definitions. Where Army and joint definitions differ, (Army)
precedes the definition. Terms for which ATP 3-20.98 is the
proponent are marked with an asterisk. The proponent manual for
other terms is listed in parentheses after the definition.
SECTION I – ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATION

Acronym Definition
1SG first sergeant
AB abatis
ABCT Armored brigade combat team
ADP Army doctrine publication
AFTTP Air Force tactics, techniques, and procedures
AMD air and missile defense
AO area of operations
ARS attack reconnaissance squadron
ATP Army techniques publication
BCT brigade combat team
BHL battle handover line
BLUES  B: Blend in with the surrounding area. Does the site
look natural? Does it attract unwanted attention?
 L: Low-to-the-ground constructed sites. Does the
site provide protection against small arms and direct
weapons fire?
 U: Unexpected sites. Does the enemy expect Soldiers
to look out the window, or out the small hole in the
wall?
 E: Evacuation routes planned during site selection.
Where is the link-up location with friendly forces?
BP battle position
BMP Russian amphibious tracked infantry fighting vehicles
BRDM Russian combat reconnaissance patrol vehicle
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 Glossary-1

Glossary
BRIDGEREP bridge report

BTR Russian class of armored vehicles
CASEVAC casualty evacuation
CAS close air support
CBRN chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear
CCIR commander’s critical information requirement
CCN combination class number
cGy centigray per hour
CLS combat lifesaver
COA course of action
CCP (s) casualty collection point
CROSSREP crossing report
CW concertina wire
CWORMS  C: Compass and navigation equipment.
 W: Weapons, such as personal, crew-served and anti-
tank.
 O: Optics, binoculars, spotting scope, thermal sights
and night observation devices with spare batteries.
 R: Radios and report formats. Signal operating
instructions.
 M: Map of the area with operational graphics.
 S: Seasonal equipment. Wet weather gear, gloves,
sleeping bags, chemical, biological, radiological,
nuclear, and high-yield explosive equipment based on
weather and threat.
DA Department of the Army
DD Department of Defense form
DIDEA detect, identify, decide, engage, and assess
DOD Department of Defense
DODD Department of Defense Directive
DTG date-time group
EEFI essential elements of friendly information
EPW enemy prisoner of war
ERT engineer reconnaissance team
EW electronic warfare
FDC fire direction center
FM field manual, frequency modulation
Glossary-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Glossary
FO forward observer
FPOL forward passage of lines
FRAGORD fragmentary order
FSO fire support officer
gal gallon
GOTWA  G: Going – where is the leader going?
 O: Others – others going with leader?
 T: Time (duration) – how long will the element be
gone?
 W: What – what happens if the leader fails to return?
 A: Actions – what actions does element and main
body plan to execute on enemy contact?
GPS Global Positioning System
HMMWV high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle
HUMINT human intelligence
IBCT Infantry brigade combat team
IED (s) improvised explosive device
IPB intelligence preparation of the battlefield/battlespace
IR infrared
IV intervisibility
JP joint publication
JTAC joint terminal attack controller
KIA killed in action
km kilometer
lb pound
LD line of departure
LD line of departure
LOGPAC logistics package
LRAS3 Long-Range Advance Scout Surveillance System
LRP (s) logistic releast point
LTIOV latest time information is of value
LZ landing zone
MCOO modified combined obstacle overlay
MCP maintenance collection point
MCRP Marine Corps reference publication
MCWP Marine Corps warfighting publication

Glossary
MEDEVAC medical evacuation

METT-TC mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support
available, time available and civil considerations
MF minefields
mils milliradians
MIST mechanism of injury, injury type, signs, treatment
MLC military load classification
MLRS Multiple Launch Rocket System
mm millimeter
MOPP mission oriented protective posture
NAI (s) named area of interest
NCO noncommissioned officer
NTTP Navy tactics, techniques, and procedures
OAKOC observation and fields of fire, avenues of approach, key
terrain, obstacles, and cover and concealment
OPORD operation order
OT observer-target
PACE primary, alternate, contingency, and emergency
PAM pamphlet
PCC precombat check
PCI precombat inspection
PIR priority intelligence requirement
PMCS preventive maintenance checks and services
POL petroleum, oils, and lubricants
PSG platoon sergeant
Psi pounds per square inch
pt pint
RALS right add, left subtract
RC road crater
REDCON ready condition
RHO reconnaissance handover
ROUTEREP reconnaissance report
ROZ restricted operations zone
RPOL rearward passage of lines
RP release point

Glossary
RTO radio telephone operator

S-2 battalion or brigade intelligence staff officer
S-3 battalion or brigade operations staff officer
S-4 battalion or brigade logistics staff officer
SALUTE size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment
SAS squadron aid station
SBCT Stryker brigade combat team
SENSEREP sensitive items report
SBF support by fire
SITREP situation report
SIR specific information requirements
SLLS stop, look, listen, smell
SOP standard operating procedure
SPOTREP spot report
SP start point
STANREP stand-to report
SQDLDR squad leader
TAI (s) target area of interest
TASKORG task organization
TC training circular
TD tank ditch
TIRS Terrain Index Reference System
TL team leader
TLE target location error
TLP troop leading procedures
TOW tube launched, optically tracked, wire guided
TRP (s) target referrence point
TTP tactics, techniques, and procedures
UAS unmanned aircraft system
U.S. United States
UTM universal transverse Mercator
WARNORD warning order
XO executive officer
ZULU Universal Time (DOD)

Glossary
SECTION II – TERMS
adversary
A party acknowledged as potentially hostile to a friendly party and against which
the use of force may be envisaged. (JP 3-0)
area security
A type of security operation conducted to protect friendly forces, lines of
communications, and activities within a specific area. (ADP 3-90)
command and control

The exercise of authority and direction by a properly designated commander over
assigned and attached forces in the accomplishment of the mission. (JP 1)
commander’s critical information requirement

An information requirement identified by the commander as being critical to
facilitating timely decision making. (JP 3-0)
enemy
A party identified as hostile against which the use of force is authorized.
(ADP 3-0)
essential element of friendly information

A critical aspect of a friendly operation that, if known by a threat would
subsequently compromise, lead to failure, or limit success of the operation and
therefore should be protected from enemy detection. (ADP 6-0)
friendly force information requirement

Information the commander and staff need to understand the status of friendly
force and supporting capabilities. (JP 3-0)
key terrain
(Army) An identifiable characteristic whose seizure or retention affords a marked
advantage to either combatant. (ADP 3-90)
latest time information is of value

The time by which an intelligence organization or staff must deliver information
to the requester in order to provide decisionmakers with timely intelligence. This
must include the time anticipated for processing and disseminating that
information as well as for making the decision. (ATP 2-01)

Glossary
mission command
The Army’s approach to command and control that empowers subordinate
decision making and decentralized execution appropriate to the situation.
(ADP 6-0)
priority intelligence requirement

An intelligence requirement that the commander and staff need to understand the
threat and other aspects of the operational environment. (JP 2-01)
special reconnaissance
Reconnaissance and surveillance actions conducted as a special operation in
hostile, denied, or politically sensitive environments to collect or verify
information of strategic or operational significance, employing military
capabilities not normally found in conventional forces. (JP 3-05)
threat
Any combination of actors, entities, or forces that have the capability and intent to
harm United States forces, United States national interests, or the homeland.
(ADP 3-0)
unified action
(DOD) The synchronization, coordination, and/or integration of the activities of
governmental and nongovernmental entities with military operations to achieve
unity of effort. (JP-1)
unified land operations

The simultaneous execution of offense, defense, stability, and defense support of
civil authorities across multiple domains to shape operational environments,
prevent conflict, prevail in large-scale ground combat, and consolidate gains as
part of unified action. (ADP 3-0)

References
URLs accessed 16 October 2019.
REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS
DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms. October 2019.
ADP 1-02. Terms and Military Symbols. 14 August 2018.
RELATED PUBLICATIONS
Most Army doctrinal publications are available online: https://armypubs.army.mil
Most joint publications are available online: https://www.jcs.mil/Doctrine
JOINT PUBLICATIONS
JP 1. Doctrine for the Armed forces of the United States. 25 March 2013.
JP 2-0. Joint Intelligence. 22 October 2013.
JP 2-01. Joint and National Intelligence Support to Military Operations. 5 July
2017.
JP 3-0. Joint Operations. 17 January 2017.
JP 3-05. Special Operations. 16 July 2014.
ARMY PUBLICATIONS
ADP 2-0. Intelligence. 31 July 2019.
ADP 3-0. Operations. 31 July 2019.
ADP 3-90. Offense and Defense. 31 July 2019.
ADP 5-0. The Operations Process. 31 July 2019.
ADP 6-0. Mission Command: Command and Control of Army Forces.
31 July 2019.
ATP 2-01. Plan Requirements and Assess Collection. 19 August 2014.
ATP 2-01.3. Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield. 1 March 2019.
ATP 3-04.1. Aviation Tactical Employment. 13 April 2016.
ATP 3-09.30. Observed Fires. 28 September 2017.
ATP 3-09.32/MCRP 3-31.6/NTTP 3-09.2/AFTTP 3-2.6. Multi-Service Tactics,
Techniques, and Procedures for Joint Application of Firepower (JFIRE).
18 October 2019.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 References-1

References
ATP 3-11.32/MCWP 10-10E.8/NTTP 3-11.37/AFTTP 3-2.46. Multi-Service

Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Chemical, Biological,
Radiological, and Nuclear Passive Defense. 13 May 2016.
ATP 3-20.96. Cavalry Squadron. 12 May 2016.
ATP 3-20.97. Cavalry Troop. 1 September 2016.
ATP 3-21.8. Infantry Platoon and Squad. 12 April 2016.
ATP 3-21.90. Tactical Employment of Mortars. 9 October 2019.
ATP 4-32. Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD) Operations. 30 September 2013.
ATP 4-32.3. Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD) Company, Platoon, and Team
Operations. 1 February 2017.
ATP 4-35. Munitions Operations and Distribution Techniques. 5 September 2014.
DA PAM 750-8. The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users
Manual. 22 August 2005.
FM 2-22.3. Human Intelligence Collector Operations. 6 September 2006.
FM 3-04. Army Aviation. 29 July 2015.
FM 3-09. Field Artillery Operations and Fire Support. 4 April 2014.
FM 3-11. Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Operations.
23 May 2019.
FM 3-24. Insurgencies and Countering Insurgencies. 13 May 2014.
FM 3-55. Information Collection. 3 May 2013.
FM 3-90-2. Reconnaissance, Security, and Tactical Enabling Tasks, Volume 2.
22 March 2013.
FM 3-98. Reconnaissance and Security Operations. 1 July 2015.
FM 6-0. Commander and Staff Organization and Operations. 5 May 2014.
FM 6-27. The Commander’s Handbook on the Law of Land Warfare.
7 August 2019.
GTA 08-01-004. MEDEVAC Request Card. August 2016.
TC 3-25.26. Map Reading and Land Navigation. 15 November 2013.
TC 7-100. Hybrid Threat. 26 November 2010.
TC 7-100.2. Opposing Force Tactics. 9 December 2011.
TC 7-100.3. Irregular Opposing Forces. 17 January 2014.
TC 7-100.4. Hybrid Threat Force Structure Organizational Guide. 4 June 2015.
OTHER PUBLICATIONS
Most publications are available online:
https://assist.dla.mil/online/start/index.cfm
DOD publications are available online:
https://www.esd.whs.mil/Directives/issuances/dodd/
References-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

References
NATO Standardization Agreements are available online:

https://www.nato.int/cps/en/natolive/publications.htm (Need to sign in to
access)
DODD 2310.01E. DOD Detainee Program. 19 August 2014.
DODD 2311.01E. DOD Law of War Program. 9 May 2006.
DODD 3115.09. DOD Intelligence Interrogations, Detainee Debriefings, and
Tactical Questioning. 11 October 2012.
PRESCRIBED FORMS
No entries for this section.
REFERENCED FORMS
Unless otherwise indicated, DA forms are available on the Army Publishing
Directorate (APD) website, https://armypubs.army.mil.
DD Forms are available at http://www.esd.whs.mil/Directives/forms
DA Form 1156. Casualty Feeder Card.

DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms.
DA Form 2404. Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet.
DA Form 2408-18. Equipment Inspection List.
DA Form 4137. Evidence/Property Custody Document.
DA Form 5517. Standard Range Card.
DA Form 5988-E. Equipment Maintenance and Inspection Worksheet (EGA).
DD Form 1380. Tactical Combat Casualty Care (TCCC) Card.
DD Form 2745. Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) Capture Tag.
DD Form 3011. Bridge Reconnaissance Report.
DD Form 3015. Engineer Reconnaissance Report.
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 References-3

Index
Entries are by paragraph number.
9 classes of supply, 7-5 E

9-line MEDEVAC combat and operational engagement area
request, 7-27 stress, 7-32 development steps,
command relationship 4-40
A degree of support, 2- essential element of
abbreviated order, 2-30 32 friendly information
actions on contact commander’s critical (EEFI), 2-5
five steps, 5-54 information
requirements (CCIR), F
adjusting indirect fire, 6-
17 1-2 fighting for information,
commander’s 2-34
air evacuation, 7-26
reconnaissance final protective line, 4-54
air search techniques, guidance
4-27 fire control measures, 4-
four elements, 3-4 49
area reconnaissance commander's terrain-based and
tasks, 3-22 reconnaissance threat-based, 4-49
B guidance, 3-4 fire matrix support, 6-7
backwards planning commander's security fire patterns, 4-54
one-third or two- guidance, 4-3
focus, 3-4
thirds rule, 2-32 creeping (DANGER
CLOSE), 6-27 forms of contact
BLUES principles, 4-16 enemy, 2-14
bounding overwatch cross fire, 4-56
forward observer (FO),
alternate bounds, 5- CWORMS, 3-9 1-13
26
successive bounds, D frontal fire, 4-55
5-27 depth fire, 4-57 fundamentals of
break contact direction of fire, 4-51 reconnaissance and
australian peel, 5-46 security, 1-3
dismounted movement
front, 5-44 formations, 5-32 G
left or right, 5-48 diamond, 5-37 gradient slope, 3-48
wedge, 5-35
C ground search
CCIR, 2-4 techniques, 4-23
civil considerations, 2- detailed search, 4-25
26 rapid scan, 4-23
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 Index-1

Index
slow (50-meter) military load Q

scan, 4-24 classification (MLC), quadrants, 4-51
3-42
H friendly based, 4-52
mission command terrain-based, 4-52
habitual enablers, 1-13 principles, 2-2
heavy weapons R
mission-oriented
special weapons, 1- protective posture radio telephone operator
11 (MOPP) levels, 5-63 (RTO), 1-12
human senses, 3-2 mounted scout platoon rally points
formations, 5-12 common types of, 5-
I 51
infiltration and moving screen, 4-13
range card, 4-47
exfiltration, 3-23 N range correction
M navigation aids hasty bracketing, 6-
maximum engagement box-in the leg or the 26
line, 4-53 entire route, 5-7 successive
catching features, 5- bracketing, 6-25
measure a radius of a 7
curve range spottings
handrails, 5-7 possible, 6-24
three methods of, 3- navigational attack
45 points, 5-7 reconaissance guidance
mechanism of injury displacement criteria,
type, signs, and O 3-7
treatment (MIST), 7- OAKOC, 2-17 engagement criteria,
27 3-6
observation post
medical treatment characteristics, 4-16 reconnaissance
combat lifesaver four forms, 3-15
off-center vision zone, 3-15
(CLS), 7-30 method, 4-26
DD Form 1380 tempo of, 3-5
[Tactical Combat operation order reconnaissance and
Casualty Card (OPORD), 2-29 security missions
(TCCC)], 7-30 confirmation brief, 2- five-core, 1-3
first response, 7-29 29
reconnaissance
method of determining a operational environment guidance
curve, 3-45 mission variables, 1- four elements of, 4-3
4
methods of navigation variables, 1-4 reconnaissance in force
dead reckoning tasks, 3-51
(point navigation), outposting, 4-37
reconnaissance
5-8 P management
general azimuth technique
method, 5-8 PIR, 2-4
indicators, 2-6 cueing, 3-14
stabilized turret mixing, 3-14
alignment platoon fire plan, 4-48
redundancy, 3-15
navigation, 5-9 primary navigation aids,
terrain association, reconnaissance
5-6
5-8 methods, 3-7
priority intelligence aerial, 3-11
METT-TC, 2-13 requirements (PIR), dismounted, 3-8
1-2 mounted, 3-9
Index-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Index
reconnaissance by route types terrain

fire, 3-11 cross compartment, avenues of
reconnaissance sensor 5-10 approach, 2-18
and surveillance terrain features, 5-9 fields of fire, 2-19
assets, 3-14 key terrain, 2-19
S line-of-sight analysis,
reconnaissance tasks scatterable mines, 6-11 2-20
fundamentals of, 3-2 MCOO assumptions,
scroll to the road
reconnaissance technique, 5-43 2-22
techniques modified combined
two, 3-7 Search, Silence, obstacle overlay
reconnaissance Segregate, Speed to
(MCOO), 2-21
pull, 3-7 safe area or rear,
obstacle, 2-18
reconnaissance Safeguard, and Tag”
(5Ss and T) time
push, 3-7 analysis, 2-24
technique, 7-34
reconnaissance tempo tracking, 5-49
four terms sector of fire, 4-51
concepts, 5-50
deliberate, 3-6 sector sketch card, 4-47
indicators, 5-50
forceful, 3-6 security operations organization, 5-49
rapid, 3-6 five forms of, 4-1
stealthy, 3-6 triangulation, 6-9
security tasks
restricted operating trigger development, 4-
five forms of, 4-6, 4-7
zone, 6-33 28
screen, 4-7
three types of, 6-33 troop leading
small open area
restrictive fire line, 4-53 procedures (TLP)
technique, 5-44
eight steps, 2-8
resupply standard call for fire, 6-
pre-positioned or 12 W
cached, 7-20 warfighting functions
stationary screen, 4-11
two methods of, 7-13 six, 2-32
support relationships
resupply techniques Warning Order
three types of, 2-33
two techniques, 7-15 (WARNORD)
service station, 7- T minimum
17 requirements, 2-
target array, 4-58
tailgate, 7-15 11
target description, 6-16
road surfaces weather
three types of, 3-42 target location
five methods of, 6-14 five military aspects
route classification of, 2-23
grid, 6-14
formula, 3-40
laser grid, 6-15 Z
route reconnaissance laser polar plot, 6-
tasks, 3-27 zone reconnaissance
15
tasks, 3-16
route reconnaissance polar plot, 6-15
overlay, 3-34 shift from a known
route tyes point, 6-15
contouring, 5-10 target location error, 6-8
04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 Index-3

ATP 3-20.98
04 December
%\2UGHURIWKH6HFUHWDU\RIWKH$UP\
-$0(6&0&&219,//(
*HQHUDO8QLWHG6WDWHV$UP\
&KLHIRI6WDII
2IILFLDO
.$7+/((160,//(5
$GPLQLVWUDWLYH$VVLVWDQW
WRWKH6HFUHWDU\RIWKH$UP\
1931907
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and United States Army Reserve: 7R EH Gistributed in
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHLQLWLDOGLVWUXEXWLRQQXPEHU,'1111029UHTXLUHPHQWVIRU
ATP 3-20.98
PIN: 103010-000

Arn19886 Atp - 3 20.98 000 Web 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Arn19886 Atp - 3 20.98 000 Web 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Arn19886 Atp - 3 20.98 000 Web 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the different types of scout platoons discussed in the document?

What are the different types of scout platoons discussed in the document?

What are the four elements of reconnaissance guidance?

What are the four elements of reconnaissance guidance?

ATP 3-20.

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

This publication supersedes ATP 3-20.98, dated 5 April 2013.

Headquarters, Department of the Army

*Army Techniques Publication Headquarters

Distribution Restriction: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

*This publication supersedes ATP 3-20.98, 5 April 2013.

Mission Command Principles ..................................................................... 2-1

ii ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Reconnaissance Handover Priority of Rehearsals ................................... 3-53

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 iii

Section IV – Movement Techniques ..................................................... 5-22

iv ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Air and Missile Defense Support .............................................................. 6-41

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 v

Figure 1-1. ABCT Cavalry squadron scout platoon ............................. 1-19

vi ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Figure 3-17a. Route reconnaissance overlay symbols ....................... 3-36

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 vii

Figure 4-21. Platoon fire plan ............................................................... 4-50

viii ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Figure 5-28. Break contact (front) ....................................................... 5-46

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 ix

Table 1-1. Reconnaissance/security fundamentals ............................... 1-3

x ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

Table 4-3. Common fire-control measures .......................................... 4-52

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 xi

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 xiii

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 xv

The scout platoon’s mission is to conduct reconnaissance and

Scout platoons conduct reconnaissance and security missions in

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-1

1-2 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

SCOUTS IN DECISIVE ACTION

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-3

VARIABLES OF THE OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

1-4 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

REGULAR AND IRREGULAR THREAT DESCRIPTION

THREAT IMPACT ON SCOUTS

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-5

information. They then transmit the information through messengers using

SECTION III – KEY PERSONNEL

1-6 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

 Employ indirect fires and Army attack helicopters.

DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-7

1-8 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-9

1-10 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-11

RADIO TELEPHONE OPERATOR

1-12 ATP 3-20.98 04 December 2019

FORWARD OBSERVER (TROOP LEVEL)

MORTARS (TROOP LEVEL)

04 December 2019 ATP 3-20.98 1-13